Manual do Usuário ATPDraw v73 para Windows - Guia Completo

ATPDraw version 73 1 ATPDRAW version 73 for Windows Users Manual Hans Kristian Høidalen László Prikler Francisco Peñaloza Release No 10 May 2021 ATPDraw for Windows 73 The manual is made available for distribution via the secure ATP FTP servers and Web sites as well as via the regional EMTP ATP Users Groups An ATP license is required to utilize the ATPDraw program and this manual Conversion of this manual to other formats and distribution on any kind of media requires explicit permission from the authors 2 ATPDraw version 73 PREFACE This Users Manual documents all main features of ATPDraw version 73 The manual is an extensive update of the previous User Manual prepared by László Prikler at SYSTRAN Engineering Services Ltd in Budapest for version 35 SINTEF TR F5680 dated 2002 and the version 56 from 2009 Version 70 is very much updated compared to version 56 This v72 covers postprocessing The Reference Manual gives a summary of menu items and menu options The Advanced Manual covers the features Grouping Models electrical machine linecable and transformer modeling and optimization Finally the Application Manual is extended with several examples where machine controls relay protection PV interface all based on MODELS scripting are covered indepth New ATPDraw users are advised to start with the Installation and Introductory manuals Version 73 is primarily a quality update and improves the embedded plotting inline fitting for lightning sources extends Variables in the Sidebar and improves the accuracy of phasor calculators ATPDraw is developed by NTNU from 1999 Program development was earlier financed by Bonneville Power Administration USA version 5 in cooperation with EEUG and Schneider Electric France For Norwegian University of Technology Trondheim Norway May 18th 2021 Hans Kr Høidalen Professor NTNUNorway SUMMARY ATPDraw is a graphical mousedriven preprocessor to the ATP version of the Electromagnetic Transients Program EMTP on the MSWindows platform The program is written in Embarcadero Delphi XE8 and runs under Windows 9xNT2000XPVista10 In ATPDraw the user can construct an electrical circuit using the mouse and selecting components from menus then ATPDraw generates the ATP input file in the appropriate format based on what you see is what you get The simulation program ATP and plotting programs can be integrated with ATPDraw ATPDraw supports multiple circuit modeling that makes possible to work on more circuits simultaneously and copy information between the circuits All kinds of standard circuit editing facilities copypaste grouping rotate exportimport undoredo are available In addition ATPDraw supports the Windows clipboard and metafile export The circuit is stored on disk in a single project file which includes all the simulation objects and options needed to run the case The project file is in zipcompressed binary format that makes the file sharing with others very simple The project file format is extensive changed in v7 Most of the standard components of ATP as well as TACS are supported and in addition the user can create new objects based on MODELS or Include Data Base Module LineCable modeling KCLee PIequivalent Semlyen JMarti and Noda is also included in ATPDraw where the user specifies the geometry and material data and has the option to view the cross section graphically and verify the model in the frequency domain Special components support the user in machine and transformer modeling based on the powerful Universal Machine and BCTRAN components in ATPEMTP In addition the advanced Hybrid Transformer model XFMR and Windsyn support is included ATPDraw supports hierarchical modeling by replacing selected group of objects with a single icon in an unlimited number of layers Components have an individual icon in either bitmap or vector graphic style and an optional graphic background Version 7 of ATPDraw removes limits on the number and size of components and circuits ATPDraw version 73 3 TABLE OF CONTENTS Page 1 Introduction 9 11 What is ATPDraw 11 12 What is ATP 12 13 Operating principles and capabilities of ATP 12 131 Integrated simulation modules in ATP 13 132 Program capabilities 14 133 Main characteristics of plotting programs for ATP 15 134 Typical EMTP applications 17 135 Hardware requirements for ATP 17 14 Contents of this manual 17 15 Manual conventions 18 2 Installation Manual 19 21 ATP licensing policy 21 22 How to download ATPDraw 21 23 Program installation 22 24 Files and subfolders in the ATPDraw system folder 22 241 Organizing the files 24 242 Configuring ATPDraw 24 243 ATPDraw command line options 24 244 Drag and drop project files 24 25 Interfacing ATPDraw with other programs of the ATPEMTP package 25 26 Installing ATPDraw on servers with limited writing privileges 27 27 How to get help 28 271 Help via the ATPDraw webpage forum 28 272 Help via the ATPEMTPL mailing list 28 273 Help from the author of ATPDraw 29 28 Available components in ATPDraw 29 3 Introductory Manual 31 31 Operating windows 33 32 Operating the mouse 36 33 Edit operations 37 34 Overview of working with ATPDraw 37 35 Your first circuit Exa1acp 40 351 Building the circuit 40 352 Storing the project file on disk 51 353 Creating the ATP input file 51 354 Running the simulation 53 36 Node names 53 361 Multiphase circuits 54 37 Data values 57 371 Parameter variations 57 38 Object organization sequence and priorities 58 39 Postprocessing 59 391 Probes 59 392 Power System Toolbox 59 4 ATPDraw version 73 393 COMTRADE 60 394 Embedded Plotting 60 4 Reference Manual 63 41 Main window 65 42 Main menu 66 421 File 66 422 Edit 68 423 View 73 424 Zoom In 76 425 ATP 78 426 Library 95 427 Tools 102 428 Window 114 429 Web 115 4210 Help 116 43 Shortcut menu 118 44 Component selection menu 119 45 Component dialog box 119 46 Connection dialog box 123 47 Text dialog box 124 48 Shape dialog box 124 49 Picture dialog box 124 410 Attachment file dialog box 125 411 Plot dialog box 126 412 Node dialog box 126 413 Probe dialog box 128 414 Selection dialog 129 415 Circuit objects in ATPDraw 130 4151 Probes 3phase 132 4152 Branch Linear 134 4153 Branch Nonlinear 136 4154 LinesCables 137 4155 Switches 141 4156 Sources 142 4157 Machines 144 4158 Transformers 145 4159 MODELS 146 41510 TACS 151 41511 User Specified 156 41512 Steadystate 157 41513 Power System Tools 158 41514 All standard Comp 162 41515 Add objects 163 41516 Plugins 163 5 Advanced Manual 165 51 Compress multilevel modeling 167 511 Compressing nonlinear objects 172 52 Nonstandard component dialog boxes 174 521 Saturable 3phase transformer 175 ATPDraw version 73 5 522 Universal machines 177 523 Statisticsystematic switch 181 524 Harmonic source 182 525 Windsyn components 183 53 Using the integrated LCC object for linecable modeling 185 531 Model and Data page settings for Overhead Lines 189 532 Model and Data page settings for Single Core Cable systems 192 533 Model and Data page settings for Enclosing Pipe type cables 194 534 Node page settings 194 535 LCC Section 195 54 Verification of the LineCable model performance 195 541 Internal LineCable Verify 196 542 External Line Check 199 55 Using MODELS simulation language 200 551 The default approach 201 552 The MODELS editor 202 553 The manual approach 208 554 Recording internal MODELS variables 211 56 BCTRAN support in ATPDraw 212 57 Hybrid Transformer XFMR 215 571 Overview 215 572 XFMR dialog box 217 58 Creating new circuit objects in ATPDraw 220 581 Creating a 6phase rectifier bridge 220 582 Creating a user specified nonlinear transformer model 226 59 Systematic parameter variations 229 591 Optimization 232 592 MonteCarlo simulations Exa21acp 236 6 Application Manual 241 61 Switching studies using JMarti LCC objects 243 611 JMarti model of a 750 kV line 243 612 Line to ground fault and fault tripping transients Exa7aacp 245 62 Lightning overvoltage study in a 400 kV substation Exa9acp 248 63 Modeling Rectifiers zigzag transformers and analysis of Harmonics Exa14acp 253 64 The Controlled Electric Rotating Machines 260 641 Synchronous machine control Exa22aacp 261 642 Universal machine control Exa22bacp 267 643 Data used in the ATPDraw cases described Chapt 641642 Exa22 270 644 The Controlled Induction Machines Exa23acp 273 645 Windsyn machine control Exa17acp 281 65 Simulating transformer inrush current transients 286 651 Energization of a 40013218 kV autotransformer Exa10acp 286 652 Energization of a 13215 kV generator stepup transformer Exa11acp 293 653 Using the Hybrid Transformer component Exa16acp 297 66 Switching overvoltage studies with statistical approach Exa12acp 299 661 Setting program options for the statistical simulation 299 662 Results of the statistical study 300 67 Power system protection Exa24acp 303 68 Solar power interface via PWM controlled inverter Exa25acp 307 69 Postprocessing 310 6 ATPDraw version 73 691 COMTRADE generation 311 692 Embedded plotting 314 7 Appendix 317 71 PFC simulations in ATPDraw 319 72 Line Check 322 721 Single phase systems 323 722 3phase systems 326 73 Hybrid Transformer XFMR 327 731 Leakage inductance 328 732 Winding resistance 329 733 Capacitance 330 734 Core 332 74 Windsyn manufacturers data input and controls 335 741 Induction machine modeling 335 742 The ATPDraw fitting approach 337 743 ATPDraw input dialogs 338 744 Synchronous machine modeling 340 745 Machine controls 341 75 Power system toolbox calculators 344 751 Filtering and downsampling 345 752 Phasor calculations 346 753 Power and impedance calculations 348 754 FFTDFT algorithm test 348 76 XML data exchange 349 761 ATPDraw coordinate system 349 762 The XML format definition DTDfile 350 763 XML skeleton 354 77 ATPDraw data structure and object model 355 78 Examples project distributed with ATPDraw v73 357 79 References 358 710 Index 359 ATPDraw version 73 7 Get Going With Airtable Integration ATPDraw version 73 9 1 Introduction ATPDraw for Windows 73 No text detected in image Introduction ATPDraw version 73 11 11 What is ATPDraw ATPDraw for Windows is a graphical mousedriven preprocessor to the ATP version of the Electromagnetic Transients Program EMTP In ATPDraw the user can construct the digital model of the circuit to be simulated using the mouse and selecting predefined components from an extensive palette interactively Then ATPDraw generates the input file for the ATP simulation in the appropriate format based on what you see is what you get Circuit node naming is administrated by ATPDraw thus the user needs to give a name only to nodes having special interest ATPDraw has a standard Windows layout and offers a large Windows help file system All kinds of standard circuit editing facilities copypaste grouping rotateflip exportimport undoredo are available Other facilities in ATPDraw are builtin editor for MODELS and ATPfile editing text viewer for displaying the output LISfile of ATP automatic LISfile checking with special trigger strings to detect simulation errors support of Windows clipboard and metafile export ATPDraw supports multiple circuit modeling that makes possible to work on more circuits simultaneously and copy information between the circuits Most of the standard components of ATP both single and 3phase as well as TACS are supported and in addition the user can create new objects based on MODELS or INCLUDE Data Base Module LineCable modeling KCLee PIequivalent Semlyen JMarti and Noda is also included in ATPDraw where the user specifies the geometry and material data and has the option to view the cross section graphically and verify the model in the frequency domain Objects for Harmonic Frequency Scan HFS have also been added Special objects help the user in machine and transformer modeling including the powerful UNIVERSAL MACHINE and BCTRAN features of ATP An advanced Hybrid Transformer model based on Test Report Design or Typical values with topologically correct core is also supported ATPDraw also integrated with Windsyn for Universal Machine modeling based on manufacturers data ATPDraw supports hierarchical modeling to replace a selection of objects with a single icon in unlimited numbers of layers Data parameters can in most cases be assigned to global variables Both ATPs native method PARAMETER and an embedded Internal Parser option is supported allowing the user to specify a text string as input in a components data field then assign numerical values or expressions to these text strings later The circuit is stored on disk in a single project file which includes all the simulation objects and options needed to run the case The project file is in zipcompressed format that makes the file sharing with others very simple ATPDraw is most valuable to new users of ATPEMTP and is an excellent tool for educational purposes However the possibility of multilayer modeling makes ATPDraw a powerful frontend processor for professionals in analysis of electric power system transients as well Version 36 and above of ATPDraw for 9xNTx2000XP Windows platforms are written in Borland Delphi 60 From version 53 CodeGear Delphi 2007 is used Version 70 is written in Embarcadero Delphi XE8 The compiled help file system supported from Windows VISTA is used ATPDraw is a trademark and copyrighted by 20052019 Norwegian University of Science and Technology Norway Program developer is Dr Hans Kristian Høidalen in Trondheim Norway with Dahl Data Design in Norway as a programming subcontractor and SYSTRAN Engineering Services in Hungary as a subcontractor for program documentation Program development has mainly been financed by Bonneville Power Administration in Portland Oregon Introduction 12 ATPDraw version 73 USA with Pacific Engineering Corporation as project coordinator Development in version 5 has in addition been cofunded by the European EMTP Users Group and Schneider Electric The ATPDraw program is royalty free and can be downloaded free of charge from several Internet sites The online help of ATPDraw and the present program documentation includes thirdparty proprietary information of thus ATP licensing is mandatory prior to get permission to download the program and documentation from the Internet or to receive ATP related materials from others 12 What is ATP The Alternative Transients Program ATP is one of the most widely used universal program system for digital simulation of transient phenomena of electromagnetic as well as electromechanical nature in electric power systems With this digital program complex networks and control systems of arbitrary structure can be simulated ATP has extensive modeling capabilities and additional important features besides the computation of transients The Electromagnetic Transients Program EMTP was developed in the public domain at the Bonneville Power Administration BPA of Portland Oregon prior to the commercial initiative in 1984 by the EMTP Development Coordination Group and the Electric Power Research Institute EPRI of Palo Alto California The birth of ATP dates to early in 1984 when Drs Meyer and Liu did not approve of proposed commercialization of BPAs EMTP and Dr Meyer using his own personal time started a new program from a copy of BPAs publicdomain EMTP Since then the ATP program has been continuously developed through international contributions by Drs W Scott Meyer and Tsuhuei Liu the coChairmen of the CanadianAmerican EMTP User Group Several experts around the world have been contributing to EMTP starting in 1975 and later to ATP in close cooperation with program developers in Portland USA Whereas BPA work on EMTP remains in the public domain by US law ATP is not in the public domain and licensing is required before access to proprietary materials is granted Licensing is however available free of all charge to anyone in the world who has not participated voluntarily in the sale or attempted sale of any electromagnetic transients program hereafter called EMTP commerce 13 Operating principles and capabilities of ATP1 The ATP program predicts variables of interest within electric power networks as functions of time typically initiated by some disturbances Basically trapezoidal rule of integration is used to solve the differential equations of system components in the time domain Nonzero initial conditions can be determined either automatically by a steadystate phasor solution or they can be entered by the user for simpler components ATP has many models including rotating machines transformers surge arresters transmission lines and cables Interfacing capability to the program modules TACS Transient Analysis of Control Systems and MODELS a simulation language enables modeling of control systems and components with nonlinear characteristics such as arcs and corona Dynamic systems without any electrical network can also be simulated using TACS and MODELS control system modeling Symmetrical or unsymmetrical disturbances are allowed such as faults lightning surges and several kinds of switching operations including commutation of valves Frequencydomain 1 Source WWWEMTPORG Introduction ATPDraw version 73 13 harmonic analysis using harmonic current injection method HARMONIC FREQUENCY SCAN and calculation of the frequency response of phasor networks using FREQUENCY SCAN feature is also supported The modellibrary of ATP at present consists of the following components Uncoupled and coupled linear lumped RLC elements Transmission lines and cables with distributed and frequencydependent parameters Nonlinear resistances and inductances hysteretic inductor timevarying resistance TACSMODELS controlled resistance Components with nonlinearities transformers including saturation and hysteresis surge arresters gapless and with gap arcs Ordinary switches timedependent and voltagedependent switches statistical switching MonteCarlo studies Valves diodes thyristors triacs TACSMODELS controlled switches Analytical sources step ramp sinusoidal exponential surge functions TACSMODELS defined sources Rotating machines 3phase synchronous machine universal machine model Userdefined electrical components that include MODELS interaction 131 Integrated simulation modules in ATP MODELS in ATP is a generalpurpose description language supported by an extensive set of simulation tools for the representation and study of timevariant systems The description of each model is enabled using freeformat keyworddriven syntax of local context and that is largely selfdocumenting MODELS in ATP allows the description of arbitrary userdefined control and circuit components providing a simple interface for connecting other programsmodels to ATP As a generalpurpose programmable tool MODELS can be used for processing simulation results either in the frequency domain or in the time domain TACS is a simulation module for timedomain analysis of control systems It was originally developed for the simulation of HVDC converter controls For TACS a block diagram representation of control systems is used TACS can be used for the simulation of HVDC converter controls Excitation systems of synchronous machines power electronics and drives electric arcs circuit breaker and fault arcs Interface between electrical network and TACS is established by exchange of signals such as node voltage switch current switch status timevarying resistance voltage and current sources Supporting routines are integrated utilities inside the program that support the users in conversion between manufacturers data format and the one required by the program or to calculate electrical parameters of lines and cables from geometrical and material data Supporting modules in ATP are Calculation of electrical parameters of overhead lines and cables using program modules LINE CONSTANTS CABLE CONSTANTS and CABLE PARAMETERS Generation of frequencydependent line model input data Semlyen JMarti Noda line models Introduction 14 ATPDraw version 73 Calculation of model data for transformers XFORMER BCTRAN Saturation and hysteresis curve conversion Data Base Modularization for INCLUDE usage Fig 11 Supporting routines in ATP 132 Program capabilities ATPEMTP tables are dimensioned dynamically at the start of execution to satisfy the needs of users and their hardware eg RAM No absolute limits have ever been observed and the standard version has limits that average more than 20 times default table sizes Today the largest simulations are being performed using Intelbased PCs The following table shows maximum limits for standard program distribution Busses 6000 Sources 900 Branches 10000 Nonlinear elements 2250 Switches 1200 Synchronous machines 90 Source wwwemtporg Introduction ATPDraw version 73 15 133 Main characteristics of plotting programs for ATP These postprocessors are interfaced with ATP via disk files and their main function is to display the results of a time or frequency domain simulation ATP simulation data are stored in a file having extension pl4 and it can be processed either offline or online The latter ie to display results while the simulation proceeds is available only if the operating system provides concurrent PL4file access for ATP and the postprocessor program Fig 12 Plotting programs for ATP ATP Analyzer is a Windows based program intended for observing and analyzing analog signals and discrete channel data associated power generation transmission and distribution systems The program is capable of reading and displaying analog signals produced by ATP as type PL4 output file data industry standard COMTRADE file and analog and digital data produced from protective relays and fault recorder equipment analog signals from table ASCII text data and audio wave files A total of 254 signals can be managed Signals can be displayed in time domain in multiple overlay charts One or more signals can be displayed as a function of another on an X versus Y chart Up to three signals can be displayed simultaneously in the frequency domain as harmonics or as a broad frequency spectrum Charts may be printed and copied to the Windows clipboard The program can process the data for harmonic content and store processed data in a Windows Access Data base Developer Bonneville Power Administration USA Licensing Distributed at no cost to the licensed ATP users Distribution EEUG annual CD distribution EEUG JAUG secure Web sites GTPPLOT is a plotting program for processing PL4 output of ATP It is compiled with the GNU FORTRAN and makes use of the graphical package DISLIN The program is available for DOS djgpp extender Windows 32 and Linux GTPPLOT can read widenn formatted PL4files FMTPL4 10Fnn Clike binary files unformatted files COMTRADE and ASCII data files GTPPLOT can process graphics files with up to 1000000 points and up to 1000 variables The program can plot up to 20 curves end export the graphics in nine different formats HPGL CGM WMF PCX PostScript PNG WMF JAVA and GNUPLOT For FS and HFS runs the plot can be bar charts The data can be exported as widenn PL4 COMTRADE Matlab MathCad and Mathematica files Furthermore the program calculates lot of Power Quality Indexes from data can be used for FOURIER analysis turbine shaft loss of life estimation Various simple math operations with variables as integration derivation RMS power energy I2T are also supported GTPPLOT can be used to generate KIZILCAY FDEPENDENT elements from FREQUENCY ATPEMTP TPBIGEXE TPPLOT WPCPLOT HFSPlot DspATP32 GTPPLOT ATP Analyzer PL42mat PlotXY DisplayNT PL42mcad PL4 PS file Introduction 16 ATPDraw version 73 SCAN PL4 output as well GTPPLOT has no graphical interface the user must use the keyboard for all the input commands Developer Mr Orlando P Hevia heviaopciudadcomar SantaFe Argentina Licensing Distributed at no cost to the licensed ATP users Distribution EEUG annual CD distribution EEUG JAUG MTU secure FTPWeb sites PlotXY is a WIN32 plotting program originally designed for ATPEMTP The program is mainly designed to make as easy and fast as possible line plots in Microsoft Windows environments It is also able to perform some postprocessing on the plotted curves algebraic operations computation of the Fourier series coefficients The program has an easytouse graphical user interface and the 32bit code provides very fast operation Up to 3 PL4 or ADF files can be simultaneously held in memory for easy comparison of different data and up to 8 curves per plots versus time or XY plots are allowed The program has a clever automatic axis scaling capability and able to make plots with two independent vertical axes and provides easy tools for factors offsets and zoom support and a graphical cursor to see values in numerical format Screen plots can be exported as Windows Metafile via win32 clipboard The program also comes in a multi window edition PlotXwinexe Developer Dr Massimo Ceraolo ceraolodseaunipiit University of Pisa Italy Licensing acknowledgeware Distributed at no cost to the licensed ATP users If user keeps it beyond the 30day trial period heshe must send an acknowledgement letter to the developer Distribution EEUG annual CD distribution EEUG JAUG and MTU secure FTP sites Website httpceraoloplotxyingunipiitdefaulthtm PCPLOT was steadily developed and improved until 1997 using Borland Turbo Pascal under MSDOS platforms The program can read PL4file types of unformatted Clike binary and formatted files PCPLOT can display maximum 4 curves with 16000 plot points per curve The maximum number of plot variables stored in the plot file is limited up to 100 The program supports three different plot types time function results of the simulations XY plot one variable against another frequencyresponse results of FREQUENCY SCAN cases The values of the plotted variables can be displayed by means of a vertical marker line Different type of curves eg currents and voltages can be mixed in the same plot by defining scaling factors and offset The curves are drawn using solid lines with different colors and user can mark each curve with different characters at the desired positions Visually redundant data points on plots are eliminated to accelerate the drawing speed Screen plots can be sent to disk file in HPGL format Developer Prof Dr Mustafa Kizilcay mkizilcayfhosnabrueckde Germany Licensing freely available without separate licensing to all ATP users Distribution EEUG annual CD distribution EEUG JAUG secure FTPWeb sites WPCPlot is a graphical output program for ATPEMTP running under Microsoft Windows 9598NT2000 The program is capable of processing PL4files of Clike and formatted types Maximum 6 variables in the same diagram are allowed Zooming redraw features and a readout facility to obtain instantaneous values of plotted curves are provided Screen plots can be copied to clipboard or save as color or monochrome bitmap image file Developer Prof Dr Mustafa Kizilcay mkizilcayfhosnabrueckde Deniz Celikag dcelikagaolcom Licensing available only for EEUG members at present Main characteristics of other postprocessors for ATP are summarized in 6 Introduction ATPDraw version 73 17 134 Typical EMTP applications ATPEMTP is used worldwide for switching and lightning surge analysis insulation coordination and shaft torsional oscillation studies protective relay modeling harmonic and power quality studies HVDC and FACTS modeling Typical EMTP studies are Lightning overvoltage studies Switching transients and faults Statistical and systematic overvoltage studies Very fast transients in GIS and groundings Machine modeling Transient stability motor startup Shaft torsional oscillations Transformer and shunt reactorcapacitor switching Ferro resonance Power electronic applications Circuit breaker duty electric arc current chopping FACTS devices STATCOM SVC UPFC TCSC modeling Harmonic analysis network resonances Protection device testing 135 Hardware requirements for ATP ATP is available for most Intel based PC platforms under DOS Windows 319xNT OS2 Linux and for other computers too eg Digital Unix and VMS Apple Macs etc Most users including program developers use Intel Pentiumbased PCs with MSWindows 9xNT A standard Pentium PC configuration with min 128 MB RAM hard disk 20 MB free space and VGA graphics is sufficient to execute ATP under MSWindows Most popular program versions are at present MSWindows 9xNT2000XPVista 32bit GNUMingw32 and Watcom ATP Linux GNU version of ATP 14 Contents of this manual This Users Manual of ATPDraw for Windows 72 contains five parts INSTALLATION MANUAL How to obtain the ATP license How to download ATPDraw How to install ATPDraw Hardware requirements How to configure your system How to use ATPDraw as operating shell for other ATP simulations How to communicate with other users and program developers INTRODUCTORY MANUAL How to create a circuit in ATPDraw Operating windows Your first circuit Threephase circuits and connections Introduction 18 ATPDraw version 73 REFERENCE MANUAL Reference of main menu items and program options Reference of the Component Text Connection Node and Group dialog boxes Reference of ATPDraw circuit objects ADVANCED MANUAL How to create multilevel group components in ATPDraw How to use the integrated LCC object for linecable modeling How to verify LineCable models How to use MODELS in ATPDraw How to use the integrated BCTRAN object for transformer modeling How to use the Hybrid Transformer component How to create new circuit objects based on DBM and INCLUDE How to use parameter variations systematically optimization APPLICATION MANUAL Switching studies using JMarti LCC objects in a 750 kV system Lightning overvoltage in a 400 kV substation Analysis of harmonics in industrial ACDC systems Controlling electrical machines synchronous induction universal windsyn Simulation of inrush current transients Line energization studies with statistical approach Power system protection IEEE 9BUS distance relays Solar power interface with PWM controlled inverter Postprocessing Comtrade Embedded Plotting 15 Manual conventions The following typographical conventions are used in this manual Italic Menus in ATPDraw Eg Select Edit Rotate L Select Rotate L command in the main menu Edit Courier 9 10 Data files Eg Listing of ATP input files MODELS code etc Description of menu options in component dialog boxes Courier 11 12 Data code and file names Eg Give the file the name HVDC6LIB and store it in the USP directory The USP directory is a directory under the main directory of ATPDraw Courier 12 Commands on the DOS prompt Eg CTMPsetup Type the command setup at CTMP ATPDraw version 73 19 2 Installation Manual ATPDraw for Windows 73 No text detected in image Installation Manual ATPDraw version 73 21 21 ATP licensing policy ATPDraw and the present documentation includes ATP proprietary information thus ATP licensing is mandatory prior to get permission to download the program from the Internet ATP license is free of all charge for all who have not engaged in EMTP commerce and it can be obtained from the CanadianAmerican EMTP User Group or an authorized regional users group In general organizational licensing is preferred over licensing of individuals Undergraduate students are not licensed personally If ATP usage is to be organizational rather than personal ie if ATP materials are to be used by in for or on behalf of a company university etc the licensee must certify that the organization has not participated in EMTP commerce nor has any employee contractor or other agent who would be granted access to ATP materials Once one is licensed heshe is authorized to download ATP materials from the secure Internet sites or obtain them from a similarly licensed user or order these materials from the regional user groups At present the CanadianAmerican European and the Japanese user groups accepts ATP license applications via the Internet Interested parties are requested to visit the online licensing page at wwwemtporg fillin and submit the appropriate webform Potential users of other continents must follow the licensing procedure of their regional EMTP user group Geographical location of ATPEMTP user groups and contact information details are shown below Source wwwemtporg Fig 21 Location of ATPEMTP user groups Chapter 272 of the Installation Manual gives further information about the ATP related Internet resources 22 How to download ATPDraw ATP licensing is mandatory prior to receiving any materials Following the license agreement approval by an authorized user group you are eligible to use the ATP program and all ATP related tools like ATPDraw and this manual There are different sources of obtaining ATPDraw and additional ATP related tools and program manuals Order ATP materials from the CanadianAmerican or the European EMTPATP Users Group via httpswwweeugorgindexphphowtobelicenced Register and download the ATPDraw program itself without the solver or plotter from httpswwwatpdrawnet Installation Manual 22 ATPDraw version 73 23 Program installation The atpdraw subfolder under the above secure servers contains a zipcompressed archive atpdraw5xzip a short installation guide and the latest patch file if any Following a successful download of the distribution kit perform the next operations 1 Copy the atpdraw7xinstallzip file into a temporary directory and unzip it 2 Run the program Setupexe The installation process will be assisted by a standard Inno Setup Wizard 3 Specify a destination directory for ATPDraw when prompted Note that in some cases dependent on ATP versions the Result Directory ATP folder default should be without blanks in the path name 4 The installation process will be completed after creating a new shortcut for ATPDraw under Start Programs ATPDraw When you start ATPDrawexe first time the subfolders ATP Projects GRP BCT HLP LCC MOD will be confirmed and optionally created The user must have writing privileges to the Result Directory ATP default 5 Download the latest patch file called patchxv7zip if exists on the server then unzip it and simply overwrite the existing files in the ATPDraw system folder with the newer ones received in the patch file The program installation will create a directory structure as shown next ATPDraw can be uninstalled in the standard manner using Windows uninstaller Start menu Settings Control Panel AddRemove programs 04112019 2248 10 260 480 ATPDrawexe 28102019 2034 269 494 ATPDrawscl 03072019 2037 1 296 918 ATPDrawchm 05112019 1324 258 ATPDrawini 05112019 1442 DIR ATP 05112019 1442 DIR Projects 05112019 1442 DIR GRP 05112019 1442 DIR BCT 05112019 1442 DIR HLP 05112019 1442 DIR LCC 05112019 1442 DIR MOD 05112019 1442 DIR UPS 05112019 1442 DIR WEB 23102018 1443 499 068 Readmepdf 05112019 1442 10 465 unins000dat 05112019 1441 730 850 unins000exe 7 Files 13 061 544 bytes The files unins000dat and unins000exe are created by Inno Setup for uninstall purposes 24 Files and subfolders in the ATPDraw system folder To use ATPDraw three files are required ATPDrawexe ATPDrawscl standard component library and ATPDrawchm help file Besides there are a few required subcircuits in the GRP folder Otherwise the example files under Projects are recommended starting points The user can also create his own library components user specified or models and include files Installation Manual ATPDraw version 73 23 Project file When the user saves a circuit the work is stored in the project file acp atpdraw circuit project This file contains the circuit with all data and graphical representation The project file is compressed by a public domain Pkzip 20 routine and can in fact be opened with any version of WinZip A few project files are also installed under the GRP folder Support file All components inherit their properties from a support file This file describes the type of component the nodes phases position identity and data default value limits parameter flag number of digits identity the default icon bitmap or vector and a help text The support files for standard components are zipped together in the file ATPDrawscl standard component library and this file is required together with the project file to open and run a project The support files can be edited inside ATPDraw in the Library menu The default icon can also be modified by using the builtin icon editors New user specified objects are created by specifying new support files ATP file This file is produced by ATPDraw and used as input to ATP simulation The atp files with all Include files are written to the Result Directory with default location is specified as the ATP subdirectory in the ATP Connection Wizard The Result Directory can be changed via the button in the toolbar or via ATPSupprocessMake ATP file The ATPfile can be edited with any textprocessors including ATPDraws own Text Editor AtpEdit ATP file F4 It is advised however only for experts to modify this file manually Include files User Specified Objects and LineCables components are described in a library file lib This text file has a predefined format as specified for the Data Base Module of ATP and contains a header describing the positions of the parameters further the ATP cards and finally a trailer containing the specification of the parameters The library file is included in the ATP input file with Include The include files are stored in memory and written to the Result Directory same as ATP file each time the ATP file is created Some nonlinear components or saturable transformers might also have an include file for the nonlinear characteristic Data files The user can export data for special components to a library for later use Today this is a somewhat obsolete approach as it is easier and safer to simply create a library project with backup and copypaste components from there A data file is introduced because the involved components have too many data to fit in to the standard component library data structure The data for a component in the circuit is stored internally in memory The following file types are used A line or cable is described by an alc file atpdraw linecable This binary file contains the line cable constants or cable parameter data It should preferably be stored in the LCC directory A BCTRAN Transformer component is described in a bct file This binary file contains the input data required for the supporting routine BCTRAN of ATPEMTP It should preferably be stored in the BCT directory A Hybrid Transformer model is described by a xfm file This file contains the winding resistance leakage inductance capacitance and core data It should preferably be stored in the BCT directory A model is described in a model file mod This text file starts with MODEL name and ends with ENDMODEL The name must be equal to the model file name It is recommended to store the models file in the MOD subdirectory Installation Manual 24 ATPDraw version 73 241 Organizing the files When ATPDraw opens a project no file is written to disk All data are stored in memory When the project is closed no disk files are deleted Thus as times goes by the number of files on disk grows It is the users responsibility to tidy up the directories Remember All required files are stored in the project and only the files you exportmodify yourself outside a project need to be kept Two housekeeping options are available under ToolsOptionsViewATP Delete tempfiles after simulation Deletes all temporary BCTRANLCC files dat lis pch and all temporary ATP files bin when the simulation is finished The files required to run ATP outside of ATPDraw atp and lib files are left on disk In case of protected elements the libfiles are immediately deleted and the atpfile is modified During debugging a LCC or BCTRAN model this button should be left unchecked Delete result files on exit Deletes the all temporary and result files atp lib lis pl4 dat pch bin gnu from ResultDir the ATP folder as default when the circuit is closed All data is stored in the project files of ATPDraw anyway 242 Configuring ATPDraw The ATPDrawini file contains customizable program options One such file for each user of the computer is stored in APPDATAatpdraw The environmental variable APPDATA is system dependent but typical equal to cusersyouAppDataRoaming Note that Windows File Manager often hides the folder Generally default settings meet most of the users requirements When required the ini file can either be modified via Tools Options menu the ATP Connection Wizard in Fig 22 or by using a text editor A default ATPDrawini file is distributed with ATPDraw This file is only used if there are no atpdrawini in the APPDATAatpdraw location and can be used to configure the default interface 243 ATPDraw command line options Command lines are rarely used under Windows operating systems nevertheless ATPDraw provides an option to load one or more project files at program start In the example below the project file my1stacp and my2ndacp will be loaded automatically and displayed in separate circuit windows CATPDRAWatpdraw catpdrawcirmy1stacp ccirmy2ndacp In MSWindows environment you can use this property to create a shortcut on the desktop for the ATPDraw project files For instance click with the right mouse button on an empty space of the desktop and select New Shortcut then browse and select ATPDrawexe Click right on the just created icon and select Properties Specify the Target properties of the new shortcut as the full path of the program including the project file name eg catpdrawatpdrawexe myciracp and the Start in parameter as the project file directory eg catpdrawproject 244 Drag and drop project files ATPDraw accepts project files dragged from the Windows File Manager Dropping the project file acp on the header main menu or background causes the file to be opened in a new circuit window Dropping the file in an existing circuit window causes the file to be imported into that circuit Other file types dragged into the circuit will be added as zipped attachments Installation Manual ATPDraw version 73 25 25 Interfacing ATPDraw with other programs of the ATPEMTP package To configure ATPDraw and connect it with the desired solver TPBIGEXE and plotter use the ATPSetup ATP connection F10 also called the ATP Connection Wizard shown in Fig 22 In six steps the solver environment variables LISfil control solver execution result directory and plotting program is selected Fig 22 shows the recommended settings Initially the Execute solver in hidden mode can be unchecked step 4 and Printout to screen or Capture screen output checked step 3 in order to identify possible configuration errors If Execute solver in hidden mode is checked there is no DOS window popping up stealing focus and the computer can be used for work while the simulation runs also set NODISK1 in graphixaux to prevent JMarti line model diagnostics Simulations per core is used in Multiple Runs with the Internal Parser systematic parameter variations or optimization In this case ATP is executed in parallel threads and folders A low number will reduce the chances of file conflicts but also slow down the execution process The results from the first run goes into the Result folder and sub sequent runs into 1 2 etc subfolders A logfile same name as ATPfile containing information about the parameters is written to the Result folder Fig 22 ATP Connection Wizard Installation Manual 26 ATPDraw version 73 The ATPEMTP simulation package consists of various separate programs which are communicating with each other via disk files ie the output of preprocessors are used as input for the main program TPBIGEXE while the product of the simulation can be used as input for plotting programs The main program itself is often used as preprocessor eg for LINE CONSTANTS CABLE CONSTANTS BCTRAN or DATA BASE MODULE runs and the punchfile results in that cases can be reused as input in a subsequent run via Include all handled directly by ATPDraw The Edit Commandsfeature of ATPDraw supports to extend the command set under the ATP menu by integrating optional user commands such as Run ATP file Run PlotXY Run TPPlot Run PCPlot Run ATPAnalyzer Run ACC Run PL42mat etc This option makes possible to use the ATPDraw program as a graphical operating environment and execute the other ATP programs in a userfriendly way as shown in Fig 23 The XML output from ATPDraw alternative to native project file binary format acp can be used to exchange or modify project content more easily Fig 23 Interaction between ATPDraw and the other ATP programs ATPDraw ASCII text editor ATP TPBIGEXE XML PCPLOT Diagnosis errors DspATP32 PL42mat ATP Analyzer PL4 LIS GTPPLOT ATP input file ACP project file Comp data USP library PCH library ATP PlotXY PL4 LIS Data flow Information flow LCC BCT Installation Manual ATPDraw version 73 27 Fig 24A The Edit Commands dialog box Fig 24B User specified commands In the Edit Commands dialog box of Fig 24A the user can specify the name of a bat or an exe file and the name of a file which then will be sent as parameter eg ATPbat current atp file or PlotXYexe current pl4 file when ATPDraw executes these external programs The Name field specifies the name of the command while the Command and Parameter fields specify the name of the file to be executed and the optional parameter Selecting Current ATP radio button the full name of the ATPDraw project in the current circuit window with extension atp will be sent as parameter When selecting the File button the ATPDraw performs a file open dialog box before executing the command where the user can select a file which is then will be passed as parameter The commands are inserted in the ATP menu dynamically when the user activates the Update button as shown above 26 Installing ATPDraw on servers with limited writing privileges On servers the users typically do not have writing privileges to the folders where ATPDraw is installed This is particularly crucial for the Result Directory default ATP The user can run the ATP Connection Wizard as shown in Fig 22 and configure the setup manually but it is also possible to edit the default ATPDrawini file to avoid any user interaction in the setup Preferences ATPCommandCEMTPsolver pgigexe PlotCommandCEMTPplotterPlotXYexe runATPhiddenOn ATPDIRCEMTPsolver ATPDirSameAsSolverOn Directories ATPMATPDrawresults ProjectsMATPDrawprojects ATPDraw SaveOnExitOn Installation Manual 28 ATPDraw version 73 The ATPCommand and PlotCommand should preferable be the executables of the solver and plotter respectively ATPDIR points to the location of ATPs STARTUP file and is normally the same location as the solver itself ATPDraw will create environment variables ATPDIR and GNUDIR accordingly A very important point is the ATP directory setting This is also called the Result Directory and is where all the outputs from both ATPDraw and ATP go This must be a location where the user has writing privileges It is also advisable to avoid any blanks in the name of this directory ATPDraw will prompt the user and create the ATP directory if it does not exist Projects is optional and the default directory for FileOpen and Save commands It could point to a location with project files of interest If not specified it will be set to Projects The user typically does not have writing privileges here and must choose Save As and a different folder The SaveOnExit setting is also optional If On the ATPDrawini under APPDATAatpdraw is createdupdated when the user exits ATPDraw This file is individual for each user and will contain all settings to be used the next time ATPDraw is run by the same user 27 How to get help ATPDraw offers a standard Windows help file system This file provides help on all windows and menus in ATPDraw and assists in building up a circuit Several links between help pages and a relatively large index register for searching text or phrases are also available A Help button is attached to all circuit objects which shows a brief overview of the meaning of each parameter Modification and extension of these help files with users own remarks are also possible using the built in Help Editor in the Tools menu 271 Help via the ATPDraw webpage forum The ATPDraw Web page is maintained at address httpswwwatpdrawnet Users can register at the webpage must pass the EMTP Quiz and get access to the discussion forums and cases Beginner Discussion Bug report Suggestions Development The discussion forums are threadbased and upload of projects is allowed 272 Help via the ATPEMTPL mailing list The list server is an Email remailer program which rebroadcasts incoming messages to all subscribers to the list The European EMTPATP Users Group Association in cooperation with the German Research Network DFN and the University of Applied Sciences of Osnabrück Germany operates a free electronic mailing list using address atpemtpllistservdfnde This LISTSERV mailing list is for ATPrelated announcements questions answers etc The ATP EMTPL list is moderated and only licensed ATP users are entitled to subscribe by means of the authorized persons of the regional ATPEMTP user groups who checks first the license status of the applicant then send a subscription request to the list operator To learn more about the subscription procedure and the operation rules of this very active mailing list please visit the wwweeugorg web site After your name has been added to the list you can post messages To do this you simply send email to atpemtpllistservdfnde Your message then will be submitted to moderators who decide whether or not to accept it The task of moderators is maintenance of the quality of communication and discussion The language of communication is English Messages written in any other language are not accepted The author of each submission must be clearly identified This includes name organizational affiliation and location Attachments especially encoded files are not allowed They can be forwarded later to interested persons by private email Any subscriber who sends a message to this mailing list gives up his right to confidentiality This is Installation Manual ATPDraw version 73 29 regardless of the messages possible declaration in autoattached legal disclaimers which are removed by moderators Subscribers of the ATPEMTPL mailing list must fulfill the ATP license requirements Specifically they are forbidden to disclose to nonlicensed persons ATP information that is received from this mail service 273 Help from the author of ATPDraw The author of the program is also available for serious questions from ATPDraw users preferably via the ATPDraw webpage Address Prof Hans Kr Høidalen Norwegian University of Science and Technology httpswwwntnuno Dept Electric Power Engineering 7491 Trondheim NORWAY Email HansHoidalenntnuno 28 Available components in ATPDraw At the time of writing of this manual ATPDraws standard component library contains 317 component support files These 317 files support more than 170 of ATPs components ie many components have several versions in ATPDraw for historical reasons Standard components Linear branches Resistor Inductor Capacitor RLC PQU multiphase Kizilcay Fdep RLC 3phase symmetric and nonsymmetric Inductor and capacitor with initial condition Nonlinear branches Nonlinear R and L components multiphase Current dependent resistor type 99 multiphase Type93 96 and 98 nonlinear inductors including initial flux linkage conditions Time dependent resistor type 97 multiphase MOV type 92 exponential resistor multiphase TACS controlled resistor inductor and capacitor multiphase Line models Lumped PIequivalents type 1 2 and RL coupled components type 51 52 RL and PI symmetric sequence input 3 and 6phase Distributed lines of constant parameters Transposed Clarke untransposed KCLee Switches Time controlled multiphase Voltage controlled Diode thyristor triac type 11 switches multiphase Simple TACS controlled switch of type 13 multiphase Measuring switches multiphase Statistic and systematic switches independent and masterslave Nonlinear diode Sources Sawtooth and pulse train type 10 DC type 11 Ramp type 12 Twoslope ramp type 13 Installation Manual 30 ATPDraw version 73 AC source 1 and 3 phase type 14 Doubleexponential surge source type 15 Heidlertype source type 15 Standlertype source type 15 CIGRÉtype source type 15 TACS source type 60 AC source with TACS modulation multiplication Empirical type 1 source with interpolation options Ungrounded DC source type 1118 Ungrounded AC source type 1418 Trapped charge disconnected at time zero Machines Synchronous machine type 59 park and 58 phase with TACS controls Universal machines Universal machines type 1 3 4 6 and 8 Windsyn embedded universal machine type 1 and 3 with manufacturer data Transformers Singlephase and 3phase ideal transformer Type 18 source Singlephase saturable transformer 3phase 2 or 3 winding saturable transformer Auto Delta Wye and ZigZag BCTRAN 13 phases 23 windings Autotransformers Y and D connections Hybrid Transformer XFMR with topological core triplex 3 or 5legged shell form 3 phases 24 windings Auto Y D and ZigZag coupled windings MODELS Inputoutput and Data variables of MODELS code are recognized automatically Corresponding support file for the model is automatically created Type 94 Thevenin Norton Iterative objects are supported WriteMaxMin cost function WriteMonteCarlo TACS Sources Circuit variable MODELS variable Constant DC AC PULSE RAMP ramped step and PWM 3phase source Transfer functions General Laplace transfer function with or without limits Integral Derivative first order Low and High Pass transfer functions TACS devices 5066 Initial condition for TACS objects type77 Fortran statements Parameterized General Math Trigonom or Logical functionsoperators User specified objects Library Users can create new objects using Data Base Modularization and Include Additional Insert additional CARD Power system tools Various higher order or MODELS components for power system 3phase studies LINE3 BUS3 LOADPQ Phasor Transforms RX and power calculators filters protective relays etc Steadystate components Harmonic sources for Harmonic Frequency Scan studies Single and 3phase frequency dependent loads in CIGRÉ format Single phase RLC element with frequency dependent parameters Load flow components ATPDraw version 73 31 3 Introductory Manual ATPDraw for Windows 73 7 Accessories Space OnePiece Top Twin SetCulottes 325000 won Navy Black Camel 38 328 Marina Black Leather Bag 150000 won 34 Line Mules 155000 won Camel 3540 No 1 2023 AutumnWinter Street Casual Look Style No 6 Boxy Dress 179000 won Brown Free Size 137 Crepe Shirt 168000 won Black SXL Introductory Manual ATPDraw version 73 33 This part of the users manual gives the basic information on how to get started with ATPDraw The Introductory Manual starts with the explanation of how to operate windows and mouse in ATPDraw The manual shows how to build a circuit step by step starting from scratch Then special considerations concerning three phase circuits are outlined 31 Operating windows ATPDraw has a standard Windows user interface This chapter explains some of the basic functionalities of the Main menu and the Component selection menu of the Main window Fig 31 The Main window and the floating Component selection menu The Component selection menu is hidden and appears immediately when you click the right mouse in the open area of the Circuit window Components can also be selected from the SidebarSelection which gives a full tree view of all components Fig 31 shows the main window of ATPDraw containing two open circuit windows ATPDraw supports multiple documents and offers the user to work on several circuits simultaneously along with the facility to copy information between the circuits The size of the circuit window is much larger than the actual screen as is indicated by the scroll bars of each circuit window The Main window consists of the following parts Header Frame As a standard Windows element it contains the system menu on the left side a header text and minimize maximize exit buttons on the right side The main window is resizable System menu Contains possible window actions Close Resize Restore Move Minimize Maximize or Resize and Next The last one exists only if multiple circuit windows are open Header text The header text is the program name in case of the main window and the Introductory Manual 34 ATPDraw version 73 current circuit file name in case of the circuit windows To move a window click in the header text field hold down and drag Minimize button A click on this button will iconize the main window Maximize button A click on this button will maximize the window The maximize button will then be replaced with a resize button One more click on this button will bring the window back to its previous size Corners Click on the corner hold down and drag to resize the window Main menu The main menu provides access to all the functions offered by ATPDraw The menu items are explained in detail in the Reference part of this Manual File Load and save circuit files start a new one importexport circuit files create postscript and metafilebitmap files print the current circuit and exit Edit Circuit editing copypastedeleteduplicatefliprotate select move label copy graphics to clipboard and undoredo etc View Tool bar status bar and comment line onoff zoom refresh and view options ATP Run ATP make and edit ATPfile view the LISfile make node names ATPfile settings miscellaneous file format file sorting etc assign data to variables Find Node and Line Check Output Manager lists all output requests Library Edit standard support files default values minmax limits icon and help file create new files for MODELS and User Specified Objects Synchronize the present circuits icons or standard data from atpdrawscl Tools Icon editor help file editor text editor setting of various program options Window Arrange the circuit windows and showhide the Map window Web Gives access to uploaddownload cases from atpdrawnet for registered users Help About box and Windows help file system Circuit window The circuit is built up in this window The circuit window is the container of circuit objects From the File menu you can load circuit objects from disk or simply create an empty window to start building a new circuit Circuit objects include standard ATP components user specified elements MODELS and TACS components connections and relations To move around in the circuit you can use the window scrollbars or drag the view rectangle of the Map window to another position Circuit objects A circuit typically consists of the objects Components and Connections These two classes take part in the node naming process and eventually in the ATPfile sent to the solver In addition comes objects used for information only These are Texts Shapes Pictures and Files with dragdrop support A special Component is the Group which contains a list of subobjects MAP window This window gives a birds eye view of the entire circuit The default size of a circuit window is 10000x10000 pixels screen points much larger than your screen would normally support Consequently the Circuit window displays only a small portion of the circuit The actual circuit window is represented by a rectangle in the Map window Press and hold down the left mouse button in the map rectangle to move around in the map When you release the mouse button the circuit window displays the part of the circuit defined by the new rectangle size and position The map window is a stayontop window meaning that it will always be displayed on the top of other windows You can show or hide the map selecting the Map Window option in the Window menu or pressing CtrlM character Introductory Manual ATPDraw version 73 35 Side bar This bar to the left has three pages The default Simulation page contains frequent simulation settings and variables besides some useful tools The Selection page contains a tree structure for insertion of all components The Project page contains some project properties and a tree structure with all objects in the active circuit The Object Tree Fig 32 in the Sidebar contains options to inspect with filter navigate arrange find and open objects Components are marked with a symbol indicating branch switch source transformer machine tacs models The Group component is marked with a box symbol with a list of Children group content Connections Texts Shapes Pictures and Files are other circuit objects Left click on the object to mark and center it in the circuit window right click to open its dialog click hold and drag to rearrange it Objects first in the list are prioritized in mouse clicks and ATPfile generation Consider also EditArrange The object tree is not automatically updated with circuit changes so click on Update to see the present situation Fig 32 Object tree inspector Status bar Action mode field The current action mode of the active circuit window is displayed in the status bar at the bottom of the main window when the Status Bar option is activated in the View menu ATPDraw can be in various action modes The normal mode of operation is MODE EDIT in which new objects are selected and data are given to objects Drawing connections brings ATPDraw into CONNEND mode and so on ATPDraws possible action modes are EDIT The normal mode EDIT TEXT Indicates that text editing is preferred Hold down the Alt key to enter this mode of operation or select Edit Text from the Edit menu Click left in an empty space to add a new text Click the left mouse button on an existing text circuit text label node name to edit it directly on screen Click left hold down and drag to move it to a new position If the text is overlapped by a component icon this mode of operation is required to access the text DRAW Mode when adding Shapes to the circuit LINE RECTANGLE ELLIPSE ARROW To cancel drawing relation click the right mouse button or press the Esc key COMPRESS Mode when objects are selected and EditCompress is clicked In this mode only the selected objects are shown with the Compress dialog on top Status bar Modified and Hints field The middle field of the status bar is used to display the Modified state of the active circuit As soon as you alter the circuit moving a label deleting a connection inserting a new component etc the text Modified appears indicating that the circuit should be saved before exit The field will be empty when you save the circuit or undo all modifications The rightmost field of the status bar displays the menu option hints Introductory Manual 36 ATPDraw version 73 Status bar atpdrawnet field Shows if the user has logged in to atpdrawnet from WebLog in In order to log in the user must register first at atpdrawnet this requires passing the EMTP Quiz Logged in users have access to the database at atpdrawnet and can download examples and contribute to the forum with upload Status bar Zoom and node size In these menus you can type in zoom and node size in or select predefined values in the popup box 32 Operating the mouse This chapter contains a summary of the various actions taken dependent on mouse operations The left mouse button is generally used for selecting objects or connecting nodes the right mouse button is used for specification of object or node properties Left simple click On object Selects the object If the Shift key is pressed the object is added to the current selection group On connection Draw a new connection with the same properties On component node Begins to draw a connection Move the mouse to the end node left click to place right to cancel On text labels and node names Edit the text directly on screen Press Alt to favor the text selection compared to other objects In open area of the circuit window Unselects objects Right simple click In open area of the circuit window Shows the Component selection menu after canceling any other drawing process On object node Shows the Node input window On unselected object Shows the Object input window On selected objects Shows the circuit window Shortcut menu If Shift is pressed rotates objects Left click and hold On object Moves the object or selected group of objects On connection Select connection On node Resizes connection it is often necessary to select connection first In open area of the circuit window Draws a rectangle for group selection Objects inside the rectangle are becoming member of the group when the mouse button is released On text labels and node names Move the text Press Alt to favor the text selection compared to other objects Left double click On Component node Shows the Node input window On selected or unselected single object Introductory Manual ATPDraw version 73 37 Shows the Object input window On selected group of objects Shows the Selection input dialog In open area of the circuit window Starts the group selection facility Click left to create an enclosing polygon click right to close Objects inside the polygon become a group 33 Edit operations ATPDraw offers the most common edit operations like copy paste duplicate rotate and delete The edit options operate on a single object or on a group of objects Objects must be selected before any edit operations can be performed Selected objects can also be exported to a disk file and any circuit files can be imported into another circuit Tool Shortcut key Equivalent in menus UNDO CtrlZ Edit Undo REDO CtrlY Edit Redo CutCopy CtrlXCtrlC Edit CutCopy Delete DEL Edit Delete Paste CtrlV Edit Paste Paste keep names CtrlK Edit Paste keep names Duplicate CtrlD Edit Duplicate SelectAll CtrlA Edit Select All SelectInside CtrlI Edit Select Inside or left double click in open space SelectProperties CtrlP Edit Select by Properties NewSelect text CtrlT Edit Edit text Rotate clockwise CtrlR Edit Rotate R or right click Rotate left CtrlL Edit Rotate L Rubber Band CtrlB Edit Rubber Bands Draw LINE3 CtrlF3 Edit Draw LINE3 Edit GroupCircuit CtrlGCtrlH Edit Edit GroupCircuit one layer down or up Zoom InOut NUM View Zoom In Out Refresh CtrlQ View Refresh redraw the circuit 34 Overview of working with ATPDraw After selecting a component in the Component selection menu rightclick open space in circuit window or SidebarSelection the new circuit object appears in the middle of the circuit window enclosed by a limecolored rectangle Click on it with the left mouse button to move right button to open the context menu finally click in the open space to unselect and place the object To select and move an object simply press and hold down the left mouse button on the object while moving the mouse Release the button and click in an empty area to unselect and confirm its new position The object is then moved to the nearest grid point known as grid snapping If two or more components overlap because of a move operation you are given a warning message and can choose to proceed or cancel the operation Selecting a group of objects for moving can be done in three ways Holding down the Shift key while left clicking on an object Pressing and holding down the left mouse button in an empty area enables the user to drag a rectangular outline around the objects he wants to select And finally doubleclicking the left mouse button in an empty area enables the definition of a polygonshaped Introductory Manual 38 ATPDraw version 73 region by repeatedly clicking the left mouse button in the circuit window To close the region click the right mouse button Components with center point within the indicated region or rectangle are added to the selected objects group Connections require both end points within the region to be selected Select EditRubber Bands to stretch connections with one end inside and one end outside To move the selected group of objects press and hold down the left mouse button inside the group while moving the mouse Unselect and confirm the new position by clicking in an empty area Any overlapping components will produce a warning Selected objects or a group can be rotated by selecting EditRotate LR CtrlR or CtrlL Other object manipulation functions such as undoredo and clipboard options can be found in the Edit menu Additionally the most frequently used object manipulation functions can be accessed in the context menu with the right mouse button on a selected object or group of objects Components and component nodes can be opened for editing by a rightclick or left doubleclick on an unselected component or node Either the Node data Component or Probe dialog box will appear allowing the user to change component or node attributes and characteristics The Component dialog box shown in Fig 33 has the same layout for most circuit objects In this window the user must specify the required component data The number of DATA and NODES menu fields are the only difference between input windows for standard objects The nonlinear branch components have a Characteristic page too in addition to the normal Attributes page where the nonlinear characteristics and some include file options can be specified Some of the advanced components like LCC BCTRAN Hybrid Transformer have special dialog boxes for input Fig 33 Component dialog box attributes page The Component dialog box shown in Fig 33 consists of a Data part and a Node part In the Data part the user can specify values using as the decimal symbol and e or E as exponent symbol Mathematical expressions are also supported and an input 120E3sqrt23 will be converted to a value when OK is clicked If the value is illegal or outside the allowed range the user will be directed and forced to change the value The range can be changed inside Edit definitions A variable name can also be specified and given a global value in the Sidebar or under ATPSettingsVariables Six characters are allowed if Internal Parser is chosen otherwise only five Specifying a variable is only allowed if the Internal Parser is used or the Param property of Introductory Manual ATPDraw version 73 39 the data in Edit definitions is set to unity Warning messages will appear in case of illegal specifications and the user can modify the data It is not legal to combine variables and expressions like MyVar1000 Data values in lime color are inherited from the parent group component and cannot be changed inside the child The CopyPaste buttons allows copying the entire data set via the Windows clipboard Paste Use row number simply paste row by row while Paste Use data name will require the data names to be equal Reset will apply the default values Node names 6 or 5 characters can be specified in the right grid Node names drawn in a red color are given a name by the user while black names are given by ATPDraw If the user wants to change a node name the red namesnodes are preferred otherwise name conflict warnings could appear Node data are also given in the Node dialog box by clicking on the nodes Multiphase nodes can only take a 5 character name and the phase sequence extension AZ is added automatically Node names in lime color are inherited from the parent group component and cannot be changed inside the child Order is optionally used for sorting ATPSettingsFormat sorting by order lowhigh Label is a text string on screen with userselectable rotation and Comment is a line of text written to the ATP file in front of the components cards Hide can be checked to make the Component grey and exclude it from the ATPfile A variable can also be specified and if its value is positive the Component becomes hidden A Component is also hidden if its parent group is hidden The Output panel varies somewhat between components but is usually used for branch output requests select current voltage power or energy to be plotted Electrical machines and ModelsTacs have a substantially extended panel In the lower left corner there is the Edit definitions button This gives access to all the local properties inherited from the template file including the icon local help names of nodes and data node positions default values param flags range and units Clicking on Help will display the help text for the component first comes the global help obtained from the support files ATPDrawscl for standard components next comes local help specific to this component and finally comes global help from the HLP directory Default component attributes are stored in template files Access to create and customize template files is provided by the Library menu Components are connected if their nodes overlap or attached to the same Connection To draw a Connection click on a node with the left mouse button A line is drawn between that node and the mouse cursor Click the left mouse button again to place the Connection clicking the right button cancels the operation The gridsnap feature helps overlapping the nodes If the Connection is drawn between nodes of different number of phases the user must choose the actual phase to connect in the Edit Connection dialog The default color coding phase Ared phase Blime phase Cblue will visualize the connected phase Connected nodes are given the same name by the run ATP option in the ATP menu Nodes can be attached along a Connection only if the connection is horizontal or vertical but always at the Connections endpoints A warning for node naming appears during the ATPfile creation if a Connection exists between nodes of different names or if the same name has been given to unconnected nodes Connections can be selected moved and rotated as any other objects and are stretched when moving connected components if EditRubber bands is checked To resize a Connection click on its endpoint with Introductory Manual 40 ATPDraw version 73 the left mouse button hold down and drag If several Connections share the same node the desired Connection to resize must be selected first Selected Connection nodes are marked with squares at both ends of the selection rectangle To avoid selecting Connections over Component nodes consider EditArrangeSend Connections back 35 Your first circuit Exa1acp This chapter describes how to use ATPDraw step by step As an example composing the circuit file of a singlephase rectifier bridge see Fig 34 is presented Reading this tutorial carefully you will be proficient in the use of the most important ATPDraw functions such as How to select and assemble components How to perform edit operations and give data to components How to give node names draw connections and specify grounding How to create the ATP input file and perform the simulation Fig 34 Singlephase rectifier bridge NEG POS I U0 UI UI U V I Fig 35 Your first circuit Exa1acp The circuit is a singlephase rectifier bridge supplied by a 120 Vrms 60 Hz source The source inductance is 1 mH in parallel with a damping resistor of 300 The snubber circuits across the rectifying diodes have a resistance of 33 and a capacitance of 1 F The smoothing capacitor is 1000 F and the load resistor is 20 The example has been taken from 2 exercise 1 The units given in Fig 34 are based on settings of Xopt and Copt equal to zero as will be explained later The circuit in Fig 35 has been chosen since its construction involves the most commonly used edit operations 351 Building the circuit Most parts of the building process will be demonstrated in this chapter along with the explanation of correcting possible drawing errors The normal mode of operation is MODE EDIT You must always be in this mode to be able to select and specify data to objects To return to EDIT from other modes press Esc Introductory Manual ATPDraw version 73 41 3511 Starting to create a new circuit Selecting the New command in the File menu or pressing the new empty page symbol in the Component Toolbar a new circuit window will be created 3512 Source First an AC source is selected from the Component selection menu which appears with a right mouse click on open area of the circuit window Fig 36 shows how to select a general AC type 14 source under Sources AC source 13 Fig 36 Selecting an AC source After you have clicked in the AC source 13 field the selected source appears in the circuit window in lime color enclosed by a rectangle Click on it with the left mouse button hold down and drag it to a desired position Then click with the left mouse button in open space to place it The AC object is redrawn in red color as an indication that no data have been given to the object To give data to the AC source component click on with the right mouse button or left double click You can give data to objects at any time during the building process If you right click on the AC source icon a window as shown in Fig 37 appears Click the radio button Amplitude RMS LG to specify the rms value 120 volts directly ATPDraw will then multiply with 2 internally the RMS LL option will also divide by 3 To use a Variable see p 73 for the AmplitideA value the Peak LG standard no scaling option is required A negative value for StartA parameter means that the source is active during steadystate initialization Introductory Manual 42 ATPDraw version 73 Fig 37 Component dialog box of the singlephase sinusoidal source Data values shown in Fig 37 refer to the circuit parameters of Fig 34 The name of the numerical fields is identical with that of used by the ATP Rule Book 3 for an AC source This AC source has 5 input data and one node AC ACNEG and Internal nodes disappear for grounded voltage sources Click on the HELP button to learn about the meaning of parameters The node names can also be specified in this window Click OK to close the window and update the object values Click on Cancel to just quit the window After you have given data to the AC source and closed the window note how the object layout changes when you exit the window proceed to the other objects Next select the source inductance as shown in Fig 38 Fig 38 Selecting an inductor After you have clicked in the Inductor field the selected inductor appears in the circuit window enclosed by a rectangle an optional parallel damping resistance is included Click on it with the left mouse button hold down and drag it to a position shown in Fig 39 Introductory Manual ATPDraw version 73 43 Click on the white space with the left mouse button to place the inductor the enclosing rectangle disappears A grid snap facility helps you to place the inductor in the correct position The component position is rounded to the nearest 10th pixel The included parallel resistor is shown in a gray style The inductor in Fig 39 should be placed so that the node of the inductor touches the source Objects having overlapping node dots will automatically be connected The next figure shows two situations where the inductor has been misplaced and are disconnected To correct the lower example a connection could be drawn between the objects as will be explained later In this example you are supposed to place the inductor so that its left node overlaps the AC source node To move the inductor follow the instructions below Click on the object with the left mouse button hold down and drag it to the proper position then click on white space The grid snap feature will help you Fig 310 Not connected When you have placed the inductor you can add the damping resistance possibly directly included After you have clicked in the Resistor field of the component selection menu a resistor icon appears enclosed by a rectangle Click on it with the left mouse button hold down and drag it to a position shown in Fig 311 Click in open space to placeunselect it This resistor is supposed to be parallel with the inductor and connections will be drawn later The resistor in Fig 311 would also be recognized as in parallel with the inductor if it had been placed in a position completely overlapping the inductor This tricky way is not recommended however since the readability of the drawing is strongly reduced also warnings will be issued by the circuit compiler Fig 311 We want to measure the source current flowing into the diode bridge To be able to do so you can add a measuring switch A special multiphase current probe is available for such measurements in ATPDraw When using this object you are requested to specify the number of phases and in which phases the current should be measured Select the probe as shown in Fig 312 Fig 312 Selecting a current measuring probe After you have clicked in the Probe Curr field the selected probe appears in the circuit window enclosed by a rectangle Click on it with the left mouse button hold down and drag it to a position shown in the figure then place it At this stage of the building process it is time to draw some connections in the circuit diagram To draw a connection you just click the left mouse button on a node release the button and move the mouse The cursor style now changes to a pointing hand and a line is drawn between the starting position and the current mouse position Click with the left mouse button again to place the connection or click with the right button to cancel the starting point Two Connections are required to connect the source inductance and the damping resistor in parallel as shown below The Connection dialog color phase number automatically appears for Fig 39 Introductory Manual 44 ATPDraw version 73 connections drawn between multi and singlephase nodes but not in this case Click left Click left Click left Click left Release move Release move The last object we want to introduce in the source part of the circuit is a voltage measuring probe which results in an output request for the node voltage in the ATP input file The voltage sensor can be selected via the Probe 3phase Probe Volt in the component selection menu see Fig 312 The probe is drawn in the circuit window in marked and moveable mode Use the left mouse button to drag and place the probe as shown on the figure to the left When you place an object by clicking on open area of the circuit window you will sometimes receive a warning message as shown in Fig 313 This message appears if a center of one of the permanent objects is inside the enclosing polygon of a marked object or more general a group of objects This is to prevent unintentional object overlap if the left mouse button were pressed while moving the object If you click on No the object is not placed but continues to be selected and you can move it further Normally it is OK to click on Yes If you change your mind later the Edit UNDO option provides an easy way to return to an earlier version of the circuit If objects with the same icon completely overlap the visual clarity is violated what you see is not what you get A warning is thus issued during the compilation MakeFilerun ATP Fig 313 Prevent object overlap Now give data to the components placed so far Click with the right mouse button on the resistor and inductor icon respectively The inductor has a builtin damping resistor option but turn this off by choosing Kp0 Fig 314 Open probe dialog box The probe objects have different input window than other objects To open the voltage or current probe input window click on its icon with the right mouse button In this window you can select the number of phases of the probe and which phases to monitor In this singlephase example default values no of phases1 monitored phaseA of both voltage and current probes should be selected as shown in Fig 314 3513 Diode bridge In this process you will learn how to use some editing options like rotate group duplicate and paste Since the diode bridge consists of four equal branches you do not need to build all of them from scratch First you select a diode from the selection menu as shown in Fig 315 After you have clicked on Diode type 11 the diode appears in the circuit window enclosed by a rectangle Introductory Manual ATPDraw version 73 45 The diode must be rotated so click the right mouse button or select Edit in the main menu and click on Rotate L The diode is now rotated 90 deg counter clockwise Click on the diode with the left mouse button hold down and drag to the position shown in Fig 316 Fig 315 Selecting a diode Click with the left mouse button on empty area to place the diode Remember the grid snap facility and the overlap warning Next you select the snubber circuit across the diode In this example the snubber circuit is a resistor and a capacitor in series Select an RLC object from the component selection menu Fig 38 Click on the selected RLC branch with the right mouse button to rotate then click with the left button hold down and drag the RLC branch to be in parallel with the diode Click on the left mouse button to place The idea is further to copy the diode and the RLC branch but before doing so it is wise to give data to them since the data are kept when copied A simple click on the RLC or diode icon with the right mouse button activates the component dialog box to give data to objects Again an explanation of the input parameters is given in a help file Click the HELP button to see this help text The numerical values of the diode are all zero meaning that the diode is ideal and is open during the steady state The RLC branch in Fig 316 has been given a resistance of 33 and a capacitance of 1 F The icon then changes to a resistor in series with a capacitor You have now given data to the diode and the RLC branch and instead of repeating the drawing and data entering process four times you can use the copy facility First you have to select a group of components This can be done by selecting Edit Select Inside field in the main menu or with a double click with the left mouse button on an empty space of the Circuit window Then cursor style changes to a pointing hand and the action mode is EDIT GROUP The process is then to click with the left mouse button to create a corner in a fence and to click the right button to enclose the fence polygon All components having their center inside the fence are included in the group Alternative way of group selection is to draw a rectangle around the objects by a left mouse click and hold at the upperleft corner of the desired rectangle and moving thereafter to the lowerright corner Objects inside the rectangle become a group when the mouse button is released You can follow the procedure shown in Fig 317 Fig 317 Drawing a polygon First double click on white space click the left mouse button at each corner of the polygon then click the right button to enclose the polygon The group created in Fig 317 can be copiedrotated etc like a single object Now we want to duplicate this group Click on the main menu Edit field and choose Duplicate or press the CtrlD Fig 316 Introductory Manual 46 ATPDraw version 73 shortcut key The selected group is copied to the clipboard and pasted in the same operation The old group is redrawn in normal mode and the copy is drawn in the top of the original The enclosing polygon is now a rectangle The pasted group is moveable so you can click on it with the left mouse button hold down and drag to a desired position Click the left mouse button on open space to put the group in the position shown in Fig 318 If you misplaced the group you can reselect it or use the Undo facility found in the Edit main menu field You can now paste a second copy of the diodeRLC group into the circuit Since the duplicate facility has already copied the group to the clipboard you can just select the Paste option from the Edit menu by using the mouse or pressing CtrlV or selecting the Paste icon from the Toolbar The pasted group is drawn on top of the original one enclosed by a rectangle Click on this group with the left mouse button hold down and drag it to a position shown in Fig 319 Fig 319 Fig 320 As part of the connection between the rectifier bridge and the load a small resistor is included in Fig 34 The resistor is included to demonstrate the option of using a small resistor for current measurement purposes Select a resistor in the component selection menu then click on the resistor with the left mouse button hold down and drag it to a desired position as shown in Fig 320 You must place the resistor precisely because the next step is to connect the top nodes of the diode bridge with the resistor Before doing so first give data to this resistor opening the component dialog box by a rightclick on the resistor Specify data value RES 001 and set Output to 1Current to get the branch current in the subsequent ATP run Having closed the component dialog box a small I symbol appears on the topleft side of the resistor indicating the current output request Now you can start to connect the diode bridge and the resistor together The procedure is to first click with the left mouse button on a starting node as shown in Fig 321 The cursor style now changes to a pointing hand Then release the mouse button and move the mouse a rubber band is drawn from the starting point to the current cursor position To place a connection click on the left mouse button again Click on the right button or press Esc to cancel the connection make operation The connection draw in Fig 321 picks up intermediate nodes so all the five nodes will be connected together In this way ATPDraw suits the requirement What you see is what you get and the amount of required connections are significantly reduced Fig 318 Move a group Introductory Manual ATPDraw version 73 47 Fig 321 Click left button Release move then click left button to place the connection If you made a mistake in the connection drawing process you can correct the error easily because connections are editable copymoverotate as any other objects If you would like to correctmodify a misplaced connection click on it and hold with the left mouse button After this selection the connection is enclosed by a rectangle and two squares replace node dots at the end of the line To move the connection click on an internal point of it using the left mouse button then hold down and move and release the mouse at the correct position To reposition a connection click on the node squares with the left button and stretch the connection as illustrated in Fig 322 Fig 322 Edit connection Click any point of the line then click node squares and stretch 3514 Load The last part of this example circuit is the load consisting of a smoothing capacitor with initial condition and a load resistor First you can select the capacitor as shown in Fig 323 Fig 323 Select capacitor with initial condition After this selection the capacitor appears in the middle of the circuit window in moveable mode enclosed by a rectangle Click on the capacitor with the left mouse button hold down and drag to a desired position then click the right mouse button or press CtrlR to orient the capacitor as shown in Fig 324 Finally click on open space to place the capacitor Fig 324 Placing a capacitor with initial conditions Introductory Manual 48 ATPDraw version 73 Next select the load resistor in the component selection menu Branch linear Resistor The resistor is drawn in moveable mode in the circuit window Click on it with the right mouse button to rotate then click with the left mouse button hold down and drag it to a desired position and place as shown in Fig 325 Fig 325 Place load resistor The time has come to connect the load to the rest of the diode bridge The process has been explained before Click on the component nodes you wish to connect with the left mouse button sequentially A left mouse click on open area while in MODE CONNEND generates a new node dot which can be used as the starting point of any new connections This way creating a circuit having only perpendicular connections recommended for complex circuits to improve the circuit readability is a relatively simple task as shown in Fig 326 Fig 326 Your first circuit is almost ready After you have finished connecting the source side and the load side of the circuit you can specify the load data Click with the right mouse button on the capacitor and specify the parameters shown in Fig 327 Introductory Manual ATPDraw version 73 49 Fig 327 Capacitor data with initial condition The capacitance is 1000 F if Copt0 in ATP Setting Simulation The positive node has an initial voltage of 75 V and the negative 75 V Both branch current and voltage will be calculated so the CurrentVoltage is selected in the Output combo box Following the branch output request the appearance of the objects icon will change if the Show branch output is checked under View Option If this option is enabled a small symbol appears on the topleft side of the capacitor indicating the branch voltage and the current output requests see Fig 328 Next click with the right mouse button on the load resistor to get the input window and specify the load resistance of 20 Branch current and voltages will be calculated so the small symbol appears again on the topleft side of the resistor after leaving the dialog box Once all the entries in the component dialog box are completed select the OK button to close the window and update the object values or click Help to obtain an online help 3515 Node names and grounding The final step of building this circuit is to give data to nodes node names and grounding All nodes will automatically receive names from ATPDraw so the user should normally give name to nodes of special interest only It is advised in general to perform the node naming as the last step in building up a circuit This is to avoid undesirable multiple node names which is corrected by ATPDraw automatically but results in irritating warning messages To give data to a node you simply have to click on this node once with the right mouse button Fig 328Fig 331 show how to give data to four different nodes Introductory Manual 50 ATPDraw version 73 Fig 328 Click on a node with the right mouse button and specify a name in the dialog box When you exit the window in Fig 328 by clicking OK the circuit is updated as shown in Fig 329 and the node dot turns red All node names are forced left adjusted and as a general rule in the ATP simulation capital letters should be used ATPDraw does accept lower case characters in the node data window however this feature should be avoided in particular if the node is connected with electrical sources Fig 329 Click on a node with the right mouse button and specify a name in the node data window The name NEG will be assigned to all nodes visually connected Fig 330 Click on a node with the right mouse button and check the Ground box indicating that the node is connected with the ground reference plane of the circuit The button right to the Ground check box can be clicked to choose the ground symbol orientation The ground symbol is drawn at the selected node when you exit the window as Fig 331 shows The nodes not given a name by the user will automatically be given a name by ATPDraw starting with XX for single phase and X for 3phase nodes followed by a fourdigit number Nodes with a name specified by the user are drawn in a red color and the disabled check box User Named in their node dialog box is checked Fig 331 shows the final step in the drawing process Fig 331 Click on the voltage source with the right mouse button and specify the node name Introductory Manual ATPDraw version 73 51 352 Storing the project file on disk You can store the project in a disk file whenever you like during the building process This is done in the main menu with File Save or CtrlS If the current project is new a Save As dialog box appears where you can specify the project file name and location on the disk The default extension is acp in both cases and it is automatically added to the file name you enter The user can also choose two other project file formats Save as type Version 56 compatible and XML text format Both these formats are less complete When the circuit is saved the name of the disk file appears in the header field of the circuit window Then if you hit CtrlS or press the Save circuit icon in the Toolbar the circuit file is updated immediately on the disk and the Modified flag in the status bar disappears The File Save As option or the Save As Toolbar icon allows you to save the circuit currently in use under a name other than that already allocated to this project There are no project file name restrictions 353 Creating the ATP input file The ATPfile describes the circuit according to the ATP RuleBook You can create this file by selecting SubprocessMake ATP File command in the ATP main menu The ATPfile is regenerated whenever you execute the run ATP command or press F2 In the latter case the process is automized By default the ATP file inherits its name from the project file However before you create the ATP input file or run the simulation you must not forget to specify the miscellaneous parameters ie parameters that are printed to the Misc Data cards of the ATP input file The default values of these parameters are given in the ATPDrawini file Changing these default values can either be done in the ATP Settings Simulation submenu or in the Sidebar for the current project or under the Tools Options ViewATP Edit settings Simulation for all new ATPDraw projects created henceforth Fig 332 shows an example of the 1st miscellaneous data card settings of an ATP simulation specifying time step time scale of the simulation etc This window appears if you select the Simulation tab of the ATP Settings dialog The most important settings can also be made in the Sidebar The simulation type time domain or frequency scan can also be set on this page Fig 332 Simulation settings Time step delta T in sec End time of simulation Tmax in seconds Xopt0 Inductances in mH Copt0 Capacitances in F Epsilon Accuracy value A zero value means the default from STARTUP is used 1E8 It could be important to set Epsilon to 1E12 or less to prevent incorrect singularity warnings Press Help to get more information or OK to close the dialog box The simulation settings are stored in the project file so you should save the file after changing these settings Values on the first integer miscellaneous data card of ATP can be changed under the ATP Settings Output page The next ATP Settings SwitchUM tab is the home of control flags Introductory Manual 52 ATPDraw version 73 required by statistical switching or universal machine simulations Under the Output page the user can select content of the output LIS and PL4 files Print freq tells the time step interval reported in the LIS file this should be a large number to prevent very large unmanageable text files Plot freq tells the time step interval into the PL4 plotting file and the checkbox Plotted output if a PL4 file will be produced at all Printout gives more details about what diagnostic data that will be written to the LISfile Autodetect simulation errors also set in the ATP Connection Wizard will enforce ATPDraw to read the LISfile after the simulation and look for error and warning and the show the message in a text file window Fig 333 The ATPfile format menu To create an ATPfile without starting the simulation you must select the SubprocessMake ATP File in the ATP menu This selection will start the compilation which examines your circuit and gives node names to circuit nodes Then a standard Windows Save As file window appears where you can specify the name and path of the ATPfile The same name as the project with extension acp file is suggested default As the ATP file is sent to the ATP solver the file name should not contain space characters You can edit this file or just display it by selecting the ATP Edit ATPfile menu The ATPfile Exa1atp you have just created will be as follows BEGIN NEW DATA CASE C C Generated by ATPDRAW August Monday 26 2019 C A Bonneville Power Administration program C by H K Høidalen at SEfASNTNU NORWAY 19942019 C C dT Tmax Xopt Copt Epsiln 5E5 05 500 1 1 1 1 0 0 1 0 C 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 C 345678901234567890123456789012345678901234567890123456789012345678901234567890 BRANCH C n1 n2 ref1ref2 R L C C n1 n2 ref1ref2 R A B Leng0 VA XX0001 33 1 0 XX0001 33 1 0 NEG VA 33 1 0 NEG 33 1 0 XX0001POS 01 1 POS NEG 1E3 3 NEG POS 20 3 VS XX0002 1 0 VS XX0002 300 0 SWITCH C n 1 n 2 Tclose TopTde Ie VfCLOP type 11VA XX0001 0 11 XX0001 0 Introductory Manual ATPDraw version 73 53 11NEG VA 0 11NEG 0 XX0002VA MEASURING 1 SOURCE C n 1 Ampl Freq PhaseT0 A1 T1 TSTART TSTOP 14VS 169705627 60 90 1 1 INITIAL 2POS 75 2NEG 75 3POS NEG 150 OUTPUT VS BLANK BRANCH BLANK SWITCH BLANK SOURCE BLANK INITIAL BLANK OUTPUT BLANK PLOT BEGIN NEW DATA CASE BLANK 354 Running the simulation Starting the ATP simulation is supported in ATPDraw in a userfriendly way The user just has to press F2 function key to create an ATP input file with the current project file as input and run the simulation ATPrun Plot F8 starts the default plotting program and sends the pl4 file as parameter The default commands that is executed when the user selects run ATP or run Plot under the ATP menu as it has been described in section 25 of the Installation Manual 36 Node names The user should give names to nodes used in outputs in order to identify this is plotting programs Otherwise ATPDraw will take care of the node naming The user can choose ATPSub processMake node names to force ATPDraw to create the node names Selecting ATPRun ATP will do the same thing but also execute ATP After node names are created the user can right click on the nodes to see the name and phase Single phase nodes will have no phase extensions unless they are connected to a Splitter or Connections where the phase is specified Threephase nodes will have phase extension ABC unless Transposition objects are involved or the DEF object is connected to the circuit The node property Circuit is used to identify which nodes of the component that should be transposed together In the case of Groups there are a few restrictions from the otherwise whatyouseeiswhatyou get The basic principle is that the Group component enforces the node names on its connected content The content can never enforce node names back on the Group this applies also to the nodes phase index The following restrictions thus apply Not legal with internal connections between two nodes from parent Not legal with transposition between two nodes from parent Not safe with a different phase index in child and parent nodes The Group nodes will indeed inherit the contents phase index during Compress and the user can click on the Group node and override the phase index directly However the user must pay attention if a node phase index in the Group content changes later due to other edit operations Introductory Manual 54 ATPDraw version 73 Fig 334 Illegal or unsafe child node connections in version 7 361 Multiphase circuits From ATPDraw version 5 a node can have up to 26 phases AZ node name extension This applies also to MODELS nodes A more generalized Connection is introduced with a special handling between single phase and nphase nodes Transpositions will only take place through 3 phase connections In this case the phase sequence will be further inherited throughout the circuit Special ABC or DEF reference components found under from Probes3phase in the Selection menu can be placed on the reference node The actual phase sequence of the node is written at the top right of the Node dialog box or in the PHASE field in the Component dialog box as shown in Fig 33 after ATPrun ATP or ATPSubprocessMake node names A special component SPLITTER is available for connections between 3phase and singlephase nodes Some special restrictions apply to the Splitter objects found under Probes 3phase in the component selection menu Connecting splitter objects together on the 3phase side or with connections on the 1phase side is permitted but transpositiondisconnection is not allowed If the name NODEA is given to what you know is phase A on the singlephase side ATPDraw does not accept this and adds its own A at the end creating the node name NODEAA The general rule is that ATPDraw takes care of the phase sequence The best solution is to specify a node name on the 3phase side only Color label and phase properties are given to the Connection as well as the possibility to force node dots on Fig 335 shows the Connection dialog that appears after a right click on the connection and automatically when the user draws a connection between a single phase and a multiphase node The Phase index field is only enabled for single phase connections 0 is used for connections between two single phase nodes no phase extension to node names Fig 335 The Connection dialog box Fig 336 illustrates the various options for 3phase in this case multiphase circuits in ATPDraw The flag DEF set at the source node to the left The color of each connection is user selectable as From parent nodes Parent Child Introductory Manual ATPDraw version 73 55 shown in Fig 335 but as default the color and phase sequence are inherited when the user clicks on one connection to draw a new one There is an important difference compared to version 56 a Connection with phase index 1A connected to a multiphase node will carry the first phase and not necessarily phase A This difference is only relevant in case of Transpositions E F D DEF D D E F D D E F E D D 3 2 1 F E F E E Fig 336 Illustration of various phase options in ATPDraw A typical example of connecting a singlephase node to a 3phase node is the case of a single phase ground fault as shown in Fig 337 Place the switch then draw the connection between the threephase node and the singlephase node Select 1A to ground the first phase of the node depends of transpositions involved U U 1 Fig 337 Singlephase ground fault Multiphase nodes are first of all important for MODELS and GROUPS An nphase connection could also be useful just to clear up the circuit drawing As an initial example a 6phase connection is shown in Fig 338 for communication between a 6pulse thyristor bridge and its control circuit This will make the drawing much easier to read Freq T K x y x y Freq 58 G u Angle T x y x y 180 T 54 1 3 5 4 6 2 54 54 54 54 54 T T T T T 1 4 3 6 5 2 1 2 3 4 5 6 Fig 338 Communicating a 6phase signal between a thyristor bridge and its control circuit All nphase nodes have only 5 characters available in the Node dialog box ATPDraw adds the extension A B and C etc at the end of the node name By default the phase sequence is ABC Introductory Manual 56 ATPDraw version 73 the first data card uses A the second B and the last C The only way to change the phase sequence is to use the available transposition objects Transp1 Transp4 selectable under Probes 3phase in the component selection menu Only 3phase nodes can be transposed Fig 339a Illustrative threephase circuit U 1 2 3 4 6 7 8 V ABC Fig 339b Equivalent ATPDraw circuit Exa2acp The circuit shown in Fig 339 was built up in the same way as your first circuit You can note that connections between the three phase nodes appear to be thick The circuit contains 3 special objects the already mentioned transposition object in this case from ABC to BCA a Splitter object which splits three phase nodes into three singlephase nodes and an ABC reference object Fig 340 shows the Node data dialog for a single phase and a threephase node If the extra option Short circuit is checked the node becomes singlephase all phases short circuited Fig 340 Default node names and phase sequence Top single phase node Bottom 3phase Introductory Manual ATPDraw version 73 57 37 Data values In the data part of dialog boxes the user can specify values using as the decimal symbol and e or E as exponent symbol Mathematical expressions are also supported and an input 120E3sqrt23 will be converted to a value when OK is clicked If the value is illegal or outside the allowed range the user will be directed and forced to change the value The range can be changed inside Edit definitions A variable name can also be specified and given a global valueexpression in SidebarSimulation or under ATPSettingsVariables If the user specifies a variable a Confirmation dialog pops up and ask if the variable should be accepted and added to the list of variables as shown in Fig 341 Click Yes or All if the variable specification was intentional The purpose of assigning a variable is primarily if a value is used in several components or if its value should be modified in multiple run parameter variations Fig 341 Add Variable to list confirmation Six characters are allowed if Internal Parser is chosen otherwise only five Specifying a variable is only allowed if the Internal Parser is used or the Param property of the data in Edit definitions is set to unity Warning messages will appear in case of illegal specifications and the user can modify the data Variables are not allowed in the BCTRAN and XFMR components but in the LCC component It is not legal to combine variables and expressions like MyVar1000 Data values in lime color are inherited from the parent group component and cannot be changed inside the child 371 Parameter variations Sometimes the user would like to study the effect of parameter variations This can be done by assigning a Variable to data and then manipulate this under SidebarSimulation or ATPSettingsVariables Intermediate variables can be defined to support data variables The default variable KNT is the simulation number counter and in the example in Fig 342 this goes from 1 to Sim making the resistance go from 100 to 1000 ohms in steps of 100 ohms If Internal Parser is checked an ATPfile for each simulation is created and ran in series utilizing multiple CPUcores in parallel threads This will also allow manipulation of data used in internal calculations Otherwise the native PARAMETER and PCVP mechanisms of ATP are used This restricts the manipulation to data with the Param property set to unity With the Internal Parser variables can be maximum 6 characters and nesting of variables is allowed previous values used otherwise character maximum is 5 the variables must be declared purely sequential and a period character must be used in all expression numbers Multiple result files PL4 are Introductory Manual 58 ATPDraw version 73 created and extended with 001 002 numbers and this requires manual inspection in plotting programs Extremal values can be extracted by the WriteMaxMin component see Chapt 59 Fig 342 Variable variations 38 Object organization sequence and priorities ATPDraw is a preprocessor that creates the input file to ATP ATPfile ATPDraw organizes all objects including components in an object list Components are written to the ATPfile in the sequence they appear in this list unless sorting options are enforced and this is the same as the sequence they were added to the project If a component is deleted and Undo selected it will appear at the end of the list This is different from earlier versions where vacant positions were filled later and the sequence could be messy over time The user can see and organize the sequence of all objects in the Object Tree Inspector in SidebarProject Three mouse operations are available in Object Tree Inspector Left click on object to highlight it and center the circuit around it Right click to open the object for input Left click and hold to drag it to a new position in the list The sequence of components in the ATPfile does typically not matter unless the user needs to dig into the file for debugging or manual editing However there are a few cases when the sequence is critical A few examples are A MODEL using output from another MODEL must come later in the ATPfile A switch current or status signal into MODELSTACS If several switches share the node used the first switch is chosen A GIFU switch will only invoke diodes following in the ATPfile In UM a control source type 60 must come after the type 14 sources used for automatic initialization Note that type 14 sources are hidden inside the UMSYN component In earlier ATPDraw versions the Component Order and Sort by Order mechanism was the only way to change the component sequence This option is still available but not recommended due to lack of transparency Besides the Sidebars Object Tree Inspector organization the user can also select a Component and then EditArrange or right click and select Arrange in the context menu Selecting Send to back will move the object to the end of the list Note that the Object Tree Inspector is not automatically updated so the user should click on Update When clicking on objects in the circuit window the first object hit in the list will be chosen It could be inconvenient if you click on a Component node the Connection dialog appears The option EditArrangeSend Connections Back will by sending all Connections back and thus reduce their priority prevent this and make the appearance equal to earlier ATPDraw versions Introductory Manual ATPDraw version 73 59 39 Postprocessing ATPDraw postprocess data in several ways Current and voltage probes can display simulation results extract phasors directly on screen The Power System Toolbox introduced a method where MODELS is used to write data to the LISfile and read this back into components This approach is further utilized in the COMTRADE objects introduced in ATPDraw 7071 ATPDraw v71 introduced a new object type TATPDrawPlot for direct embedding of PL4 simulation results 391 Probes Node voltage and current probes probev probei have options to display steadystate values on screen There is one choice called SteadystateEnable that turns the capture onoff and one option On screenEnable that turns onoff presentation on screen The type of format of the screen output is to a large extent user controlled and it is written as a movable green label on screen The user can choose to extract phasors at a time T0 and in this case a MODEL WRITEPROBEV or WRITEPROBEI are added to the ATPfile This will extract the phasor from a window looking 1FREQ back in time All phases of the probe are captured in a grid where the user can copy out data to windows clipboard without scaling The values on the screen and in the grid are simulated peak values divided by the user specified Scale factor The Scale should typically be sqrt2 to get RMS values or sqrt23 to get linequantities in rms For 3phase probes output on screen can be sequence parameters Fig 343 Voltage and current probes that write phasor values to screen A component under MODELSShow maxmin will extract the extremal value of a simulation withing a TstartTStop interval and display this on screen The flexible transmission line model LINE3 can also output time zero steady state current andor power flow out on the line 392 Power System Toolbox Several components in the Power System Toolbox extract phasors and trajectories This applies to all relay models Relays have a View button that display trajectories current or impedance until tripping This will display the standard plotting window in ATPDraw as shown in Fig 344 Introductory Manual 60 ATPDraw version 73 Fig 344 Plotting window used for distance relay 393 COMTRADE ATPDraw can also export simulation data as COMTRADE IEEE C7111999 binary og ascii alternatively MatLab v4 format Three different COMTRADE objects are available The first called just COMTRADE assumes 3phase inputs and can be connected directly to threephase nodes and thus knows the inputs name and if the input is current voltage or digital The other two COMTRADE1 and COMTRADE2 both needs a packing object in MODELS that merge input and internal calculations to analog andor digital channels The COMTRADE objects offers a very flexible userselectable sample frequency up or down sample a starting time and allocation of standard channel scaling and naming The COMTRADE input dialog also has a View button that displays similar to Fig 344 the raw simulation results as read in from the LIS file The COMTRADE objects will automatically export dat and cfg files to the Result Directory after each run The feature to export as MatLab v4 matfile works the same way 394 Embedded Plotting ATPDraw has from v71 an embedded plotting object that reads the PL4file directly NEWPL402 format and displays user selectable traces The user can choose to save data in the project file or not but the names of selected traces are always stored There can be many plotting objects inside a project and they can be placed inside groups The user can move the Plot objects around and scale them One unique feature with the embedded plotting object is that the user can easily select to plot a trace as function of the run number in multirun simulations as shown in Fig 345 where the inrush current is plotted as function of the switching instant The selection og Plot objects is somewhat different compared to other objects since left and right mouse clickhold inside the Plot is used for zooming and panning respectively A handle on the right side can be used to drag the component without selecting it first via the Context menu shown in Fig 345 Introductory Manual ATPDraw version 73 61 Fig 345 Embedded Plotting object Context menu after right click The traces to plot are selected inside the dialog box of the Plot object Open Fig 346 The number of plots must be selected first then the actual plot from the combo box that appears when clicking in the Series name column The sequence is the same as in the PL4 file and follows the Output Manager F9 with naming convention like PlotXY The colors option follows the standard Windows colors but selecting Custom will enable all possible colors for selection The run column is used to select which multiplerun case to display The curve is plotted as ctPL4tSkewScaleOffset Clicking the Right column button will align the curve on the Plots right axis Save plots in project have three options Plot definition will only save grid above chart settings will also save all Plot object settings axis zooming etc and data values saves the actual data so the curves displays immediately when loading the project The data are stored with single precision same as PL4 and compressed but beware of possible large project file sizes Draw reduced samples reduces the accuracy somewhat but speeds up the drawing GDI draws more smooth curves On the Settings page axis and panel can be adjusted ss shown in Fig 347 The Advanced settings brings up the extremely rich native chart setting dialog This allows fine tuning of fonts positions and appearances as shown in Fig 348 The settings made in this dialog are also stored if chart settings or data values are selected in Fig 346 Fig 346 Embedded Plot dialog main Plot page Introductory Manual 62 ATPDraw version 73 Fig 347 Embedded Plot dialog Settings page Fig 348 Embedded Plot dialog native advanced settings dialog Introductory Manual ATPDraw version 73 63 4 Reference Manual ATPDraw for Windows 73 Reference Manual 64 ATPDraw version 73 Reference Manual ATPDraw version 73 65 This part of the manual outlines all menu items and program options and gives an overview of the supported ATP components TACS and MODELS features ATPDraw has a standard Windows user interface The Main window of the program is shown in Fig 41 The Main menu the Circuit window and the Component selection menu are the most important items of that window Elements of the Main menu and supported ATP components in the Component selection menu will be referenced in this part of the manual 41 Main window Fig 41 Components of ATPDraws main window If you are unfamiliar with the use of ATPDraw read the Introductory Manual to learn how to create a circuit or the Advanced Manual to learn how to create a new object in ATPDraw The Introductory Manual starts with the explanation of operating windows and the mouse in ATPDraw and shows how to build up a circuit and how to create an ATPfile to be used as input for a subsequent transient simulation Reference Manual 66 ATPDraw version 73 42 Main menu 421 File This field contains actions for inputoutput of ATPDraw projects Selecting the File item in the main menu will result in a popup menu shown in Fig 42 Fig 42 File menu 4211 New Selecting this menu item will open a new empty Circuit window ATPDraw supports to work on several circuits simultaneously and copy information between the circuits The number of simultaneous open windows is limited only by the available MSWindows resources The circuit window is much larger than the actual screen as it is indicated by the scroll bars of each circuit windows 4212 Open This menu performs a Windows standard Open dialog box In this window the user can select a project file and load it into ATPDraw Short key CtrlO The default directory is the previously used directory and the first time the dialog is used the Project Folder set under ToolsOptionsFilesFolders initially read from ithe ATPDrawini file is suggested ATPDraw can read both circuit cir files created by an earlier version of the program and project files acp and adp When opening a project file all data are stored in memory and no files are written to disk The circuit files and project files are binary data files The OpenSave dialog box is used for several different selections in the main menu An alternative MSWindows 31 style is also supported There is a check box in the Tools Options General tab to switch between the two supported alternatives 4213 Save Activating this menu item will save the project in the active circuit window into a disk file If the name Nonameacp is shown in the circuit window a Save As dialog box will be performed where the user can specify a new name for the current project file name Short key CtrlS Reference Manual ATPDraw version 73 67 4214 Save As The project in the active circuit window is saved to disk under a new name The name of the file can be specified in the Save As dialog which is similar to the Open Project This command allows the user to save the project under a name other than that is already used ATPDraw can read circuit files cir created by earlier program versions but the Save As command supports only the newest file format The default extension of the project files on disk is acp 4215 Save All Saves all modified projects to disk under their own project file names If one or more open projects still have not got a name Nonameacp it will be requested in a Save As dialog boxes successively 4216 Close Close the active circuit window If any changes to the circuit have not been saved yet the user will be warned as shown in Fig 43 to confirm before the circuit is closed If the project has been modified the user is given a chance to save it first 4217 Close All Close all circuit windows If a project has been modified since the last save operation a confirmation dialog will be prompted giving a chance for the user to save it first Fig 43 Confirmation prevents the loss of unsaved project data 4218 Import circuit file This command inserts a circuit from disk file into the active circuit window contrary to the Open command which loads the circuit into a new circuit window Selecting this menu will result in an Import Project dialog box where the user can select the file to load The imported circuit appears in the circuit window as a group in marked moveable mode Existing node names will be kept or rejected upon the selection of the user 4219 Export circuit file Save the selected objects of the active circuit to a disk file Same as Save As but only the selected objects marked by a rectangular or polygon area of the circuit are written to the disk file 42110 Import power system Opens up the Import Power System Dialog where a text file describing the power system can be imported 42111 Save Metafile Write the selected objects of the active circuit to a disk file in Windows metafile wmf format If no objects are selected the entire circuit window content is written to disk This way even graphics of large circuits can be exported to other applications without loss of resolution seen on Reference Manual 68 ATPDraw version 73 the screen when the Zoom option is used to fit the circuit to the screen size Metafiles created by this command can be imported as picture into other applications like MSWord or WordPerfect having filter available for this format 42112 Print Print the graphics on the currently selected printer 42113 Printer Setup Select and setup the printer 42114 Exit This command closes all open circuit windows of ATPDraw User will be asked to save any modified circuits before the application is terminated 422 Edit This menu contains the various edit facilities of circuit objects in ATPDraw The Edit popup menu is shown in Fig 44 An object or group of objects must be selected before any edit operation can be performed on them If the user clicks on an object with the left mouse button in the circuit window the icon of the object will be enclosed by a lime colored frame indicating that it is selected Fig 44 Edit menu 4221 UndoRedo The Undo command cancels the last edit operation The Redo cancels the last undo command Short key for UndoRedo CtrlZ and CtrlY The number of undoredo operations depends on the Undoredo buffers setting on the Preferences tab of the Tools Options menu Default value is 10 Almost all object manipulation functions object create edit delete move rotate etc can Reference Manual ATPDraw version 73 69 be undone or redone Changes made to the circuit data in the component dialog box are also supported by the Undoredo functions this included also the extensive data in LCC BCTRAN XFMR These functions also update the circuits Modified state in the status bar to indicate that the circuit has been modified During an undo operation the modified state is reset its previous value After SaveSave As the UndoRedo buffer is cleared 4222 Cut Copies the selected objects to the Windows clipboard and deletes them from the circuit window The objects can later be pasted into the same or other circuit windows or even other instances of ATPDraw Short key CtrlX 4223 Copy The selected objects are copied to the clipboard Short key CtrlC A single marked object or a group of objects can be copied to the clipboard This command unselects the selected objects 4224 Paste The contents of the clipboard are pasted into the current circuit when this menu item is selected Short key CtrlV The pasted object or objects appear in the current window in marked moveable mode The node names are deleted when pasting components 4225 Paste Keep names Paste the content of the clipboard into the circuit but keeps all node names This can be useful in special situations when copying elements between different circuits But should never be used when copying components from and to the same circuit otherwise annoying duplicate node names warnings will appear 4226 Duplicate Copies the selected object or a group of objects to the clipboard and then duplicates them in the current circuit window Duplicated objects appear in the current window in marked moveable mode Short key CtrlD 4227 Delete Selected objects are removed the from the circuit window Short key Del 4228 Copy Graphics The selected objects are copied to the clipboard in Windows Metafile format This way graphics of selected objects can be exported to other Windows applications Short key Ctrl W 4229 Select This menu has five submenus None To cancels the object selection Short key Ctrl N All Select all objects in the current circuit window Short key Ctrl A Inside Enables object selection by a polygon shaped region Short key Ctrl I or doubleclick with the left button in an empty region of the circuit window by Properties Enables selection by objects support file name or order number see below Short key Ctrl P Overlapped Select component that overlap other components First ATPrun ATP must be chosed to identify overlapping component Reference Manual 70 ATPDraw version 73 A selected object or group of objects can be subject of the most editing operations Move click left button hold down and drag RotateCopyDuplicateDelete or Export in the File menu To unselect a group select None or just click with the left mouse button in an empty space of the circuit window In Inside mode the mouse cursor icon changes its style to a pointing hand and moves to the middle of the circuit window The current action mode also changes to MODEGROUP in the status bar To draw a polygon around a group of objects move the cursor to the starting location and click the left mouse button Then release the button and a rubber band line will be drawn between the starting point and the current mouse cursor location And so forth left click to create corners right to complete the polygon All objects with midpoint inside or connections with both endpoints inside the polygon will be included in the selection In the by Properties selection mode the group of components can be selected by their type andor Order number The type here is the name of the support file and the Order number is the identifier specified in the component dialog box The available component Names and Order numbers are listed in two combo boxes as shown in Fig 45 When you click on OK the components with the selected order number andor support file name become selected Then all kinds of edit operation can be performed on the group copypaste copy graphics rotate edit grouping etc Fig 45 Selecting objects by name or group no 42210 Arrange This menu has six submenus All are related to the order of the objects A component in front is prioritized when clicking and comes first in the ATP file Bring forward Sends the selected object one step forward Send backward Sends the selected object one step backward Bring to front Sends the selected object to the front Send to back Sends the selected object to the back Send connections back Send all connections back Connections not prioritized when clicking on nodes Sort all Models Sorts the Models so that models used by other comes first Using the Arrange carefully sorting by Order can be avoided The SidebarProject contains a tree view of the circuit structure and allowed sorting as well by dragging objects Reference Manual ATPDraw version 73 71 42211 Edit Text This menu is used to insert a new circuit text In addition the selection of texts component labels or node names is favored in this mode An alternative to this last property is to press the Alt key This is beneficial when texts labels or node names are drawn overlapped by components If you click on existing texts labels or node names you can edit the text directly on screen or move them click and hold Short key CtrlT Fig 46 The circuit text dialog box It appears after a right click or left double on a circuit text Selecting the Edit Text menu item the mouse cursor style will change to a pointing hand and forced to stay within the circuit window The action mode indicator in the status bar will also change to MODE EDIT TEXT You can leave this mode by pressing the ESC key 42212 Rotate RL This command rotates the selected objects 90 degrees clockwise R counterclockwise L The operation Rotate R can also be performed by clicking the right mouse button inside the selected group Short key Ctrl RL 42213 Flip Mirrors the icon left to right For vector icons the texts are not flipped This option is useful for instance for transformers since the primary and secondary node will be swapped Short cut CtrlF 42214 Copy Graphics Copy the selected graphical content to the Windows clipboard in MetaFile format 42215 Rubber Bands If this option is checked connections with one endpoint inside a selected region and one outside are treated as a rubber band between the selected group and the rest of the circuit Short key Ctrl B This command does not work for short cut single component selections eg left click on several components while the Shift key is pressed because this way no connections are selected 42216 Draw Line 3 If this option is selected LINE3 components are drawn instead of Connections LINE3 components are 3phase with sequential data input in either lumped of distributed parameter models Various CB CT and fault options are supported 42217 Compress This command Compress will replace a group of selected objects with a single icon having user selectable external data and nodes ATPDraw supports real grouping or single icon replacement of subgroups in an unlimited numbers of levels The Compress dialog box see Fig 47a appears where the user designs the new group object The user can later modify a compressed group by selecting it and click Compress once more Reference Manual 72 ATPDraw version 73 In the Compress dialog the user can specify the external data and nodes of the Group object Parent and how group content Children will inherit this A nonlinear characteristic can also be selected as external data Only the members of the group are shown in the Compress process and moved to the middle of the circuit window with the Compress dialog as a stayontop window Fig 47a The Compress dialog The user must first select a component in the circuit window It is then drawn in a lime color and its data and nodes appear under Available Here the user can select a parameter and click on the button to transfer it to the Added to group list If the button is disabled it means that the datanode already is in Added to group list and shown there with a lime color Selected node in the Available list will be drawn in a lime color in the circuit window All data and nodes listed in the Added to group will be an external attribute of the new group object The selected external nodes are drawn enclosed by a red circle The positions of the external nodes are selected in the Position combo box Positions 112 will be on the traditional border as shown in the graphic below while position 0 will enable the user to specify positions in the Posx and Posy fields in increments of 10 pixels gridsnap You can change the Added to group names by double clicking on them Data with the same name are treated as a single data in the component dialog box Fig 47b Selected data and nodes can also be removed from the Added to group by clicking on the button The Keep icon check box can be used when Recompressing a group in cases where the user wants to keep its icon When you later open the component dialog box of the groupobject the selected data values and node parameters will appear as input possibilities The values will automatically be transferred to the group members as shown in Fig 47b Node that the 8 selected data are represented by two external data in Fig 47b since the names are duplicated Reference Manual ATPDraw version 73 73 Fig 47b Component dialog box for a subgroup object 42218 Extract This is the reverse operation of Compress The group is extracted on the current circuit layer To perform the operation a compressed group and only one must be selected first 42219 Edit Group This command shows the group content Short key CtrlG The group is shown in a separate window To perform the operation a compressed group and only one must be selected first It is possible to edit the group in a normal way except deletion of the reference components Ie components having been referenced in one of the Added to group lists cannot be deleted If the user tries a Marked objects are referenced by compressed group warning message appears 42220 Edit Circuit Displays the circuit to which the current group belongs Short key Ctrl H Actually the grouping structure can be taken as a multilayer circuit where the Edit Group brings the user one step down in details while Edit Circuit brings one step back The group object single icon replacement of objects acts as the connection between the layers and transfers data between them 423 View This menu provides options for displaying and controlling the visibility of user interface and circuit window objects The menu items are shown in Fig 48 Reference Manual 74 ATPDraw version 73 Fig 48 View menu 4231 Status Bar Status bar onoff at the bottom of the main window The status bar displays status information about the active circuit window The mode field on the left hand side shows which mode of operation is active at present Possible modes are EDIT The normal mode EDIT TEXT Indicates that text editing is preferred Hold down the Alt key to enter this mode of operation or select Edit Text from the Edit menu Click left in an empty space to add a new text Click the left mouse button on an existing text circuit text label node name to edit it direcly on screen Click left hold down and drag to move it to a new position If the text is overlapped by a component icon this mode of operation is required to access the text DRAW Mode when adding Shapes to the circuit LINE RECTANGLE ELLIPSE ARROW To cancel drawing relation click the right mouse button or press the Esc key COMPRESS Mode when objects are selected and EditCompress is clicked In this mode only the selected objects are shown with the Compress dialog on top The field to the right of the mode field displays the modified status of the active circuit As soon as you alter the circuit moving a label deleting a connection inserting a new component etc the text Modified will show up to indicate that the circuit needs saving The field will be empty when you save the circuit or undo all modifications Note that the number of available undo buffers is limited default value is 10 but can be increased on the Preferences tab of the Tools Options menu In the default case if more than 10 modifications are done the field will indicate a modified status until you save the circuit The next rightmost field of the status bar displays the menu option hints and Dragover information To the very right of the status bar comes items for controlling the zoom and the node sizes 4232 Side bar This bar to the left has three pages The default Simulation page contains frequent simulation settings and variables besides some useful tools The Selection page contains a tree structure for selection of all components When selecting a component in the Selection page a new component will be created in the middle of the circuit window The Simulation page contains useful and frequent ATP settings and a list of Variables used The user can rightclick in the Variables grid to Reference Manual ATPDraw version 73 75 sort or copypastedelete variables When Show values is checked an extra column appears together with a panel for parsing the variables Clicking on or the UpDown arrows will execute the script with simulation number KNT this has some relevance for object with Hide linked to Variables The Project page contains some project properties in the Documentation part and a tree structure with all objects in the active circuit in the Objects part Click on Update to refresh the object tree after circuit window edit operations and Filter to show only objects of interest The Conn button will bring all connections in the back similar behavior as in pre v70 Leftclick on an object will center and highlight it the circuit window rightclick will open it and left click and hold will enable to drag and drop it in the list for ordering not legal to move object in or out of groups Objects first in the list will be prioritized in mouse clicks and comes first in the ATPfile Components are marked with a symbol indicating branch switch source transformer machine tacs models The Group component is marked with a box symbol with a list of Children group content Connections Texts Shapes Pictures and Files are other types of circuit objects Fig 49 Side bar pages Reference Manual 76 ATPDraw version 73 4233 Toolbar The standard toolbar is Fig 410 Toolbar From the left the tools are Item Menu Shortcut Description New FileNew Open FileOpen Save FileSave Save As FileSave As Import FileImport Export FileExport Undo EditUndo Redo EditRedo Cut EditCut Copy EditCopy Paste EditPaste EditDuplicate EditEdit text EditSelectAll EditRotateR EditRotateL EditFlip ViewRefresh ViewCentre circuit ViewLock circuit EditRubber band EditDraw LINE3 ATPrun ATP ATPrun Plot ATPSetup ATP Result Dir CTRLO CTRLS CTRLZ CTRLY CTRLX CTRLC CTRLV CTRLD CTRLT CTRLA CTRLR CTRLL CTRLF CTRLQ CtrlB F2 F8 F10 Open an empty circuit file Loads a circuit file into a new window Contains also a dropdown with the five recent opened projects Saves the active circuit window to the current project file Saves the active circuit window to a new project file Inserts a stored circuit into the current circuit Export the selected circuit to an external project file Undo the previous operation Redo the previous undo operation Copy the current selected circuit to the clipboard and then delete it Copy the current selected circuit to the clipboard Paste the ATPDrawcontent from the clipboard into the circuit CopyPaste Go into Edit text mode for adding and selecting text Required to add new text to the circuit window Select the entire circuit Rotate 90 deg clockwise Rotate 90 deg counter clockwise Flip lefttoright The nodes changes position Vector text is not flipped Redraw circuit Centre the circuit in the circuit window Turn on child safety prevent edit operations except for input When selecting components connections and LINE3 stretches automatically When check LINE3 components are drawn instead of Connections Make node names write the ATP file run ATP by executing the ATP command ATP Connection Wizard F10 Plot Executed the Plot Command ATP Connection Wizard F10 and send the current PL4 file as parameter Open the ATP Connection Wizard to select Solver Execution mode and Plotter Select the Result DirectoryFolder all output goes here ATP LIB LIS PL4 Default set in ATP Connection Wizard F10 and also with ATPSubprocessMake ATP file 424 Zoom In Enlarges the objects in the active circuit window by increasing the current zoom factor by 20 percent Short key plus sign on the numeric keypad or alphanumeric key 4241 Zoom Out Reduces the icon size in the active circuit window by 20 percent Short key minus sign on the numeric keypad or the alphanumeric key 4242 Centre circuit Centers the circuit in the circuit window Reference Manual ATPDraw version 73 77 4243 Lock circuit Turns on child safety prevents edit operations except for input 4244 Refresh This command redraws all objects in the active circuit window Short key CtrlQ This command can also be activated by clicking the Toolbar icon 4245 Set Circuit Font Enables you to select a font type and size for the node names and labels on the screen and also for the metafile export The default font is MS Sans Serif regular 8 pt size This also becomes the default font for circuit text but this can be adjusted individually To get the angle symbol used for phasors on screen the Cambria font can be used instead 4246 Options Selecting this menu item will bring up the View Options dialog box The View Options dialog can be used to control the visibility of the objects in the active circuit window The options dialog consists of three pages Circuit controls circuit appearance and size PS colors gives the colors used in the power systems components LINE3 BUS3 and Connections Objects turns onoff classes of circuit objects but this is rarely useful By default all objects are visible Fig 411 View Options dialog box Circuit The meaning of options assumed checked are listed below Node names Node names are visible on the screen overrides the Display attribute of the Node data window This option is useful after a Make Names selection in the ATP menu Drag over info List information about the component name number of data and nodes under the mouse cursor No clicking is required Can slow down the application in case of large circuits Red color default Components and node dots are drawn with a red color until the component or node is opened for the first time Show branch output Small UI symbols indicate the selected branch output requests Branch output requests can be specified in most of the component dialog boxes Lock circuit Components cannot be selected and moved only opened for input PS Colors Specify 6 voltage ranges and associate color Objects Turn onoff classes of objects The meaning of options assumed checked are listed below Reference Manual 78 ATPDraw version 73 Components All standard and user specified components are displayed Connections All connections short circuits between nodes are displayed Texts All Text objects are displayed Pictures All Picture objects are displayed Shapes All Shape objects line rectangle ellipse and arrow are displayed Probes All probes are displayed Labels Component labels are displayed on the screen To accept the current view options and return from the dialog select the OK button To set and view new options without returning select the Apply button If you want the current settings be applied to all current and future circuit windows select the Apply All button before you exit the dialog box this saves the selections to the ATPDrawini file 425 ATP The ATP menu provides options to create display and modify the ATP input files and to set circuit specific ATP options eg T Tmax before running the case by the run ATP command or the F2 function key From this menu all output requests can be managed and the ATP and LIS files edited and inspected The Find node and Find next node navigation tool is also available here The Optimization module works with a cost function and perform multiple ATP runs The Line Check feature calculate sequential parameters of transmission lines and subcircuits Other components of the ATPEMTP package eg pre and postprocessors supporting programs and utilities can also be launched from this menu Besides the default commands the user can add additional commands eg Run PlotXY Run Analyzer Run PCPlot Run TPPlot etc to the existing program items which are listed immediately below the Edit commandsas shown in Fig 412 Fig 412 The ATP menu 4251 Settings In the ATP Settings dialog box several options for the active circuit window can be specified These settings are used when ATPDraw generates the ATP input file Options are sorted in six tabs such as the Simulation and Output for the miscellaneous data card settings Format for specification of datacard sorting options and miscellaneous request SwitchUM for statistical and Universal Machine studies and Variables for specification of global Parameter and Pocket Calculator options Reference Manual ATPDraw version 73 79 Fig 413 Simulation settings Simulation settings Simulation type Select between the simulation methods supported by ATP o Time domain o Frequency Scan o Harmonic Frequency Scan HFS Time domain delta T Time step of simulation in seconds Tmax End time of the simulation in seconds Xopt Inductances in mH if zero otherwise inductances in Ohm with Xopt as frequency Copt Capacitances in mF if zero otherwise capacitances in Ohm with Copt as frequency Epsilon Sensitivity in singularity check Set to 1E12 or less Zero gives default value from STARTUP file Freq System frequency in Hz Power Frequency when checked the SYSTEM FREQUENCY request card is written in the ATPfile The ideal transformer component uses this frequency Frequency scan If Frequency scan is selected the FREQUENCY SCAN option of ATP is enabled min Starting frequency for the frequency scan max Ending frequency for the frequency scan df Frequency increment Leave 0 for logarithmic frequency scale NPD Number of frequency points per decade in logarithmic scan Harmonic Frequency Scan HFS Selecting HFS will run the ATP data case so many times as specified in the Harmonic source component dialog box see chapter 41512 The frequency of the harmonic source will for each ATP run be incremented The power frequency specification is mandatory for HFS simulations If Frequency scan or HFS is selected the user must specify which component of the solution to print out Magnitude only Default request Magnitude Angle Results are printed in POLAR Magnitude Angle RealImag Both POLAR and RECTANGULAR RealImag RECTANGULAR output request Other combinations are illegal and are prevented by button logic Reference Manual 80 ATPDraw version 73 Output settings statistical Print freq Frequency of LUNIT6 output within the timestep loop For example a value of 500 means that every 500th simulation time step will be printed to the LIS file This option controls ATPs 1st misc data parameter IOUT Plot freq Saving frequency of the simulation data to the pl4 output file A value of 5 means for example that every fifth time step will be written to the PL4file This option controls ATPs 1st misc data parameter IPLOT Fig 414 Output request tab Plotted output If checked ATPDraw sets the 1st misc data parameter ICAT1 in the ATP input file which results in a pl4 output file MemSave Controls the dumping of EMTP memory to disk at the end of simulation if START AGAIN request is specified If checked indicates memory saving Autodetect simulation errors If this option is selected ATPDraw will analyze the output LISfile of ATP following the completion of the simulation If the specified Detect string is found the corresponding section of the file is displayed in a text editor window This feature helps the user to recognize the simulation errorswarnings generated by ATP during the time step loop or input data interpretation The string or strings which makes this function work are user selectable and activating at least Error and Kill code are highly recommended Printout Network connectivity If 0 connectivity table description of the topology of the circuit is written to the LUNIT6 output file This option controls ATPs 1st misc data parameter IDOUBLE If zero no such table is written Steadystate phasors If checked complete steady state solution branch flows switch flows and source injection is written to the LUNIT6 output file This option sets ATPs 1st misc data parameter KSSOUT1 If unchecked no such output is produced by ATP Extremal values If checked extrema of each output variables will be printed at the end of the LISfile This option controls ATPs 1st misc data parameter MAXOUT If unchecked no such output is produced by ATP Extra printout control Additional control for the frequency of LUNIT6 output within the timestep loop If checked the 1st misc data parameter IPUN is set to 1 and a 2nd misc data card will appear in the ATP input file Parameters KCHG and MULT control the breakpoints and the new Print freq value If unchecked IPUN is set to 0 and LUNIT6 printout frequency will be constant throughout the simulation Reference Manual ATPDraw version 73 81 Format settings The Format settings page contains four buttons for setting of ATP input file data format a button for controlling the auto path generation and several other buttons for miscellaneous request cards The Additional button supports the user to insert any request card or text strings in the ATPfile on precise location Fig 415 ATPfile format settings Sorting Sorting by cards The sequence of ATP input data follows the default sequence of data sorting cards ie BRANCH cards are written first followed by SWITCH cards and the SOURCE cards Sorting by order The Order number that can be specified in the component dialog box for each object determines the sequence of cards The lowest Order number comes first Sorting by Xpos The leftmost object in the circuit window is written first Any combination of the three different sorting mechanisms can be specified Force high resolution Use Vintage 1 if possible for high precision data input Miscellaneous request Insert Prefix and Suffix cards If this option is checked ATPDraw will assume that all Include files User Specified LCC and external nonlinear characteristics are located in the Result Directory and have the extension lib Two cards Prefix and Suffix will the be inserted into the ATP file and the Include commands are specified without path and extension This should be a preferred choice as this path and extension generally are used and that increased readability of the ATP file is obtained this way Insert PL4 Comments If checked ATPDraw writes the circuit comments in a BEGIN PL4 COMMENTSEND PL4 COMMENTS block This may result in an error for some older ATP versions Insert Exact Phasor Equivalent card If checked ATPDraw writes an EXACT PHASOR EQUIVALENT request in the ATPfile This is recommended for Frequency Scan simulations including constant and distributed parameter overhead lines Insert TACS HYBRID card Checking this button forces TACS HYBRID BLANK TACS to be written to the ATPfile Useful when TACS objects are only present inside a User Specified Object Printed Number width Enables the PRINTED NUMBER WIDTH request card which controls the printout of the LUNIT6 device output LISfile Width is the total column width of printed output including blanks separating the columns Space is the number of blanks between columns of printed output Reference Manual 82 ATPDraw version 73 SwitchUM settings Switch study Statistic study Study with statistic switches Systematic study Study with systematic switches Num Number of simulations This value influences ATPs 1st misc data parameter NENERG ATPDraw sets the correct sign of NENERG ie 0 for statistic or 0 for systematic switch studies Fig 416 SwitchUM settings Switch controls ISW If 1 printout of all switch closingopening time appear in the output LISfile No such printout if the parameter is set to 0 ITESTExtra random delay using DEGMIN DEGMAX and STATFR in STARTUP Possible values are 0 Extra random delay for all switches 1 No random delay 2 Extra random time delay added to all closing switches 3 Extra random time delay added to all opening switches IDIST Select probability distribution function of subsequent switching operations Zero means Gaussian distribution and 1 means uniform distribution IMAX If 1 printout of extrema is written to the ATP output LISfile for every energization If 0 zero no such printout IDICE Controls use of the random generator A value of 0 implies computer dependent random generator and a value of 1 means standard random generator KSTOUT If 0 extra printed LUNIT6 output for each energization Output of the timestep loop and variable extrema if Extremal values is selected on the Output tab will be printed If 1 no such output NSEED Repeatable MonteCarlo simulations Possible values are 0 Every simulation on the same data case will be different 1 Same result each time the data case is run on the same computer Universal machines Here the user specifies the global data for the Universal electrical machine models in ATP The selections here apply to all universal machines in the circuit Initialization Manual Terminal quantities of all machines must be specified Automatic Initial conditions will be calculated by ATP See section 9D15 for more details in the ATP Rule Book Units Input variables are specified in SI units or Per unit puquantities Reference Manual ATPDraw version 73 83 Interface Compensation The machine does appear to be a nonlinear element to the external network Certain rules regarding connecting machines together must be followed Inclusion of stub lines is often required Preferred method Prediction The machine does not appear to be a nonlinear element to the external network This option is not available for single phase machines Load flow Fig 417 Global load flow settings Sets the global variables of load flow according to RuleBook chapt X CAO LOAD FLOW Does not work as intended NNNOUT Additional interactive output during load flow iteration NPRINT Tabular printout for nodes with power constraints NITERA Maximum number of iterations Default 500 NFLOUT Buffer size convergence monitoring printout per line Default 20 RALCHK Relative convergence tolerance Default 1100 CFITEV Acceleration factor ref dQdU Default 210 CFITEA Acceleration factor ref dPdTh Default 25 VSCALE Voltage scaling factor Use 14142 to get rms values output ZeroUnity KTAPER 0 Constant acceleration factors 2 used also in DC25DC26 examples Variables The Variables page supported originally only the PARAMETER feature of ATPEMTP but since v6 an Internal Parser option is added Using variables can also be called parametrization or scripting and instead of a data value the user can specify a variable name and assign a value to it externally The advantage is when data values are used in many different components and when there is a need for frequent updates of some key parameters In addition Variables allow systematic variations of values with Multiple Runs as the default variable KNT is available as the simulation number A key component compatible with Multiple Runs is the model WriteMaxMin which is designed to extract extremal values of a simulation as function of variables or the simulation number With the classical PARAMETER option parametrization is managed inside ATP This means that variables used in internal ATPDraw calculations cannot be assigned to variables The data attribute Params is set to unity when parametrization is allowed With the Internal Parser option the variables get their values assigned before ATP execution in parallel threads and folders The restrictions on parametrization of data is thus removed Even data in LCC objects can be parametrized The user is allowed to specify a text string 6 characters with Internal Parser 5 otherwise instead of a numerical value in the component dialog boxes as shown in Fig 418 If the Internal Parser is used or DataParams is set to unity under Edit definitions the variable is Reference Manual 84 ATPDraw version 73 recognized and the user is asked if it should be added to the list of variables otherwise the user is asked if the Internal Parser should be turned on There is also a sanity check on variable names as they must consist of AZ 09 and characters and cannot start with a number Fig 418 Using text string instead of variables in the RLC and LINEPI3S component dialog box An expression or a numerical value can be assigned to these text strings under Variables or in the Sidebar The variables specified by the user appear in the NAME column and the user has to assign data values in the EXPRESSION column as shown by Fig 418 The user can also add intermediate variables and use these in subsequent expressions If the Internal Parser is used restrictions on the expressions are relaxed Without variable names must be less or equal 5 characters and a period must be added to all numerical values in the expression eg U01000sqrt23 The following functions are defined in the Internal Parser One parameter functions also available without the Internal Parser ABS SQR SQRT LOG LOG10 SIGN DEG RAD INVRSx1x RECIPx1x FLOOR CEIL TRUNC RND RANDOM Reference Manual ATPDraw version 73 85 SIN COS TAN COTAN ASIN ACOS ATAN SINH COSH TANH ASINH ACOSH ATANH Two parameter functions partly supported with the Internal Parser POWbase exp INTPOWbaseexp MIN MAX MOD LOGNbase value ATAN2yx atanyx in 4 quadrants HYPOTxysqrtxxyy Statistical two parameter functions return random sample from the distribution UNIFORMab fx1ba for x in ab returns a floating point value between a and b UNIFORMIab fx1ba for x in ab returns an integer value between a and b NORMALmusigma fx1sigmasqrt2pexp05xmusigma2 LOGNORMALMsigma fx1xsigmasqrt2pexp05lnxMsigma2 Mexpmu WEIBULLscale shape fxshapescalexscaleshape1expxscaleshape Statistical bounded from a to b two parameter functions NORMALBab musigma fx1sigmasqrt2pexp05xmusigma2 LOGNORMALBa b Msigma fx1xsigmasqrt2pexp05lnxMsigma2 Mexpmu WEIBULLBab scale shape fxshapescalexscaleshape1expxscaleshape Double lognormal distribution LOGNORMAL2abIbM1sigma1M2sigma2 where a b is the range Ib is the boundary between regions shielding failure and backflash M1 sigma1 are for the low region M2 and sigma2 are for the high region Related to next CIGRE functions M1610 sigma1133 M2333 sigma20605 Single parameter set found by setting Ibb and M1M2311 and sigma1sigma20484 Special distribution functions for lightning amplitudes LACIGREa b cfd051erflnx61sqrt2133 for x20 and 051erflnx333sqrt20605 and x in ab a and b in kA answer returned in A LACIGRE1ab cfd051erflnx311sqrt20484 and x in ab a and b in kA answer returned in A LAIEEEab cfd1131x26 and x in ab a and b in kA answer returned in A Three parameter function IFbool true false yIFx3 2 4 returns y2 if x3 otherwise y4 Resident variables also available without the Internal Parser PI KNT simulation number 1 2 Users do not have to think about the number of characters in the final ATPfile since ATPDraw automatically obtain the maximum resolution in PARAMETER by adding underscore characters A variable RES used both for high and low precision resistances will thus be declared twice with 3 and 13 underscore characters added This process is hidden but the result is seen in the final ATPfile after the Parameter declaration Also Models can utilize Variables and the default number of digits is set to 10 in this case There is a limit in ATP on the number of internal variables in PARAMETER Reference Manual 86 ATPDraw version 73 PARAMETER option The variables RES and CAP are circuit variables while R0 is a pure intermediate variable The ATP file becomes PCVP 100 PARAMETER R0I 025 RESI R0IKNT CAPI 12E3 RESRESI CAPCAPI BLANK PARAMETER KNT is the simulation number 110 in this case IMPORTANT Always use a period after a number in the value field Internal Parser option No period required in integer numbers More statistical functions available Six character variable names ATP executed several times but in parallel in case of multiple core computers Fig 419 Assigning expressions and values to variables Under Limit output the value of IOPCVP is set 0 No LISfile suppression 1 Writes only extrema and parameters 2 Writes only extrema 3 Writes just the KNT information IOPCVP must be zero for the Optimization or the WriteMaxMin module to work ATPDraw supports some special syntax for loop control variables as function of the simulation number KNT Without the Internal Parser there are severe restrictions in the number of managed elements The special syntax is Reference Manual ATPDraw version 73 87 MyVara b c n First run KNT1 MyVara Second run KNT2 MyVarb Last item and beyond KNT n MyVarn The characters are used to identify this format Space or comma can be used to separate the numbers integer or floating point For PARAMETER the ATP syntax SELECT was supposed to manage this but as this manual is written there are problems with how ATPDraw implements intermediate variables and it is recommended to not check SELECT MyVarFILE FileName Col FILE is the keyword FileName is the name of a text file assumed stored in the ResultDirectory unless a full path is given same as final ATP file enclose the file name within if it contains space and Col is an optional parameter identifying which column in the text file to use The text file can have integer or floatingpoint values in free format space or comma separated If Col is not specified the first column of the file is loaded The length of the file does not need the match the chosen Number of Simulations First run KNT1 MyVarFirst value of column Col Second run KNT2 MyVarSecond value of column Col etc Both the and FILE syntax requires a lot of intermediate variables and ATP puts a limit on this MyVarFILEA FileName Col Same behavior as the FILE syntax but instead of a file on disk an attached file is used MyVarLIN Lo Hi LIN is the keyword Creates a linear space MyVaraKNT1b MyVarLOG Lo Hi LOG is the keyword Create a logarithmic space MyVar10aKNT1b MyVarPOW Lo Hi P POW is the keyword MyVar aKNT1Pb MyVarEXP Lo Hi P EXP is the keyword MyVar aPKNT1b If P e this is replaced by exp1 a and b are calculated based on Lo and Hi First run KNT1 MyVarLo Last run KNTNumber of Simulations MyVarHi The last four options could easily be managed directly be the user The user should normally not change the name of the variables listed by ATPDraw in the NAME column but if you do you will be asked to take an Action regarding the old Variable still defined in the circuit as shown in Fig 420 The action can be to reset the parameter to zero or the default or a specific value reintroduce the old variable and give an expression or select a new variable name Reference Manual 88 ATPDraw version 73 Fig 420 Actions to take when nondefined parameters are found 4252 Run ATP Executing the run ATP command at the top of the ATP menu will create the ATP input file the project file name with extension atp and the ATP system folder are default but changeable via SubprocessMake ATP file Then ATP is executed based on the default ATP command specified in the ATP field of the Preferences page under Tools Options The current ATPfile is sent as parameter to the ATPEMTP Note that users do not need to select Make Names and Make ATP File before running the simulation These commands are internally executed before the ATP run If the user needs to do manual changes of the ATPfile and run the modified case use ATPSubprocessrun ATP file After executing ATP ATPDraw examines the LISfile and displays any error or warning messages if exist 4253 Run Plot Execute the Plot program defined under ToolsOptionsPreferences with the current ATP file name and the extension pl4 4254 Subprocess This submenu contains the individual three parts of the run ATP command Run ATP file Executes ATP and sends the current ATP file as parameters This choice must be used if the user has manually modified the ATP file under ATPEdit ATP file Make ATP file Creates the ATP file from the circuit without executing ATP but calls Make node names first This choice must be used to change the current ATP file name and the Result Directory Make node names Gives node names to all nodes in the circuit Overlapping andor connected nodes get the same name Whenever a same name on different nodes or duplicate names on same node are found ATPDraw produces a warning and the user is asked to confirm this operation While ATPDraw establishes the node names a Generating node names message is displayed in the middle of the current circuit window Following Make Names the node name and phase sequence attributes in the Component dialog and in the Node data window will be updated Make ATP file and run ATP perform this subprocess initially IMPORTANT All nodes will automatically receive names from ATPDraw so the user should normally only give names to nodes of special interest eg involved in output requests and displayed in the Output Manager Reference Manual ATPDraw version 73 89 4255 Output manager The Output Manager list all requested outputs in the data case in the order that they appear in the pl4 file The sorting option of the components is considered The Output Manager even goes into User Specified Additional data cards and Windsyn components to find outputs requested there There is a limit of 32 output requests per component voltagecurrent counts as one The sequence of the output is Branch voltages and power Switch voltages and power Node voltages Switch currents and energy Branch currents and energy SM TACS MODELS UM When launching the Output Manager it compiles the circuit to generate the node names and presents a list of the outputs as shown in Fig 421 The Windows Manager is a stayontop window that lets the user go back to edit the circuit Two additional features are available Find and Edit Both are linked to the current selected row in the grid The Find button finds the involved component and displays it in the middle of the screen in a lime color If necessary it goes down into groups to display internal components The Edit button brings up the involved components input dialog where the user can edit the settings However the user must leave the Output Manager and reopen it to refresh its content When ATPDraw goes into User Specified components it lists the node names found in the expected columns This could however be an argument in the Include call and this in not handled by ATPDraw Fig 421 Output Manager from Exa9acp Fig 422 Output Manager from an extension of Exa12acp as shown in Fig 423 Reference Manual 90 ATPDraw version 73 In the case of a statistical study chosen under ATPSettingsSwitch the Output Manager lists three additional columns as shown in Fig 422 In the fourth columns in Fig 422 the user can turn available output requests on and off for statistical tabulation Only node voltages are on as default In the sixth column the user can assign a group number to the statistical output request and in the fifth column assign a scaling factor to this group There is also a Preview button available in this mode that lets the user examine how the final statistical tabulation will look like This text will appear under STATISTICS in the final ATP file STATISTICS 234300MIDA MIDB MIDC BEGA BEGB BEGC ENDA ENDB ENDC 4 1E6ENDA ENDB ENDC BEGA BEGB CONT 4 1E6BEGC There is one challenge related to SATURABLE TRANSFORMERS and the request of magnetizing branch outputs This would require a very complicated identification of the transformer that is not handled in ATPDraw The magnetization output is presented in the Output Manager using an alias node name but it is not possible to add this to a statistical tabulation U U U MOV PE U STAT MOV PE LCC MID LCC LCC LCC STAT STAT V V V Fig 423 Exa12acp requesting additional output both side node voltages and arrester powers and energies 4256 Edit ATPfile This selection calls a text editor which enables the user to view or edit the ATPfile When the Edit File option is selected or the F4 function key is pressed a file having the same name as the active circuit file with extension atp is searched for and will be opened in the built in Text Editor as shown in Fig 424 The editor will be show as a nonmodal window and the user has to close it manually Reference Manual ATPDraw version 73 91 Fig 424 The main window of the builtin text editor The status bar at the bottom of the window displays the current line and column position of the text cursor and the buffer modified status Basic text editing facilities OpenSave Print CopyPaste Find Replace are supported The default text font can be changed by selecting the Font option in the Character menu A detailed description of all the available options can be found in the menu options help topic The text buffer of this editor is limited to maximum 2 GB in size The user can specify his own favorite text editor wordpadexe writeexe notepadexe on the Preferences page of the Tools Options dialog box The rightclick context menu offers 50 different request card templates via the Insert field Text Editor option in the Tools menu provides an alternative way of invoking this editor In that case the text buffer will initially be empty 4257 View LISfile This selection calls the builtin text editor which enables the user to contemplate the LUNIT6 output of ATP often called as LISfile This file has extension lis and can be found in the Result Directory default the ATP system folder following a successful simulation In certain cases when the simulation is halted by an operating system interrupt or a fatal error in the ATP input file illegal file name IOxx bad character in input field etc the LISfile does not exist and cannot be displayed either 4258 Find node and Find next node The Find node helps the user to find a node with a specific name in the circuit You type in the node name in the simple dialog For multiphase node you only type in the root name without phase extensions AZ Find next node is used to proceed to the next node with the same name Find node goes into groups as well and multiple EditEdit circuit CtrlH may be necessary to navigate back into the main circuit 4259 Find variable and Find next variable The Find variable helps the user to find a variable with a specific name in the circuit You type in the variable name in the simple dialog and the first instance of a component containing the variable is marked in lime color and the circuit is centered around it Find next variable is used to Reference Manual 92 ATPDraw version 73 proceed to the next node with the same name Find variable goes into groups as well and multiple EditEdit circuit CtrlH may be necessary to navigate back into the main circuit 42510 Optimization To use the optimization module there must be variables declared in the circuit and a cost function object must have been added to the circuit MODELSWriteMaxMin The optimization module will change chosen circuit variables to optimize the cost function based on either a Gradient Method a Genetic Algorithm or a Simplex Annealing method This is further documented in the Advanced Manual chapter 511 Fig 425 Finding the neutral grounding coil value giving resonance Exa18acp 42511 Line Check First the user selects the line he wants to test and then clicks on ATPLineCheck as shown in Fig 426 Then the inputoutput selection dialog box shown in Fig 427 appears The LineCheck feature in ATPDraw supports up to 3 circuits ATPDraw suggests the default quantities The leftmost nodes in the circuit are suggested as the input nodes while the rightmost nodes become the output The circuit number follows the node order of the objects For all standard ATPDraw components the upper nodes have the lowest circuit number The user also must specify the power frequency of the linecable test Finally the user can check the Exact phasor equivalent button which will result in a slightly better results for long line sections When the user clicks on OK in Fig 427 an ATPfile LCCLineCheckdat is created and ATP executed For a 3phase configuration 4 sequential data cases are created Z Y Z0 Y0 while for a 9phase configuration 24 cases are created Z11 Y11 Z110 Y110 Z12 Z22 Z13 Z23 Z33 since symmetry is assumed Finally the entire LISfile is scanned The calculated values are then presented in the result window shown in Fig 426 The user can switch between polar and complex coordinates and create a textfile of the result The mutual data are presented on a separate page The unit of the admittances is given in Farads or Siemens micro or nano and the user can scale all values by a factor or by the length Reference Manual ATPDraw version 73 93 The series impedances are obtained by applying 1 A currents on the terminals while the output ends are grounded the other circuits are left open and unenergized For mutual coupling 1 A is applied at both circuits On the other hand the shunt admittances are obtained by applying a voltage source of 1 V at one terminal leaving the output end open For mutual coupling 1V is applied at one circuit while a voltage of 1E20 is applied at the other Special attention must be paid to long lines and cables This applies in particular to PI equivalents Usage of Exact phasor equivalent is recommended but is no guarantee of success No attempt is made in ATPDraw to obtain a better approximation since the linecable system to be tested in general is unknown The mutual coupling in the positive sequence system is in symmetrical cases very small and vulnerable to the approximations made Appendix 72 documents the calculation procedure It might happen that the result for multicircuit test gives strange result as a consequence of ATP failing to execute the required number of stacked cases In this case it might help to reduce the LIMCRD parameter in ATPs STARTUP file A value below 100000 should be used Fig 426 Selecting a line Fig 427 Selecting the inputs and outputs Reference Manual 94 ATPDraw version 73 Fig 428 Presentation of the results 42512 Edit Commands This feature enables to specify executable files exe or bat to run from the ATP menu New commands will appear as menu items below the Edit Commands After clicking on the New button of the dialog box as shown in Click Update to confirm and store the command Fig 429 the user is requested to specify Name of the command displayed under the ATP menu Command is the full path of the executable fileexe or bat Parameter is the file to send as parameter when calling the executable file Click Browse to select None No file sent as parameter File A file open dialog box is displayed where the user can select a file Current ATP send the current ATPfile Current PL4 send the current PL4file Current Circuit Click Update to confirm and store the command Fig 429 Specifying your own executable commands When you completed editing the batch job settings click on the Update button and the new commands will be inserted into the ATP menu This feature can be used for many different purposes in ATP simulation eg running different ATP versions Salford Watcom GNU Reference Manual ATPDraw version 73 95 MingW32 within ATPDraw running external postprocessors like TPPLOT PCPlot or PlotXY or launching any other data assembler As any other program options the previous settings can be saved to the ATPDrawini file by using the Tools Save Options command or by selecting the Save options on exit program options on the General page of the Tools Options menu 426 Library This menu contains options for creating and customizing component support files Support files contain definitions of data and node values icon and help text Circuit components in ATPDraw can be either 1 Standard 2 User specified or 3 Model Each component has a unique support file template which includes all information about the input data and nodes of the object the default values of the input variables the graphical representation of the object and the associated help file Standard components have their support files stored in ATPDrawscl standard component library When a component is added to the circuit this component inherit the properties from its support file and the support file is not used anymore Except for the help text of standard components In order to define and use User Specified components a support file sup is required Models can optionally be managed without a support file since a default template can be automatically created based on the Models text header All components support files can be edited in the Library menu The user can create new MODELS and User Specified components as described in the Advanced Manual 4261 ATPDrawscl Under this menu the user can edit standard component templates stored in ATPDrawscl This can be to fix bugs in the templates It is not a good idea to put effort into changing a lot here as the ATPDrawscl file will be overwritten if you update the installation The Developer has more options under this menu Selecting the Edit Standard field will first perform a select file dialog box of Fig 430 where the support file to be edited can be selected then a dialog box shown in Fig 431 appears The Num data and Num node specifiers cannot be changed Reference Manual 96 ATPDraw version 73 Fig 430 Specify the support file of the standard component to be edited Fig 431 Template editor 4262 Templates on discNew User specified supfile The user can create and edit templates for User Specified components and Models sup on disc as well as Models script files mod on disc This indirect way of working with Models is not recommended User specified objects are either customized standard objects or objects created for the use of INCLUDE and Data Base Modularization feature of ATPEMTP The LibraryTemplates on discNew User Specified menu enables the user to create a new support file for a user specified object or customize data and node values the icon and the help text of an existing one Support files of USP objects are normally located in the USP folder The Edit Definitions dialog box opens with empty Data and Nodes tabs in this menu Number of nodes and data must be in line with the ARG and NUM declarations in the header section of the Data Base Module DBM file The number of data can be in the range of 0 to 2 giga and the number of nodes in the range of 0 to 2 giga Control parameters for the object data can be entered on the Nodes and Data pages Speed button to the Help Editor Speed button to the Icon Editor Speed button to the Picture background Reference Manual ATPDraw version 73 97 of Fig 432 On the Data page of the Edit Object dialog box control variables of the support file one row for each object data can be specified Name The name of the parameter Used to identify the parameter in the Component dialog box This name often reflects the name used in the ATP Rule Book Default Initial value of the parameter Units Maximum 12 character text string with the unit that appear in the Component dialog box The units COPT and XOPT are defined keywords responding to the users choice of COPTXOPT under the ATPSettingsSimulation MinMax MinimumMaximum value allowed Set equal to cancel range checking Param If set equal to 1 a variable text string can be assigned to the data value These values are assigned under ATPSettingsVariables Digits Maximum number of digits allowed in the ATPfile When high precision is checked Vintage 1 is enabled and Digits is split in two values for high and low precision An error message will appear in the Component dialog if a parameter value is out of range To cancel range checking set MinMax eg set both equal to zero Fig 432 Control page of a new user specified object On the Node page of the Edit definitions dialog box the node attributes of the support file one row for each component node can be specified Name The name of the node Used to identify the node in the Open Node and Component dialog boxes Circuit 3phase circuit number of the object The number is used to handle transposition of 3phase nodes correctly for objects having more than 3 phases Kind1 for all nodes of single phase objects 3phase nodes with the same Kind get the same phase sequence 1 1st to 3rd phase 2 4th to 6th phase 3 7th to 9th phase Reference Manual 98 ATPDraw version 73 4 10th to 12th phase The Circuit parameter has a different meaning for MODELS or TACS component nodes It is used to specify the type of inputoutput MODELS node values 0 Output node 1 Current input node 2 Voltage input node 3 Switch status input node 4 Machine variable input node 5 TACS variable tacs 6 Imaginary part of steadystate node voltage imssv 7 Imaginary part of steadystate switch current imssi 8 Output from another model Note that the model which produces this output must be USEd before the current model This can be done by specifying a lower Order number for the model and then select the Sorting by Order number option under ATPSettingsMisc 9 Global ATP variable input 10 Variable from connected PL4file TACS node values 0 Output node 1 Positive sum input node 2 Negative sum input node 3 Disconnected input node Phases Number of phases 126 for the component node If Phases is set to 1 the length of the node name is limited to 5 The last character of nodes in the proper phase sequence according to Kind will be appended by ATPDraw Pos Specifies the relative node position in steps of 10 pixels grid The standard border positions shown in the picture to the left of Fig 438 have short cut keys AltF1AltF12 The position x y can in general be in the range 12011010010110120 The xaxis is oriented to the right while the yaxis is oriented downwards The node positions should correspond with icon drawing Each circuit object has an icon which represents the object on the screen This icon can be of bitmap type or vector graphic type as selected under Icon type The conversion from Bitmap to Vector style is not possible so you should not unintentionally change the icon style Vector graphic enables better zooming and graphic export font handling and editing but for simplicity reasons the Bitmap option is shown here The leftmost of the three speed buttons on the right hand side of the Fig 431 invokes the builtin pixel editor where icons can be edited Each icon has equal width and height of 41x41 pixels on the screen Reference Manual ATPDraw version 73 99 Clicking with the left mouse button will draw the current color selected from a 16 colors palette at the bottom Clicking the right button will draw with the background color Dark red colored lines indicate the possible node positions on the icon border Menu field items of the Icon Editor are described in the section 4271 of this manual The user can draw individual pixels and in additions line rectangles circles and fills Text must be manually put together by pixels The Vector graphic editor has far better text capabilities Fig 433 Icon Editor Each component has a predefined help file which can be edited by a built in Help Editor accessible via the speed button on the middle speed button in the Edit definitions dialog in Fig 431 Using the help editor users can write optional help file for the objects or add their notes to the existing help text Available functions and menu field items of the Help Editor are described in the 4273 section of this manual With the rightmost speed button in Fig 438 the user can add a background bitmapmetafile image of any size to the icon This should only be used in special cases since it could heavily occupy memory and increase the project file dramatically No downsampling of the imported image is performed When the user has completed all modifications of the component data and of the icon and help the new support file can be saved to disk using Save existing support file will be overwritten or Save As new file will be created in the USP folder buttons 4263 Templates on discNew Model supfile Usage of MODELS 4 in ATPDraw is described in the Advanced Manual When the user changes the Model header input output or data section in a circuit in ATPDraw the component and its icon is automatically updated So for the usual case of a dynamic Model there is no point in predefining support and model files These files can anyhow be exported from a finished Model If you want a static Model however you can specify a support file under this menu item To use this feature you first must write a model file using the built in Model Editor as shown in section 4264 This file must have a legal MODELS structure eg starting with MODEL name and ending with ENDMODEL have an extension mod and stored in the MOD system folder ATPDraw is capable of reading such a mod file examining its inputoutput and data variables and suggesting a support file on the correct format see in section 4159 and 551 If the user wants a different icon or other node positions on the icon border he is free to modify the default supfile or create a new one by selecting the Objects Model New supfile menu This menu item will perform the Edit Definitions dialog as shown in Fig 434 Reference Manual 100 ATPDraw version 73 Fig 434 Control page for a New Model supfile Name Identifies the node in the Node and Component dialog boxes 12 characters maximum Must be equal to the name used in the Model header Kind Specifies the inputoutput type of the node PhasesNumber of phases can be from 1 to 26 and must be defined as V11n Pos Specifies the relative node position in steps of 10 pixels grid The standard border positions shown in the picture to the left of Fig 438 have short cut keys AltF1AltF12 The position x y can in general be in the range 12011010010110120 The xaxis is oriented to the right while the yaxis is oriented downwards on the icon border The node positions should correspond with icon drawing Supported Kind values for MODELS objects are shown next 0 Output node 1 Current input node 2 Voltage input node 3 Switch status input node 4 Machine variable input node 5 TACS variable tacs 6 Imaginary part of steadystate node voltage imssv 7 Imaginary part of steadystate switch current imssi 8 Output from other model Note that the model which produces this output must be USEd before the current model This can be done by specifying a lower Order number for the model and then select the Sorting by Order number option under ATPSettingsFormat 9 ATP global variable MNT is for instance the simulation number and the Pocket Calculator KNT equivalent 10 PL4 Variable The number of Nodes is the sum of inputs and outputs to the Model The number of Data must be equal to the number of DATA declarations of the actual Model The Kind parameter can be changed later in the Model node input window right click on the node dot All model nodes are assumed a singlephase one The maximum number of nodes is 32 and the maximum number of data that can be passed into a Model is 64 Reference Manual ATPDraw version 73 101 The Save or Save As buttons can be used to save the new support file to disk Default location of Model support files is the MOD folder 4264 Templates on discNew Model modfile In addition to a support file and icon definition each Model component needs a text file which contains the actual Model description This file may be created outside ATPDraw or using the built in Model Editor Selecting the Library New object Model modfile menu the wellknown internal text editor of ATPDraw popsup ATPDraw supports only a simplified usage of MODELS It is the task of the user to write the modelfile and ATPDraw takes care of the INPUTOUTPUT section of MODELS along with the USE of each model The following restrictions apply Only INPUT OUTPUT and DATA supported in the USE statement Not possible to specify expressions HISTORY of DELAY CELLS under USE Not possible to call other models under USE 4265 Templates on discEdit User Specified supfile An existing user specified object can be edited in the same way as any standard components as described in chapt 4261 4266 Templates on discEdit Model supfile A model object can be edited like any other circuit object If the user clicks on the Library Edit object Model supfile the Edit Definitions dialog box appears with the model object controls Here the user is allowed to customize data and node values icon and help text of the object 4267 Templates on discEdit Model modfile Selecting the Objects Model Edit modfile menu the wellknown internal text editor of ATPDraw popsup Each model object has a mod file which contains the description of the model This file can be edited inside ATPDraw using the built in Model Editor 4268 Synchronize Reload Icons Reads and displays standard component icons from their respective support files This function is useful when the user has redesigned one or more support file icons and wants the changes to be reflected in the circuit window User Specified and Models components icons are not updated 4269 Synchronize Reload Standard Data Updates data properties name units digits range param for all standard components from ATPDrawscl The properties are stored in project files but sometimes there are updates in the ATPDrawscl file that should be manually synchronized that was the case with the LINEZT1 components that got updated ZA ZB units with special interpretation Reference Manual 102 ATPDraw version 73 427 Tools Items under the Tools menu enable you to edit component icons or help text view or edit text files add special circuit objects customize several program options and save them to the ATPDrawini file Fig 435 Tools menu Fig 436 Icon Editor menus 4271 Bitmap Editor Brings up an icon editor shown in Fig 436 where the user can edit the icon of the component It can be invoked either from the Template editor or by selecting the Icon Editor option in the Tools menu Depending on how the editor was invoked the file menu provides different options When called from the Library menu Edit Standard User Specified or Edit Model supfile the user can import icons from other support files or cancel the edit operation and close the editor window In this case the Done option in the main menu is seen to accept and store the modified icon in the sup file When the icon editor is called from the Tools menu additional options like the Open and Save appears in the File menu At the bottom of the editor window there is a color palette with two boxes indicating the current foreground and background color selections and the realsize image of the icon at right In the color palette the color marked with a capital letter T is the transparent color To select a color from the palette click either the left or the right mouse button in one of the color boxes The selected color will be assigned to the mouse button you clicked until you use the same mouse button to select another color The leftmost box displays the color currently assigned to the left mouse button The one to the right displays the color assigned to the right mouse button The foreground color is normally used to draw with and the background color to erase any mistakes made during the drawing It is therefore convenient to assign the transparent color indicated by T to the right mouse button and desired drawing color to the left button Mistakes can then easily be corrected by alternating leftright mouse button clicks The vertical and horizontal lines of dark red color indicate the icon node positions These are in the same position as indicated on the Nodes pages of the Template editor Reference Manual ATPDraw version 73 103 The icon editor has a File menu an Edit menu and a Tools menu In addition a Done option appears to the right of the Tools menu if the editor has been called from the Component dialog box Selecting Done changes made to the icon will be accepted Available menu options are described below File options Open Loads the icon of a support file into the icon buffer Save Stores the contents of the icon buffer to disk Import Reads the icon of a support file and inserts it into the icon buffer Merge Request an external support file and adds its icon to the current icon ExitCancel Closes the icon editor window If the option Exit is selected and the icon buffer have been modified you are given a chance to save the icon before closing If the Done option is visible in the main menu the name of this menu item is Cancel and the icon editor window is closed without any warning with respect to loss of modified data Edit options Undo Cancels the last edit operation Redo Cancels the undo command Cut Copies a bitmap version of the icon to the Clipboard and clears the icon buffer This bitmap can be pasted into other applications eg pbrushexe Copy Places a bitmap version of the icon in the Clipboard Paste Inserts the bitmap in the Clipboard into the icon buffer If colors are different from those used in the original bitmap it is because the icon editor calculates which color in its own color palette provides the nearest match to any bitmap color Delete Clears the icon buffer Tools options Pen Selects the pen drawing tool enabling you to draw single icon pixels or lines or shapes by pressing and holding down the left or right mouse button while you move the mouse Fill Selects the flood fill tool Fills any shape with the current color Line Selects the line drawing tool enabling you to draw a rubber band line by pressing and holding down the left or the right mouse button while you move the mouse Circle Selects the circle drawing tool enabling you to draw a dynamically sized circle by pressing and holding down the left or the right mouse button while you move the mouse Rectangle Selects the box drawing tool enabling you to draw a rubber band box by pressing and holding down the left or the right mouse button while you move the mouse 4272 Vector graphic editor In ATPDraw all icons of standard components are in vector graphic style This enables better zooming and dynamic icon capabilities A component can have either a bitmap or a vector icon but not both The building block of the vector graphic format is the Element An Element has a Visible flag and can belong to a Layer it is thus possible to easily turn onoff element as a response to user settings Further an element can either be a Shape or a Text A shape can be of various standard Windows types lines rectangle ellipses polylines polygons arcs pies and Bezier curves while a Text is simpler A Shape can consist of maximum 255 points which is very beneficial for polylines polygons and Bezier curves The vector graphic editor has been developed from scratch utilizing an internal graphic format for fast drawings The editor is shown in Fig 437 Reference Manual 104 ATPDraw version 73 Fig 437 Vector graphic editor 400 zoom An element can be selected by clicking in the icon window or by specifying the Edit element spin edit field to the top right The selected element is shown with its properties below In the Properties grid the pen and brush colors and styles can be selected with colors from the palette to the right In addition rotation angle of rectangles and ellipses and rounding of rectangles can be set In the Points grid the coordinates for the points are shown and can be edited Fig 437 also shows the items Nodes and the Frame These are turned onoff via the checkboxes in the very top right corner The Frame is the selection area of the icon mouse clicks inside this area in the circuit will select or open the component A too large Frame will result in overlapping conflicts with other icons The Frame is not changeable with the mouse the user has to specify the coordinates in the Frame string grid The External point drawn as red is used for branch output of some of the components The Nodes are drawn as gray dots with their node names oriented relative to the Frame The Node positions and name can be specified in the Nodes string grid The nodes can also be moved with the mouse selecting ToolMove nodes The nodes have to be on the grid so the nodes are only moved in steps The grid is also drawn in Fig 437 with the red lines indicating the center The grid can be turned onoff via EditNode grid When the editing process is completed the user clicks on Done 42721 Properties Fig 438 Fig 440 shows the properties grids Most of the properties have combo boxes and pupup dialogs attached as shown in Fig 439 for selection of possible values Reference Manual ATPDraw version 73 105 Fig 438 Properties grid Left and center Shapes Right Texts Fig 439 Shape properties alternatives Fig 440 Text properties The Shape points are given in the coordinate system where x increases from left to right and y increases from top to bottom 32 bit integer are used to store the data so this is no practical size restriction The Text point P is specified in the center of the text The Node coordinates have to be rounded off to the nearest 10 The colors can be chosen from the 16 standard colors in the color palette to the right Left click for pen outline color right click for brush fill color Full 24 bit colors are found by clicking on the PenBrush squares which will bring up the Windows Color selector Reference Manual 106 ATPDraw version 73 Fig 441 The Full 24bit RGB color palette Standard ATPDraw colors 42722 Editing Selecting moving resizing and clipboard An element is selected by clicking on it in the icon window If the brush color is clear the user has to click on the visible border does not apply to arcs and pies Extensive code is added to support clicking on Bezier curves If an element is already selected it is given priority in the selection process Click in open space to unselect the element Several elements can be selected by holding down the shift key or by clicking in open space and draw an enclosing rectangle A single element or a group of elements can be moved clicking and holding down the left mouse key Elements can be resized by clicking on one of the eight black marking squares the mouse cursor changes style in this case A group of elements can also be resized It is possible to move all elements via the ToolMove all menu and this is the same as EditSelect all normal move The position of elements can be finetuned by holding down the shift key and use the arrow keys to move the selected group one pixel The point position can also be typed directly into the points grid shown in Fig 438 The order of elements can be changed via the EditArrange menu where the four choices send updown send to backfront are available Elements or groups of elements can also be rotated 90 deg and flipped left to right or top to bottom via the EditFlipRotate menu It is possible to copy selected elements to the windows clipboard This can then be pasted into other icons or duplicated To place the graphical content in metafile format on the clipboard select EditCopy Graphics 42723 Drawing new elements A new element is drawn be selecting the proper tool under Tools The following tools are available After selecting the tool click with the left mouse button to place points and with the right mouse button to place the final point Line rectangles ellipses arcs and pies take a fixed number of points so the leftright clicking does not really matter in this case For polylines polygons and Reference Manual ATPDraw version 73 107 Bezier curves the number of points can range up to 255 maximum When drawing Bezier curves only the curve points follow the mouse clicks point 14 710 etc while the intermediate control points 23 56 etc are calculated internally Fig 442 Available modes and tools The shape points can be edited later by entering the ToolEdit points mode The shape points are then drawn as green squares which can be moved directly It is also possible to add or delete points by clicking the right mouse button and choose from the popup menu Bezier curves are handled in a special way as shown in Fig 443 The curve points are drawn in a lime color while the control points are drawn in read with a line to their curve points The curve points lies on the curve while the control points sets the curve derivative In the drawing tool in Windows office Word and Power points the left and right control points are forced to lie on the same tangent and this will force a smooth curve When points are added to or deleted from Bezier curves this directly affects the curve point while the control points are automatically addedremoved The Bezier curve can be closed by selecting Brush style solid Fig 443 Bezier curve drawn in Edit points mode Green squares curve points red squares control points 42724 Layers and visible Each element can belong to a specific layer as specified in the properties grid in Fig 438Fig 439 The layers can be shown individually by changing the Show layer item in Fig 437 Elements with Layer0 are always drawn The practical usage of this for user specified icons is limited to separation of elements in the drawing process For standard elements though the Layer property is used to turn onoff elements dynamically This is hard coded in the source code of ATPDraw an affects RLC elements transformers time controlled and statistical switches TACs devices sources currentvoltage LCC transmission lines overhead line single core cables enclosing pipe length and universal machines The Layer information is used to control the Reference Manual 108 ATPDraw version 73 Visible property Elements with Visiblefalse are not drawn in the circuit window but they are drawn in the icon editor 42725 Example of complex icons In the new vector graphics editor quite complex icons can be created There is no limit of the size of the icon or the number of elements One of the benefits with vector graphic icons is that it is possible to create larger and much more complex icons Fig 444 shows an example of a created windmill and transformer icons IM Fig 444 Wind turbine and transformer icon with connecting universal machine and load in standard size 4273 Help EditorViewer Displays the Help Editor where the current help text assigned to components can be modified The Help Editor and the Viewer supports a simple rich text format rtf but so far this is not much utilized in help files However it is possible with different font styles and colors bulleted lists etc but not pictures To edit help file of standard objects the user must select the Help Editor speed button in any Edit Template dialogs In this case a Done option appears in the main menu and the File menu provides printing options and a Cancel choice By selecting Done you accept any changes made to the help text When the editor is called from the Tools menu the File menu contains an Open and a Save option as well In that case the text buffer is initially empty so the user must select the File Open first to load the help text of a support file The default font can be changed by selecting the Font option in the Character menu This menu will bring up the Windows standard font dialog box where you can specify a new font name and character style size or color Note that ATPDraw does not remember the current font setting when you terminate the program so if you dont want to use the default font you must specify a new one each time you start ATPDraw The Word Wrap option toggles wrapping of text at the right margin so that it fits in the window Reference Manual ATPDraw version 73 109 When the builtin editor is used as a viewer of component help text editing operations are not allowed and the File menu provides printing options only Additionally the Find Replace option is missing in the Edit menu The status bar at the bottom of the window displays the current line and character position of the text buffer caret and the buffer modified status This status bar is not visible when viewing component help A more detailed description of menu options is given in the next subsection 4274 Text Editor To invoke the editor you may select the Text Editor option in the Tools menu or the Edit ATPfile or Edit LISfile in the ATP menu In the latter case the file having the same name as the active circuit file with extension atp or lis are automatically loaded When the program is called from the Tools menu the text buffer will initially be empty The status bar at the bottom of the window displays the current line and character position of the text buffer caret and the buffer modified status Any other text processor eg notepadexe or wordpadexe can be used if Text editor setting of the Preferences page in the Tools Options menu overrides the default one A detailed description of the menu options is given below File options New Opens an empty text buffer Builtin text editor only Open Loads the help text of a support file or the contents of a text file into the text buffer Save Stores the contents of the text buffer to disk Save As Stores the contents of the text buffer to a disk file Print Sends the contents of the text buffer to the default printer Print Setup Enables you to define default printer characteristics ExitCancel Closes the editor or viewer window If the option displays Exit and the text buffer has been modified you are given a chance to save the text before closing If a Done option is available from the main menu this option displays Cancel and the window will close without any warning with respect to loss of modified data Edit options Undo Cancels the last edit operation Cut Copies selected text to the Clipboard and deletes the text from the buffer Copy Puts a copy of the selected text in the Clipboard Paste Inserts the text in the Clipboard into the text buffer at the current caret position Delete Deletes any selected text from the text buffer Select All Selects all the text in the buffer Find Searches the text buffer for the first occurrence of a specified text string and jumps to and selects any matching text found This option displays the Windows standard Find dialog box Find Next Searches for the next occurrence of the text string previously specified in the Find dialog FindReplace Searches the text buffer for one or all occurrences of a specified text string and replaces any instance found with a specified replacement string This option displays the Windows standard Replace dialog box Character options Word Wrap Toggles wrapping of text at the right margin so that it fits in the window Reference Manual 110 ATPDraw version 73 Font From the Windows standard Font dialog box you can change the font and text attributes of the text buffer 4275 Add objects From this menu Texts Shapes Pictures Files and Plot object can be added to the circuit Shapes are further split into Lines Arrows Rectangles and Ellipses and requires two leftclicks for the upperleft and bottomright corners 4276 Options In the Tools Options menu several user customizable program options for a particular ATPDraw session can be set and saved to the ATPDrawini file read by all succeeding sessions During the program startup each option is given a default value Then the program searches for an ATPDrawini file in the current directory the directory of the ATPDrawexe program the Windows installation directory and each of the directories specified in the PATH environment variable When an initialization file is found the search process stops and the file is loaded Any option values in this file override the default settings The ATPDrawini file is stored under APPDATAatpdraw typically cdocuments and settingsuserprogram dataatpdraw and is unique for each user of the computer The file is ATPDraw version independent Fig 445 Customizing program options The ATPDraw Options dialog enables you to specify the contents of the ATPDrawini file without having to load and edit the file in a text editor As shown on Fig 445 this dialog box has four subpages General Preferences Directories and ViewATP General The General tab specifies the project file and ATPDraw main window options The following list describes the available options Option Description Autosave every Saves all modified circuits to a separate disk file every minutes specified interval of minutes The file name is the same as the project file but with extension ad Modified state of the circuit window does not change as a consequence of Reference Manual ATPDraw version 73 111 autosave operation Create backup Changes the extension of the original project file to ad files each time the circuit is saved This option does not apply to autosave operations Save toolbar Records the current view state visible or hidden of the state main window toolbar so it can be redisplayed in the same state next time when ATPDraw is started Save sidebar Records the current view state visible or hidden of the state main window sidebar so it can be redisplayed in the same state next time when ATPDraw is started Save status bar Records the current view state visible or hidden of the state main windows status bar so it can be redisplayed in the same state next time when ATPDraw is started Save options Causes program options to be automatically saved to the on exit initialization file when the program is terminated Note that the save state options will have no effect unless program options are saved to the initialization file ATPDrawini by the Save command at the bottom of the ATPDraw Options dialog or by selecting the Save options on exit check box or by the Tools Save Options menu At the bottom of the ATPDraw Options dialog box the five buttons provide the following functionality Option Description OK Stores current settings into program option variables updates the screen and closes the dialog box Changes made will only affect the current session Save Saves the current settings to the ATPDrawini file Load Loads settings from the ATPDrawini file Apply Same as OK but does not close the dialog box Help Displays the help topic related to the options on the current page Note that if no initialization file exists ATPDraw will create a new file in its installation directory when the user selects the Save button or the Save Options in the Tools menu Preferences On the Preferences page the user can set the size of undoredo buffers background colors and skins specify the default text editor and command files to execute ATPEMTP TPBIGEXE and Armafit programs Setting up the ATP and Plot programs is now recommended from the ATP Connection Wizard Fig 446 Customizable program options on the Preferences page Reference Manual 112 ATPDraw version 73 Option Description Undoredo Specifies the number of undo and redo buffers to allocate for each buffers circuit window Changing this option does not affect the currently open circuit windows only new windows will make use the specified value Almost all object manipulation functions object create delete move rotate etc can be undone or redone These functions also update the circuits modified state to indicate that the circuit needs saving During an undo operation the modified state is reset its previous value so if you undo the very first edit operation the Modified text in the status bar will disappear Any operation undone can be redone Since only a limited number of buffers are allocated you are never guaranteed to undo all modifications For example if the number of undoredo buffers is set to 10 default and eleven successive modifications to the circuit are made the first modification can no longer be undone and the modified state will not change until you save the circuit Background Selects the background color of circuit windows The color list color provides available system colors but you may customize your own from the Windows standard Color dialog displayed by the Custom button The current color selection is shown in the box to the right of the Custom button Skin Iceberg Classico is the standard skin This suffers from sum bugs in Windows context menu and in this case the Standard Windows skin can be chosen The compiler offers a many Skins but they are not distributed in v7 due to increased ATPDrawexe size Text editor Holds the name and path of the text editor program to use for program editing ATPfiles eg notepadexe or wordpadexe If no program is specified the field is empty the builtin text editor will be used Note that the program specified here must accept a filename on the commandline otherwise the ATPfile will not be automatically loaded by the editor ATP Holds the ATP program command which is executed by the run ATP command or F2 key at the top of the ATP menu A batch file is suggested as default runATPSbat for the Salford runATPWbat for the Watcom and runATPGbat for the MingW32GNU versions WatcomGNU versions can also be executed directly as WATDIR TPBIGWEXE DISK r or GNUDIRTPBIGGEXE DISK s r where replaces the 1 sign normally used in a batch file ARMAFIT Holds the name of the Armafit program used for NODA linecable models A batch file runAFbat is suggested Plot Holds the preferred plotting command Executed under ATPrun Plot F8 FilesFolders The following table describes the available options on the Directories page Option Description Project folder The directory where ATPDraw stores the project files acp ATP folder Specifies the directory in which atp files are created This is also the default Result Directory Web folder Default directory for WebDownload Model folder Directory containing support sup and model mod files for MODELS components Help folder The user can write help text files for instance resistortxt same name as the support file and extension txt and store Reference Manual ATPDraw version 73 113 it in this folder It will then automatically be added after the standard help text User spec folder Directory containing support sup library lib files for user specified components LineCable folder Default folder for the line and cable models This folder will contain alc files ATPDraw linecable data intermediate atp and pch files and lib files include If the alc files are stored in that directory the resultant lib files used in Include statements in the final ATP input file are also stored in this directory The PrefixSuffix option should in this case be turned off The Noda format in ATP does not allow to specify the full path for include files Therefore Noda lines alc files must be stored in the same directory as the final ATPfile Transformer folder The default folder for BCTRAN multiphase multiwinding linear transformer models This folder will contain bct files ATPDraw Bctran data intermediate atp pch and lis files In addition the Hybrid transformer XFMR files could be stored here xfm Plugins folder This is a user definable folder that appears in the bottom of the Selection menu The user can add project files acp and subfolders to this folder structure ViewATP Two groups of options can be specified in the ViewATP page These are the Default view options and the Default ATP settings The Edit options button opens the View Options dialog which enables you to specify view options to apply as default to all new circuit windows Available options are described in section 4246 Note that all circuit windows maintain their own set of view options and only the new circuit windows you open will use the options specified here To change the view options of an existing circuit window select the Options item in the View menu section 4246 The Edit settings button calls the ATP settings dialog described in section 4251 of this manual ATP settings specified here will be applied as default to all new project files Note that all circuits have their own settings stored together with the objects in the project files The settings specified here will only be used by the new circuits you create To customize ATP settings of an existing project select the Settings item in the ATP menu or press F3 function key Reference Manual 114 ATPDraw version 73 The prefix tags are text strings added in front of the include file name This is because User Specified USP and LineCable LCC components both have their include files dumped to the Result Directory same as the ATPfile In the case of duplicate file names in these cathegories file conflicts will occure The prefix option can then be used to avoid the conflict If two UPS component have the same name for instance the include file is anyhow forced to be equal Fig 447 Setting default view and ATP options The Housekeeping options delete temporary files after the simulation or exit In the case of debugging a LineCable model the Delete tempfiles after simulation option should not be checked 4277 Save Options Saves program options into the ATPDrawini This file is normally located in the program installation directory and can be used to store default options and settings 428 Window The Window menu contains options for activating or rearranging circuit windows and showing or hiding the Map window Fig 448 Supported options on the Window menu Tile The Tile command arranges the circuit windows horizontally in equal size on the screen To activate a circuit click the title bar of the window The active circuit window is marked by a symbol in front of the circuit file name Cascade The Cascade command rearranges the circuit windows so that they overlap such a way that the title bar remains visible To activate a circuit click the title bar of the window Arrange Icons Reference Manual ATPDraw version 73 115 The Arrange Icons command arranges the icons of minimized circuit windows so that they are evenly spaced and dont overlap 4281 Map Window The Map Window command Shortcut CtrlM displays or hides the map window The map window is a stayontop style window meaning that it will always be displayed on top of all other windows You can show or hide the map by pressing the CtrlM character of the keyboard to enable it when you need it or hide it when it conceals vital circuit window information The map window displays the entire contents of the active circuit The circuit window itself is represented by a map rectangle and the circuit objects are drawn as black dots Fig 449 Map window When you press and hold down the left mouse button in the map rectangle you move the display of the circuit world continuously If any circuit objects are currently selected when you reposition the map rectangle they remain in the same position in the circuit window This functionality can be used to quickly move a collection of objects a relatively large distance 429 Web Logged in users must register at atpdrawnet will get access to easy upload contribution and download of existing cases Fig 450 Fig 450 Download example searching for topic Electrical Machines Reference Manual 116 ATPDraw version 73 4210 Help The Help menu contains options for displaying the help of ATPDraw and the copyright and version information The help file ATPDrawchm is distributed with ATPDraw and it follows the compressed HTML standard compatible with Windows Vista Fig 451 Help menu ATPDraws HTML help is displayed in a standard Windows dialog which provides indexed and searchable help on all ATPDraw dialogs and options 42101 Help Topics The Help Topics command invokes the MSWindows standard help dialog box Several links and a relatively large index register support the users in searching Selecting the Contents tab you get a lists of available help functions as shown on Fig 452 This page allows you to move through the list and select an entry on which you need help To display an entry select one from the list by a simple mouse click and press Display or double click on the entry with the mouse Index and Find tabs can be used to get help by the name of a topic Eg if you ask for help on topics Circuit Window type this phrase into the input field of the Index page and press the Display button The ATPDraw help file consists of 136 topics Reference Manual ATPDraw version 73 117 Fig 452 HTML help of ATPDraw 42102 On Main Window The menu item On Main Window displays help about the ATPDraw main window 42103 About ATPDraw Selecting this menu item shows the ATPDraw copyright information and the program version used Fig 453 About window of ATPDraw Reference Manual 118 ATPDraw version 73 43 Shortcut menu The Shortcut menu provides access to the most frequently used object manipulation functions To show the shortcut menu click the right mouse button on an selected object or a selected group of objects in the circuit window Most of the items on this menu are identical with that of the Edit menu section 422 The Open menu item at the top of the menu is an addition to these normal edit functions If this command is performed on a single object the Component dialog box appears If you select this command for a group of selected objects the Selection dialog appears Open Enables the component customization by showing the Component dialog or the Group dialog when several objects are selected Hide Hides the selected objects Cut Copy Provides access to the standard clipboard Delete functions Duplicate Rotate Flip Rotates and flips the selected objects Arrange Move object forward or backward Objects in front are selected first and comes first in the ATPfile Fig 454 Available options in the Shortcut menu Reference Manual ATPDraw version 73 119 44 Component selection menu The Component selection menu provides options for inserting new components into the circuit window This menu is normally hidden To open it you must click on the right mouse button in an empty area of the circuit window The component selection menu collects all the available circuit objects of ATPDraw in a structured way as shown in Fig 455 After selecting a component in one of the floating menus the selected object is drawn in the circuit window A complete list of all components comes in chapter 415 Fig 455 Component selection menu The upper section of the menu provide access to the probe splitter and transposition and reference objects the next seven to many standard ATP components linear and nonlinear elements lines and cables switches sources electrical machines and transformers The next section is dedicated for the control systems MODELS and TACS components User specified objects and Frequency dependent components for Harmonic Frequency Scan HFS studies are accessible in the next group followed by the Power System Toolbox with its phasor calculators and protective relays etc Towards the end comes a list of all the standard supported components for instance older component replaced by new versions The final menu item called Plugins points to a user defined folder structure for import of project files subcircuits 45 Component dialog box After selecting a component in the Component selection menu the new circuit object appears in the middle of the circuit window enclosed by a rectangle Click on it with the left mouse button to move or the right button to rotate finally click in the open space to unselect and place the object The Component dialog box appears when you click the right mouse button on a circuit object or double click with the left mouse Assuming you have clicked on the icon of an RLC element a dialog box shown in Fig 456 appears These dialog boxes have the same layout for all circuit objects except probes which can be edited from the Probe dialog box Reference Manual 120 ATPDraw version 73 Displays the help text of the object High low precision ATP input data Not written to the ATP file Comment in the ATP file Label on screen Rotation Node names RedUser defined Icon local help background node and data definitions Branch output request Order number for sorting Copy paste all data via Windows clipboard Reset all data to default values Data values Fig 456 The Component dialog box Component data can be entered in the Value field of the Attributes page The Node Phase and Name fields are initially empty and you can enter node names in the Name field without phase extensions AZ You have to run ATPSubprocessMake node names or ATPrun ATP to obtain the ATPDraw specified node names Numerical values in the data input fields can be specified as real or integer with an optional exponential integer identified by E or e A period is used as decimal point Many data parameters have a legal range specified To check this legal range place the input caret in a data field and press the CtrlF1 keys If you specify an illegal value an error message is issued when you move to another data field or select the OK button The legal range can be set under Edit definitions Instead of a value you can also assign a 6 or less character text string as input data for most of the standard components This requires the Param property of the data to be set to unity see Edit definitions unless the Internal Parser is used Numerical values can later be assigned to these variables under ATPSettingsVariables using the Internal Parser or PARAMETER feature of ATPEMTP see in 4251 Just below the node input column there is an Order input field It can be used later as optional sorting criteria the lowest order number will be written first in the ATPfile on the ATP Settings Format page The Sidebars Projectpage allows direct sorting in the object inspector tree The content of the Label input text field is written on the screen The visibility of the component label is controlled by the Labels option in the View Options dialog box The label is movable and directly editable on the screen The font of the Label is controlled vie ViewSet circuit font The component dialog box has a Comment input text field If you specify a text in this field it will be written to the ATPfile as a comment ie as a comment line before the data of the object Reference Manual ATPDraw version 73 121 Many standard components such as branches nonlinear switches and transformers contain an Output section for setting the branch output request in a combo box Possible values are Current Voltage CurrentVoltage PowerEnergy or none Like the Order Label and Comment fields the Hide button is common to all components Besides checking Hide the user can also specify a Variable and if its value is positive the component becomes hidden Hidden components are not included in the ATPfile and are displayed as light gray icons in the circuit window All components where the high precision format is available has a Vintage 1 check button in the component dialog box It is thus possible to control the precision format for each individual component Selecting Force high resolution under the ATP SettingsFormat page will overrule the individual setting and force Vintage 1 for all components if possible The components User specified Models and Groups has also a Protect button for password protection of their content The OK button will close the dialog box and the object data and all properties are updated in the data structure Then the red drawing color of the object icon will be turned off indicating that the object now has user specified data When you click on the Cancel button the window will be closed without updating The Help button calls the Help Viewer to show the help text of the object Further help about the Component dialog is also available through the Windows standard HTML help system of ATPDraw if you press the F1 key The nonlinear components nonlinear branches saturable transformers TSWITCH and TACS Device 56 have a Characteristic page too as shown in Fig 457 On the Characteristic tab of the dialog box you define the input characteristic for nonlinear components Data pairs can be specified in a standard string grid To add new points after the cursor position click on Add Delete the marked point by clicking on Delete You can manipulate the order of points by the Sort button the characteristic for nonlinear components is automatically sorted after increasing xvalues starting with the lowest number or the and arrows The user can edit the data points directly any time It is possible the export the characteristic to an external file or to the Windows clipboard as text The whole characteristic is copied no marking is supported or required You can also paste a characteristic from the clipboard It is thus possible to bring an old atp file up in a text editor mark the characteristic the flag 9999 is optional and copy it to the clipboard then paste it into the characteristic page The number of points will automatically be adjusted Therefore you do not have to click on Add or Delete buttons before pasting ATPDraw uses fixed format 16 character columns to separate the numbers Note Pasting in from a text file with C in the first column is not possible Delete leading C characters first Reference Manual 122 ATPDraw version 73 Fig 457 The Characteristic page of nonlinear components Fig 458 The View nonlinearity window The External characteristic section at the bottom of the page contains a Data source field where you can specify the name of a standard text file containing nonlinear characteristic If the Include Reference Manual ATPDraw version 73 123 characteristic button is checked this file will be referenced in the INCLUDE statement in the ATPfile rather than including each of the value pairs from the points table ATPDraw reads the specified file into memory and inserts it directly in the final ATP file The nonlinear characteristic specified by the user can be displayed by clicking on the View button In the View Nonlinearity window Fig 458 the min and max axis values are user selectable as well as the use of logarithmic scale if min0 It is possible to left click and drag a rectangle for zooming Click right to restore The Add 00 check box will add the origin point and 1st quad will display only the first quadrant It is also possible to copy the graphic to the Windows clipboard in a metafile format with Copy wmf Selecting Done will close the nonlinearity display The following components deviate somewhat from the above description and will be referenced in the Advanced part of this Manual Saturable 3phase transformer SATTRAFO Universal machine UM1 UM3 UM4 UM6 UM8 Statistical switch SWSTAT Systematic switch SWSYST Harmonic source HFSSOUR BCTRAN transformer BCTRAN3 LineCable LCC objects LCC Windsyn embedded component UMIND UMSYN Hybrid Transformer XFMR ModelsType 94 Depending on the type of component opened the group box in lowerleft corner of the Attributes page may display additional options a For Models you can enter the editor for inspecting or changing the Models text In addition you can specify a Use As string and defined the output of internal variables RECORD The WriteMaxMin class of models have options to View extracted data b For the Fortran TACS components ATPDraw provides an extra OUT field here to specify the Fortran expression Some TACS transfer functions and devices also have options to turn onoff inputs visually c For user specified components you specify the name of the library file in the Include field If Send parameters option is selected the Internal phase seq controls how the node names are passed ie unselect this option if your library file expects 5character 3phase node names If the library file name does not include a path the file is expected to exist in the USP folder 46 Connection dialog box The Connection dialog box appears if you draw a Connection between a singlephase node and a multiphase node or double click on a Connection This dialog allows you to select the number of phases in the Connection and the phase number of a singlephase Connection Phase index A pure singlephase connection between two single phase nodes should have the Phase index 0 You can also select the Color of the Connection and a text Label which can be displayed on screen in rotated options In addition you can choose to Hide the connection and in this case the connection do not affect the node names A special option is to force the Node dots on regardless of the Node dot size set in the main menu for visual clarity 3phase connections have a kV option to force its color to follow the ViewOptionsPS color settings Reference Manual 124 ATPDraw version 73 Fig 459 Connection dialog box 47 Text dialog box The Text dialog box appears if you right click or double click on a Circuit Text not a Label or Node Name In this dialog you can specify the Font Size and Colors of the font used in the Circuit Text You can edit Circuit Text Label and Node Names directly in the Circuit Window by a left simple click on them Circuit Texts can hold multiple lines and the entire text uses the same font You can move the Circuit Texts Labels and Node Names by left click and hold Press the Alt key to avoid selecting other circuit objects Fig 460 Circuit Text dialog box 48 Shape dialog box Shapes can be lines rectangles ellipses and arrows This are used for documentation purposes and to illustratehighlight parts in a circuit The objects are inserted via Add objects under Tools or from the Selection menu Click left mouse cursor to place start point and click left mouse button again to finish click right mouse button to cancel Right click on the object to change it pen shape outline and brush shape fill with color style and fill pattern If gradient fill is selected a second brush color option appears Arrows have selection of arrow styles instead of brush styles Fig 461 Circuit Shape dialog box 49 Picture dialog box Pictures can be inserted for documentation purposes The bitmap formats png jpeg bmp and windows meta file vector graphics wmf are supported The user can paste in pictures from the clipboard or open image files The Width in pixels 100 zoom can be set and the aspect ratio is Reference Manual ATPDraw version 73 125 always maintained Transparent means that the lowerleft color is turned into transparent color If Rotate is checked the image is rotatable as any other object but this does not apply to wmffiles unless Store as bmp is selected Pictures also have a rotatable caption Fig 462 Circuit Picture dialog box 410 Attachment file dialog box Attached files can be added via Add objects from Tools or the Selection menu but Dragdrop from the file explorer is also supported The various file types get unique symbols in the circuit window Textfiles for ATP atp dat pch lib lis will get an ATP symbol while many Office files and PL4files will have a specialized symbol The Attachment File dialog right click on the objects have a Name from its source information about the file size uncompressed the file is stored compressed in memory and project an option to Export the file and a button to View it If View is clicked the attachment is uncompressed and opened in the standard viewer for the file type This applies to office files textATP files and PL4files Text file viewer and PL4viewer is set up under ToolsOptionsPreferences and this follows what is used otherwise in the project word file pdfdocument PowerPoint PL4file PCHATPDATLIS TXTfile Fig 463 Circuit File dialog box left File type circuit appearance right Reference Manual 126 ATPDraw version 73 411 Plot dialog box Plot objects are also inserted from Add objects under Tools or the Selection menu These objects can read PL4files of type NEWPL40 or 2 and include the plotted results directly in the circuit as well as inside groups Direct embedded plotting has an advantage since it is directly coupled to the simulation number in multiplerun cases It also helps to document the result ensure reproducibility and enables quality plots for publication purposes However it could also be somewhat risky especially for large PL4files more than million samples It should be used with care also because this is a new feature in ATPDraw v71 The user first specifies the number of plots in Plots then selects the Series name in the string grid above A dropdown menu with all available series following the PlotXY syntax and the listing in the Output manager F9 appears when clicking in the Series name column Series containing ATPDraw generated node names XXnnnn XnnnnAZ involve a possible future naming confusion and should be avoided The user should consequently name all nodes involved The colors option follows the standard Windows colors but selecting Custom will enable all possible colors for selection The column Run indicates which multirun case to use In the example below the same output is studied for the first 5 runs If run or scale are zero 1 will be used The curve is plotted as ctPL4t SkewScaleOffset The Right column is to assign a series to the right plot axis Save plots in project have three options Plot definition will only save grid above chart settings will also save all Plot object settings axis zooming etc and data values saves the actual data so the curves displays immediately when loading the project The data are stored with single precision same as PL4 and compressed but beware of possible large project file sizes Draw reduced samples reduces the accuracy somewhat but speeds up the drawing GDI draws more smooth curves On the Settings page axis and panel can be adjusted as shown in Fig 347 The Advanced settings brings up the extremely rich native chart setting dialog This allows fine tuning of fonts positions and appearances as shown in Fig 348 The settings made in this dialog are also stored if chart settings or data values are selected Fig 464 Circuit Plot dialog box 412 Node dialog box In the Node data dialog box you specify data for a single component node Input text in this Reference Manual ATPDraw version 73 127 dialog boxes should contain only ASCII characters but characters like etc should not be used Avoid using space in the node name and lowercase letters as well The user does not need to give names to all nodes in general The name of the nodes without special interest are recommended to be left unspecified and allow ATPDraw to give a unique name to these nodes The node dots given a name by the program are drawn in black while those whose names were specified by the user are drawn with red color There are four different kinds of nodes each treated slightly different in this dialog box 1 Standard and user specified nodes 2 MODELS object nodes 3 TACS object nodes 4 TACS controlled machine nodes Fig 465 Node dialog box for standard components Parameters common to all nodes are Name A six or five 3phase components characters long node name The name caption is read from the support file If you try to type in a name on the reserved ATPDraw format XX1234 for single phase or X1234 for threephase nodes you will be warned Ignoring this warning can result in unintentional naming conflicts UserNamed This disabled checkbox shows whether this node name is specified by the user or ATPDraw If the user wants to change a node name he should do this where the UserNamed box is checked If not duplicate node name warnings will appear during the compilation Node with UserNamed set are also drawn with a red node dot Name on screen If checked the node name is written on screen regardless of the current setting of the Node names option in the View Options dialog box The following list explains the type specific node parameters Standard and USP components Ground If checked the node is grounded A ground symbol appears for rotation of the graphical grounding symbol Short circuit Appears only for multiphase nodes and if checked the node becomes a singlephase node with all phases shortcircuited MODELS node Type 0Output 1Input current i 2Input voltage v 3Input switch status switch 4Input machine variable mach 5TACS variable tacs 6Imaginary part of steadystate node voltage imssv 7Imaginary part of steadystate switch current imssi 8Output from other model Note that the model that produces this output must be USEd before the current model This is done by specifying a lower Order number for the model and then select the Sorting by Order number option under ATP Settings Format 9Global ATP variable 10Variable from connected PL4file Reference Manual 128 ATPDraw version 73 TACS node Type 0Output 1Input signal positive sum up 2Input signal negative sum up 3Input signal disconnected necessary only if the node name is user specified TACS controlled synchronous machine type 5859 node Type 0No control 1Daxis armature current Out 2Qaxis armature current Out 3Zerosequence armature current Out 4Field winding current Out 5Daxis damper current Out 6Current in eddycurrent winding Out 7Qaxis damper current Out 8Voltage applied to daxis Out 9Voltage applied to qaxis Out 10Zerosequence voltage Out 11Voltage applied to field winding Out 12Total mmf in the machines airgap Out 13Angle between q and daxis component of mmf Out 14Electromagnetic torque of the machine Out 15Not used 16daxis flux linkage Out 17qaxis flux linkage Out 18Angle mass Out 19Angular velocity mass Out 20Shaft torque mass Out 21Field voltage In 22Mechanical power In 413 Probe dialog box Probes are components for output of node or branch voltages branch current or TACS values and are handled differently than other components you open In the Probe dialog you can specify the number of phases of a probe and which phases to produce output in the PL4file There are six different probes in ATPDraw Probev Node voltage output request Probeb Branch voltage output request Probed Line voltage output request Probei Switch current output request Probet TACS variable output request Type33 Probem MODELS node output request Fig 466 Probe dialog box for voltage probes The Steadystate option is only available for Node Voltage and Switch Current probes ATPDraw reads the lisfile and identifies the steadystate ATP output In On screen the user can specify how the steadystate information is shown on screen If the T value is larger than zero Reference Manual ATPDraw version 73 129 ATPDraw will insert a hidden MODELS component that calculates that phasors for one period 1Freq prior to the specified time For multiphase nodes all phases are analyzed for 3phase nodes sequential output is possible ATPDraw divide the steadystate value with the Scale factor 18779421361230000sqrt23 gives pu of a 230 kV system before displaying it on screen or only in the grid below For current probes the user can choose between current and power flow active andor reactive for output while both are shown in the Current and Power grids There is also an Add current node option which is forced on for beyond T0 outputs to assist the hidden MODELS component This option confuses many users but it means that two measuring switches are added in series and the middle node is displayed as a unique connection point The rationale is to avoid confusion about which switch ATP uses for current measurement in the case of more than one switchcurrent probe are connected to the same node Note that the number of phases is critical for a current probe and this must match the circuit 414 Selection dialog If you doubleclick in a selected group of objects the Selection dialog will appear allowing you to change attributes common to all components in that group such as data values Order number and Hide state The common data parameters are listed in a dialog as of Fig 463 where you can change the data for all the involved components simultaneously The data names from the definition properties are used to classify the data If there are no common data you can still select the type of component to open and set data for this type An alternative way to change the data parameter for several component simultaneously is to use Variables see Fig 418 in section 4251 Fig 467 Selection dialog box for simultaneous data setting Every component has an Order number By specifying a value in the Order field all components in the selected group of objects are assigned the same number The order number serves as an optional sorting criterion for the ATPfile components with the lowest order number are written to the atp file first if Sort by Order is checked Consider direct ordering via sidebar object inspector tree for more visual control The Hide state of multiple components can also be specified Hidden components are not included in the ATPfile and are displayed as gray icons You can also choose to reset to the default values inherited from the support files by clicking on the now button Selecting the Use default values check box will cause default values to be loaded automatically next time the dialog box is opened Reference Manual 130 ATPDraw version 73 415 Circuit objects in ATPDraw The Component selection menu provides options for creating and inserting new components into the circuit window This menu is normally hidden To show and activate the menu click the right mouse button in an empty circuit window space Following a selection in one of the floating submenus the selected object will be drawn where you clicked the mouse button in the active circuit window enclosed by a rectangle You can move left mouse click and drag rotate right mouse button or place the object click on open space The Component selection menu has several submenus each of them include circuit object of similar characteristics as briefly described below Fig 468 Component selection menu Probes 3phase o Probes for node voltage branch voltage current TACS and Models output monitoring o Various 3phase transposition objects o Splitter coupling between 3phase and singlephase circuits and Collector o ABCDEF Reference objects for specifying the master node for phase sequence Branches o Branch linear multiphase and 3phase noncoupled components RLC o Branch nonlinear multiphase nonlinear R and L components MOV Type93 96 and 98 nonlinear inductors including initial conditions for the flux linkage o TACS controlled and time dependent resistor inductor and capacitor LinesCables o Lumped PIequivalents type 1 2 and RL coupled components type 51 52 o Distributed lines of constant frequency independent parameters Transposed Clarke up to 9phases untransposed 2 or 3phase KCLee line models o LCC the user can select 19 phase models of linescables In the input menu of these components the user can specify a LINE CONSTANT or CABLE PARAMETER data case The resulting include file contains the electrical model and the LIBfile is generated automatically if the ATP setup is correct Bergeron KCLeeClarke nominal PI JMarti Semlyen and Noda models are supported Templates Sections and EGM o Read PCHfile This is a module in ATPDraw to read the punchfiles from Line Constants Cable Constants or Cable Parameters and to create an ATPDraw object automatically sup file and libfile ATPDraw recognizes PIequivalents KCLee Clarke Semlyen and JMarti line formats Switches Reference Manual ATPDraw version 73 131 o Time and voltage controlled 3phase timecontrolled switch o Diode thyristor triac o Simple TACS controlled switch o Measuring switch o Statistic and systematic switches Sources o AC and DC sources 3phase AC source Ungrounded AC and DC sources o Ramp sources sawtooth and pulse train o Surge sources with front and halfvalue time fitting o TACS controlled sources AC modulated Machines o Type 5958 synchronous machine Type 56 induction o Universal machines type 1 3 4 6 and 8 o Windsyn components Transformers o Single phase and 3phase ideal transformer o Single phase saturable transformer o 3phase two or threewinding saturable transformer o BCTRAN Automatic generation of pch file 13 phases 23 windings Autotransformers Y and D connections with all possible phase shifts External nonlinear magnetizing inductances supported o Hybrid Transformer XFMR Advanced topologically correct transformer with Test Report Design data or Typical value input 3phase 24 windings Auto Y D and zigzag coupling MODELS o Under MODELS the user can either select a default model and writeupdate the script internally or select an existing external model component by specifying a supfile or a mod file o Only input output data and variables declared in front of TIMESTEP INTERPOLATION DELAY HISTORY INIT and EXEC are recognized by ATPDraw when interpreting the model script and converting this to a component o Type 94 General multiphase type 94 component Specify the type THEV ITER NORT NORTTR and the number of phases Specify a modfile describing the Type94 models component templates available The same rules as specified under MODELS apply TACS o Coupling to Circuit Input to TACS from the circuit must be connected to this object o 4 types of TACS sources DC AC Pulse Ramp o Transfer functions General Laplace transfer function If the Limits are not specified or connected no limits apply First order dynamic icon with limits Simple Integral Derivative first order Low and High Pass transfer functions o TACS devices Type 5066 o Initial condition for TACS objects Type77 o Fortran statements General Fortran statement single line expression Simplified Math statements or Logical operators o Draw relations Relations are drawn in blue and are used just to visualize connections between Fortran statements and other objects Relations will not affect the ATP input file User specified o Library Include is used to include the libfile into the ATP input file The user must keep track of internal node names in the include file Reference Manual 132 ATPDraw version 73 o Additional Free format user specified text for insert in the ATP file Selection of location o Single and 3phase reference These objects are not represented in the ATP input data file and serve only as visualization of connectivity o Files Select a support file sup Import a libfile Data Base Module format via the Edit menu Include is used to include the user specified libfile into the ATP input file and pass node names and data variables as parameters Steadystate components o RLC Phasor component only present at steady state o Harmonic source for Harmonic Frequency Scan studies o Single and 3phase frequency dependent loads in CIGRÉ format o Single phase RLC element with frequency dependent parameters o Load flow components PQ UP TQ Power system tools o 3phase basic components LINE3 BUS3 LOADPQ CTRLCB o Phasor RX and power calculators o Filters RMS Phaselockedloops o Protective relays components o TACS block for RMS 012 PQ0 AB conversion All standard comp o Complete list of standard components in alphabetical order sorted by support file names Plugins o User defined folder structure containing project files acp for import 4151 Probes 3phase The menu Probes 3phase appears when the mouse moves over this item in the Component selection menu or when the user hits the P character Probes are components for monitoring the node or branch voltage branch current or TACS values In the Open Probe dialog you can specify the number of phases to connect to and select phases to be monitored Fig 469 Drawing objects on the Probe 3phase menu Reference Manual ATPDraw version 73 133 Probe Volt PROBEV V Selecting this item draws the voltage probe to specify a node voltagetoground output request in the ATPfile Probe line volt PROBED D Selecting this item draws the line voltage probe to specify voltage difference output requests in the ATPfile Useful for 3phase circuits where the user can specify AB B C CA or AC BA CB voltages Probe Branch volt PROBEB v Selecting this item draws the branch voltage probe to specify a branch voltage output requests in the ATPfile Probe Curr PROBEI I Selecting this item inserts a current probe measuring switch into the circuit to specify current output request in column 80 in the ATPfile The number of monitored phases are user selectable Add current node Two switches in series Middle node available Probe Tacs PROBET T Selecting this item draws the Tacs probe to specify signal output and inserts TACS Type 33 object into the ATPfile Probe Model PROBEM M Selecting this item draws the Model probe which can be added to Models output nodes Inserts RECORDS cards into ATPfile Probe fluxlinkage FLUX3 FLUX3N FLUX1 F L X Selecting this item draws the fluxlinkage probe these components are groups located in the GRP folder Inside the group is a Model that integrates the input from a specified time instant that can be set negative to initialize the integration from steadystate COMTRADE COMTRADE COMTRADE1 COMTRADE2 comtrade A1 A6 D1 D3 cmtrd A D C7111 These objects create COMTRADE dat cfg or MATLAB mat automatically following the simulation The objects offer flexible user selectable sampling rate and specification of channel name and scaling The COMTRADE object can be connected to 3phase nodes for direct loading while the two others require packing objectsmerging units Maximum 26 analog and 26 digital channels Example of packing objects user specified MODELS found in Exa26acp Splitter SPLITTER Probes The Splitter object is a transformation between a 3phase node and three 1phase nodes The object has 0 data and 4 nodes ABC ABC A B C A B C When a splitter is rotated the phase sequence of the singlephase side changes as shown left NODE NODEA NODEB NODEC If a name is given to the 3phase node the letters A B C are added automatically on the singlephase side of splitters Note Do not give names to nodes at the singlephase side of splitters and do not connect splitters together on the singlephase side except all three phases Ie next two examples are illegal Reference Manual 134 ATPDraw version 73 Disconnection is illegal this way Transposition is illegal this way This is legal however Collector COLLECTOR The Collector object is a component with a single multiphase node It is useful in Compress since only components can have external nodes not connections Transp 1 ABCBCA Transp 4 ABCACB Transposition objects can be used to change the phase sequence of a 3phase node The following transpositions are supported 3phase Change the phase sequence from ABC to BCA Change the phase sequence from ABC to CAB Change the phase sequence from ABC to CBA Change the phase sequence from ABC to ACB Handling of transpositions for objects with several 3phase nodes is controlled by the circuit number Kind under Library EditNew USP Nodes see in 4262 3phase nodes having the same Circuit property will receive the same phase sequence ABC reference ABC ABC When attached to a 3phase node in the circuit this node becomes the master node with phase sequence ABC The other nodes will adapt this setting DEF reference DEF DEF When attached to a 3phase node in the circuit this node becomes the master node with phase sequence DEF The other nodes will adapt this setting A combination of ABC and DEF references is possible for eg in 6phase circuits 4152 Branch Linear This submenu contains linear branch components The name and the icon of linear branch objects as well as a brief description of the components are given next in tabulated form Data parameters and node names to all components can be specified in the Component dialog box see Fig 456 which appears if you click on the icon of the component with the right mouse button in the circuit window The Help button on the Component dialog boxes calls the Help Viewer in which a short description of parameters and a reference to the corresponding ATP Rule Book chapter is given As an example Fig 471 shows the help information associated with the ordinary RLC branch Fig 470 Supported linear branch elements Reference Manual ATPDraw version 73 135 Selection Object name Icon ATP card Description Resistor RESISTOR Branch BRANCH type 0 Pure resistance in Multiphase Capacitor CAPRS BRANCH type 0 Capacitor with damping resistor C in F if Copt0 Multiphase Inductor INDRP BRANCH type 0 Inductor with damping resistor Inductance in mH if Xopt0 Multiphase RLC RLC BRANCH type 0 R L and C in series Dynamic icon Multiphase R inf RINF BRANCH type 0 General resistor to ground to fix floatingsubnetwork problems Multiphase PQU PQU PQ BRANCH type 0 Resistance and Inductance or Capacitance calculated internally based on PQ and Uvoltage Multiphase Kizilcay Fdep KFD Fsz BRANCH IVI High order admittance transfer in frequency s or time z domain RLC 3ph RLC3 BRANCH type 0 3phase R L and C in series Independent values in phases Dynamic icon RLCY 3ph RLCY3 BRANCH type 0 3phase R L and C Y coupling Independent values in phases Dynamic icon RLCD 3ph RLCD3 BRANCH type 0 3phase R L and C D coupling Independent values in phases Dynamic icon C U0 CAPU0 U0 I BRANCH initial condition Capacitor with initial condition L I0 INDI0 i0 BRANCH initial condition Inductor with initial condition Fig 471 Help information associated with the series RLC object Reference Manual 136 ATPDraw version 73 4153 Branch Nonlinear This menu contains the supported nonlinear resistors and inductors All the objects except the TACS controlled resistor can also have a nonlinear characteristic These attributes can be specified by selecting the Characteristic tab of the Component dialog as shown in Fig 457 The nonlinear characteristic of objects can be entered as piecewise linear interpolation The number of data points allowed to enter on the currentvoltage currentflux or timeresistance characteristics are specified in the Help file of objects UI characteristics of nonlinear resistances are assumed symmetrical thus 0 0 point should not be entered If the saturation curve of a nonlinear inductor is symmetrical start with point 0 0 and skip the negative points The hysteresis loop of Type96 reactors is assumed symmetrical so only the lower loop of the hysteresis must be entered The last point should be where the upper and lower curves meet in the first quadrant If you specify a metal oxide arrester with MOV Type 92 component ATPDraw accepts the currentvoltage characteristic and performs an exponential fitting in the loglog domain to produce the required ATP data format Fig 472 Nonlinear branch elements Selection Object name Icon ATP card Description Ri Type 99 NLINRES NonLin Ri BRANCH type 99 Current dependent resistance Multiphase Ri Type 92 NLRES92 Ri BRANCH type 92 Current dependent resistance Multiphase Rt Type 97 NLINRT Rt BRANCH type 97 Time dependent resistor Multi phase Rt Type 91 NLRES91 Rt BRANCH type 91 Time dependent resistor Multi phase Li Type 98 NLININD BRANCH type 98 Current dependent inductor Multiphase Li Type 93 NLIND93 BRANCH type 93 True nonlinear current dependent inductor Multi phase Li Type 96 NLIND96 BRANCH type 96 Pseudononlinear hysteretic inductor Multiphase Li Hevia 98 96 HEVIA98 H BRANCH type 98 Pseudononlinear hysteretic inductor Multiphase Li ZirkaMoroz DHM96 DHM BRANCH Type96 Magnetic hysteresis model with list of predefined materials MOV Type 92 MOVN MOV BRANCH type 92 Current dependent resistance on exponential form Multiphase Reference Manual ATPDraw version 73 137 RTACS Type 91 TACSRES T BRANCH type 91 TACS MODELS controlled time dependent resistor Multi phase LTACS TACSIND T BRANCH TACS MODELS controlled time dependent inductor Multi phase CTACS TACSCAP T BRANCH TACS MODELS controlled time dependent capacitor Multiphase Li Type 98 init NLIN98I BRANCH type 98 Currentdependent inductor With initial flux Li Type 96 init NLIN96I BRANCH type 96 Pseudononlinear hysteretic inductor with initial flux Li Type 93 init NLIN93I BRANCH type 93 True nonlinear inductor with initial flux All nonlinear inductances have a Based on IrmsUrms option and if checked the current fluxlinkage characteristic is calculated internally similarly to SATURA routine of ATP The routines is the same as has been used in transformer for a long time 4154 LinesCables The LinesCables menu has several submenus for different types of line models Available line models are Lumped parameter models RLC RL coupled distributed parameter lines with constant ie frequency independent parameters lines and cables with constant or frequency dependent parameters Bergeron PI Jmarti Noda or Semlyen calculated by means of the LINE CONSTANTS CABLE CONSTANTS or CABLE PARAMETERS supporting routine of ATPEMTP Fig 473 PI equivalents with electrical data input 41541 Lumped parameter line models RLC Piequiv 1 These line models are simple lumped equivalents of ATP Type 1 2 3 etc branches of ATP RL Coupled 51 These line models are simple lumped mutually RL coupled components of Type51 52 53 etc branches of ATP The following selections are available in the two popup menus Reference Manual 138 ATPDraw version 73 Selection Object name Icon ATP card Description RLC Piequiv 1 1 phase LINEPI1 BRANCH type 1 Single phase RLC equivalent RLC Piequiv 1 2 phase LINEPI2 BRANCH type 12 2phase RLC equivalent Symmetric RLC Piequiv 1 3 ph LINEPI3 BRANCH type 13 3phase RLC equivalent Symmetric matrix input RLC Piequiv 1 3 ph Seq LINEPI3S BRANCH type 13 3phase RLC equivalent Sequence params Transposed RLC Piequiv 1 3x1 ph Cable PICAB3S BRANCH type 13 3phase RLC equivalent No mutual coupling RLC Piequiv 1 4 ph LINEPI4 LINE PI BRANCH Type 14 4phase RLC equivalent Symmetric matrix input RLC Piequiv 1 5 ph LINEPI5 LINE PI BRANCH Type 15 5phase RLC equivalent Symmetric matrix input RLC Piequiv 1 6 ph indiv transp LINEPI6S BRANCH type 16 6phase RLC equivalent Individually transposed circuits RL Coupled 51 1 phase LINERL1 BRANCH type 51 Single phase RL coupled line model RL Coupled 51 2 phase LINERL2 BRANCH type 5152 2phase RL coupled line model Symmetric matrix input RL Coupled 51 3 phase LINERL3 BRANCH type 5153 3phase RL coupled line model Symmetric matrix input RL Coupled 51 3 ph Seq LINERL3S BRANCH type 5153 3phase RL coupled line model with sequence impedance 0 input Transposed RL Coupled 51 4 phase LINERL4 LINE RL BRANCH type 5154 4phase RL coupled line model Symmetric matrix input RL Coupled 51 5 phase LINERL5 LINE RL BRANCH type 5155 5phase RL coupled line model Symmetric matrix input RL Coupled 51 6 ph indiv transp LINERL6S BRANCH type 5156 6phase RL coupled line model with individually transposed circuits RL Coupled 51 6 ph full transp LINERL6N BRANCH type 5156 6phase RL coupled line model with full transposition RL Coupled 51 6 phase LRs LINERL6 BRANCH type 5156 2x3 phase RL coupled line model Nonsymmetric Off diagonal R is set to zero RL Sym 51 3 ph seq 012 LINERL012 012 BRANCH type 5153 3phase RL coupled line model with sequence impedance 0 input Unsymmetric RL Sym 51 3 ph Full matrix LINERL3F 3x3 BRANCH type 5153 3phase RL coupled line model with full matrix input Unsymmetric Reference Manual ATPDraw version 73 139 41542 Distributed parameter line models Fig 474 Distributed transmission line models Selecting Distributed opens a popup menu where two different types of line models can be selected Transposed lines or Untransposed lines Both types are distributed parameters frequency independent lines of class Bergeron Losses are concentrated at the terminals R4 and of the midpoint R2 The time step has to be less than half the travel time of the line Transposed lines Clarke These components can be characterized as symmetrical distributed parameter and lumped resistance models called as Clarketype in the ATP RuleBook Six different types are supported Selection Object name Icon ATP card Description Transposed lines 1 phase LINEZT1 L distr BRANCH type 1 Single phase distributed parameter line Clarke model Transposed lines 2 phase LINEZT2 BRANCH type 1 2 2phase distributed parameter transposed line Clarke model Transposed lines 3 phase LINEZT3 BRANCH type 1 3 3phase distributed parameter transposed line Clarke model Transposed lines 6 phase LINEZT6N BRANCH type 1 6 6phase distributed parameter transposed line Clarke model Transposed lines 6 phase mutual LINEZT6 BRANCH type 1 6 2x3 phase distributed Clarke line With mutual coupling between the circuits Transposed lines 9 phase LINEZT9 BRANCH type 1 9 9phase distributed parameter transposed line Clarke model Untransposed lines KCLee Parameters of these nonsymmetrical lines are usually generated outside ATPDraw These components can be characterized as untransposed distributed parameter and lumped resistance models with real or complex modal transformation matrix called as KCLeetype in the ATP RuleBook Doublephase and 3phase types are supported Selection Object name Icon ATP card Description Untransposed lines KCLee 2 phase LINEZU2 BRANCH 2phase distributed parameters untransposed KCLee line model with complex transf matrix Untransposed lines KCLee 3 phase LINEZU3 BRANCH 3phase distributed parameters untransposed KCLee line model Reference Manual 140 ATPDraw version 73 41543 LCC objects In this part of ATPDraw you specify the geometrical and material data for an overhead line or a cable and the corresponding electrical data are calculated automatically by the LINE CONSTANTS CABLE CONSTANTS or CABLE PARAMETERS supporting routine of ATPEMTP The LCC module supports linecable modeling with no limits on the number of phases or conductors To use the LCC module of ATPDraw the user must first select a linecable component The number of phases is selected internally in the LCC dialog box This will display an object 3 phases default in the circuit window that can be connected to the circuit as any other component Clicking on this component with the right mouse button will bring up a special input dialog box called LineCable Data dialog box with two subpages Model and Data where the user selects between the supported System type o Overhead Line LINE CONSTANTS o Single Core Cables CABLE PARAMETERS or CABLE CONSTANTS o Enclosing Pipe CABLE PARAMETERS or CABLE CONSTANTS and Model type of the linecable o Bergeron Constant parameter KCLee or Clark models o PI Nominal PIequivalent short lines o Jmarti Frequency dependent model with constant transformation matrix o Noda Frequency dependent model o Semlyen Frequency dependent simple fitted model The LineCable Data dialog box completely differs from the Component dialog of other components therefore it is described in chapter 53 of the Advanced Manual An LCC template component can be a standalone object written to the ATPfile or an actual template checkbox inside serving as a common data source for LCC section objects using it Selection Object name Icon ATP card Description LCC template LCC LCC LCC LCC Include Multiphase LCC object Overhead line Single core cables Enclosing pipe BergeronPIJmartiSemlyenNoda LCC section LCC LCC 12 km LCC 12 km Include Uses the data of an LCC template with local modification of standard data length frequency and ground resistivity Optional singlephase layout LCC EGM LCCEGM EGM 14 km Include Same as LCC but with an electro geometrical model for lightning studies included Top node to be connected to lightning source 41544 Read PCH file ATPDraw can read the pch output files obtained by external run of ATPEMTPs Line Constants or Cable Constants supporting routines Selecting the Read PCH file menu item the program performs an Open Punch File dialog in which the available pch files are Reference Manual ATPDraw version 73 141 listed If you select a file and click Open ATPDraw attempts to read the file and if succeed in creates a lib file and stores it in memory in the Data Base Module format of ATP When the lib file is successfully created the icon of the new LCC component appears in the middle of the circuit window Supports files for 112 phases are included as standard 4155 Switches ATPDraw supports most of the switch type elements in ATP such as ordinary time or voltagecontrolled switches options for modeling diodes valves and triacs as well as measuring and statistical switches The Switches submenu contains the following switch objects Fig 475 Supported switch type ATP components Selection Object name Icon ATP card Description Switch time controlled TSWITCH SWITCH type 0 Single or 3phase time controlled switch Multiple closingopenings Dynamic icon will open will close Switch time 3ph SWIT3XT SWITCH type 0 Threephase time controlled switch Independent operation of phases Switch voltage contr SWITCHVC Vf SWITCH type 0 Voltage controlled switch Diode type 11 DIODE SWITCH type 11 Diode Switch type 11 Uncontrolled Valve type 11 SWVALVE SWITCH type 11 ValveThyristor Switch type 11 TACSMODELS controlled GIFU Triac type 12 TRIAC S C SWITCH type 12 Double TACSMODELS controlled switch TACS switch type 13 SWTACS SWITCH type 13 Simple TACSMODELS controlled switch GIFU Measuring SWMEAS M SWITCH type 0 Measuring switch Current measurements Statistic switch SWSTAT STAT SWITCH Statistic switch See ATP Settings SwitchUM Systematic switch SWSYST SYST SWITCH Systematic switch See ATP Settings SwitchUM Nonlinear diode DIODEN SWITCH BRANCH Ideal or nonlinear resistance with forward resistance and snubbers Reference Manual 142 ATPDraw version 73 4156 Sources The popup menu under Sources contains the following items Fig 476 Electrical sources in ATPDraw Selection Object name Icon ATP card Description AC source 13 ACSOURCE SOURCE type 14 AC source Voltage or current Single or 3phase Ungrounded or grounded Phase voltage and rms scaling Sawtooth type 10 SAW10 SOURCE Type 10 FORTRAN source with frequency and amplitude Pulse train type 10 PULSE10 SOURCE Type 10 FORTRAN source with frequency duty cycle and amplitude DC type 11 DC1PH SOURCE type 11 DC step source Voltage or current Ramp type 12 RAMP SOURC E type 12 Ramp source Voltage or current SlopeRamp type 13 SLOPERA SOURCE type 13 Twoslope ramp source Voltage or current Twoexp type 15 Ftype source with front and half value SURGE TWOEXPF SOURCE type 15 Double exponential Reference Manual ATPDraw version 73 143 time inline fitting or ATPDraw optimization source Type15 Voltage or current Heidler type 15 Ftype source with front and half value time inline fitting or ATPDraw optimization HEIDLER HEIDLERF H H SOURCE type 15 Heidler type source Voltage or current Standler Ftype source with front and half value time inline fitting or ATPDraw optimization STANDLER STANDLERF S S SOURCE type 15 Standler type source Voltage or current Cigre CIGRE C C SOURCE type 15 Cigre type source Voltage or current TACS source TACSSOUR SOURCE type 60 TACSMODELS controlled source Voltage or current AC Source modul ACSRCMOD SOURCE type 1417 Same as ACSOURCE but with additional TACS input as multiplication factor Empirical type1 SOUR1 SOURCE type 1 Source with user defined time characteristic Voltage or current AC Ungrounded AC1PHUG SOURCE type 1418 Ungrounded AC source Voltage only DC Ungrounded DC1PHUG SOURCE type 1118 Ungrounded DC source Voltage only Trapped charge TRAPCHRG SOURCE Type 14 Special quasi DC voltage source disconnected at t0 The sources TWOEXPF HEIDLERF and STANDLERF support ATPs inline fitting of provided front time T1 and halfvalue time T2 Alternatively ATPDraw can also calculate the parameters using optimization A PERC parameter enables various definitions of the times 0 T1 defined as time from zero to peak T2 defined from zero to 50 on tail 10T1 defined as T90T1008 T2 defined from virtual zero to 50 on tail 30T1 defined as T90T3006 T2 defined from virtual zero to 50 on tail 50T1 defined as T90T10 T2 defined from zero to 50 on tail It is not always possible to calculate parameters to fit any shape and the help file provides some inline fitting restrictions ATPDraw optimization seems more robust and can also find approximate solutions in some cases Reference Manual 144 ATPDraw version 73 4157 Machines Two categories of electrical machines are available in ATPDraw Synchronous Machines and Universal Machines ATPDraw does not support machines in parallel or backto back Fig 477 Supported electric machine alternatives The Synchronous Machine models in ATPDraw have the following featureslimitations With and without TACS control Manufacturers data No saturation No eddycurrent or damping coils Single mass The Universal Machine models in ATPDraw have the following featureslimitations Manual and automatic initialization SM IM and DC type supported Raw coil data internal parameters Manufacturers data in Windsyn Saturation is supported in d q or both axes Maximum five excitation coils sum d and q axis Network option for mechanical torque only Single torque source The Component dialog of Universal Machines is significantly different than that of the other objects A complete description of parameters in this dialog box is given in chapter 522 of the Advanced Manual The WI embedded WIndSyn by Gabor Furst components support the following machine types Synchronous machines with salient or round rotor with damping options Induction machines with wound single cage double cage or deepbar rotors The Windsyn component is documented it chapter 525 in the Advanced Manual The popup menu under Machines contains the following items Selection Object name Icon ATP card Description SM 5959 No control SM TEx TPow 59 SM MACHINE type 59 or 58 Synchronous machine Max 5 TACS outputs 3phase armature IM 56 IM56A IM T MACHINE Type 56 Induction machine with multiple controls 3phase armature Induction WI UMIND Torque IM WI UMMACHINE Type 3 4 Universal machine with manufacturers data input Synchronous WI UMSYN Exfd Torque SM WI UMMACHINE Type 1 Universal machine with manufacturers data input Reference Manual ATPDraw version 73 145 UM1 Synchronous UM1 SM UMMACHINE type 1 Synchronous Set initialization under ATP SettingsSwitchUM UM3 Induction UM3 IM UMMACHINE type 3 Induction Set initialization under ATP SettingsSwitchUM UM4 Induction UM4 IM UMMACHINE type 4 Induction Set initialization under ATP SettingsSwitchUM UM6 Single phase UM6 SP UMMACHINE type 6 Single phase Set initialization under ATP SettingsSwitchUM UM8 DC UM8 DC UMMACHINE type 8 DC machine Set initialization under ATP SettingsSwitchUM 4158 Transformers ATPDraw supports the transformer components Ideal transformer saturable transformer BCTRAN and the Hybrid Transformer The BCTRAN model is documented in chapters 56 and the Hybrid Model in chapter 57 of the Advanced Manual Fig 478 Transformer models in ATPDraw The popup menu under Transformers contains the following items Selection Object name Icon ATP card Description Ideal 1 phase TRAFOI Trafos P S n 1 SOURCE type 18 Singlephase ideal transformer Ideal 3 phase TRAFOI3 P S n 1 Y Y SOURCE type 18 3phase ideal transformer Saturable 1 phase TRAFOS P S BRANCH TRANSFORMER Singlephase saturable transformer Saturable 3 phase SATTRAFO SAT Y BRANCH TRANSFORMER General saturable transformer 3phase 2 or 3 windings BCTRAN BCTRAN BCT Y BRANCH Type 19 Direct support of BCTRAN transformer matrix modeling Hybrid model XFMR XFMR Y BRANCH Winding resistance leakage inductance topologically correct core capacitance Test report design data or typical The characteristic of the nonlinear magnetizing branch of the three saturabletype transformers can be given in the Characteristic tab of the component dialog box The saturable transformers have an input window like the one in Fig 457 In this window the magnetizing branch can be entered in IRMSURMS or IAFLUXVs coordinates The RMS flag on the Attributes page select between the two input formats If the Include characteristic check box is selected on the Attributes page a disk file referenced in the Include field will be used in the ATP input file If the nonlinear characteristic is given in IRMSURMS ATPDraw will calculate the fluxcurrent values automatically and use them in the final ATP input file Reference Manual 146 ATPDraw version 73 The BCTRAN transformer component provides direct support of BCTRAN transformer matrix modeling The user is requested to specify input data open circuit and short circuit factory test data in BCTRAN supporting routine format then ATPDraw performs an ATP run to generate a punchfile that is inserted into the final ATPfile describing the circuit The user can specify where the factory test was performed and where to connect the excitation branch The excitation branch can be linear or nonlinear In the latter case the nonlinear inductors must be connected to the winding closest to the iron core as external elements The BCTRAN dialog and the Component dialog of the Saturable 3phase SATTRAFO differ in many ways from the input data window of other objects A more comprehensive description of the input parameters is given in chapters 56 and 521 of the Advanced Manual respectively The Hybrid Transformer model is based on development made by Dr Bruce Mork and his group at Michigan Technological University It offers both advanced and simplified usage The XFMR dialog box and the implementation is documented in chapter 572 of the Advanced Manual 4159 MODELS Besides the standard components the user can create hisher own control modules using the MODELS simulation language in ATP 4 ATPDraw supports only a simplified usage of MODELS The user writes a modelfile and ATPDraw takes care of the INPUTOUTPUT section of MODELS along with the USE of each model The following restriction applies Only INPUT OUTPUT and DATA supported in the USE statement Not possible with expressions call of other models or specification of HISTORY or DELAY CELLS under USE Using this feature requires knowledge about the syntax and general structure of MODELS language There are two options for creating a model object in ATPDraw Create a script internally or load a mod file created externally and rely on ATPDraw for automatic identification and layouticon The icon and node positions can later be fine tuned This is the preferred option Create a template manually under Library Template on disc New Model supfile and a corresponding mod file The Advanced part of this Manual Chapter 55 gives detailed information about both procedures and a general overview about the use of MODELS in ATPDraw In this chapter only the automatic template generation is introduced Fig 479 Options under the MODELS submenu Default model This will load a simple default object and display it in the circuit window Its input dialog box Reference Manual ATPDraw version 73 147 will look as shown in Fig 480 2 data 4 nodes Click on the Edit button to show the Models Editor and modify the script directly or to import a script from file or clipboard Click on Done in the main menu of the Models Editor when finished ATPDraw will then identify the object and create the required template including icon see Fig 481 Inputs and outputs are placed to the left and right of the icon respectively You can always go back and modify the script and if you change the number of input or outputs the icon will be recreated The Models Editor support simple debugger syntax highlighting code folding context menu right click insert of most language feature and a simple debugging ATPDraw will correctly identify array INPUT OUTPUT and DATA when the first index is unity MYDATA124 MYINPUT13 for INPUTOUTPUT there is a upper limit of 26 AZ phase extension etc Fig 480 Model component dialog box And Text Editor Reference Manual 148 ATPDraw version 73 Files supmod Selecting MODELS Files supmod in the component selection menu performs an Open Model dialog box where the user can choose a model file name or a support file name These files are normally stored under the MOD folder If a mod file was selected ATPDraw interprets the file as shown in Fig 481 and a model component with the corresponding definition and icon appears If a support file with the same name as the model file exist in the same folder this file is used instead as basis for the model definitions In this case the new model object appears immediately in the circuit window ie the Information dialog shown in Fig 481 does not show up Fig 481 Interpretation of the model The Component dialog of model objects has a new input section Models below the DATA and NODES attributes as shown in Fig 482 This new section has two fields Model which is disabled but automatically follows what is defined in the Model text found using the Edit button and a Use As field for specification of the modelname in the USE model AS modelname statement of MODELS The Record button is used for output of internal model variables On the Library page the link to the original support file on disk is given and a Reload option is made available Remember that the original support file on disk not necessarily match the present Model text if the user has changed this Fig 482 The component dialog box of model object FLASH1 Reference Manual ATPDraw version 73 149 The inputoutput to MODELS the use of the model and interfacing it with the rest of the circuit are handled by ATPDraw automatically Model descriptions are written directly in the ATP file instead of using Include Blank lines are removed when inserting the model file in the ATPfile The general structure of the MODELS section in the atp input file is shown below MODELS MODELS INPUT IX0001 vCR30A IX0002 vCR20A IX0003 vCRZ2A OUTPUT GAPA MODEL FLASH1 Description of the model is pasted here ENDMODEL USE FLASH1 AS FLASH1 INPUT V1 IX0001 V2 IX0002 iczn IX0003 DATA Pset 1 Eset 9 Fdel 4 Fdur 20 OUTPUT GAPAtrip ENDUSE ENDMODELS Type 94 Selecting MODELS Type 94THEV ITER NORT NORTTR will load a corresponding default model component You can then open the component which will bring up the Type 94 component dialog box as shown in Fig 483 As for simple models you can then click on the Edit button to inspect or modify the type 94 models text When you click on Done in the Text Editor ATPDraw tries to identify the model and then displays a message box similar to Fig 481 Be aware of that the name of the models must be six characters or less The bottom section of the input dialog has to the right four radio buttons THEV ITER NORT and NORTTR for specification of the solution method for ATP when interfacing the Type94 object with the rest of the electrical network The Data Node fields and the icon will update dependent on the choice of type You can also specify the number of phases Ph 126 in the component Branch output and Record of internal variable are also available Reference Manual 150 ATPDraw version 73 Fig 483 Component dialog box of Type94 model objects Signal input and data values for a Type94 object are loaded by ATP and the output of the object are also used automatically by ATP Interfacing it with other components of the circuit is handled by ATPDraw A Type94 compatible mod files must have a fixed structure and the use of such an object also requires special declarations in the ATP input file as shown next Structure of a Type94 compatible script MODEL ind1n comment Internal circuit 1ground L1 1 o ground Built for use as a 1phase nontransmission type94 Norton component endcomment comment First declarations required for any type94 iterated model the values of these data and input are loaded automatically by ATP the values of these outputs are used automatically by ATP DO NOT MODIFY THE SEQUENCING OF THE DATA INPUT AND VAR IN THIS GROUP the names may be modified except n when built for n1 the array notation is not required endcomment DATA n number of phases ng dflt nn12 number conductances INPUT v voltaget at terminal 1 v0 voltaget0 at terminal 1 i0 currentt0 into terminal 1 VAR i currentt into terminal 1 is Norton sourcettimestep at terminal 1 g conductancettimestep at terminal 1 flag set to 1 whenever a conductance value is modified OUTPUT i is g flag comment Next declarations of userdefined data for this particular model values which must be defined when using this model as a type94 component endcomment DATA L1 H reference value of inductance L comment Next declarations private to the operation of this model endcomment VAR st used for converting Laplace s to time domain L H variable value of inductance L INIT Reference Manual ATPDraw version 73 151 st 2timestep trapezoidal rule conversion from Laplace L L1 initialize variable inductance value g 1stL conductance converted from Laplace 1sL ENDINIT EXEC L is constant in this example IF t0 THEN flag 1 conductance values have been changed i i0 t0 current through L is i0 gv0 istory term for next step ELSE flag 0 reset flag i gv is pplying trapezoidal rule calculate from vt is i gv history term from trapezoidal rule for next step ENDIF ENDEXEC ENDMODEL The use of a Type94 Norton model in the ATPDraw generated input file is shown next C Time varying inductor 94LEFT IND1N NORT 1 DATA L1 01 END Write MaxMin This is a special cost function or reporting component using Models The component extracts a value from a simulation by reading from the LIS file As default the minimum or maximum value of a single input signal is extracted but the user can add more sophistication to this Only the signal after a user selectable time Tlimit is identified The component supports multiple run via the Sidebar or ATPSettingsVariables and contains a View module for displaying the result A data parameter AsFuncOf can be used to pass a loop variable from the Variables if a number is specified here the simulation number is used instead The component is used extensively in circuit optimization and can extract results of systematic parameter variations see Chapt 59 Show MaxMin Record the extremal value of the simulation within a Tstart Tstop span and write the value on screen Write MonteCarlo Uses the same approach as WRITEMAXMIN and extracts data from the LISfile Accumulates extremal values from Monte Carlo studies in statistical probability density function with user specified resolution 41510 TACS The TACS menu gives access to most type of TACS components of ATP The TACS sub menu on the component selection menu contains the following items Fig 484 Supported TACS objects Reference Manual 152 ATPDraw version 73 415101 TACS sources The Sources of TACS menu contains the following items Selection Object name Icon ATP card Description Circuit variable EMTPOUT TACS T TACS type 9093 Value from the electrical circuit into TACS 90 Node voltage 91 Switch current 92 internalvariable special EMTP comp 93 Switch status Manages also data from universal machines Models variable TMODVAR M TACS type 27 Models output can be connected to TACS via this component Constant TCONST 120 C TACS type 98 Displays a TACS constant on screen DC 11 DC01 T TACS type 11 TACS step signal source AC 14 AC02 T TACS type 14 TACS AC cosine signal source Pulse 23 PULSE03 T TACS type 23 TACS pulse train signal Ramp 24 RAMP04 T TACS type 24 TACS sawtooth train signal Ramp step RAMPSTEP T TACS type 24 11 98 TACS ramp to constant value Connect with AC source modulated to get easy ramp up AC source PMW 3phase TPMW6 PWM 3p TACS type 23 14 98 Pulse width modulated TACS source 3 phase The Circuit variable object TACS T provides an interface for TACS HYBRID simulations This object must be connected with an electrical node to pass node voltages or the branch currents switch status to TACS The type of the variable sent to TACS is controlled by the Type settings in the EMTPOUT component dialog box Users are warned that only singlephase electrical variables can be interfaced with TACS input nodes this way In case of 3phase modeling a splitter object is also required and the coupling to circuit object must be connected at the singlephase side of the splitter as shown in Fig 485 Reference Manual ATPDraw version 73 153 BUS V LCC 66 RMS 66 RMS T T 66 RMS T UC T UB T UA T A Coupling to TACS RMS output Fig 485 Coupling a 3phase electrical node to TACS 415102 TACS transfer functions All the older TACS transfer functions of previous ATPDraw versions are supported in version 3 but some of them has been removed from the component selection menu and replaced by a more general component the General transfer function This object defines a transfer function in the s domain and it can be specified with or without limits The Order 1 component offers order 01 transfer function with a dynamic icon containing values and optional limits Four more simple transfer functions are also supported Integral Derivative first order High and Low pass filters Selection Object name Icon ATP card Description General TRANSF Gs Gs TACS General transfer function in s domain Order 07 Named dynamic limits Order 1 TRANSF1 1s 110s s 110s 5 TACS Order 01 with optional limits Dynamic icon with transfer function Constant TRANSFK K TACS General transfer function in s domain Order 0 Named dynamic limits Integral INTEGRAL K s TACS Integral of the input multiplied by K Derivative DERIV Ks TACS Simple derivative transfer function Low pass LOPASS K 1Ts TACS First order low pass filter High pass HIPASS Ks 1Ts TACS First order high pass filter 415103 TACS devices The following TACS Devices are supported in ATPDraw Selection Object name Icon ATP card Description Freq sensor 50 DEVICE50 Devices 50 f TACS type 8898 or 99 Frequency sensor Relay switch 51 DEVICE51 51 TACS type 8898 or 99 Relayoperated switch Reference Manual 154 ATPDraw version 73 Level switch 52 DEVICE52 52 TACS type 8898 or 99 Leveltriggered switch Trans delay 53 DEVICE53 53 TACS type 8898 or 99 Transport delay Pulse delay 54 DEVICE54 54 TACS type 8898 or 99 Pulse delay Digitizer 55 DEVICE55 55 TACS type 8898 or 99 Digitizer User def nonlin 56 DEVICE56 56 TACS type 8898 or 99 Pointbypoint nonlinearity Multi switch 57 DEVICE57 57 TACS Multiple openclose switch Cont integ 58 DEVICE58 58 G u TACS type 8898 or 99 Controlled integrator Simple deriv 59 DEVICE59 59 Gdu dt TACS type 8898 or 99 Simple derivative Input IF 60 DEVICE60 60 if TACS type 8898 or 99 InputIF component Signal select 61 DEVICE61 61 TACS type 8898 or 99 Signal selector Sampletrack 62 DEVICE62 62 Sampl Track TACS type 8898 or 99 Sample and track Inst minmax 63 DEVICE63 63 MIN MAX TACS type 8898 or 99 Instantaneous minimummaximum Minmax track 64 DEVICE64 64 MIN MAX TACS type 8898 or 99 Minimummaximum tracking Acc count 65 DEVICE65 65 ACC TACS type 8898 or 99 Accumulator and counter Rms meter 66 DEVICE66 66 RMS TACS type 8898 or 99 RMS value of the sum of input signals 415104 Initial conditions The initial condition of a TACS variable can be specified by selecting TACS object type 77 under the TACS Initial cond menu The name of this component is INITT and its icon is InitCond INIT TACS 415105 Fortran statements The component dialog box of the Fortran statements General object provides a Type field where the user is allowed to specify the type of the object input output inside and an OUT field for the single line Fortranlike expression These statements are written into the TACS subsection of the ATP input file starting at column 12 The Fortran statements Math and Logic submenus include additional simple objects for the basic mathematical and logical operations General Selection Object name Icon ATP card Description F19 TFORTRAN fu TACS type 98 Preferred FORTRAN expression Use Ii for inputs and Dd for Reference Manual ATPDraw version 73 155 data to make object modular General FORTRAN1 Fortran F TACS type 8898 or 99 User specified FORTRAN expression old type not modular cant copypaste it Fortran statements Math Selection Object name Icon ATP card Description x y DIFF2 Math TACS 98 Subtraction of two input signals x y SUM2 TACS 98 Addition of two input signals x K MULTK K TACS 98 Multiplication by a factor of K x y MULT2 TACS 98 Multiplication of x by y x y DIV2 x y x y TACS 98 Ratio between two input signals x ABS x x TACS 98 Absolute value of the input signal x NEG NEG TACS 98 Change sign of the input signal sqrt x SQRT TACS 98 Square root of the input signal expx EXP exp TACS 98 Exponent of input signal ex logx LOG log TACS 98 Natural logarithm og input signal log10x LOG10 log10 TACS 98 Logarithm of input signal radx RAD RAD TACS 98 Converts the input signal from degrees to radians degx DEG DEG TACS 98 Converts the input signal from radians to degrees rndx RND RND TACS 98 Random number generator x Fortran statements Trigonom Selection Object name Icon ATP card Description sin SIN sin TACS 98 Sinus cos COS cos TACS 98 Cosinus tan TAN tan TACS 98 Tangens sincos cotan COTAN cotan TACS 98 Cotangens cossin asin ASIN asin TACS 98 Inverse sinus acos ACOS acos TACS 98 Inverse cosinus atan ATAN atan TACS 98 Inverse tangens sinh SINH sinh TACS 98 Sinus hyperbolic cosh COSH cosh TACS 98 Cosinus hyperbolic tanh TANH tanh TACS 98 Tangenss hyperbolic Fortran statements Logic Selection Object name Icon ATP card Description NOT NOT TACS Logical operator Reference Manual 156 ATPDraw version 73 type 98 OUT NOT IN AND AND TACS type 98 Logical operator OUT IN1 AND IN2 OR OR TACS type 98 Logical operator OUT IN1 OR IN2 NAND NAND Logic TACS type 98 Logical operator OUT IN1 NAND IN2 NOR NOR TACS type 98 Logical operator OUT IN1 NOR IN2 GT x x y y TACS type 98 Logical operator Output 1 if x y 0 otherwise GE x x y y TACS type 98 Logical operator Output 1 if x y 0 otherwise EQ xy TACS type 98 Logical operator Output 1 if x y 0 otherwise 41511 User Specified Selecting the Library item will draw the predefined user specified object LIB This object has no input data and cannot be connected with other objects because it has no input or output nodes Fig 486 Supported user specified objects Library Using this object will result in a Include statement in the ATPfile inserted in the BRANCH part No parameters are used in this case The User specified section at the bottom contains an Edit button that brings up the Text Editor where the user can edit or import an external text The user can type in the name of the component in the Include field The text will be dumped to a file with this name and extension lib and location in Result Directory same as ATP file when the ATP file is created Additional Like the Library component but in addition it allows the user to choose under which section in the ATP file to insert the text The input dialog of this component contains a larger memo field where the user can write in free format text with a row and column indication below The Additional section at the bottom contains an Edit button that brings up a more advanced Text Editor that allows the user to import a text from file of clipboard This Text Editor also has a rightclick context menu with an Insert option of 50 predefined request cards There is no Include field in this component because the text will be inserted directly into the ATP file Instead the user can select the section REQUEST TACS MODELS BRANCH SWITCH STATISTICAL SOURCE INITIAL OUTPUT LOAD FLOW MACHINE type 5956 UNIVERSAL MACHINE FREQUENCY COMP The Order number can be used for fine tuning of the location within each section together with ATPSettingsFormatSorting by Order The three character text in the icon will adapt to the selected section Ref 1ph Selecting Ref 1ph will draw the object LIBREF1 This object has zero parameters and LIB REQ Reference Manual ATPDraw version 73 157 two nodes Reference objects are not represented in the ATP input data file but serve only as visualization of connectivity Ref 3ph Selecting Ref 3ph will draw the object LIBREF3 This object has zero parameters and two nodes Reference objects are not represented in the ATP input data file but serve only as visualization of connectivity Files Besides the standard components the user is allowed to create User Specified components The usage of this feature requires knowledge about ATPs DATA BASE MODULARIZATION technique The procedure that is described in the Advanced part of this Manual consists of two steps 1 Creating a new support file sup using the Library New objectUser Specified menu 2 Creating a Data Base Module file LIB which describes the object Selecting Files in the component selection menu executes the Open Component dialog and the existing support files in the USP directory are listed If you select a sup file from the list and click on the Open button the icon of the object will appear in the middle of the active circuit window In the dialog box of this component type there is a User Specified section with an Edit button which will bring up the Text Editor where a lib file can be imported A checkbox Send parameters is used if the library file is on the Data Base Module format with external parameters A second checkbox Internal phase seq is used if the phase extension A B is hard coded inside the Data Base Module and only the fivecharacter root node name should be sent Henceforth the user specified objects operate similarly than standard objects 41512 Steadystate Harmonic frequency scan and load flow components The Harmonic Frequency Scan HFS is one of the options under ATP Settings Simulation General load flow specification is given under ATPSettingsLoad flow Fig 487 Supported HFS components Selection Object name Icon ATP card Description RLC Phasor RLCPHASOR BRANCH RLC component only present during steadystate t0 PQU Phasor PQUPHASOR PQ BRANCH RLC component only present during steadystate t0 Cigre load 1 ph CIGRE1 CIGRE LOAD BRANCH type 0 Singlephase CIGRE load Reference Manual 158 ATPDraw version 73 Cigre load 3 ph CIGRE3 CIGRE LOAD BRANCH type 0 3phase CIGRE load Linear RLC RLCF RLC BRANCH type 0 Linear RLC for HFS studies HFS Source HFSSOUR FreqComp HFS SOURCE type 14 Harmonic frequency source Load flow PQ LFPQ PQ Load flow SOURCE Load flow Load flow component with active and reactive power restriction Load flow UP LFUP U Load flow P SOURCE Load flow Load flow comp with voltage and active power restriction Load flow TQ LFTQ Q Load flow SOURCE Load flow Load flow component with angle and reactive power restriction Selecting HFS under ATP Settings Simulation will run the ATP data case so many times as specified in the Harmonic source component dialog box The frequency of the harmonic source will for each ATP run be incremented In the example shown at left 5 harmonic components are specified in the Fn column and the ATP data case will run 5 times Fig 488 Specification of harmonic source frequencies In the first run the source frequency will be 1x50 Hz the second run 5x50 Hz etc up to the fifth run f 11x50 Hz 550 Hz The Freq value specified by the user under ATP Settings Simulation is used here as base frequency The source frequency can also be specified directly in Hz and in such case the first Fn must be greater or equal to the Power Frequency Specifying the frequencies Fn like 50 250 350 450 and 550 would be equivalent to what is shown in Fig 488 41513 Power System Tools The Power System Toolbox consists of 3phase components for power system studies short circuit and fault analysis and relay protection Key elements are the LINE3 component that are drawn and edited like Connections and the various phasor calculators based on MODELS Fig 489 Components in the Power System Toolbox Reference Manual ATPDraw version 73 159 Fundamental components These are the building blocks in power system studies with easy fault application Combine this with the standard voltage and current probes with steadystate output Selection Object name Icon ATP card Description Bus BUS3 BRANCH Multinode Bays connection point with optional load and arrester Line LINE3 BRANCH LINEPI3S or LINEZT3 component with faults CB and CT Edited like Connections Load PQ LOADPQ LOAD k U n MODELS RLCSRC Voltage dependent load model Group with MODELS controlled source based on phasor calculation Ctrl CB CTRLCB ctrlcb MODELS SWITCH 3phase TACS switch opens at MODELS controlled zero crossing Basic MODELS calculators These calculators takes in 3phase current or voltage chosen in the input node left dialog box Selection Object name Icon ATP card Description RMS ABC2RMS MODELS Outputs RMS value of all 3phase inputs Phasors Basic ABC2PHR abc MODELS Outputs phasors re im for all 3 phase inputs DFT recursive or FFT methods with down sampling Phasors Initialized ABC2PHRI abc v0 MODELS Same as ABC2PHR but with steadystate initialization at t0 Phasors Freq variant ABC2PHRF abc MODELS Same as ABC2PHR but with frequency as input from PLL Phasors 1h ABC2PHRH2 DFT1h MODELS Calculate phasors re im in fundamental frequency and one extra harmonic Phasors Sequence 012 ABC2SEQ abc 012 MODELS Calculate phasors and convert it to sequence 012 output re im Phasors WritePlot WRITEPHASOR WRIT MODELS Takes in phasors re im to View this at specific instance in time Transforms RMS ABC2RMS abc rms MODELS Outputs RMS value of all 3phase inputs Transforms ParkD ABC2DQ0D abc dq0 MODELS Outputs the power invariant Park transform with angle as data Transforms ParkI ABC2DQ0I abc dq0 q MODELS Outputs the power invariant Park transform with angle as input Reference Manual 160 ATPDraw version 73 Transforms Clarke ABC2xyz abc abg MODELS Outputs the power invariant Clarke transform Transforms CartesianPolar CAR2POL car pol MODELS Converts quantities in cartesian coordinates to polar Filters Low pass BLPFILT MODELS 03 order Butterworth low pass filter with gain adjustment Filters High pass BHPFILT MODELS 03 order Butterworth high pass filter with gain adjustment PLL PLLDQ abc f MODELS Calculation of frequency based of park transform of 3phase inputs Harmonics HARMONICS DFT MODELS Calculation of 126 harmonics based on DFT recursive alg Old Power and RX calculators These calculators require input of 3phase currents and voltages topleft node is voltage bottom left node is current Normally the two input nodes can simply be connected and further to a unique 3phase switch node as shown in Fig 490 Note that currents can only be obtained from switches and ATP will give you the current in the first switch connected to the node you specify To make sure you get the correct current in the case of several switches connected to the same bus you should connect to a node not shared by any other switch with a different current The current probe with Add current node adds two measuring switches in series behind the scene and gives you access to the unique middle point Selection Object name Icon ATP card Description PQ PQ 31 UI2PQ ui PQ MODELS Calculate active and reactive power per phase for 3phase volt and curr PQ PQ 3phase UI2PQ3 ui PQ MODELS Calculate active and reactive 3 phase power DFTFFTDQ alg PQ Watt meter WMETER ui W MODELS Calculate average active power by integral method No downsampl RX UaUbIaIb UI2RXL ui RX MODELS Calculation of positive sequence impedance R X for phaseto phase faults RX UaUbIaIb UI2RXE ui RX E MODELS Calculation of positive sequence impedance R X for phaseto ground faults RX UaIa UI2RX ui RX MODELS Calculates the impedance seen in each phase Reference Manual ATPDraw version 73 161 230 kV LL ui PQ ui RX I 21 B T M M LOAD k U n PQ I ctrlcb V 104 230 kV LL ui PQ ui RX 21 B T M M LOAD k U n PQ I ctrlcb V 104 Fig 490 Connection of PQ and RX calculators correct left and incorrect way right Protective relays These relays should be connected to RMS over current and underover voltage Phasor calculators differential and RX calculators distance The directional overcurrent relay has its own zero sequence phasor calculator and the frequency relay requires frequency input The user must click on the input node of the models to make sure the correct signals are recorded The relays using signals from other models has default input from models and must be ordered after the model producing the signals Sorting by order was previously the only option to accomplish this but ATPDraw v7 offers an option EditArrangeSort all Models to help ordering correctly All the relays has a blocking control signal input trip signal and trip zone information outputs In the dialog window the user sets the zone characteristics and there is also View option that plots the zones and recorded trajectories with down sampling until trip The W1RELAY21P component also has a zone helper Selection Object name Icon ATP card Description Relays Overcurrent 5051 W1RELAY51 51 B T MODELS Based on rms input and a definite time zone gives a trip signal out Blocking option available Zone output not relevant Relays Time overcurrent W1RELAY51I 51 B T MODELS Based on rms input and standardized inverse time zone gives a trip signal out Relays Dir Ground 67N W1RELAY67N 67N B T V MODELS Current and voltage input with internal zero sequence phasor calculation Trips is V0Vlim and I0 in zone relative to V0 Relays Distance quad 21 W1RELAY21P 21 B T MODELS Input from RX calculator Three delayed zones with 4 points Zone helper available Relays Distance circ 21 W1RELAY21C 21 B T MODELS Input from RX calculator Three delayed zones with mho characteristic Reference Manual 162 ATPDraw version 73 Relays Diff transf 87T W1RELAY87T 87T B T MODELS Input from current phasors 1h Calc differential current with turns ratio phase shift scaling and harmonic blocking inrush Current into unit on both sides Relays Diff line 87L W1RELAY87L 87L B T MODELS Input from current phasors 1h Calc differential current with time delay compensation and harmonic blocking Current into unit on both sides Relays Undervoltage 27 W1RELAY27 27 B T MODELS Input from rms voltage Two undervoltage zones with time delays and 3 different standard characteristics Relays Overvoltage 59 W1RELAY59 59 B T MODELS Input from rms voltage Two overvoltage zones with time delays and 3 different standard characteristics Relays Frequency 81 W1RELAY81 81 B T MODELS Input from frequency calculator Two zones for both under and over frequency with fixed time delay TACS Selection Object name Icon ATP card Description TACS RMS TABC2RMS abc rms TACS 3phase RMS calculator DEVICE66 TACS Freq TABC2FRQ abc f rq TACS 3phase frequency calculator DEVICE50 TACS DQ0 TABC2DQ0 abc dq0 TACS 3phase park transform calculator TACS alphabeta TABC2ABG abc abg TACS 3phase alphabeta transform calculator 41514 All standard Comp In ATPDraw the standard component support files are stored in a single file called ATPDrawscl The Standard library dialog is the container of supported circuit objects in alphabetical order Any component can be selected from this list then the objects icon appears in the circuit window the same way as after other selections in the component selection submenus Support files of the present and even all retired objects which once were supported in earlier program versions but have been removed from the component selection menu are included in the standard library An old circuit file may of course contain such older components which are also supported internally in ATPDraw and the program will produce correct output Reference Manual ATPDraw version 73 163 41515 Add objects From this menu Texts Shapes Pictures Files and Plot object can be added to the circuit Shapes are further split into Lines Arrows Rectangles and Ellipses and requires two leftclicks for the upperleft and bottomright corners Press ESC or click right to cancel the drawing operation ATPDraw supports DragDrop of project files and attachments from the File Explorer If a project file is dragged into an existing project window it is imported and if it is dragged into background of the main window it is opened Any file can be dragged into an existing project and will then become an attachment Microsoft office and pdf files will get their own symbol and can be opened directly with the default program ATP LIS and DAT will be marked as ATPfiles and opened in the text editor PL4files will be opened in the installed plotter 41516 Plugins The Plugins Item points to a user defined disk structure with project files acp and subfolders This thus gives an easy access to a user defined library of subcircuits for import This is similar to FileImport but enables the possibility of direct access The Plugin directory is defined under ToolsOptionsFilesFolders Fig 491 Example of Plugins menu No content to extract ATPDraw version 73 165 5 Advanced Manual ATPDraw for Windows 73 No content to extract Advanced Manual ATPDraw version 73 167 This chapter gives an overview of several more advanced features in ATPDraw Grouping special components usage of the integrated LINECABLE CONSTANTS BCTRAN and the UNIVERSAL MACHINE support including the Hybrid Transformer model and Windsyn This chapter also describes how to use MODELS in ATPDraw and how to create new user specified object by means of ATPs Include and DATA BASE MODULARIZATION features You will not be shown how to create the example circuits but these project files Exaacp are part of the ATPDraw distribution To load these example circuits into ATPDraw use the File Open command or Ctrl O and select the file name in the Open Project dialog box 51 Compress multilevel modeling The Compress feature in ATPDraw allows multilevel modeling by replacing a group of objects with a single icon in an almost unlimited numbers of layers The grouping structure can be imagined as a multilayer circuit where the Edit Edit Group brings you one step down in details while the Edit Edit Circuit menu brings you one step back This feature increases the readability of the circuit and the feature is especially useful for TACS blocks or frequently reused circuit elements A group can be copied within the circuit and from other circuits The grouping feature is demonstrated by redesigning the circuit Exa4nacp in the ATPDraw distribution This circuit is an induction machine supplied by a pulse width modulated PWM voltage source The induction machine is represented by a Universal Machine type 3 with a typical mechanical load Fig 51 An induction machine supplied by a pulse width modulated voltage source The process of creating a group is as follows Select a group of components Left click and hold to make a selection rectangle Double left left left and finally right click to create a polygon as shown in Fig 51 Select Edit Compress in the main menu After selecting a group the Edit Compress command will replace it with a single icon First the selected subcircuit is redrawn alone in the middle of the circuit window and the Compress dialog Advanced Manual 168 ATPDraw version 73 appear as shown in Fig 52 The process is now to graphically select components in the circuit window behind and optionally add their data and nodes to the Added to groups list Fig 52 The Compress dialog window In the Compress dialog the user can specify the external data and nodes of a group of components The selected data and nodes appear as input in the group object inherited by the content children When you select a component in the circuit window its data and nodes are listed under Available The component is also drawn in a lime color in the circuit window The already selected external datanode from this component is drawn with a lime color in the Added to groups You can then select a parameter under Available and click on the button to transfer it to the Added to list If it is already added the button is disabled Selected nodes in the Available node list are also drawn in a lime color in the circuit window Nodes in the Added to list are drawn enclosed by a red ring in the circuit window as shown for the 3phase node of the Splitter chosen to the external in Fig 52 The node position 2 is chosen for this node and this is the middle left standard position Vector icon is chosen for this group object The Group name PWM is used in the icon and displayed as an indicator in the Component dialog as shown in Fig 55 The Auto pos option is available for vector icons only Later in this example we will change the icon to bitmap style All data and nodes listed in the Added to groups will be the external attribute of the new group object You can also for each selected node specify its position relative to the objects The node Advanced Manual ATPDraw version 73 169 positions different from the default 112 must be specified by selecting Position 0 and then give the relative coordinates of the node in the Posx and Posy fields The xaxis is oriented to the right and the yaxis downwards The Auto pos button is only available for Vector graphic icons Selected data and nodes can also be removed from the Added to groups by clicking on the button When later opening the component dialog box for the group object the selected data and node parameters will appear as input possibilities and the values will automatically be transferred to the subgroup It is also possible to change the datanode labels by doubleclicking on the texts in Added to lists Important Two or more data labels with the same name are treated as a single data in the component dialog box Fig 53 Name and position of the external nodes of the group The Compress process continues in Fig 53 by selection of the external data all belonging to the PULSE03 object Click on OK when you have finished If you need to change the group attributes you can later select the group and once again choose EditCompress to reopen the Compress dialog In such case a Keep icon checkbox enables you to preserve the groups icon After selecting all the required data and nodes click on OK then a object will automatically be created The group content disappears and the new group object is drawn in the circuit window as shown in Fig 54 The user is then allowed to connect this group object to the rest of the circuit Fig 54 On return from the Compress the circuit is redrawn Advanced Manual 170 ATPDraw version 73 Group objects operate like any other objects You can drag and place the new group in the desired location The component dialog of the group can be opened by a right or double mouse click and it appears as shown in Fig 55 The data and node values are as specified under Fig 52 and Fig 53 When changing the data parameter in this window the value will also be transferred to the member components A change in the node name will be transferred in the same way In this particular case the Fortran TACS objects are connected to the singlephase side of a splitter The name of the 3phase node V will be transferred as real names VC VB and VA from left to right at the Fortran objects output node The user must follow this phase sequence in the PWM group object too Fig 55 Opening the new group dialog box The Compress process for the mechanical load of the induction machine and the component dialog of the new group can be seen in Fig 56 and Fig 57 respectively Advanced Manual ATPDraw version 73 171 I Torque BUSMG U0 UI I BUSMS M I Fig 56 Selection of data values and external nodes for the mechanical load group Fig 57 Component dialog box of the mechanical load groupobject To viewedit a group the user must first select it and then click Edit Edit Group in the main menu or CtrlG The group is then extracted on the current circuit window Actually the grouping structure can be taken as a multilayer circuit where the Edit Group brings the user one step down in details while the Edit Circuit brings him one step back The group is editable in normal way but the user cant delete components with reference nodes or data in the mother group Ie Advanced Manual 172 ATPDraw version 73 components having been referenced in one of the Added to group lists cannot be deleted If the user attempts to do so a Marked objects are referenced by compressed group warning message reminds him that the operation is not allowed Selecting the main menu Edit Edit Circuit or short key CtrlH will close the group edit window It is possible with several levels of groups in the circuit The maximum number of group levels is 1000 To customize the icon click the Edit definitions speed button in the lower left corner of the Component dialog as shown in Fig 55 The icon editor will appear where the user is free to modify the icon Fig 58 shows the Exa4gacp circuit after grouping the PWMsource and the mechanical load and modifying their icons Such process is convenient for documentation purposes because increases the readability of the circuit U V BUS V I IM Fig 58 The icon of the PWM source and the load group has been customized Fig 59 Customizing the icon of the PWM source and TRQ mechanical torque model The icon is oriented so that node connections fit with border position 2 left middle 511 Compressing nonlinear objects A nonlinearity can also be external data in a group object Up to three objects can share the same external nonlinearity As an example this section shows how to create a 3phase Type96 hysteretic inductor You can draw a circuit as shown to the left of Fig 510 To create a group mark the 3 singlephase inductor and the splitter then select Edit Compress The data CURR FLUX and RESID are set as external parameters for all the three inductors The nonlinearity Advanced Manual ATPDraw version 73 173 button under Added to group is checked and the Add nonlinear button is checked too for all three inductors When you press OK the group object is created The group dialog box shown in Fig 511 contains only one entry for CURR FLUX RESID and FL0 which are used for all phases although 3 copies of them are present in the data structure Only one characteristic is entered in the groups dialog box and inherited by all subscribing inductors If the 26 data points were insufficient to describe the characteristic as you wish select the Include characteristic option and specify the characteristic in a disk file The name of that file must be entered in the Include field The new 3phase Type96 group object can be stored as a project file in a special library location and later copied into any circuit using the File Import command or place in the Plugins library Fig 510 Creating a 3phase hysteretic inductor Advanced Manual 174 ATPDraw version 73 Fig 511 Nonlinear characteristic of the 3phase Type96 group Sidebar object tree to the left notice that only one characteristic is specified that is used for all phases You can customize the group icon as shown in Fig 511 vector icon illustrated in this case The hysteresis loop originates from the original inductor icon This is done by executing the next sequence of operations click on Edit definitions and go into the vector icon editor leftmost speed button The default icon is shown as a box with the text GROUP and nl963d Modify the GROUP text to GRP and move it toward the upper left corner of the box Modify the text nl963d to D and choose font symbol you may also increase the font size and pick a different color and move it towards the lower right corner of the box Now choose FileAppend std and choose the standard icon NLIND96 Adjust the left and right node connections Click on Done 52 Nonstandard component dialog boxes The component dialog box in which the user can change the objects attributes shows a considerable similarity nearly for all components on the Attributes page the components data and nodes can be specified on the optional Characteristic page you specify the input characteristic of nonlinear components The following components deviate somewhat from the above description Saturable 3phase transformer SATTRAFO Universal machine UM1 UM3 UM4 UM6 UM8 Statistical Systematic switch SWSTAT SWSYST Harmonic source HFSSOUR Windsyn manufacturers data UM component In additions comes Models and User Specified component explained later Advanced Manual ATPDraw version 73 175 521 Saturable 3phase transformer The component dialog box of this transformer model is shown in Fig 512 This dialog box also has an Attributes and a Characteristic page but the former is largely differs from the standard layout The function of the Order Label Comment and Output fields are the same as on any other component dialog boxes the meaning of the other fields are given next The pair Io Fo defines the magnetizing branch inductance at steady state Rm is the resistance of the magnetizing branch representing the hysteresis and eddy current losses of the iron core Io Fo Rm may be left blank if the magnetizing branch is neglected in the simulation Checking the 3leg core turns the transformer into a TRANSFORMER THREE PHASE type with high homopolar reluctance that can be specified in the appearing R0field With the button 3leg core unchecked the model is a saturable transformer with low homopolar reluctance eg a 3phase transformer with at least one delta winding Checking the RMS button enables specification of the saturation characteristic in rms values for current and voltage on the Characteristic page A conversion to fluxcurrent values is performed internally in ATPDraw If the button is unchecked normal fluxcurrent values should be entered The tertiary winding can be turned on or off by checking the 3wind button The nominal voltage of the transformer windings is given in volts The short circuit inductances may be specified in mH if Xopt parameter is 0 default on the ATP Settings Simulation page Otherwise the impedance is given in at frequency Xopt Windings coupled in wye delta auto with all possible phase shifts are supported In addition zigzag configuration can be selected with arbitrary phase shift from 600060 In this case the winding is split in two parts internally and the leakage inductance recalculated Fig 512 General saturable transformer dialog Advanced Manual 176 ATPDraw version 73 The Saturable 3phase object is found under Transformers in the component selection menu and it can be edited and connected to the main circuit as any other components The Help button at the lower right corner of the dialog box displays the help file associated with the SATTRAFO object This help text briefly describes the meaning of input data values Name SatTrafo General saturable transformer 3 phase 2 or 3 windings Wye Delta with all phase shifts Auto and Zigzag Card BRANCH Data Io Current A through magnetizing branch MB at steady state Fo Flux Wbturn in MB at steady state The pair Io Fo defines the inductance in MB at steady state Rm Resistance in magnetizing branch in ohm 5leg core or 3leg shell The magnetizing branch is always connected to the PRIMARY winding and Rm is referred to this voltage R0 Reluctance of zerosequence airreturn path for flux 3leg coretype Vrp Rated voltage in V primary winding only the voltage ratios matter Rp Resistance in primary winding in ohm Lp Inductance in primary winding in mH if Xopt0 Inductance in primary winding in ohm if Xoptpower freq Vrs Rated voltage in V secodary winding Rs Resistance in secondary winding in ohm Ls Inductance in secondary winding in mH if Xopt0 Inductance in secondary winding in ohm if Xoptpower freq Vrt Rated voltage in V tertiary winding Rt Resistance in tertiary winding in ohm Lt Inductance in tertiary winding in mH if Xopt0 Inductance in tertiary winding in ohm if Xoptpower freq RMS unchecked CurrentFlux characteristic must be entered checked IrmsUrms characteristic must be entered ATPDRAW performs a SATURATION calculation 3leg core checked 3leg core type transformer assumed TRANSFORMER THREE PHASE unchecked 5leg or 3leg shell type assumed TRANSFORMER 3wind turn on tertiary winding Output specified the magnetization branch output powerenergy not supported Node P Primary side 3phase node S Secondary side 3phase node PN Neutral point primary side SN Neutral point secondary side T Tertiary side 3phase node TN Neutral point tertiary side Sat Internal node connection of the magnetization circuit with saturation The coupling is specified for each winding with four coupling options Y D A Z All phase shifts are supported Special note on Autotransformers The primary and secondary windings must be of coupling Auto Special note on ZigZagtransformers For this type the user can specify a phase shift in the range 600060 Note that the values 60 0 and 60 degrees are illegal as one of the winding parts degenerates The phase shift is given relative to a Ycoupled winding If the primary winding is Zigzagcoupled all other windings will be shifted with it If the primary winding is Dcoupled 30 deg must be addedsubtracted to the phase shifts For negative phase shifts the phase A winding starts on leg 1 called z with voltage Uz and continues in the opposite direction on leg 3 called y with voltage Uy For negative phase shifts the phase A starts on leg 1 and continues in the opposite direction on leg 2 The normal situation is to specify a phase shift of 30 deg in which case the two parts of the winding have the same voltage level and leakage impedance In general the ratio between the second part of the winding Uy and the first part Uz is nUyUzsinasin60a where a is absolute value of the phase shift This gives UzUcosancos60a and UyUzn LzL1nn and LyLznn RzR1n and RyRzn where Lz and Ly are the leakage inductance of each part of the winding L is the total leakage inductance and Rz and Ry are the winding resistance of each winding part R is the total The parameters Uz Uy Zz and Zy are automatically calculated by ATPDraw based on the equivalent parameters U and Z and the phase shift a Advanced Manual ATPDraw version 73 177 Points Its possible to enter and infinite number of points on the currentflux characteristic The required menu is performed immediately after the input menu The points should be entered as increasingly larger values The point 00 is not permitted added internally in ATP RuleBook IVE12 or 3 522 Universal machines Handling of electrical machines in version 3 of ATPDraw has been updated substantially to provide a userfriendly interface for most of the electrical machine modeling options in ATP Supported Universal Machine UM types are Synchronous machine UM type 1 Induction machines UM type 3 4 DC machine UM type 8 Singlephase machine UM type 6 The component dialog box of the Universal Machine object is substantially differs to the standard dialog box layout as shown in Fig 513 In the UM component dialog box the user enters the machine data in five pages General Magnet Stator Rotor Init Several UM models are allowed with global specification of initialization method and interface These Global options can be specified under ATP Settings SwitchUM On the General page data like stator coupling and the number of d and q axis coils are specified On the Magnet page the fluxinductance data with saturation are specified while on the Stator and Rotor pages the coil data are given Init page is for the initial condition settings Fig 513 Universal machine input dialog auto init with BUSM node Advanced Manual 178 ATPDraw version 73 The dialog boxes for all the universal machines are similar The type 4 induction machine does not have the Rotor coils group since this is locked to 3 None of the type 3 and 4 induction machines have the field node of course The singlephase machine type 6 and the DC machine type 8 do not have the Stator coupling group For the type 6 machine the number of daxis is locked to 1 Even if the number of rotor coils or excitation coils can be set to maximum 3 only the first daxis coils will have external terminals for a type 1 6 and 8 machine The other coils will be short circuited Rotor coils are short circuited in case of type 3 machine while the type 4 machine has an external terminal for all its 3 coils Fig 514 shows the various pages for universal machine data input induction machine type 3 The buttons under the Saturation on the Magnet page turns onoff the various saturation parameters for the d and qaxis This is equivalent to the parameter JSATD and JSATQ in the ATP data format Selecting symm is equal to having JSATD5 and JSATQ0 total saturation option for uniform air gap On the Stator page you specify the Park transformed quantities for resistance and inductance for the armature winding The number of coils on the Rotor page and on the Init page for manual initialization adapts the specification of the number of rotor coils First the daxis coils are listed then comes the qaxis coils The function of the Order Label Comment fields are the same as on any other component dialog boxes The Help button at the lower right corner of the dialog box displays the help file associated with the UM objects With UM automatic initialization checked ATP will initialize the machine based on slip induction machines and stator voltage phasor synchronous machine For all machine types a node BUSM will appear and the user must add an AC singlephase current source with ultralow frequency to this node ATP will in the initialization give an amplitude to this equivalent torque source CurrentTorque Further the must be a connection switch or low resistance to the MNODE where the mechanical network is connected For synchronous and DC machines there will similarly appear a BUSF node where the user must add an ultralow frequency AC voltage source ATP will assign the field voltage to this source initially Advanced Manual ATPDraw version 73 179 Fig 514 Data pages of the universal machines dialog box The Help text briefly describes the meaning of input data values and node names as the example shows next for UM type 1 Synchronous machine Data General page Pole pairs Number of pole pairs Tolerance Rotorspeed iterationconvergence margin Frequency Override steady state frequency Stator coupling Select between Y Dlead AC BA CB and Dlag AB BC CA Selecting Y turns neutral node Neut on Rotor coils Specify the number of d and q axis rotor coils Maximum total number is 3 Only terminals for 1st daxis coil The other coils are assumed short circuited Global Visualization of mode of initialization and interface Set under the main menu ATPSettingsSwitchUM for each circuit Stator page Specify resistance and inductance in Park transformed Advanced Manual 180 ATPDraw version 73 quantities d q and 0 system All inductances in H or pu Rotor page The total number of coils are listed and given data on the Rotor page First the daxis coils then the qaxis coils are listed Specify resistance and inductance for each coil All the coils except the first is short circuited All inductances in H or pu Magnet page LMUD daxis magnetization inductance LMUQ qaxis magnetization inductance Turn onoff the saturation Symm is equal saturation in both axis specified only in d LMSD daxis saturated inductance FLXSD daxis fluxlinkage at the saturation knee point FLXRD daxis residual fluxlinkage at zero current LMSQ daxis saturated inductance FLXSQ qaxis fluxlinkage at the saturation knee point FLXRQ qaxis residual fluxlinkage at zero current NB All inductances in H or pu Initial page Initial conditions dependent on manual or automatic initialization is chosen under ATPSettingsSwitchUM Automatic AMPLUM initial stator coil phase voltage V ANGLUM angle of phase A stator voltage deg Manual Specify stator current in the d q and 0system Specify rotor current inn all coils OMEGM initial mechanical speed mech radsec or unit THETAM initial pos of the rotor elec rad Output TQOUT1 air gap torque 2 1 daxis common flux 3 2 daxis magnetization current OMOUT1 rotor shaft speed in radsec 2 1 qaxis common flux 3 2 qaxis magnetization current THOUTchecked rotor position in mech rad CURR checked all physical coil currents Node Stator 3phase armature output terminal MNODE airgap torque node FieldA Pos terminal of excitation rotor coil the other coils are grounded FieldB Neg terminal of excitation rotor coil BUSM torquesource node for automatic initialization BUSF fieldsource node for automatic initialization Neut Neutral point of Ycoupled stator coils The final section of the Help file describes the equivalent electrical network of the mechanical network for torque representation Shaft mass moment of inertia Capacitance 1kgm2 1 Farad Shaft section spring constant Inverse inductance 1 Nmrad 1Henry Shaft friction viscous damping Conductance 1 Nmrads 1ohm Angular speed Voltage 1 rads 1 Volt Torque Current 1 Nm 1 Amp Angle Charge 1 rad 1 Coulomb Advanced Manual ATPDraw version 73 181 L1 oooo J1 K1 J2 T C1 R1 C2 R2 O I D1 D2 C1J1 C2J2 R11D1 R21D2 L11K1 IT 523 Statisticsystematic switch Handling of statisticsystematic switches in version 3 of ATPDraw has been made more general by introducing the independentmasterslave concept The component dialog boxes of the statistical switches slightly differ however from the standard switch dialog box layout as shown in Fig 515 The user can select the Switch type in a combo box out of the supported options Independent Master or Slave This will also enable the possible input fields and change the number of nodes note that slave switch has 4 nodes The Distribution for the statistical switch takes into account the specification of the IDIST parameter on the miscellaneous switch card ATP Settings SwitchUM Selecting IDIST1 will disable the Distribution group and force Uniform distribution The OpenClose radio buttons select if the switch closes or opens with Ie as current margin for opening switches The number of ATP simulations is set by the miscellaneous switch parameter Num on the ATP Settings SwitchUM page This value influences the 1st misc data parameter NENERG of ATP ATPDraw sets the correct sign of NENERG ie 0 for statistic or 0 for systematic switch studies The function of the Order Label Comment and Output fields are the same as for any other standard components Advanced Manual 182 ATPDraw version 73 Fig 515 Dialog box of the statistic switch top and data windows of the systematic switch The Help button at the lower right corner of the dialog box displays the help file associated with the object This text briefly describes the meaning of input data values and node names as shown below SWSTAT Statistic switch Distribution Select uniform or gaussian distribution If IDIST1 under ATPSettingsSwitchUM only uniform is possible OpenClose Select if the switch closes or opens Current margin available for opening switch T Average switch opening or closing time in sec For Slave switches this is the average delay Dev Standard deviation in sec For Slave switches this is the deviation of the delay Ie Switch opens at a time TTmean and the current through the switch is less than Ie Switch type INDEPENDENT Two nodes MASTER Two nodes TARGET punched Only one is allowed SLAVE Four nodes Specify node names of MASTER switch The icon and nodes of the objects adapt the switch type setting Node SWF Start node of switch SWT End node of switch REFF Start node of the MASTER switch REFT End node of the MASTER switch SWSYST Systematic switch Tbeg When ITEST1 ATPSettingsSwitchUM Tmid When ITEST0 ATPSettingsSwitchUM Tdelay For SLAVE switches If ITEST0 TTmid INCT Size of time increment in sec NSTEP Number of time increments Switch type INDEPENDENT Two nodes MASTER Two nodes TARGET punched SLAVE Four nodes Specify node names of MASTER switch The icon and nodes of the objects adapt the switch type setting Node SWF Start node of switch SWT End node of switch REFF Start node of the MASTER switch REFT End node of the MASTER switch 524 Harmonic source The component dialog box of the Harmonic source that is used in HFS studies deviates somewhat from the standard source dialog box layout shown in Fig 488 Advanced Manual ATPDraw version 73 183 Selecting HFS under ATP Settings Simulation the ATP will run the case so many times as specified in the Harmonic source component dialog box The frequency of the harmonic source will for each ATP run be incremented The user selects the source type by the Voltage or Current radio button In the example shown here the data case will run 5 times because the Fn column has 5 harmonics entered Fig 516 Harmonic source dialog box The base frequency here is the Freq value specified under ATP Settings Simulation The amplitude and angle of the Fn th harmonic source is given in columns Ampl and Angl 525 Windsyn components Windsyn was a program by the late Gabor Furst in VancouverCanada It took manufacturers machine data as input made a fitting and produced an electrical universal machine model with startup The source code of this program is now rewritten and directly embedded in ATPDraw and in addition internal exciter and governor controls are added This facilitates the usage of electrical machines in ATPATPDraw considerably Seven electrical different machine types are supported Induction machines wound single cage double cage and deepbar rotors Synchronous machines salient rotor ddamping dqdamping round rotor dqdamping Fig 517 shows the Windsyn induction machine input dialog in ATPDraw It follows the same design as most components The input data consists of the standard Data grid to the left and a page control at the bottom On the Model page the user can select the type of machine add inertia in three different formats with a damping factor add an optional governor and perform fitting of the manufacturers data to electrical quantities The current machine number is presented to the user but this number could change as the circuit develops As default an induction machine with wound rotor is assumed If the user changes the machine type under Rotor the Data grid is automatically updated On the Startup page the user can set the startup options for the machine dependent on the machine type and initialization INITUM set under ATPSettingsSwitchUM and add an optional extra load Under Output the user can select various outputs calculated via TACS Advanced Manual 184 ATPDraw version 73 Fig 517 Windsyn dialog box in ATPDraw Fig 518 Windsyn induction machine fitting For induction machines parameters the electrical parameters can be fitted to the manufacturer data power factor efficiency slip starting and rated current starting and maximum torque with user tunable fitting factors as shown in Fig 518 The torquespeed characteristic is shown via Plot Two different and simplified Exciter Voltage or Reactive power and Governor Speed or Active power controls via TACS are also embedded as shown in Fig 519 Advanced Manual ATPDraw version 73 185 Fig 519 Windsyn Synchronous machine controls 53 Using the integrated LCC object for linecable modeling The integrated LCC objects in ATPDraw are based on the LINE CONSTANTS CABLE CONSTANTS or CABLE PARAMETERS supporting routines of ATPEMTP The user must first describe the geometry of the system and the material constants and ATPDraw then run ATP to process this data case and converts the output punchfile containing the electrical model of the line or cable into standard libfile format This libfile will then be included in the final ATPfile via a Include call The idea in ATPDraw is to hide as much as possible of the intermediate ATP execution and files and let the user work directly with geometrical and material data in the circuit Only those cases producing an electrical model of the line or cable are supported in ATPDraw Advanced Manual 186 ATPDraw version 73 The user can either model each linecable section individually or create a template that can be reused by many sections or variable length Both these approaches start with choosing an LCC object under LinesCablesLCC template as shown in Fig 520 This will display a component in the circuit window that is connected to the circuit as any other component Fig 520 Selecting a line or cable and connecting the LCC object to the rest of the circuit Clicking on the LCC component with the right mouse button will show special input dialog box called the Linecable dialog as shown in Fig 522 This window contains three sheets one for the various model specifications one for the data geometry and materials and one for nodes where experts can change node sequence The user specifies if the component should be overhead line single core or enclosing pipe cables and the number of phases and cables under the System type group This choice will directly influence the grounding conditions in cable systems The icon adapts setting of overhead linesingle core cableenclosing pipe and the number of phases Under System type the user can also check Template and Single ph icon single phase layout of icon A Template is not written to the ATPfile but its data can be used by LCC Section components This is very useful when the same cross section and model is used in many sections of variable length Embed is used to insert the linecable model directly into the final ATPfile without INSERT When the required data are specified the user can close the dialog by clicking on OK The user is also asked if ATP should be executed to produce the required punchfiles If the user answers No to this question ATP is not executed and the user is prompted again later when creating the final ATPfile under ATP run ATP You must give a name to the component Template components must have unique names since this name is used as identification by the LCC Sections Otherwise unique naming is recommended as debugging is easier in this case Advanced Manual ATPDraw version 73 187 Fig 521 LineCable dialog box Model specification View feature Fig 522 Duplicate linecable components No longer used from v73 The punchfile created by ATP with LINE CONSTANTS or CABLE PARAMETERS CONSTANTS is immediately read from disc back into the component and stored in the project When the final ATPfile is created the actual nodenames are substituted in memory Unless Embed is checked the resulting punch pch file will get the specified name followed by a unique counter number and stored in the Result Directory same as the final ATPfile If something goes wrong in the generation of an electrical model an error message appears as shown in Fig 523 Typical problems are missing or incorrect data overlapping conductors for instance You can inspect the intermediate files in the Result Directory catpdrawatp in this case File with extensions dat LINECABLE CONSTANTS or CABLE PARAMETER file and pch result that is transformed into a lib file and the same name as the linecable component should be present Advanced Manual 188 ATPDraw version 73 Fig 523 Model generation messages The data is stored internally in memory and the user can choose to export this data to an external library typically the LCC folder by clicking the Export button This data file is on a binary format and have extension alc You can click the Import button to load external data from disk The LineCable component can also be copied between project as all other components Clicking on the View button displays the cross section of the linecable as shown in Fig 521 The phase numbers with zero as ground can be displayed in a red color via ViewNumbering For cables the grounded conductors are drawn with a gray color while the ungrounded conductors are black The phase number is according to the rule of sequence first comes the cable with the highest number of conductors and the lowest cable number The thick horizontal line is the ground surface Zooming and copying to the Windows clipboard is supported in metafile formats The Verify button of the LCC dialog box helps the user to get an overview of the performance of the model in the frequency domain This feature is described separately in subsection 54 When creating a Noda linecable model the Armafit program is executed automatically to create the required libfile The Armafit command is specified under Tools Options Preferences The batch file runAFbat is distributed with ATPDraw ATPDraw supports all the various electrical models Bergeron KCLee and Clarke PI equivalents JMarti Noda and Semlyen It is straightforward to switch between different models Under System type the user can select between Overhead Line and Single Core Cable or Enclosing Pipe In the LineCable dialog the user can select between System type Model Type Overhead Line LINE CONSTANTS Single Core Cables CABLE PARAMETERS or CABLE CONSTANTS Enclosing Pipe CABLE PARAMETERS or CABLE CONSTANTS Bergeron Constant parameter KCLee or Clark PI Nominal PIequivalent short lines JMarti Frequency dependent model with constant transformation matrix Noda Frequency dependent model not supported in CABLE CONSTANTS Semlyen Frequency dependent simple fitted model The LineCable Data dialog of Fig 521 really consists of three pages Model page Line or Cable page and Node page The parameter names used in the LCC dialog boxes are identical with that of in Chapter XXI LINE CONSTANTS and Chapter XXIII CABLE CONSTANTS parts of the ATP Rule Book 3 The Standard data of the Model page is common for all line and cable types and has the following parameters Advanced Manual ATPDraw version 73 189 RhoThe ground resistivity in ohmm of the homogeneous earth Carsons theory Freq init Frequency at which the line parameters will be calculated Bergeron and PI or the lower frequency point JMarti Noda and Semlyen of parameter fitting LengthLength of overhead line in mkm or miles Set length as a text in icon option Fig 524 Standard data for all linecable models 531 Model and Data page settings for Overhead Lines For overhead transmission lines the System type settings are as follows High accuracy FCARblank is used in all cases Specify the number of phases in the Ph combo box Transposed The overhead line is assumed to be transposed if the button is checked Disabled for PI model type Auto bundling When checked this enables the automatic bundling feature of LINE CONSTANTS Skin effect If the button is checked skin effect is assumed IX4 if unchecked no skin effect correction REACT option is set IX0 MetricEnglish Switching between the Metric and English unit systems Fig 525 System type options for overhead lines Segmented ground Segmented ground wires If button is unchecked then the ground wires are assumed to be continuously grounded Real trans matrix If checked the transformation matrix is assumed to be real The eigenvectors of the transformation matrix are rotated closer to the real axis so that their imaginary part is assumed to become negligible Recommended for transient simulations Otherwise a full complex transformation matrix will be used Recommended for steady state calculations 5311 Model Type settings Bergeron No additional settings are required PI For nominal PIequivalent short lines the following optional settings exist under Data Fig 526 Optional settings for PI line models Printed output If selected the shunt capacitance series impedanceadmittance matrix of the unreduced system andor of the equivalent phase conductor Advanced Manual 190 ATPDraw version 73 system after elimination of ground wires and the bundling of conductors andor of the symmetrical components will be calculated C print out Selection between the capacitance matrix and the susceptance matrix C JMarti The JMarti line model is fitted in a frequency range beginning from the standard data parameter Freq init up to an upper frequency limit specified by the mandatory parameters number of Decades and the number of sample points per decade PointsDec The model also requires a frequency Freq matrix where the transformation matrix is calculated and a steady state frequency Freq SS for calculation of the steady state condition Freq matrix parameter should be selected according to the dominant frequency component of the transient study The JMarti model needs in some cases modification of the default fitting data under the optional Model fitting data field that can be made visible by unselecting the Use default fitting check box For further details please read in the ATP Rule Book 3 Fig 527 Parameter settings for the JMarti line model Noda The Noda line model is fitted in a frequency range beginning from the standard data parameter Freq init up to an upper frequency limit specified by the number of Decades with the resolution of PointsDec The model needs a frequency Freq veloc where the wave velocities of the natural modes of propagation are calculated A value higher than the highest frequency of the frequency scan is usually appropriate The Noda model needs in some cases modification of the default fitting data under the optional Model fitting data field that can be made visible by unselecting the Use default fitting check box For further details please read in the ATP Rule Book 3 Fig 528 Parameter settings for the Noda line model Semlyen The Semlyen line model is frequency dependent simple fitted model Fitting range begins at the standard data parameter Freq init and runs up to an upper frequency limit specified by the parameter number of Decades The model also requires a frequency Freq matrix where the transformation matrix is calculated and a steady state frequency Freq SS for calculation of the steady state condition Freq matrix parameter should be selected according to the dominant frequency component of the transient study The Semlyen model needs in some cases modification of the default fitting data under the optional Model fitting data field that can be made visible by unselecting the Use default fitting check box For more details please read in the ATP Rule Book Advanced Manual ATPDraw version 73 191 Fig 529 Parameter settings for the Semlyen line model 5312 Line Data page settings The data page contains input fields where the user can specify the geometrical or material data For overhead lines the user can specify the phase number conductor diameters bundling conductor positions as shown in Fig 530 The number of conductors is user selectable ATPDraw set the grounding automatically or gives warnings if the grounding conditions do not match the fixed number of phases You can Delete last row of the table using the gray buttons below or add a new one by clicking on the Add row command Rows inside the table can also be deleted but it must first be dragged down as last row To drag a row click on its identifier in the first column hold the button down and drag the selected row to a new location or use the and arrows at right Fig 530 Line Data dialog box of a 3phase line 4 conductorsphase 2 ground wires Phnophase number 0ground wire eliminated by matrix reduction Rin Inner radius of the conductor Only available if Skin effect check box is selected on the Model page see in Fig 525 If unselected the Rin column is removed and a React column appears where the user specifies the AC reactance of the line in ohmunit length Rout Outer radius cm or inch of the conductor RESIS Conductor resistance ohmunit length at DC with Skin effect checked or AC resistance at Freq init if no Skin effect selected Horiz Horizontal distance m or foot from the centre of bundle to a user selectable reference line Vtowervertical bundle height at tower m or foot Vmid vertical bundle height at midspan m or foot The average conductor height calculated from the eq h 23Vmid 13Vtower is used in the calculations If System type Auto bundling is checked on the Model page see Fig 525 Separ Distance between conductors in a bundle cm or inch Advanced Manual 192 ATPDraw version 73 Alpha Angular position of one of the conductors in a bundle measured counterclockwise from the horizontal line NB Number of conductors in a bundle 532 Model and Data page settings for Single Core Cable systems Support of CABLE CONSTANTS and CABLE PARAMETERS has been added to the LCC module of ATPDraw recently and the user can select between the two supporting programs by a single button switch This enables a more flexible grounding scheme support of Semlyen cable model instead of Noda and the cascade PI section On the other hand in CABLE CONSTANTS enabled state ATPDraw does not support additional shunt capacitance and conductance input and Noda model selection The CABLE CONSTANTS and CABLE PARAMETERS support in ATPDraw does not extend to the special overhead line part and the multilayer ground model For ClassA type cable systems which consists of singlecore SC coaxial cables without enclosing conducting pipe the System type settings are as follows Specify the number of phases in the Ph combo box Cables in Select if the cables are in the air on the earth surface or in ground Number of cables Specify the number of cables in the system Cable constants Selects between Cable Constants and Cable Parameters option If checked the additional conductance and capacitance option will be switched off and the Ground options on the Cable Data page will be activated The Semlyen model is supported only with Cable Constants and the Noda model only with Cable Parameters Fig 531 System type options for SC cables Matrix output Check this button to enable printout of impedance and admittance matrix data R L and C Snaking If checked the cables are assumed to be transposed Add G Check this button to allow conductance between conductors Not supported for Cable Constants Add C Check this button to allow additional capacitance between conductors Not supported for Cable Constants 5321 Model Type settings for SC cables Bergeron JMarti Noda and Semlyen The ModelType and Data settings for these SC cable models are identical with that of the overhead transmission lines as described in section 5311 Users are warned however that the frequency dependent models may produce unrealistic results due to neglecting the frequency dependency of the transformation matrix which is acceptable in overhead line modeling but not for cables Cascade PI model If the Cable Constants option is selected under the System type field the PI model supports additional input parameters to produce cascade PIequivalents The cascade PI model is described in the ATP Rule Book 3 The Homogenous type can be used with all grounding schemes Fig 532 SC cable data for cascade PI output Advanced Manual ATPDraw version 73 193 5322 Cable Data page settings for SC cables The data page contains input fields where the user can specify the geometrical or material data for cables The user can turn on sheatharmor by a single button and allowed to copy information between the cables The cable number is selected in the top combo box with a maximum number specified in Number of cables in the Model page For CABLE PARAMETERS Cable Constants unselected the Ground options are inactive and the number of grounded conductors is calculated internally in ATPDraw based on the total number of conductors in the system and the number of initially selected phases For CABLE CONSTANTS Cable Constants check box is On the user must specify which conductor is grounded by checking the appropriate Ground buttons A warning will appear if a mismatch between the number of phases and the number of ungrounded conductors is found Grounded conductors are drawn by gray color under View Selecting ViewNumbering will show the phase number in red color 0grounded The cables will be sorted internally according to the sequence rule of ATP the cable with most conductors comes first To avoid confusion and mismatch between expected phase number and conductors the user should try to follow this rule also in the CableData dialog The Nodes page allows the user to rearrange the phase sequence Fig 533 Cable Data dialog box for a 3phase SC type cable system For each of the conductors Core Sheath and Armor the user can specify the following data Rin Inner radius of conductor m Rout Outer radius of conductor m Rho Resistivity of the conductor material mu Relative permeability of the conductor material muins Relative permeability of the insulating material outside the conductor epsinsRelative permittivity of the insulating material outside the conductor semicon in Thickness of inner semiconductor layer in m semicon out Thickness of outer semiconductor layer in m The semicon parameters are used to calculate an equivalent permittivity Advanced Manual 194 ATPDraw version 73 Total radius Total radius of the cable outer insulator m SheathArmor On Turn on optional Sheath and Armor conductors Position Vertical and horizontal positions relative to ground surface and to a user selectable reference line for single core cables 533 Model and Data page settings for Enclosing Pipe type cables This selection specifies a cable system consisting of singlecore SC coaxial cables enclosed by a conducting pipe referred as ClassB type in the ATP Rule Book 3 The cable system might be located underground or in the air The System type settings are identical with that of the Class A type cables see in subsection 532 When the button Cable Constants is checked the shunt conductance and capacitance options are disabled and a new check box Ground controls the grounding condition of the pipe Transposition of the cables within the pipe is available via the Snaking button Cascade PI options can be specified similarly to SC cables see Fig 532 For cables with enclosing pipe the following Pipe data are required Fig 534 System type and Pipe data settings for an Enclosing Pipe cable Depth Positive distance in meter between pipe center and ground surface Rin Inner radius of the pipe in meter Rout Outer radius of the pipe in meter Rins Outer radius of outer insulation total radius in meter Rho Resistivity of the pipe conductor Mu Relative permeability of the pipe conductor Epsin Rel permittivity of the inner insulation between cables and pipe Epsout Rel permittivity of the outer insulation around pipe G and C Additional shunt conductance and shunt capacitance between the pipe and the cables Infinite thickness Infinite thick pipe ISYST0 and uniform grounding The cable Data page input fields for Enclosing Pipe type cable systems are identical with that of the SC cables see subsection 5322 The only difference is the meaning of Position Position Relative position to pipe center in polar coordinates distance and angle 534 Node page settings The Node page was introduced in ATPDraw version 53 Normally the user does not need to specify anything on this page It gives however access to the node names of the LCC component and offers the user to assign conductor numbers to the nodes Conductor numbering can be desirable for cables since ATP requires a special sequence in this case first comes the cores then the sheaths then the armors The cables with most conductors must be numbered internally in ATP as the first cable To avoid too much confusion the user should also try to follow this rule For Advanced Manual ATPDraw version 73 195 overhead line the user specifies the conductor number directly in the data grid and there should be no need to alter this A cable system consisting of 3 single core cables with sheaths and a fourth ground wire will as default receive an unexpected phase sequence The core of the three cables will be numbered 1 23 then the ground wire will be numbered 4 and finally the three sheaths will be numbered 56 7 This does not fit well with the 3phase layout used for this 7phase system The core of the cables will all be a part of IN1OUT1ABC but then the ground wire will become IN2AOUT2A the cable sheaths 1 and 2 will be IN2BOUT2B and IN2COUT2C and the third cable sheaths will be connected to the singlephase nodes IN3OUT3 To let the ground wire be connected to the singlephase node the conductor sequence 1235674 can be assign in the grid The View module has a Number feature that displays the conductor numbers 535 LCC Section This component LCC requires an LCC Template to be defined first The component uses the data of the template but can change its Standard data length frequency and ground resistance The component is very useful when the same linecable cross section is used in several sections of variable length as the data can be changed only in the template to affect all sections In the LCC Section dialog the user selects the name of the template to use Use As not really needed and usually sets the length of the section Fig 535 LCC Section input dialog 54 Verification of the LineCable model performance A line or cable model can be verified in two different ways Internally in the LineCable dialog there is a Verify module that supports both a frequency scan option and a power frequency calculation Externally under ATPLine Check there is a module that enables the user to select several sequential line section including transposition and perform power frequency calculations of series impedance and shunt admittance This model is better for long lines Advanced Manual 196 ATPDraw version 73 541 Internal LineCable Verify The Verify button of the LCC dialog box helps the user to get an overview of the performance of the model in the frequency domain This feature of ATPDraw enables the user to compare the linecable model with an exact PIequivalent as a function of frequency or verify the power frequency benchmark data for zeropositive short circuit impedances reactive open circuit line charging and mutual zero sequence coupling The Verify module supports two types of frequency tests 1 LINE MODEL FREQUENCY SCAN LMFS as documented in the ATP benchmark files DC5152dat The LMFS feature of ATP compares the punched electrical model with the exact frequency dependent PIequivalent as a function of a specified frequency range 2 POWER FREQUENCY CALCULATION PFC of zero and positive short circuit impedances and open circuit reactive line charging and mutual zero sequence impedance for multi circuit lines In the Verify dialog box as shown in Fig 536 the user can choose between a LINE MODEL FREQUENCY SCAN LMFS or a POWER FREQUENCY CALCULATION PFC case Under Circuit specification each phase conductor is listed for which the user should assign a circuit number The phase order for overhead lines is from the lowest phase number and up to the one assigned under Data in the LineCable dialog box For cables the cable with the highest number of conductors and the lowest cable number comes first rule of sequence ATP Rule Book Chapter XXIII A circuit number zero means that the conductor is grounded during the frequency test For the LMFS test the user must specify the frequency range Min freq and Max Freq along with the number of points per decade for the logarithmic space frequencies For the PFC test the input parameters are the power frequency and the voltage level used to calculate the reactive line charging There are ATP restrictions related the LMFS approach If the ATP simulation hangs in the verification process the user can press ESC Fig 536 Frequency range specification for the LMFS run left and selecting the line voltage and system frequency for the PFC run right a Select LMFS Clicking on OK will result in the generation of a LMFS data case called xVerifydat and execution of ATP based on the settings of the default ATP command ToolsOptionsPreferences The sources are specified in include files called xVerifyZdat xVerifyPdat and xVerifyMdat for the zero positive and mutual sequence respectively The individual circuits are tested simultaneously The receiving ends are all grounded over 01 m and all sending ends if Circuit number 0 attached to AC current sources of 1 Amps The phase angle of the applied current source for the ith conductor is 360i1n where n is the total number of conductors belonging to that circuit Phase angle for the zero sequence tests are zero The mutual coupling works only for 6phase lines For circuit one all phases are supplied with Advanced Manual ATPDraw version 73 197 zero phase angle sources while the phase conductors of the other circuit at the sending end are open The View old case button will skip creation of the LMFS data case and trace the program directly to the procedure that reads the xVerifylis file which contains the input impedances of the electrical model compared to the exact PIequivalent as function of frequency under various conditions ATPDraw can read this file and interpretation of the results is displayed in the LMFS results window as shown in Fig 538 for the 4phase JMarti linemodel specified in Fig 537 LMFS relies on simulations in ATP and there are restrictions on how many phases six can be managed If the ATP simulation hangs for some reason ATPDraw will wait in an eternal loop for it to finish Break this loop by pressing ESC Fig 537 Specification of a 4phase JMarti line model In Fig 538 the user can select the Mode and the Phase number of which the absolute value of the input impedance is displayed to the left in a loglog plot It is also possible to copy the curves to the windows clipboard in metafile format Copy wmf The absolute value of the input impedance of the model and the exact piequivalent can be compared for the following cases Zerosequence AC currents of 1 A with zero phase angle is applied to all phases simultaneously while the other end of the linecable is grounded The zerosequence impedance is thus equal to the voltage on the sending end of each phase Positive sequence AC currents of 1 A with a phase angle of 360i1n is applied to all phases where i is the current phase number in the specific circuit and n is the total number of phases in the circuit A 6phase linecircuit will result in phase angles 0 120 240 0 120 240 while a 4 phase circuit will result in 0 90 180 270 The user specifies a circuit number for each phase under Circuit specification of Verify Data dialog The receiving end is grounded Mutual sequence AC currents of 1 A with zero phase angle is applied to all phases of the first circuit while the other circuit is open The receiving ends of all phases are grounded Apparently this works only for 6phase lines Advanced Manual 198 ATPDraw version 73 Fig 538 Verifying a JMarti line model 1 Hz to 1MHz Model is OK for f 25 Hz b Select PFC For the PFC test the user must specify the power frequency and the base voltage level for scaling of the reactive charging Clicking on OK will result in the generation of a PFC data case called xVerifyFdat and execution of ATP based on the settings of the ATP Command Tools Options Preferences In this case each circuit is tested individually all other phases are left open while a specific circuit is tested The library file describing the electrical model of the linecable is included in a new ATP case an supplied by unity voltage or current sources in order to calculate the steady state short circuit impedances and open circuit reactive line charging The file xVerifyFlis is read by ATPDraw and the short circuit impedances together with the open circuit line charging is calculated in the zerosequence and positive sequence mode The results of the calculations are displayed in Fig 539 Fig 539 Results of the PFC run If the user clicks on Report the content in the string grids of Fig 539 will be dumped to a user selectable text file Further details about the operation of the Verify feature and PFC option can be found in the Appendix part of the Manual Advanced Manual ATPDraw version 73 199 542 External Line Check First the user selects the line he wants to test and then clicks on ATPLine Check as shown in Fig 540 Then the inputoutput selection dialog box shown in Fig 541 appears The LineCheck feature in ATPDraw supports up to 3 circuits ATPDraw suggests the default quantities The leftmost nodes in the circuit are suggested as the input nodes while the rightmost nodes become the output The circuit number follows the node order of the objects For all standard ATPDraw components the upper nodes have the lowest circuit number The user also has to specify the power frequency where the linecable is tested Finally the user can check the Exact phasor equivalent button which will result in a slightly better results for long line sections When the user clicks on OK in Fig 541 an ATPfile LCCLineCheckdat is created and ATP executed For a 3phase configuration 4 sequential data cases are created Z Y Z0 Y0 while for a 9phase configuration 24 cases are created Z11 Y11 Z110 Y110 Z12 Z22 Z13 Z23 Z33 since symmetry is assumed Finally the entire LISfile is scanned The calculated values are then presented in result window as shown in Fig 542 The user can switch between polar and complex coordinates and create a textfile of the result The mutual data are presented on a separate page The unit of the admittances is given in Farads or Siemens micro or nano and the user can scale all values by a factor or by the length Fig 540 Select a linecable sequence Fig 541 Specify inputs and outputs The series impedances are obtained by applying 1 A currents on the terminals and the output ends are grounded the other circuits are left open and unenergized For mutual coupling 1 A is applied at both circuits On the other hand the shunt admittances are obtained by applying a voltage source of 1 V at one terminal leaving the output end open For mutual coupling 1V is applied at one circuit while a voltage of 1E20 is applied at the other Special attention must be paid to long lines and cables This applies in particular to PI equivalents Usage of Exact phasor equivalent is recommended but is no guarantee of success No attempt is made in ATPDraw to obtain a better approximation since the linecable system to be tested in general is unknown The mutual coupling in the positive sequence system is in symmetrical cases very small and vulnerable to the approximations made Advanced Manual 200 ATPDraw version 73 Fig 542 Presentation of the LineCheck results 55 Using MODELS simulation language MODELS is a generalpurpose description language supported by a set of simulation tools for the representation and study of timevariant systems This chapter of the Manual builds on MODELS IN ATP Language Manual February 1996 4 Please consult this manual for more detailed information related to the MODELS language The MODELS language focuses on the description of the structure of a model and on the function of its elements There is a clear distinction in MODELS between the description of a model and the use of a model Individual models can be developed separately grouped in one or more libraries of models and used in other models as independent building blocks in the construction of a system The description of a model is intended to be selfdocumenting A system can be described in MODELS as an arrangement of interrelated sub models independent from one another in their internal description and in their simulation eg individual models can have different simulation time step Description of each model uses a freeformat keyworddriven syntax of local context and does not require fixed formatting in its representation The main description features of the MODELS language are the following The syntax of MODELS allows the representation of a system according to the systems functional structure supporting the explicit description of composition sequence concurrence selection repetition and replication The description of a model can also be used as the models documentation The interface of a model with the outside world is clearly specified The components of a model can be given meaningful names representative of their function A system can be partitioned into individual sub models each with a local name space The models and functions used for describing the operation of a system can be constructed in programming languages other than the MODELS language Advanced Manual ATPDraw version 73 201 ATPDraw supports only a simplified usage of MODELS In general ATPDraw takes care of the interface between MODELS and the electrical circuit INPUT and OUTPUT of the MODELS section and the execution of each model USE There can thus not be any expressions in the USE section The type of input current voltage output from model tacs etc to a Model is a property of the Models node The user must click on the nodes to set or verify correct input type Creating a new Model in ATPDraw can follow two approaches 1 The default approach Select the ModelsDefault model or open an existing mod file and let ATPDraw take care the component definitions with icon and node connections This is the preferred option and the best approach as a model typically will change during the study The icon and node positions can be edited under Edit definitions also here 2 The manual approach Select ModelsFiles modsup and choose a preexisting support file accompanied with a compatible mod file This is a relevant choice if the model is fixed during the study and the icon and node locations are crucial The new MODELS object created in this chapter is part of the ATPDraws example file Exa14acp In this example the harmonic content of the line current on the 132 kV supply side of an industrial plan using a 24 pulse ACDC converter is calculated by MODELS 551 The default approach Add a new Model to your circuit by selecting MODELSDefault model from the selection menu A simple Model will appear with the standard Model dialog shown as shown in Fig 543 Now click on the Edit button and type in your model script import a text from file with FileImport or paste in a text from the Windows clipboard Anyway this is the hard part of the process All INPUT OUTPUT DATA and VAR can be indexed For INPUTS and OUTPUTS there is a maximum upper index limit of 26 AZ phase extension of node names The low index has to be unity Indexed data is also allowed and these are then split in x1 x2 etc There is no limitation on the number of data Instead of starting with the Default model the user could also paste in a Model from the same or another circuit Fig 543 Component dialog of the Default Model Click on Done when the edit process is completed ATPDraw will then examine the Model description and identify the InputOutputData declarations If the number of input or outputs have Advanced Manual 202 ATPDraw version 73 changed the icon is recreated Inputs are positioned on the left side and Outputs on the right side from top to bottom A message box then appears as shown in Fig 544 Typically you should choose not to edit the file but if you choose Yes the Edit definitions dialog appears where you can relocate the nodes and change the icon This might be a tricky process though Anyway you can whenever click on Edit definitions an do this job later If you click on No you will return to an updated Component dialog box as shown in Fig 545 Fig 544 Identification of the Model text Fig 545 Component dialog of the FOURIER model In the Models section in Fig 545 you must also specify the Use As name for USE model AS modelname statement of MODELS Record of local variable is also available in this section 552 The MODELS editor The Models Editor is built on the commercial TMSsoftware TadvMemo component This provides better syntax highlighting features as the notoriously slow native Windows control RichEdit is bypassed The syntax of the MODELS language is described in ATPDraw as required by the component The MODELS editor shown in Fig 546 has now a gutter with line numbers and a grey line at column 80 for visualization of maximum ATP line width ATPDraw will wrap long lines though Advanced Manual ATPDraw version 73 203 5521 Highlighter The highlighter differentiates between Comments green italic this is a comment Keywords black bold INPUT EXEC for if Functions blue cos recip sqrt Numbers red 2 50 1e3 Operatorsparenthesis purple Texts teal BEGIN WRITE W1RELAY21P In ATPDraw v70 the user is only allowed to turn onoff highlighting and not edit the appearance Fig 546 MODELS editor in ATPDraw v7 5522 UndoRedo The undoredo mechanism is substantially extended by default in the TadvMemo component with an infinite number of undoredo steps compared to just a single step in ATPDraw v6 5523 Indent and codefolding Autoindent is to start the new line in the same column as the previous after a carriage return There are also menu options to indent or unindent a selected block of code in steps of two characters Codefolding is an option to collapse or open a group of code lines between sections line INIT ENDINIT ifendif forendfor EXECENDEXEC etc This can be useful for large MODELS codes Codefolding can be turned onoff by the user Advanced Manual 204 ATPDraw version 73 Fig 547 Edit menu in MODELS editor Fig 548 Code folding in MODELS editor 5524 Insert menu The MODELS editor contains a complete context menu right mouse click for insertion of MODELS controls and functions Fig 549 Insert function examples context menu rightclick in Editor Among the most useful Insert is the Calculus in the Math functions This contains the special limiter syntax and a reminder about History declaration Advanced Manual ATPDraw version 73 205 Fig 550 Insert calculus functions with illustration of limited laplace 5525 Debugger ATPDraw does not implement a MODELS parser since this would be a large and very difficult task Instead the existing debugging feature of ATP is utilized The Debugger is built on adding a model called TESTER in the background This TESTER model acts as a source with number of outputs corresponding to the number of inputs of the model being tested In the DebugTest setup each of the inputs and data can be controlled by the user while under DebugSyntax default values are used A test case with the name of the model plus debugdat is created in the ResultDir folder and run in ATP ATP will then in the LISfile report error messages that usually can be identified by ATPDraw For syntax errors ATP will write a string of compact interpreted code and stop just prior to an error ATPDraw will compare this code with its own compacted version of the tested model to identify the for now faulty line number Only the first syntax error is detected Difficulties in syntax error checking is that ATP does not report the exact error but only part of the correct code in front of the error It is particularly difficult to detect missing end parenthesis or end of sections like endfor endif etc properly In models with repetitive sections the debug information provided by ATP does not uniquely define the error and misinterpretation is theoretically possible 5526 Debug example This example shows how to utilize the Debug feature in the new Models Editor A model used for a voltage source inverter control is used as an example The header of the model is shown in the listing below The full model is shown in appendix It has 1 input and 3 data The TESTER model will thus have 1 output MODEL HARMONICS comment This model calculates the harmonics up to maximum order 26 of a time varying signal X based on a DFT algorithm in a moving window Scale1 output of peak quantities endcomment INPUT X input signal to be transformed DATA FREQ DFLT50 power frequency Advanced Manual 206 ATPDraw version 73 n DFLT26 number of harmonics to calculate Scale DFLT1 scaling of the harmonics values OUTPUT absH126 angH126H0 Harmonic outputs H0 is DC comp VAR absH126 angH126H0reH126 imH126iNSAMPLOMEGA DF1F2F3F4 HISTORY X DFLT0 55261 DebugSyntax The TESTER model will consist of 1 output cosine signal with amplitude of unity and a phase displacement of 3601360 degrees The entire TESTER model is shown in the listing below The data of the model will be set to the values specified otherwise default values are used zero if nothing is specified and the model is not initialized MODEL TESTER OUTPUT out11 VAR out11 EXEC for i1 to 1 do out11cos2pit500360 endfor ENDEXEC ENDMODEL Fig 551 shows the case where a syntax error is introduced by using a wrong parenthesis instead of and how the debugger responds to this by underlining line 28 and displaying Syntax error found in line 28 in the footer bar Fig 551 Debugger indicate line with syntax error Advanced Manual ATPDraw version 73 207 55262 DebugTest In DebugTest all inputs and data of the models are automatically listed as shown in Fig 552 For Inputs the user can specify a cosine function with amplitude frequency and phase angle For Data the user can specify a constant Default values equal to what is used under DebugSyntax are initially suggested After specifying the Inputs and Data the user should click on Run This will display possible error messages from the LISfile in the field below not only syntax errors but also undefined variables or functions Clicking Plot will open the plotting program with the generated pl4 file containing all outputs Clicking Show syntax error will go back to the Models Editor and underline the line with an error Fig 552 Model DebugTest dialog Specification of inputs and data The actual model file describing the calculation of harmonics is shown below MODEL HARMONICS comment This model calculates the harmonics up to maximum order 26 of a time varying signal X based on a DFT algorithm in a moving window Scale1 output of peak quantities endcomment INPUT X input signal to be transformed DATA FREQ DFLT50 power frequency n DFLT26 number of harmonics to calculate Scale DFLT1 scaling of the harmonics values OUTPUT absH126 angH126H0 Harmonic outputs H0 is DC comp VAR absH126 angH126H0reH126 imH126iNSAMPLOMEGA DF1F2F3F4 HISTORY X DFLT0 DELAY CELLS DFLT 1FREQtimestep2 INIT OMEGA 2PIFREQ NSAMPL1FREQtimestep H00 Advanced Manual 208 ATPDraw version 73 FOR i1 to 26 DO reHi0 imHi0 absHi0 angHi0 ENDFOR ENDINIT EXEC f1delayXNSAMPL1timestep1 f2delayXNSAMPLtimestep1 f3delayXtimestep1 f4X H0H0f4f3f2f12NSAMPL FOR i1 to n DO D1iPIf4f2siniOMEGATf3f1siniOMEGATtimestep f4f3f2f1timestepiOMEGA cosiOMEGATcosiOMEGATtimestep reHireHiD D1iPIf4f2cosiOMEGATf3f1cosiOMEGATtimestep f4f3f2f1timestepiOMEGA siniOMEGATsiniOMEGATtimestep imHiimHiD absHisqrtreHi2imHi2Scale IF absimHi1E10 THEN angHi0 ELSE angHiatan2imHireHi ENDIF ENDFOR ENDEXEC ENDMODEL 553 The manual approach You can create an external support file in two ways Either by click on Edit definitions is the Component dialog of your Model and then click on Save As preferable to the MOD directory This will simply give you a copy of your Model component The other way is to go via LibraryNew objectModel supfile and create a support file from scratch Both these options use the Edit definitions dialog The result is a support file that you load via MODELSFiles supmod The manual approach requires that you have the mod file finished or at least you need to know the number and name of all input outputs and data Enter the Library menu and select the New objectsModel supfile This menu item will perform the Edit definitions dialog In the Standard data field you specify the size of the model number of nodes and number of data as shown in Fig 553 The FOURIERMOD text has four nodes 1 input 3 outputs and two data FREQ n so you must enter 4 and 2 in the Num fields Fig 553 Specify the size of the model After you have specified the node and data values go to the tabbed notebook style part of the dialog box Select the Data page where you specify the values shown in Fig 554 The Name of the data must be the same as those used in the DATA declaration part of the mod file The Advanced Manual ATPDraw version 73 209 Default value appears initially in the models dialog The default values are taken from the Use Model statements in DC68DAT you can of course change these values individually for each use of the model Min and Max restrict the legal input range No restriction is applied here to data values so MinMax Param is set to 1 which means that variable text string can be assigned to the data value Digits is the maximum number of digits allowed in the ATP input file Fig 554 Specify Data parameters After you have specified the data values click on the Nodes tab to enter to the node window as shown in Fig 555 The Name identifies the node in the Node and Component input dialogs The name you enter here must be the same as those used in the INPUT and OUTPUT declaration sections of the mod file The Position field is the node position on the icon border as shown at the right AltF1F12 are short keys but other positions 120120 is possible The Kind value specifies the inputoutput type of the node Number of Phases must be set to match the array size of the inputoutputs Fig 555 Specifying Node attributes Supported Kind values for MODELS objects are 0 Output node 3 Switch status input node 1 Current input node 4 Machine variable input node 2 Voltage input node 5 TACS variable tacs 6 Imaginary part of steadystate node voltage imssv 7 Imaginary part of steadystate switch current imssi 8 Output from other model 9 Global ATP variable The Kind parameter of model object nodes can be changed later in the Node dialog box input field Type as shown in Fig 556 This window appears when the user clicks on a Model node with the right mouse button Fig 556 Model node dialog box Advanced Manual 210 ATPDraw version 73 Note If a model output is used as input to another model the outputting model must be USEd in the ATP file before the receiving model This can be done by selecting EditArrangeSort all Models sorting manually in the SidebarProjectObject tree or by specifying a lower Order number for the outputting model and selecting the Sorting by Order option under ATP Settings Format or SidebarSimulation Model objects also have an icon which represents the object on the screen and an optional help which describes the meaning of parameters If no user supplied help text was given the Help Viewer displays the model definition file mod automatically If you really need a help text this feature can be overridden by opening the Help Editor with the button at the righthand side of the dialog box The Icon Editor appears similarly by clicking on the button In this case Bitmap icon style is chosen Here you can be creative and draw a suitable icon for the new model object When you finished select the Done menu item Fig 557 The icon of the new model objects The Save or Save As buttons can be used to save the new support file to disk Default location of Model support files is the MOD folder The sup file does not need to have the same name as the model file but it is recommended The new model object has now been created is ready for use You can reload and modify the support file of the model objects whenever you like Selecting MODELS Files supmod in the component selection menu performs an Open Model dialog box where you can choose a model support file If you select the file FOURIERSUP the icon of the new model appears immediately in the circuit window and it can be connected with other object in normal way The input and output interface for MODELS objects the use of the model and interfacing it with the rest of the circuit are handled automatically by ATPDraw The model description is written directly in the ATP input file Blank lines are removed when inserting the mod file The general structure of the MODELS section in an atp input file is shown below MODELS INPUT M0001A iHVBUSA OUTPUT X0027A X0027B X0027Z X0028A Advanced Manual ATPDraw version 73 211 X0028B X0028Z XX0029 MODEL FOURIER Description of the model Complete copy of the FOURIERMOD is pasted here ENDMODEL USE FOURIER AS FOURIER INPUT X M0001A DATA FREQ 50 N 26 OUTPUT X0027AABSF1 X0027BABSF2 X0027ZABSF26 X0028AANGF1 X0028BANGF2 X0028ZANGF26 XX0029F0 ENDUSE 554 Recording internal MODELS variables ATPDraw supports the RECORD feature of MODELS to record any internal variable of a model object in the pl4 output The selection of internal variables is done by clicking the Record button in Fig 545 This will bring of the Record dialog shown in Fig 558 The available variables VAROUTPUT is shown in the list to the left Select the desired variable and click the button The Record field to the right is a free format text field that allows you to easily edit the AS name In the case of indexed variables you also need to specify the index as well shown as reF5 Remove the variable from the Record list by the button The Outputs from a Model can alternatively be recorded with the Model Probe as shown to the right in Fig 558 Fig 558 Record of model variables Right Models Probe connected to Output node Advanced Manual 212 ATPDraw version 73 56 BCTRAN support in ATPDraw ATPDraw provides a userfriendly interface for the BCTRAN transformer matrix modeling to represent single and threephase two and three winding transformers After the user has entered the open circuit and short circuit factory test data the ATPDraw calls ATP and executes a BCTRAN supporting routine Finally ATPDraw includes the punchfile into the ATPfile The windings can be Y D or Auto coupled with support of all possible phase shifts The nonlinear magnetization branch can optionally be added externally Fig 559 shows the BCTRAN dialog box which appears when the user selects BCTRAN under Transformers of the component selection menu Under Structure the user specifies the number of phases the number of windings the type of core not supported yet except for single phase cores triplex and threephase shell type and the test frequency The dialog box format adapts the number of windings and phases The user can also request the inverse L matrix as output by checking AR output An Autoadd nonlinearities button appears when an external magnetizing branch is requested Fig 559 The BCTRAN dialog box Under Ratings the linevoltage rated power and type of coupling must be specified Supported winding Connections are A autotransformer Y wye and D delta The Phase shift menu adapts these settings with all types of phase shifts supported If the connection is A or Y the rated voltage is automatically divided by 3 to get the winding voltage VRAT Auto Trafo by ATP should be checked in case of Autotransformers using a new 2015 ATP version as ATP was at some point modified to autocorrect autotransformer test reports Under Factory tests the user can choose either the Open circuit test or the Short circuit test Under the Open circuit tab the user can specify where the factory test has been performed and where to connect the excitation branch In case of a three winding transformer one can choose Advanced Manual ATPDraw version 73 213 between the HV LV and the TV winding Normally the lowest voltage is preferred but stability problems for deltaconnected nonlinear inductances could require the lowest Yconnected winding to be used Up to 6 points on the magnetizing curve can be specified The excitation voltage and current must be specified in and the losses in kW With reference to the ATP Rule Book the values at 100 voltage is used directly as IEXPOSCurr and LEXPOSLoss kW One exception is if External Lm is chosen under Positive core magnetization In this case only the resistive current is specified resulting in IEXPOSLoss10 SPOS where SPOS is the Power MVA value specified under Ratings of the winding where the test has been performed If zerosequence open circuit test data are also available the user can similarly specify them to the right The values for other voltages than 100 can be used to define a nonlinear magnetizing inductanceresistance This is set under Positive core magnetization a Specifying Linear internal will result in a linear core representation based on the 100 voltage values b Specifying External LmRm the magnetizing branch will be omitted in the BCTRAN calculation and the program assumes that the user will add these components as external objects to the model c Specifying External Lm will result in calculation of a nonlinear magnetizing inductance first as an IrmsUrms characteristic then automatically transformed to a currentfluxlinked characteristic by means of an internal SATURAlike routine The current in the magnetizing inductance is calculated as 3 3 10 2 2 kV V Loss kW SPOS MVA Curr A I ref rms where Vref is actual rated voltage specified under Ratings divided by 3 for Y and Auto connected transformers The user can choose to Autoadd nonlinearities under Structure and in this case the magnetizing inductance is automatically added to the final ATPfile as a Type98 inductance ATPDraw connects the inductances in Y or D dependent on the selected connection for actual winding for a 3phase transformer In this case the user has no control on the initial state of the inductors If more control is needed for instance to calculate the fluxlinked or set initial conditions Autoadd nonlinearities should not be checked The user is free to create separate nonlinear inductances however The Copy button at the bottom of the dialog box allows the user to copy the calculated nonlinear characteristic to an external nonlinearity What to copy is selected under ViewCopy To copy the fluxlinkedcurrent characteristic used in Type93 and Type98 inductances Lmflux should be selected The Short circuit data can be specified as shown in Fig 560 With reference to the ATP Rule Book Imp is equal to ZPOS Pow MVA is equal to SPOS and Loss kW is equal to P These three values are specified for all the windings If zerosequence short circuit factory test data are also available the user can similarly specify them to the right of the positive sequence values after selecting the Zero sequence data available check box Fig 560 Short circuit factory test data If Autotransformer is selected for the primary and secondary winding HVLV the impedances must be recalculated according to Eq 645 646 650 of the EMTP Theory Book 5 This task is performed by ATPDraw and the values ZH L ZL T and ZH T are written to the BCTRANfile automatically Advanced Manual 214 ATPDraw version 73 L H L T L L H H T H L H L H H L H T L T T L L H H H L H L V V V z V V V z V V V V z z z z V V V z z 2 2 where ZLH ZLT and ZHT are the shortcircuit impedances Imp referenced to a common PowMVA base ATP was at some point modified to autocorrect autotransformer test reports and in this case Auto Trafo by ATP should be checked to bypass the ATPDraws correction When the user clicks on OK the data is stored in memory with the project Then the user is offered to generate a BCTRAN model via execution of ATP This is optional since often a new BCTRAN model will be required anyway during the final ATPfile generation Trying to run ATP is a good practice however since this will quickly warn the user about possible problems The button Run ATP requests an ATP execution without leaving the dialog box If the BCTRANfile is correct a punchfile will be created This file is directly included in the final ATPfile and there is no conversion to a library file as for linescables This means in practice that a new BCTRAN model will be created and ATP executed automatically when creating the final ATPfile each time the transformers node names change If the user clicks Export the data is stored in a binary disk file with extension bct preferably in the BCT folder There is also an Import button available to import existing BCTfiles The user can also store the BCTfile with a different name Save As which is useful when copying BCTRAN objects The View and Copy buttons are for the nonlinear characteristic Copy transfers the selected characteristic to the Windows clipboard in text format with 16 characters fixed columns the first column is the current View displays the nonlinear characteristic in a standard View Nonlin window The Help button at the lower right corner of the dialog box displays the help file associated with the BCTRAN object This help text briefly describes the meaning of input data values 1 Excitation test data Specified under Factory testOpen circuit The data required by BCTRAN are FREQ Test frequency under Structure IEXPOS Curr for the 100 voltage value in Open circuit Positive sequence Loss for the 100 voltage value divided by 10SPOS when External Lm requested SPOS Power under Ratings for winding specified under Performed at LEXPOS Loss for the 100 voltage value in Open circuit Positive sequence IEXZERO Curr for the 100 voltage value in Open circuit Zero sequence SZERO Power under Ratings for winding specified under Performed at LEXZERO Loss for the 100 voltage value in Open circuit Zero sequence The above input values can be derived from the factory test data as shown next IEXPOS IexV100SPOS for single phase IEXPOS Iex3V100SPOS for 3phase where Iex kA excitation current V kV excitation voltage SPOSMVA power base IEXZERO 0 for single phase IEXZERO 13Iexh3V100SZERO for 3phase where Iexh kA zerosequence excitation current SPOSMVA power base normally equal to SPOS Yconnected windings typical values 3leg core type IEXZERO IEXPOS 5leg core type IEXZERO 4IEXPOS 2 Winding cards Specified under Ratings The data required by BCTRAN are Advanced Manual ATPDraw version 73 215 VRAT LL voltage kV for Dconnection or single phase transformers LL voltage kV divided by 3 for A Auto and Y connections 3phase only BUS1 The present node names of the transformer component in ATPDraw BUS6 taking the connection and Phase shift deg into account Renaming the nodes will require a new BCTRAN execution performed automatically upon ATPRun ATP or Make File 3 Short circuit test data Specified under Factory test Short circuit The data required by BCTRAN are Pij Loss kW under Short circuit Positive sequence ZPOSij Imp under Short circuit Positive sequence SPOS Pow MVA under Short circuit Positive sequence ZZEROij Imp under Short circuit Zero sequence SZERO Pow MVA under Short circuit Zero sequence The short circuit input data can be derived from the factory test reports as shown next ZPOSij UsiIsiSPOSVri2100 for single phase ZPOSij Ush3IshSPOSVri2100 for 3phase where Usi kV shortcircuit voltage at winding i Isi kA nominal current at winding i SPOSMVA power base Vri kV rated line voltage at winding i ZZEROij 0 for single phase ZZEROij UshIshSZEROVri2300 for 3phase where SZEROMVA power base Zerosequence tests must be performed with open Deltawindings The BCTRAN component is found under Transformers BCTRAN in the component selection menu and it can be edited and connected to the main circuit as any other component The data specified in Fig 559 will result in an icon at left with 3 threephase terminals and one singlephase neutral point common to the primary and secondary autotransformer windings The label shows the transformer connection 57 Hybrid Transformer XFMR This component called XFMR was first added to version 42 of ATPDraw in June 2005 The model is further improved in several steps by extensive debugging The XFMR component is an implementation and extension of the work performed by Prof Bruce Mork at Michigan Tech and his coworkers Francisco GonzalezMolina and Dmitry Ishchenko This project called Parameter Estimation and Advanced Transformer Models for EMTP Simulations was sponsored by Bonneville Power Administration A series of report documents this work and his here used as references MTU4 MTU6 and MTU7 The implementation in ATPDraw was also funded by BPA 571 Overview The principle of the modeling is to derive a topologically correct model with the core connected to an artificial winding on the core surface Individual magnetizing branches are established for the yokes and legs dependent on their relative length and area normally a value within limited range A key feature is that magnetization is assumed to follow the Frolich equation which is fitted to Test Report data using the Gradient Method optimization This improves extreme saturation behavior since linear extrapolation above the Test Report data is avoided The leakage inductance Aa0d11 BCT A A Advanced Manual 216 ATPDraw version 73 is modeled with an inverse inductance matrix Amatrix following the BCTRAN approach as documented in the Theory Book p 621 Shunt capacitances and frequency dependent winding resistance is also considered The transformer model consists of four parts as shown in Fig 561 Inductance Leakage reactance Amatrix Resistance Winding resistance Rf Capacitance Shunt capacitance Cmatrix Core Individual magnetization and losses for legs and yokes Fig 561 Duality model for a 3phase twowinding transformer from MTU4 The XFMR component support three sources of data Design parameters Winding and core geometry and material properties Test report Standard Test Report data like in BCTRAN Capacitances and frequency dependent resistance added Typical values Typical text book values based on transformer ratings Be careful with this as both design and material properties have changed a lot the last decades The overall node structure of the XFMR component in the final ATP file is shown in Fig 562 Advanced Manual ATPDraw version 73 217 Fig 562 Node structure in the ATPfile This component can be connected as any other component in the circuit with the following exceptions In both these cases switches should be used in order to maintain unique node names It is not legal to ground nodes directly It is not correct to connect several components to the same bus 572 XFMR dialog box The advance Hybrid Transformer component XFMR is found under Transformers in the selection menu The model support 3phase transformers with 2 to 4 windings coupled as Wye Delta Auto or Zigzag All possible phase shifts are supported Triplex single phase bank 3 and 5legged stacked cores and shell form cores are supported The dialog box is shown in Fig 563 All the input fields in the dialog box change dynamically with the users selection of the number of windings and type of core Advanced Manual 218 ATPDraw version 73 Fig 563 The XFMR component dialog box When the user presses OK the electrical model data A and C matrices R and Core are calculated and stored internally The calculation of the core model might take up to one minute and a progress bar is shown the user can press ESC to stop the calculation The data can be exported Export button to an external library file xfm for later import but also copied between projects Using the Import button it is possible to load a previously created xfm file Twelve radio buttons are available under Structure and Data based on that enables the user to set the source of data individually for each part of the model Click the right mouse button to omit the part completely inductance cannot be omitted Inductance Resistance Capacitance and Core Under Type of core the user can select the core configuration Triplex single phase bank 3 and 5 legged stacked and shell form cores Shellform B are supported The type of core will influence the structure and calculation process of the core model A 5legged core will have a saturation characteristic also for the outer legs while in the case of a 3legged core this is replaced by a constant inductance representing the zerosequence behavior Under Ratings Connections the user must specify the linetoline voltage in kV the rated power of the transformer MVA and the type of coupling and phase shift for each winding These settings all refer to the Primary P Secondary S and Tertiary T notation P is on the left side S on the right side and T on the top side of the transformer icon There is no restrictions on the voltage levels here Advanced Manual ATPDraw version 73 219 The phaseshift referred to the primary winding is specified in the dropdown list Only possible phaseshifts are listed except for Zigzag transformer with arbitrary phase shifts in 600 and 060 The sequence of the winding on the core leg is set in the combo box Winding sequence This is used establish the artificial winding where the core should be connected If this sequence is unknown then remember that the inner winding usually has the lowest voltage When the Ext neutral connections button is checked all neutral points become 3phase nodes that the user has to connect in the circuit manually allows measurement of individual phase currents in the neutral For design data the user must input the geometry and material data of the winding and core For the core the user must choose a magnetic material The list of available material data is very limited and only relatively new characteristics are included This means that a modeling of an old transformer using this approach would result in too low core losses Uncertain aspects of the design data are the core losses and the zerosequence data especially for 3legged transformers For test report data ATPDraw has an embedded BCTRANlike routine for calculation of the A matrix and winding resistance R The core model is established by fitting the measured excitation currents and losses The user can specify 9 points on an excitation characteristic Some Insert and Delete buttons are available ATPDraw will also sort the points by increasing voltage level If the current and core loss do not increase with voltage an error message is displayed For typical values some estimation is made based on textbook tables using the rated voltage and power In the Typical data page there is a button Edit reactances Edit resistances Edit capacitances or Edit magnetization When the user check this button ATPDraw calculates the typical values based on the rated quantities and display the typical values The values are then locked To update the values based on a new setting of rated values the user must uncheck the button There are basically two levels of sophistication available The default level requires no user input at all the inductance resistance capacitance and core data is calculated based on typical values from tables The user is allowed to specify a few data to improve the guessing type of cooling for inductances unknownforced air coupling factor for capacitances and rated magnetic field intensity Bmax loss density Pmax and basic insulation level for core modeling The user can examine the internally calculated data by checking an Edit button this also enables the second level Once the button is checked the data are no longer updated when the rated voltage or power is changed At the second level the user can directly specify the data Some buttons are available for viewing the winding and core design If these buttons are checked a separate ontop window pops up with the information required to specify the input correctly The Configuration image changes with the number and type of winding and the core type The figures are fixed and are not scaled with the user specified dimensions Click on the Settings button on the core page to set some parameters for the core model This will bring up the Advanced core settings dialog An important setting is the points in saturation the internal core model based on the Frolich equation 2 or 3 parameter option is fitted to the test report with a fast Gradient optimization method by minimizing the different between the measured and calculated rms currents This is then converted to a piecewise linear characteristic type 93 or 98 inductors assuming a certain number of points Type 96 hysteretic inductors are also supported and in this case half the core loss is assumed to be hysteresis losses and the core loss is in general assumed to be proportional to the square of the flux density Initialization is challenging for the type 96 inductors and ramping up the power supply with a controlled source Advanced Manual 220 ATPDraw version 73 might be necessary at least for a 5legged core A very important parameter for inrush studies is the final slope inductance La Design parameters are required here and 2 0 a leg leg L N A l Fig 564 The Advanced core settings dialog 58 Creating new circuit objects in ATPDraw The user specified objects USP are either customized standard objects or objects created for the use of INCLUDE and DATA BASE MODULARIZATION feature of ATPEMTP The Objects User Specified New supfile menu enables the user to create a new support file for such a user specified object or customize datanode properties and the icon or the help text of an existing one The number of nodes and data specified in the Edit Object dialog box for USP objects must be in line with the ARG and NUM declarations in the header section of the Data Base Module DBM file The number of data must be in the range of 0 to 36 and the number of nodes in the range of 0 to 12 The USP support files are normally located in the USP folder Two new circuit objects will be created in this section a 6pulse controlled thyristorrectifier bridge that is used as building block for simulating a 12pulse HVDC station Exa6acp in section 63 of the Application Manual and a generator stepup transformer model with winding capacitances and hysteretic core magnetism included The latter object is used in a transformer inrush current study Exa11acp in section 652 of the Application Manual 581 Creating a 6phase rectifier bridge The Data Base Module DBM file shown next describes a 6pulse thyristor rectifier bridge based on exercise 54 in 2 The process of creating a DBMfile is certainly the most difficult part of adding new circuit objects to ATPDraw The input file to the DBM supporting routine of ATP begins with a header declaration followed by the circuit description The ATP Rule Book 3 chapter XIXF explains in detail how to create such a file The output punchfile of the DBM supporting routine can actually be considered as an external library file which is included to the ATP simulation at run time via a INCLUDE call Advanced Manual ATPDraw version 73 221 BEGIN NEW DATA CASE NOSORT DATA BASE MODULE ERASE ARGUPOSNEGREFPOSREFNEGANGLERsnubCsnub NUMANGLERsnubCsnub DUMPULS1PULS2PULS3PULS4PULS5PULS6MID1MID2MID3 DUMGATE1GATE2GATE3GATE4GATE5GATE6VACRAMP1COMP1 DUMDCMP1DLY60D TACS 11DLY60D 002777778 90REFPOS 90REFNEG 98VAC REFPOSREFNEG 98RAMP158UNITY 12000 00 10VAC 98COMP1 RAMP1ANGLE180 AND UNITY 98DCMP154COMP1 50E3 98PULS1 NOT DCMP1 AND COMP1 98PULS254PULS1 DLY60D 98PULS354PULS2 DLY60D 98PULS454PULS3 DLY60D 98PULS554PULS4 DLY60D 98PULS654PULS5 DLY60D 98GATE1 PULS1 OR PULS2 98GATE2 PULS2 OR PULS3 98GATE3 PULS3 OR PULS4 98GATE4 PULS4 OR PULS5 98GATE5 PULS5 OR PULS6 98GATE6 PULS6 OR PULS1 BRANCH VINTAGE0 POSUA Rsnub Csnub POSUBPOSUA POSUCPOSUA UANEGPOSUA UBNEGPOSUA UCNEGPOSUA SWITCH 11UAPOS GATE1 11UBPOS GATE3 11UCPOS GATE5 11NEGUA GATE4 11NEGUB GATE6 11NEGUC GATE2 BEGIN NEW DATA CASE C C in the 1st column is mandatory here PUNCH BEGIN NEW DATA CASE BLANK The header section of the DBMfile starts with an ARG declaration after the special ATP request card DATA BASE MODULE Its function is to specify the external variables numerical node names and the sequence of arguments for the INCLUDE procedure The NUM card tells what arguments are numerical DUM card lists the dummy or local variables which are typically internal node names ATP gives dummy nodes a unique name and thus let you use the same DBMfile several times in a data case avoiding node name conflicts The rest of the DBMfile describes the rectifier bridge in a normal ATP data structure except that sorting cards TACS BRANCH SWITCH etc are used in a special way Sorting cards are required but no BLANK TACS BLANK BRANCH etc indicators are needed The 3phase thyristor bridge has a 3phase AC input node and two single phase DC output nodes The firing angle is taken as input data and the snubber parameters are also practical to consider as numerical input to the model The model created here accepts external reference signals for the Advanced Manual 222 ATPDraw version 73 zero crossing detector alternatively the DBM module file could have detected its own AC input thus the new USP object will have 5 nodes and 3 data U The AC 3phase node POS The positive DC node NEG The negative DC node REFPOS Positive reference node REFNEG Negative reference node ANGLE The firing angle of the thyristors Rsnub The resistance in the snubber circuits Csnub The capacitance in the snubber circuits Note the importance of the number of characters used for each parameter The U parameter has only 5 characters because it is a 3phase node and the extensions A B and C are added inside the DBMfile Underscore characters has been used to force the variables to occupy the 6 characters space for node names and 6 columns VINTAGE 0 for the snubber data Running the DBMfile through ATP will produce a pch punch file shown below KARD 3 4 5 6 6 6 7 7 8 8 8 9 9 10 10 10 11 11 11 12 12 12 13 13 13 14 14 14 15 15 15 16 16 16 17 17 17 18 18 18 19 19 19 20 20 20 21 21 21 24 24 24 24 25 25 25 25 26 26 26 26 27 27 27 27 28 28 28 28 29 29 29 29 31 31 31 32 32 32 33 33 33 34 34 34 35 35 35 36 36 36 KARG20 4 5 4 5161617 617181819 11819 1 220 2 320 3 420 4 520 5 620 1 210 2 311 3 412 4 513 5 614 1 615 1 2 7 8 1 1 2 2 1 1 2 2 1 1 2 3 1 1 2 3 1 1 2 3 1 2 10 1 212 1 214 1 313 1 315 1 311 KBEG 3 3 3 12 19 3 69 3 20 13 3 12 3 3 32 19 12 3 69 12 3 69 12 3 69 12 3 69 12 3 69 13 25 3 13 25 3 13 25 3 13 25 3 13 25 3 25 13 3 9 3 27 39 9 21 3 15 9 21 3 15 3 21 15 9 3 21 15 9 3 21 15 9 3 9 65 3 9 65 3 9 65 9 3 65 9 3 65 9 3 65 KEND 8 8 8 17 24 8 74 8 25 18 8 17 8 8 37 24 17 8 74 17 8 74 17 8 74 17 8 74 17 8 74 18 30 8 18 30 8 18 30 8 18 30 8 18 30 8 30 18 8 13 8 32 44 13 25 8 20 13 25 8 20 7 25 20 14 7 25 20 14 7 25 20 14 7 14 70 7 14 70 7 14 70 13 8 70 13 8 70 13 8 70 KTEX 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 0 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 0 0 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 ERASE TACS 11DLY60D 002777778 90REFPOS 90REFNEG 98VAC REFPOSREFNEG 98RAMP158UNITY 12000 00 10VAC 98COMP1 RAMP1ANGLE180 AND UNITY 98DCMP154COMP1 50E3 98PULS1 NOT DCMP1 AND COMP1 98PULS254PULS1 DLY60D 98PULS354PULS2 DLY60D 98PULS454PULS3 DLY60D 98PULS554PULS4 DLY60D 98PULS654PULS5 DLY60D 98GATE1 PULS1 OR PULS2 98GATE2 PULS2 OR PULS3 98GATE3 PULS3 OR PULS4 98GATE4 PULS4 OR PULS5 98GATE5 PULS5 OR PULS6 98GATE6 PULS6 OR PULS1 BRANCH VINTAGE0 Advanced Manual ATPDraw version 73 223 POSUA Rsnub Csnub POSUBPOSUA POSUCPOSUA UANEGPOSUA UBNEGPOSUA UCNEGPOSUA SWITCH 11UAPOS GATE1 11UBPOS GATE3 11UCPOS GATE5 11NEGUA GATE4 11NEGUB GATE6 11NEGUC GATE2 EOF Usersupplied header cards follow 31May02 154606 ARGUPOSNEGREFPOSREFNEGANGLERsnubCsnub NUMANGLERsnubCsnub DUMPULS1PULS2PULS3PULS4PULS5PULS6MID1MID2MID3 DUMGATE1GATE2GATE3GATE4GATE5GATE6VACRAMP1COMP1 DUMDCMP1DLY60D This file is very similar to the DBM input file but with a different header and with the original DBMfile header given at the bottom instead This file is ready to INCLUDE into an ATP input file by ATPDraw The file must be given a name and extension LIB and stored in the default USP directory The name HVDC6LIB is used here as an example When the punchfile from the DBMfile has been created the next step is to create a support file for the new HVDC6 object in the the Objects User Specified menu The process of creating a new object consists of two steps create parameter support and create the icon First select the New supfile in the popup menu A notebookstyle dialog box shown in Fig 565 appears where you specify the number of data and nodes The number of arguments on the NUM cards of the DBMfile tells you the Number of data which is 3 in this example The number of arguments on the ARG cards minus number of arguments on the NUM cards specifies the total Number of nodes which is 5 in this example On the Data tab you specify the names of the data parameters number of digits it must be less or equal the space used in the DBMfile which is 6 in this case a default value and the MinMax values The name of data need not be equal to the names used in the DBM punchfile but the sequence of data must be the same as on the ARG and NUM cards After specifying data properties click on the Node tab and set the node control parameters as shown in Fig 565 The Name of nodes the number of Phases 13 and the node position on the icon border 112 are to be given here Codes for the available node positions are shown in the icon at right Kind is not used here It must be left unity default for all nodes The name of the nodes need not be identical with the names used in the DBMfile but the node sequence must be the same as on the ARG card ATPDraw writes all three names of a 3phase node in the INCLUDE statement In this example only the core name of the 3phase node is expected on the argument list because the phase identifiers ABC are added internally in the DBMfile This option requires the Internal phase seq checked box be selected in the component dialog box of the HVDC6 object as shown in Fig 568 If it is selected ATPDraw writes only the 5character long core names in the INCLUDE statement and let the extensions A B and C be added inside the DBM library file Note that ATPDraw does not perform any diagnosis of the include file before sending the node names Moreover the Internal phase seq option may result in conflict with transposition objects As a result this option should in general not be used in transposed circuits To avoid the conflict Advanced Manual 224 ATPDraw version 73 use three input names for 3phase nodes in DATA BASE MODULE files Fig 565 Properties of the new HVDC6 object Each user specified objects might have a unique icon which represents the object on the screen and an optional online help which describes the meaning of parameters These properties can be edited using the built in Help and Icon Editors Fig 566 shows an example file that can be associated with the user specified 6phase rectifier bridge Fig 566 Help file of the HVDC6 object Fig 567 shows the icon editor window The red lines in the background indicate the possible node positions on the icon border Connecting lines to the external nodes of the object should be drawn from the symbol in the middle and out to the node positions specified in Fig 565 The completed icon of the 6pulse rectifier bridge is shown in Fig 567 Advanced Manual ATPDraw version 73 225 Fig 567 The icon associated with the new HVDC6 object Finally the just created support file must be saved to disk using the Save or Save As buttons User specified supfiles are normally located in the USP folder and their default extension is sup You can reload the support file of any user specified objects whenever you like using the User Specified Edit supfile option of the Objects menu Fig 568 Component dialog box of the new user specified HVDC6 object Advanced Manual 226 ATPDraw version 73 The User Specified Files in the component selection menu provides access to the user specified objects The component dialog box of the HVDC6 object is very similar to that of the standard objects as shown in Fig 568 The name of the DBMfile which is referenced in the final ATP input file must be specified in the Include field under User specified The Send parameters check box is normally selected if the USP object has at least one input node or data The inserting method can be either Include data base module or Insert or simply Use file which does not write anything to disk but instead relies on a file coming from a different source 582 Creating a user specified nonlinear transformer model Supporting routine BCTRAN can be used to derive a linear representation of a single or 3phase multiwinding transformer using excitation and short circuit test data If the frequency range of interest does not exceed some kHz the interwinding capacitances and earth capacitance of the HV and LV windings can be simulated by adding lumped capacitances connected to the terminals of the transformer Although BCTRAN produces only a linear representation of the transformer connecting nonlinear inductances to the winding closest to the iron core as external elements provides an easy way to take the saturation andor hysteresis into account It is noted that the BCTRAN object is now supported by ATPDraw in a user friendly way see in section 56 but the procedure described here gives more flexibility in handling of the iron core nonlinearities and allows incorporation of winding capacitances in the USP object if needed Further advantage of the USP based modeling is that users do not need to run the BCTRAN supporting routine as many times as such kind of transformers present in the circuit before the execution of the time domain simulation Creating such a user specified component however requires some experience in two ATP supporting routines DATA BASE MODULE and BCTRAN The BCTRAN model requires easily available input data only like the nameplate data of a generator stepup transformer shown below Voltage rating VhighVlow 13215 kV Winding connection Ynd11 Power rating 155 MVA Excitation losses 74 kW Excitation current 03 267 A Short circuit losses 461 kW Short circuit reactance 14 The zerosequence excitation current and losses are approximately equal to the positive sequence measurements because the presence of delta connected secondary winding Taking that the nonlinear magnetizing inductance is going to be added to the model as an external element only the resistive component of the excitation current 005 must entered in the BCTRAN input file shown next BEGIN NEW DATA CASE ACCESS MODULE BCTRAN ERASE 2 50 005 155 74 005 155 74 0 2 2 1 7621 HVBUSASTRPNTHVBUSBSTRPNTHVBUSCSTRPNT 2 150 LVBUSALVBUSCLVBUSBLVBUSALVBUSCLVBUSB 1 2 461 140 155 140 155 0 1 BLANK PUNCH BLANK BEGIN NEW DATA CASE BLANK BLANK Advanced Manual ATPDraw version 73 227 Running this file through ATP will produce an output punchfile that can be used as input for the Data Base Module DBM run The process of creating a DBMfile is certainly the most difficult part of adding new circuit objects to ATPDraw The input file to the DBM supporting routine of ATP begins with a header declaration followed by the circuit description The ATP Rule Book 3 chapter XIXF explains in detail how to create such a file The output of the DBM supporting routine is a lib file that can actually be considered as an external procedure which is included to the ATP simulation at run time via a INCLUDE call 5821 Creating a Data Base Module file for the BCTRAN object The DBMfile begins with a header declaration followed by the ATP request card DATA BASE MODULE and ends with a PUNCH request The ARG declaration together with the NUM card if needed specifies the external variables numerical node names and the sequence of arguments for the INCLUDE procedure The rest of the file describes the BCTRAN model Note that data sorting card BRANCH is part of the file but no BLANK BRANCH indicator is required The ARG declaration of the DBMfile includes 7 node names in this example HVBUSA HVBUSB HVBUSC The 3phase node of the high voltage terminal LVBUSA LVBUSB LVBUSC The 3phase node of the low voltage terminal STRPNT The 1phase node of the HV neutral The rest of the DBMfile is the transformer model description as produced by the BCTRAN supporting routine of ATP The structure of the DBM input file is shown below BEGIN NEW DATA CASE NOSORT DATA BASE MODULE ERASE ARGHVBUSAHVBUSBHVBUSCLVBUSALVBUSBLVBUSCSTRPNT The PCH file generated by the BCTRAN supporting routine must be inserted here BEGIN NEW DATA CASE C This comment line here is mandatory PUNCH MYTRAFOLIB BEGIN NEW DATA CASE BLANK BLANK Running the DBMfile through ATP will produce a file mytrafolib that must be stored in the USP folder of ATPDraw KARD 3 3 4 4 6 6 10 10 11 11 13 13 16 16 20 20 25 25 KARG 4 6 4 5 5 6 1 7 4 6 2 7 4 5 3 7 5 6 KBEG 3 9 9 3 9 3 3 9 3 9 3 9 9 3 3 9 9 3 KEND 8 14 14 8 14 8 8 14 8 14 8 14 14 8 8 14 14 8 KTEX 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 ERASE C Cards punched by support routine on 28Jan02 141013 C ACCESS MODULE BCTRAN C ERASE C 2 50 005 155 74 005 155 74 0 2 2 C 1 7621 HVBUSASTRPNTHVBUSBSTRPNTHVBUSCSTRPNT C 2 150 LVBUSALVBUSCLVBUSBLVBUSALVBUSCLVBUSB C 1 2 461 140 155 140 155 0 1 C BLANK VINTAGE 1 1LVBUSALVBUSC 91216157726436 Advanced Manual 228 ATPDraw version 73 2LVBUSBLVBUSA 00 91216157726436 3LVBUSCLVBUSB 00 00 91216157726436 USE AR 1HVBUSASTRPNT 19966704093183 16716783247242 2LVBUSALVBUSC 1014441679294 00 51541471986794 00647606659729 3HVBUSBSTRPNT 00 00 00 00 19966704093183 16716783247242 4LVBUSBLVBUSA 00 00 00 00 1014441679294 00 51541471986794 00647606659729 5HVBUSCSTRPNT 00 00 00 00 00 00 00 00 19966704093183 16716783247242 6LVBUSCLVBUSB 00 00 00 00 00 00 00 00 1014441679294 00 51541471986794 00647606659729 VINTAGE 0 UNITS 11 USE RL C case separator EOF Usersupplied header cards follow 28Jan02 142828 ARGHVBUSAHVBUSBHVBUSCLVBUSALVBUSBLVBUSCSTRPNT 5822 Creating new support file and icon Next step is to create a new user specified object via the Object User Specified New sup file menu of ATPDraw The process of creating a new object consists of two steps creating parameter support and creating an icon Since no NUM card exists in the DBM header the number of data is 0 the number of nodes is 3 in this example as shown in Fig 569 On the Nodes tab a Name can be assigned to each node The number of phases and the node position on the icon border must also be specified here The name of the nodes may differ from the name used in the lib file but the node sequence must be the same as specified on the ARG list Each user specified component might have an icon and an optional online help which describes the meaning of input parameters The appearance of this icon is up to the users creativity but it is recommended to indicate three phase nodes with thick lines and to locate them according to the Pos 112 setting on the Nodes tab Finally the support file of the object must be saved to disk using the Save button the default location is the USP folder to make the new USP object accessible via the User Specified Files option of the component selection menu Advanced Manual ATPDraw version 73 229 Fig 569 Creating support file for the new BCTRAN object The user specified components can be used in combination with the Compress feature of ATPDraw as shown in Fig 570 In this example the linear part of the transformer model has been completed with winding capacitances as external components and three nonlinear Type96 hysteretic inductors in delta connection at the 15 kV terminals which represent the nonlinear magnetic core The Compress feature of ATPDraw supports single icon replacement of these 7 objects The inter winding and windingtoearth capacitances are input parameters to the group object As shown below the group objects icon can be customized as well An artistic icon may improve the readability of the circuit and help in understanding of the circuit file for others I Clg I I Chg Chl Fig 570 Compressing the transformer model into a single object 59 Systematic parameter variations Very often the user wants to study the maximum voltage at a point as function of a certain parameter ATPDraw offers features to do this quite easily To utilize this Variables must be introduced as function of the simulation number KNT and an extremal value extractor WriteMaxMin added If you turn on Internal Parser you can vary most parameters As an example let us say you want to study the maximum lightning overvoltage at a transformer as function of the length of the feeding cable from the busbar and arrester Fig 571 shows the complete circuit with the Variable LEN declaration in the Sidebar TR132 Advanced Manual 230 ATPDraw version 73 Fig 571 Setup to vary cable JMartimodel from 100 to 1000 m in ten steps The cable is first modeled as an LCC template and an LCC section component is connected to it with the Length data declared as LEN as shown in Fig 572 Fig 572 Input of LCC section component for length variation The component MODELSWriteMaxMin is then connected to record the voltage extremal of interest This will be phase A of the transformer terminal since the lightning strike also is in phase Advanced Manual ATPDraw version 73 231 A on the feeding line In the input dialog of WriteMaxMin as shown in Fig 573 the LEN variable is also assigned to the AsFuncOf data MaxOrMin is unity default Tlimit is the time when the model start looking for extremal values The user must also click the input node of the component to make sure node voltage is selected branch current is the default Fig 573 Input of the WriteMaxMin component The Variable LEN now will be systematically varied This can simply be done by declaring is as function of the simulation number 110 in this case represented by the default variable KNT LEN100KNT means that LEN100 m the first run 200 m the second run etc ATPDraw will make sure to run CABLE PARAMETERS every run to create the new cable model with a new length The WriteMaxMin component will examine the LISfile every run and extract the extremal value written to is by the MODELS code If the system is set up correctly with ATP execution in hidden mode and NODISK1 in graphicsaux the process runs without any interruption After the 10 runs counted in the main windows progress bar the extremal values are available under View in Fig 573 as shown in Fig 574 Advanced Manual 232 ATPDraw version 73 Fig 574 View of the WriteMaxMin component The number of runs is not restricted to 10 Note that the maximum simulation time would need to be adjusted to capture the maximum of the longest cable A text file ParameterVariationlog same name as created ATPfile will be created in the Result Folder with information of the variables at each run Note that a lot of things are happening behind the scene here so the user is advised to first get the correct behavior of the circuit before jumping into parameter variations 591 Optimization This module was added to ATPDraw version 56 as part of a cooperation with Schneider Electric The user must add a cost function object found in the selection menu under MODELSWrite MaxMin This component will extract a single value from the simulation In addition variables must be assigned to data in the circuit These variables can then be tuned to optimize the cost function The optimization problem is defined as the minimization or maximization of the object function OF in n dimensions with variables x 1 2 max min n OF x x x The variables x can be selected by the user among the global variables 5911 Optimization routines Three different optimization routines are supported The Gradient Method GM is the LBFGSB routine 16 limited memory algorithm for bound constrained optimization which is a quasiNewton method with numerical calculation of the gradient The gradient is calculated based on the twopoint formula Advanced Manual ATPDraw version 73 233 2 f f x h f x h x h where the discretization point h is calculated as 6 max 10 h x dx where dx is a user selectable parameter delta X If n is the number of variables in the optimization problem the cost function thus has to be evaluated 2n1 times for each solution point This is calculated in a single ATP run utilizing PCVP The iteration number is somewhat loosely defined in the Gradient Method If the solution is poorer than the previous point the algorithm steps backwards along the gradient until an improved solution is found and only then the iteration number is incremented The Genetic Algorithm GA is based on the RiverSoft AVG package wwwRiverSoftAVGcom but modified to better handle the variable constraints This optimization routine might need further improvement and development The evolvement of the solution with GA is to more or less randomly select solutions individuals and mate these to obtain new solutions The selection process can be Random Roulette using cumulative distribution Tournament competition between a user selectable number of randomly selected rivals Stochastic Tournament combination of Roulette and Tournament and Elitism select only the user defined best percentage of the population Tournament with 510 rivals is a reasonable starting point The user has to select the size of the population maximum 1000 and this is a critical parameter which depends on the problem and the number of variables The user must also select the resolution with 8 16 and 32 bits available This part needs further development to allow integer values and arbitrary resolutions Up to twenty cost function evaluations are performed in parallel using PCVP of ATP The Simplex Annealing SA method is implemented from Numerical Recipes 17 It is based on the NelderMead simplex algorithm with an added random behavior gradually reduced simulated annealing The algorithm also uses a possible larger set of points called population and can support mutation With all control parameters set to zero the algorithm simply reduces to the classical NelderMead simplex method The method relies only on function evaluations and POCKET CALCULATOR of ATP is thus not used Since a single case is run through ATP for each cost function evaluation the method thus has potential to be extended to include other variables than those defined within the global variables 5912 Cost function A generalpurpose Cost Function in MODELS called WRITEMAXMIN is introduced in ATPDraw version 56 The idea is to extract a single value from a simulation and write this to the lisfile and read it back when the simulation is finished The single value is either the maximum or minimum of the signal xout from time Tlimit and out to the end time of the simulation The Model has one input but this can be expanded The Model also takes in one DATA parameter AsFuncOf and if this is assigned to a variable WRITEMAXMIN writes output as function of this data parameter If AsFuncOf is a number it is simply replaced by the simulation number WRITEMAXMIN supports multiple run though POCKET CALCULATOR The selection of the component and its input dialog is shown in Fig 572 Advanced Manual 234 ATPDraw version 73 Fig 572 Cost Function WRITEMAXMIN 5913 Optimization dialog The Optimization dialog is found under ATPOptimization The user has to set up the data case which is not stored with the project The variables x1xn are chosen by clicking in the Variables column and selecting the available variable in the appearing combo box as shown to the left in Fig 573 The user also must specify the constraints Minimum and Maximum The Object function must be selected among the available WRITEMAXMIN components in the circuit The user can then select to minimize or maximize and select a solution method Genetic Algorithm Gradient Method or Simplex Annealing The Max iter field is the maximum number of iterations in the solution algorithm For the Genetic Algorithm there are several special selections The size of the Population is a critical parameter A low number will produce a degenerated result while a too high number will waste computation time The maximum allowed number is 1000 The required Resolution depends on the selected range MaxMin Since it anyhow is recommended to switch to the Gradient Method for fine tuning a 8bit resolution 255 steps is normally sufficient The Population count and Resolution cannot be changed in the optimization process Continue The Crossover probability should be set to a high number 1 as the alternative is cloning The Inversion and Mutation probabilities should be set to low numbers but this depends on the complexity of the problem High numbers will slow down the convergence considerably The Rival count for Tournaments should be set to a medium value 210 A large number here will approach strong elitism and possible degenerated solutions The Preserve fittest option will simply copy the fittest individual to the next generation weak elitism The preferred Selection method is one of the Tournament types Elitism can be selected towards the end of the optimization process Advanced Manual ATPDraw version 73 235 Fig 573 Optimization dialogs For the Gradient Method the user has to specify a convergence limit epsx and a dicretization step in per unit delta X Intermediate trial steps do not count as part of the Max iter The user also has to specify the starting point in the Best fit column if blank the average of Minimum and Maximum is assumed For the Simplex Annealing method the user must choose the Population number of points evaluated for membership in the simplex which is internally restricted to Populationmax Population n1 The Mutation probability parameter controls if the new points in the simplex is found at random or with the classical methods reflection expansion or contradiction The Max Climbs parameter controls how many steps in a negative direction that is accepted by the method This should be a moderate value 03 The parameter beta 1 controls annealing schedule temperature reduction and the parameter ratio controls the annealing schedule when a local minimum is found For a rough surface with many local minima the beta and ration parameters need to be increased Ftol is the convergence criterion the downside of this method The iteration stops if max min max min 2 tol f f F f f With all the other parameters set to zero the Simplex Annealing method becomes equal to the NelderMead simplex method The user can press ESC to stop the optimization algorithms When the user clicks on Exit the result of the optimization are written back to the VALUE field in ATPSettingsVariables 5914 Example Resonance grounding Exa18acp Fig 4 shows a resonance grounding circuit which could be extended to any complexity The variable REACT is assigned to the neutral inductor and the unit is set to ohms as XOPT is 50 An intermediate variable CURR is used in Fig 575 to vary the current linearly between 1 and 20 Amps with the special syntax LIN 1 20 as this is the standard way of quantifying a resonant grounding Advanced Manual 236 ATPDraw version 73 V 15024 SAT Y LCC WRITE max min 150 kV LCC LCC LCC LCC Calculation of the neutral voltage as a function of the inverse coil reactance for a Pettersen coil grounded neutral resonance curve VariablesParameters used to change the coil reactance ATPSettingsVariables defines the REACT and CURR internal variables MODEL WRITEMAXMIN used to write to the lis file and read back the results Use View inside the WRITEMAXMIN component to see the resonant curve Fig 574 Resonant grounding circuit Fig 575 Parameter selections LIN The new special Model component WRITEMAXMIN is used to write the maximum value of the neutral voltage as function of the neutral current CURR for all the 51 simulations specified in Fig 575 The input dialog of the Model component is shown in Fig 576 It takes one input and writes the max or min value of this after an onsettime Tlimit to the lisfile After the simulation the results are automatically read back from the lis file and a View button is available for charting the results as shown in Fig 577 CURR A 20 15 10 5 NEUT kV 30 25 20 15 10 5 CURR Fig 576 Input dialog of the new WRITEMAXMIN Fig 577 Neutral voltage as function component of neutral current The exact value of current that corresponds to resonance can be found via the new Optimization module of ATPDraw This is obtained under ATPOptimization with an input dialog as shown in Fig 573 Fig 573 shows the optimum value found for the GA and GM solution methods This case with a single variable involved and a pure convex object function as shown in Fig 577 is simple to solve 592 MonteCarlo simulations Exa21acp Systematic variations of parameters can be also be made based on statistical functions ATPDraw offers a series of probability density functions as described in Chapt 425 Among these are some special distribution functions suitable for lightning amplitude statistical variations Advanced Manual ATPDraw version 73 237 LACIGREa b 61 05 1 a 20 2 133 333 05 1 2 06 05 20 ln x erf x cfd ln x erf x b a and b in kA answer in A LACIGRE1ab 311 05 1 2 0484 a x b erf ln x cfd a and b in kA answer in A LAIEEEab 26 1 1 31 a x b cfd x a and b in kA answer in A Furthermore ATPDraw has an overhead line model LCCEGM that can be connected to the LCC template component for calculation of lightning stroke hits within multiple segments The overhead line cross section can be of arbitrary format and tower models grounding and insulator string flashover modeled in any level of details The LCCEGM model input dialog is shown in Fig 578 where the user must declare variables for the lightning amplitude Im the lightning position x y and specify the length and start Ys of the segment The segments are then connected as shown in Fig 579 with a lightning current source connected to all the top nodes HIT Fig 578 LCCEGM input dialog Advanced Manual 238 ATPDraw version 73 LCC Template H H EGM 03 km V EGM 03 km EGM 03 km LCC Template EGM 03 km LCC 004 km EGM 03 km MOV EGM 03 km WRITE Monte Carlo EGM 03 km EGM 03 km EGM 03 km Fig 579 MonteCarlo study case of lightning strikes to overhear line Exa21acp The parameters to vary statistically are the lightning amplitude and position The Variables in the SidebarSimulations are defined as shown in 580 The lightning current source has an amplitude following the CIGRE twoslope logNormal statistics assigned to the variable IM while the LCCEGM model is assigned to IMKA The lightning position is uniform within an area with 100 m width on each side of the line center and 3 km length 10 spans in this case The Internal Parser must be used to enable the statistical functions A total number of 8000 simulations is chosen for the MonteCarlo study Fig 580 Declarations of Variables To extract the extremal simulation values and calculate statistical overvoltage distributions and breakdown probability a new component WriteMonteCarlo is added This builds on the ModelWrite technology and reads in extremal threephase voltages from the LISfile like the WriteMaxMin component but has a different View module Instead of showing the extremal value for each run the model will show the probability distribution of the voltage A message box will also show the ratio of voltage exceeding Withstand over the total number of runs Fig 581 shows the dialog box of the WriteMonteCarlo component and Fig 582 the View module If Polarity is set to 0 the absolute value of the voltages is used if Polarity is positive only positive voltages are tested and with 1 only negative Resolution and Withstand can be changed before or after the simulation and the View will adapt Advanced Manual ATPDraw version 73 239 WRITE Monte Carlo Fig 5 81 WRITEMONTECARLO icon and input dialog 12E6 1E6 8E5 6E5 4E5 2E5 fBUS0 10 9 8 7 6 5 4 3 2 1 Fig 582 WriteMonteCarlos View with plotting of the maximum voltage density 13E6 12E6 11E6 1E6 9E5 8E5 7E5 fBUS0 2 18 16 14 12 1 8 6 4 2 5 GREAT TIPS TO KEEP YOUR HOME SAFE WHILE AWAY THIS HOLIDAY SEASON 241 6 Application Manual ATPDraw for Windows 73 5 GREAT TIPS TO KEEP YOUR HOME SAFE WHILE AWAY THIS HOLIDAY SEASON Application Manual ATPDraw version 73 243 This chapter begins with some simple examples You will not be shown how to create these circuits but the circuits files Exaacp are part of the ATPDraw distribution To load these example circuits into the circuit window of ATPDraw use the File Open command or Ctrl O and select the file name in the Open Project dialog The resulting ATPfiles will be given at the end of each description Simulation results andor comparison with measurements are also presented in some cases These figures have been obtained by processing the pl4 output file or field test records with prostprocessors PlotXY or ATPAnalyzer 61 Switching studies using JMarti LCC objects The LCC modeling features of ATPDraw are described in detail in section 53 of the Advanced Manual Line modeling by LCC objects means that user specifies the geometrical arrangement and material constants then ATPDraw executes ATPs LineCable Constants routine and converts the output punchfile to DBM library format The resulting LIBfile will then be included in the final ATPfile via a Include call The JMarti option is one out of the five alternatives supported by ATPDraws LCC object Here two switching transient simulation examples are presented 611 JMarti model of a 750 kV line The JMarti line models introduced in this section will be used in the subsequent singlelineto ground fault study on a 750 kV shunt compensated transmission line with total length of 487 km Transpositions separate this line into four sections Each section of the line is represented by 3 phase untransposed LCC object with JMarti option enabled The ATPDraw project of the SLG study includes four such objects with name LIN750xALC where x runs from 1 to 4 The line configuration is shown in Fig 61 Fig 61 Tower configuration of the 750 kV line The line parameters are given in Metric units The Auto bundling option is enabled to simplify the data entry for this 4 conductorphase in rectangular arrangement system Tubular assumption has been applied as in the previous example with the following parameters DC resistance 00585 km Outside diameter of the conductors 3105 cm At tower 4105 m Midspan 2615 m Separ60 cm Alpha45 NB4 132 m 175 m At tower 279 m Midspan 130 m Application Manual 244 ATPDraw version 72 Inner radius of the tube 055 cm ATPDraw calculates the thicknessdiameter value internally TD 032 Sky wires are made from steel reinforced conductors thus tubular assumption applies here too DC resistance 0304 km Outside diameter of the sky wire 16 cm Inner radius of the tube 03 cm ATPDraw calculates the thicknessdiameter value internally TD 0187 The resistivity of the soil equals to 20 m The conductor separation in the bundle is 60 cm Entering the geometrical material data and model options of the line then executing Run ATP will produce a LIBfile in the LCC folder Since the length of each section is different four LCC objects with different name are needed The Save As button of the LCC dialog box can be used to save the ALC file with the new length thus the line parameters need not be entered from scratch Fig 62 LCC Model and Data tab of the 1st section of the 750 kV line BEGIN NEW DATA CASE JMARTI SETUP ERASE BRANCH INAOUTAINBOUTBINCOUTC LINE CONSTANTS Application Manual ATPDraw version 73 245 METRIC 10323 00585 4 31 175 279 13 60 45 4 20323 00585 4 31 00 279 13 60 45 4 30323 00585 4 31 175 279 13 60 45 4 00313 0304 4 16 132 4105 2615 00 00 0 00313 0304 4 16 132 4105 2615 00 00 0 BLANK CARD ENDING CONDUCTOR CARDS 20 1E3 846 1 20 50 846 1 20 0005 846 7 10 1 BLANK CARD ENDING FREQUENCY CARDS BLANK CARD ENDING LINE CONSTANT DEFAULT PUNCH BLANK CARD ENDING JMARTI SETUP BEGIN NEW DATA CASE BLANK CARD 612 Line to ground fault and fault tripping transients Exa7aacp Singlephase to ground fault transients on a 750 kV interconnection are investigated in this study The oneline diagram of the simulated network is shown in Fig 63 At the sending end of the line shunt reactors are connected with neutral reactors to reduce the secondary arc current during the dead time of the singlephase reclosing The staged fault has been initiated at the receiving end of the line 750 kV tr line 6000 MVA 6000 MVA Single phase to ground fault 478 km 750 3 750 kV 400 kV 1100 MVA 1100 MVA 400 kV 10000 MVA Fig 63 One line diagram of the faulted line The layout of the completed ATPDraw circuit is shown in Fig 64 Along the route three transposition exist so each LCC object represents a line section between two transpositions with length 846 km 1627 km 1559 km 757 km respectively ArcRES SLGA Nreact RECV V U SEND I U LCC LCC LCC LCC ABC V A Fig 64 Linetoground fault study Exa7aacp The supply network model is rather simple a Thevenin equivalent 50 Hz source and a parallel resistor representing the surge impedance of the lines erected from the 400 kV bus An uncoupled series reactance simulates the short circuit inductance of the 400750 kV transformer bank The singlephase shunt reactors are represented by linear RLC components Nononlinearities need not Application Manual 246 ATPDraw version 72 been considered here because the predicted amplitude of the reactor voltage is far below the saturation level of the air gapped core The impedance of the fault arc is considered as 2 ohm constant resistance The ATPDraw generated ATPfile for this 750 kV example circuit is shown next BEGIN NEW DATA CASE C C Generated by ATPDRAW August Monday 26 2019 C A Bonneville Power Administration program C by H K Høidalen at NTNUSEfAS NORWAY 19942019 C DUMMY XYZ000 C dT Tmax Xopt Copt 2E5 5 500 3 0 0 1 0 0 1 0 C 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 C 345678901234567890123456789012345678901234567890123456789012345678901234567890 BRANCH C n 1 n 2ref1ref2 R L C SLGA 2 0 XX0008 1 300 0 X0012CX0014C 5 180 0 X0012AX0014A 5 180 0 X0012BX0014B 5 180 0 X0012CX0014C 150 0 X0012AX0014A 150 0 X0012BX0014B 150 0 X0022CX0021C 5 300 0 X0022AX0021A 5 300 0 X0022BX0021B 5 300 0 X0022CX0021C 150 0 X0022AX0021A 150 0 X0022BX0021B 150 0 RECVC 20 6E3 0 RECVA 20 6E3 0 RECVB 20 6E3 0 X0014CX0017C 2 200 0 X0014AX0017A 2 200 0 X0014BX0017B 2 200 0 SENDC XX0008 10 3E3 0 SENDA XX0008 10 3E3 0 SENDB XX0008 10 3E3 0 INCLUDE DATPDRAW3LCCLIN7502LIB TRAN1B TRAN1C TRAN1A TRAN2B TRAN2C TRAN2A INCLUDE DATPDRAW3LCCLIN7501LIB LN1C LN1A LN1B TRAN1C TRAN1A TRAN1B INCLUDE DATPDRAW3LCCLIN7503LIB TRAN2A TRAN2B TRAN2C TRAN3A TRAN3B TRAN3C INCLUDE DATPDRAW3LCCLIN7504LIB TRAN3C TRAN3A TRAN3B RECVC RECVA RECVB SWITCH C n 1 n 2 Tclose TopTde Ie VfCLOP type RECVC SLGA 0285 225 10 0 X0017CSENDC 1 075 0 X0017ASENDA 1 1 0 X0017BSENDB 1 1 0 SENDC LN1C MEASURING 1 SENDA LN1A MEASURING 1 SENDB LN1B MEASURING 1 RECVC X0022C 1 075 0 RECVA X0022A 1 1 0 RECVB X0022B 1 1 0 SOURCE C n 1 Ampl Freq PhaseT0 A1 T1 TSTART TSTOP 14X0012C 0 612300 50 1 1 14X0012A 0 612300 50 120 1 1 14X0012B 0 612300 50 120 1 1 14X0021C 0 612300 50 10 1 1 14X0021A 0 612300 50 110 1 1 14X0021B 0 612300 50 130 1 1 Application Manual ATPDraw version 73 247 INITIAL OUTPUT SENDC SENDA SENDB RECVC RECVA RECVB BLANK BRANCH BLANK SWITCH BLANK SOURCE BLANK INITIAL BLANK OUTPUT BLANK PLOT BEGIN NEW DATA CASE BLANK Fig 65 shows the results of the simulation The upper curve is the phasetoground voltage at the receiving end of the line Following the secondary arc extinction an oscillating trapped charge appears on the faulty phase which is the characteristics of the shunt compensated lines The blue lower curve shows the line current at the faulty phase during the fault and henceforth file Exa7apl4 xvar t vSENDA 00 01 02 03 04 05 s 700 350 0 350 700 kV file Exa7apl4 xvar t cSENDA LN1A 00 01 02 03 04 05 s 3000 2000 1000 0 1000 2000 A Fig 65 SLG fault and fault clearing transients simulation upper curve phase to ground voltage lower curve line current Fig 66 SLG fault and fault clearing transients Phase currents and voltages recorded at a staged fault test by a variable sampling frequency disturbance recorder Application Manual 248 ATPDraw version 72 Fig 66 shows the recorded phase voltages and line currents obtained by a highspeed transient recorder at a staged fault tests of the same 750 kV line 62 Lightning overvoltage study in a 400 kV substation Exa9acp This example demonstrates the use of ATPDraw in a lightning protection study The oneline diagram of the investigated 400 kV substation is drawn in Fig 67 The numbers written on the top of the bus sections specify the length in meters The simulated incident is a singlephase backflashover caused by a lightning strike to the tower structure 900 m away from the substation Severe lightning parameters were chosen with 120 kA amplitude and 450 s fronttail times In the investigated cases only Line1 and Line2 are connected with the transformer bus The transformer is protected by conventional SiC arresters 22 LINE3 TR LINE2 LINE1 LINE5 LINE4 22 22 15 15 15 15 22 22 22 15 12 57 10 15 12 15 12 15 12 57 10 15 12 57 8 8 5 10 12 25 68 12 12 68 15 15 24 57 57 13 24 13 15 13 24 5 10 5 10 5 10 5 5 10 5 13 24 15 13 24 15 7 17 51 PT1 PT2 PT3 Conventional gapped arrester PT4 PT5 Fig 67 Oneline diagram of the substation Application Manual ATPDraw version 73 249 Limp H t TOP I t t t V TWR4 V V LINE2 t Ri I TR400 t Ri I LINE1 t TR Ri I V PT1 U LCC LCC LCC LCC LCC LCC Fig 68 Example circuit Exa9acp The ATPDraw circuit of the complete network substationincoming line is shown in Fig 68 The CopyPaste or Grouping Compress feature of ATPDraw could be used effectively when creating such a model because the circuit has many identical blocks Ie the user needs to define the object parameters only once and copy them as many times as needed Close to the lightning strike the line spans are represented by 4phase JMarti LCC objects phase conductors sky wire The surge propagation along the tower structure has been taken into account in this model by representing the vertical pylon sections as singlephase constant parameter transmission lines The RL branches below the tower model simulate the tower grounding impedance The front of wave flashover characteristic of the line insulators plays a significant role in such a backflashover study It can be simulated quite easily using a MODELS object like the Flash of this example which controls a TACSMODELS controlled switch The influence of the power frequency voltage on the backflashover probability cant be neglected either at this voltage level In this study case it was considered by a Thevenin equivalent 3phase source connected to the remote end of Line2 The ATPfile created by ATPDraw is shown below Note This case exceeds the storage cell limit of ATP if the program runs with DEFAULT30 table size default LISTSIZEDAT setting To run the simulation successfully the user must increase this limit from 30 to 60 BEGIN NEW DATA CASE C C Generated by ATPDRAW August Monday 26 2019 C A Bonneville Power Administration program C by H K Høidalen at NTNUSEfAS NORWAY 19942019 C DUMMY XYZ000 C dT Tmax Xopt Copt 5E9 25E5 500 3 0 0 1 0 0 1 0 MODELS MODELS INPUT IX0001 vTWR4A IX0002 vXX0016 OUTPUT XX0048 MODEL Flash comment Application Manual 250 ATPDraw version 72 Front of wave flashover characteristic of the HV insulator Input Voltage accross the insulator Output Close command for the TACS switch endcomment INPUT UP UN OUTPUT CLOSE DATA UINF DFLT650e3 UO DFLT 1650e3 TAU DFLT8e7 UINIT DFLT1E5 VAR CLOSE TT U FLASH INIT CLOSE0 TT0 FLASHINF ENDINIT EXEC U ABSUPUN IF UUINIT THEN TTTTtimestep FLASHUINF UOUINFEXPTTTAU IF UFLASH THEN CLOSE1 ENDIF ENDIF ENDEXEC ENDMODEL USE FLASH AS FLASH INPUT UP IX0001 UN IX0002 DATA UINF 14E6 UO 3E6 TAU 8E7 UINIT 35E5 OUTPUT XX0048CLOSE ENDUSE RECORD FLASHU AS U FLASHCLOSE AS CLOSE ENDMODELS C 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 C 345678901234567890123456789012345678901234567890123456789012345678901234567890 BRANCH C n 1 n 2ref1ref2 R L C C n 1 n 2ref1ref2 R A B Leng0 1XX0010XX0167 10 200 25E5 008 1 0 0 1XX0012XX0010 10 200 25E5 007 1 0 0 1XX0014XX0012 10 200 25E5 018 1 0 0 1XX0016TOP 10 200 25E5 008 1 0 0 1 XX0019 20 600 29E5 3 1 0 0 1XX0020XX0016 10 200 25E5 007 1 0 0 XX0014 40 0 XX0014 13 005 0 1XX0026XX0171 10 200 25E5 008 1 0 0 1XX0028XX0020 10 200 25E5 018 1 0 0 1X0032AX0033A 20 650 24E5 3 1 0 0 2X0032BX0033B 2 400 29E5 3 1 0 0 3X0032CX0033C 0 XX0028 40 0 1XX0036 20 600 29E5 3 1 0 0 XX0028 13 005 0 1XX0040XX0179 10 200 25E5 008 1 0 0 1XX0042XX0040 10 200 25E5 007 1 0 0 1XX0044XX0042 10 200 25E5 018 1 0 0 XX0044 40 0 XX0044 13 005 0 1XX0054XX0183 10 200 25E5 008 1 0 0 1XX0056XX0026 10 200 25E5 007 1 0 0 LIGHT 400 0 1XX0060XX0054 10 200 25E5 007 1 0 0 1XX0062XX0056 10 200 25E5 018 1 0 0 1XX0064XX0060 10 200 25E5 018 1 0 0 XX0064 40 0 Application Manual ATPDraw version 73 251 1XX0069XX0019 10 200 25E5 008 1 0 0 XX0064 13 005 0 1X0073AX0074A 20 400 24E5 008 1 0 0 2X0073BX0074B 2 260 29E5 008 1 0 0 3X0073CX0074C 0 1XX0075XX0036 10 200 25E5 008 1 0 0 1X0078AX0211A 20 400 24E5 012 1 0 0 2X0078BX0211B 2 260 29E5 012 1 0 0 3X0078CX0211C 0 1X0257AX0081A 50 650 24E5 015 1 0 0 2X0257BX0081B 10 360 29E5 015 1 0 0 3X0257CX0081C 0 1X0082AX0083A 20 400 24E5 068 1 0 0 2X0082BX0083B 2 260 29E5 068 1 0 0 3X0082CX0083C 0 1X0271ALINE2A 20 650 24E5 024 1 0 0 2X0271BLINE2B 2 360 29E5 024 1 0 0 3X0271CLINE2C 0 1X0086AX0269A 20 400 24E5 012 1 0 0 2X0086BX0269B 2 260 29E5 012 1 0 0 3X0086CX0269C 0 1X0088AX0293A 20 650 24E5 015 1 0 0 2X0088BX0293B 2 360 29E5 015 1 0 0 3X0088CX0293C 0 1X0074AX0090A 20 400 24E5 015 1 0 0 2X0074BX0090B 2 260 29E5 015 1 0 0 3X0074CX0090C 0 1X0074AX0271A 20 400 24E5 085 1 0 0 2X0074BX0271B 2 260 29E5 085 1 0 0 3X0074CX0271C 0 X0271A 0005 0 X0271B 0005 0 X0271C 0005 0 1X0269AX0211A 20 650 24E5 022 1 0 0 2X0269BX0211B 2 360 29E5 022 1 0 0 3X0269CX0211C 0 1X0211AX0257A 20 650 24E5 022 1 0 0 2X0211BX0257B 2 360 29E5 022 1 0 0 3X0211CX0257C 0 99SICC 11E6 1 1 100 65E5 1E3 76E5 2E3 8E5 4E3 834E5 5E3 85E5 1E4 935E5 2E4 1082E6 3E4 12E6 9999 1X0104AX0105A 20 400 24E5 068 1 0 0 2X0104BX0105B 2 260 29E5 068 1 0 0 3X0104CX0105C 0 1X0106AX0257A 20 400 24E5 012 1 0 0 2X0106BX0257B 2 260 29E5 012 1 0 0 3X0106CX0257C 0 1X0108ATR400A 20 650 24E5 017 1 0 0 2X0108BTR400B 2 360 29E5 017 1 0 0 3X0108CTR400C 0 1X0105AX0110A 20 400 24E5 025 1 0 0 2X0105BX0110B 2 260 29E5 025 1 0 0 3X0105CX0110C 0 99SICB 11E6 1 1 100 65E5 1E3 76E5 2E3 8E5 4E3 834E5 5E3 85E5 1E4 935E5 2E4 1082E6 3E4 12E6 9999 1PT1A LINE1A 20 650 24E5 024 1 0 0 Application Manual 252 ATPDraw version 72 2PT1B LINE1B 2 360 29E5 024 1 0 0 3PT1C LINE1C 0 1X0118AX0293A 20 400 24E5 012 1 0 0 2X0118BX0293B 2 260 29E5 012 1 0 0 3X0118CX0293C 0 1X0083AX0120A 20 400 24E5 015 1 0 0 2X0083BX0120B 2 260 29E5 015 1 0 0 3X0083CX0120C 0 TR400A 003 0 TR400B 003 0 TR400C 003 0 1X0105AX0108A 20 650 24E5 051 1 0 0 2X0105BX0108B 2 360 29E5 051 1 0 0 3X0105CX0108C 0 1SICA X0108A 20 400 24E5 007 1 0 0 2SICB X0108B 2 260 29E5 007 1 0 0 3SICC X0108C 0 99SICA 11E6 1 1 100 65E5 1E3 76E5 2E3 8E5 4E3 834E5 5E3 85E5 1E4 935E5 2E4 1082E6 3E4 12E6 9999 X0132AX0133A 1 50 0 X0132BX0133B 1 50 0 X0132CX0133C 1 50 0 1XX0135XX0075 10 200 25E5 007 1 0 0 1X0083APT1A 20 400 24E5 085 1 0 0 2X0083BPT1B 2 260 29E5 085 1 0 0 3X0083CPT1C 0 PT1A 0005 0 PT1B 0005 0 PT1C 0005 0 1X0293AX0269A 20 650 24E5 022 1 0 0 2X0293BX0269B 2 360 29E5 022 1 0 0 3X0293CX0269C 0 1XX0143XX0135 10 200 25E5 018 1 0 0 XX0062 40 0 XX0062 13 005 0 1XX0149XX0069 10 200 25E5 007 1 0 0 1XX0151XX0149 10 200 25E5 018 1 0 0 XX0151 40 0 XX0151 13 005 0 XX0143 40 0 XX0143 13 005 0 1LINE2AX0132A 20 650 24E5 3 1 0 0 2LINE2BX0132B 2 360 29E5 3 1 0 0 3LINE2CX0132C 0 INCLUDE DATPDRAWLCCEXA9LIB X0033A X0033B X0033C XX0019 X0166A X0166B X0166C XX0167 INCLUDE DATPDRAWLCCEXA9LIB X0166A X0166B X0166C XX0167 X0170A X0170B X0170C XX0171 INCLUDE DATPDRAWLCCEXA9LIB X0170A X0170B X0170C XX0171 TWR4A TWR4B TWR4C TOP INCLUDE DATPDRAWLCCEXA9LIB TWR4A TWR4B TWR4C TOP X0178A X0178B X0178C XX0179 INCLUDE DATPDRAWLCCEXA9LIB X0178A X0178B X0178C XX0179 X0182A X0182B X0182C XX0183 INCLUDE DATPDRAWLCCEXA9LIB X0182A X0182B X0182C XX0183 LINE1A LINE1B LINE1C XX0036 SWITCH C n 1 n 2 Tclose TopTde Ie VfCLOP type LIGHT TOP MEASURING 1 X0090AX0086A 1 1001 0 X0090BX0086B 1 1001 0 X0090CX0086C 1 1001 0 X0110AX0106A 1 1001 0 X0110BX0106B 1 1001 0 Application Manual ATPDraw version 73 253 X0110CX0106C 1 1001 0 X0120AX0118A 1 1001 0 X0120BX0118B 1 1001 0 X0120CX0118C 1 1001 0 13XX0016TWR4A XX0048 0 SOURCE C n 1 Ampl Freq PhaseT0 A1 T1 TSTART TSTOP 15LIGHT 1 12E5 4E6 5E5 5 1 14X0133A 0 33E5 50 1 1 14X0133B 0 33E5 50 120 1 1 14X0133C 0 33E5 50 120 1 1 INITIAL OUTPUT LINE1ALINE1BLINE1CTWR4A TWR4B TWR4C TR400ATR400BTR400CPT1A PT1B PT1C BLANK MODELS BLANK BRANCH BLANK SWITCH BLANK SOURCE BLANK INITIAL BLANK OUTPUT BLANK PLOT BEGIN NEW DATA CASE BLANK Some results of the simulation are drawn in Fig 69 The blue line is the voltage stress appearing at the transformer terminal the red line shows the incoming surge measured at the voltage transformer of Line1 node PT1 of the circuit The discharge current of the gapped arrester is drawn at the bottom if the figure As it can be seen the instantaneous value of the power frequency voltage was set opposite to the polarity of the lightning surge in the simulation file Exa9pl4 xvar t vPT1A vTR400A cSICA 0 5 10 15 20 25 us 050 025 000 025 050 075 100 125 150 MV 0 2 4 6 8 10 12 14 16 kA Fig 69 ATP simulation results Red incoming surge at the substation entrance Blue voltage stress at the transformer terminal Green arrester discharge current 63 Modeling Rectifiers zigzag transformers and analysis of Harmonics Exa14acp In section 581 of the Advanced Manual it is shown how to create a 6pulse controlled thyristor rectifier bridge and make it available in ATPDraw as a user specified single object In this part of the manual a diode rectifier will be used instead and the focus shifted to harmonics in the supplying line currents The case is an industrial plant consisting of ACDC converters and consuming 55 MW for aluminum production The plant is supplied by a 132 kV high voltage AC Application Manual 254 ATPDraw version 72 system and there are concerns about the harmonics in the current on the high voltage side This example shows how to model an equivalent 24 pulse diode rectifier and calculate the harmonics in currents in Models The harmonics could alternatively have been calculated as a part of a post processing Fig 610 shows the example circuit SAT Y Z 132 kV SAT Y Y 5 uH Cable 132113 SAT Y Y SAT Y Z SAT Y Y V 5 uH 00265 UI 5 mF U0 222 mH Cable 00265 UI 5 mF U0 MODEL fourier M I V A Regulation 113106 kV transformers Diode bridges Zigzag transformers ZN0d11y0 1070693 kV Fig 610 Example circuit Exa14acp The diode bridge is modeled and compressed into a group as shown in Fig 611 Note the need for small resistors 1 to decouple the diodes and added snubber circuits The R and C data for all six snubbers are added to the External parameter group but will appear as only two parameters in the compressed object A bitmap icon is created for diode bridge Fig 611 Compress a 3phase diode bridge Application Manual ATPDraw version 73 255 Fig 612 Component dialog of the compressed group ACDC The key unit to produce the 24pulse system are the two supplying transformers phase shifted 15 degrees and with a Y and coupling on the secondary side This is accomplished by using the Saturable Transformer component with a zigzag coupling on the primary winding The input dialog of the upper transformer is shown in Fig 612 The Saturable Transformer requires direct input of electrical quantities so recalculation of Test Report data is required The transformers had the following test report data Coupling ZN0d11y Rated power 248 MVA Rated primary voltage 10735 kV Rated secondary voltage 693 V Rated tertiary voltage 693 V Rated frequency 50 Hz Open circuit current 00056 pu Short circuit impedance 12 00084 j01015 pu Short circuit impedance 13 00084 j01015 pu Short circuit impedance 23 00210 j01887 pu Phase shift Z ref 3 75 deg This will result in the standard per unit equivalent circuit for the short circuit impedances Fig 613 Per unit equivalent circuit of the 3winding transformer Note the negative resistance in the primary winding This could result in a stability problem in the simulations but fortunately this didnt seem to be the case in this example The input dialog of the Saturable transformer with the electrical parameters is shown in Fig 614 0 0944 0 0105 2 0 0944 0 0105 2 0 00715 0 0021 2 12 23 13 3 13 23 12 2 23 13 12 1 pu j Z Z Z Z pu j Z Z Z Z pu j Z Z Z Z 1 2 3 Z1 Z2 Z3 Application Manual 256 ATPDraw version 72 Fig 614 Component dialog of the Saturable Transformer component The total winding voltage is 10735 3 kV 62 kV UA The short circuit impedance is 2 1 00021 000715 10735 kV 248 MVA 000976 00332 Z j j The zigzag winding 1 is further split in Z and Y parts with sin75 0165 sin60 75 n The voltages across each winding part and the individual leakage impedances are automatically calculated by ATPDraw as 5 68 kV kV 57 0 165 cos60 57 cos 3 735 10 1 U z 0 934 kV 5 68 kV 0165 1 U y 14 m 0 165 1 0 165 00976 0 84 m 0 165 1 1 00976 0 1 1 y z R R H H 279 0 165 1 165 0 50 2 0332 0 H 0103 mH 0 165 1 1 50 2 0332 0 2 2 1 2 1 y z L L If the HV winding 1 is chosen as the primary winding the magnetizing branch will be added to the first winding part Z of the zigzag winding This is probably not a good choice and alternatively the magnetizing branch should be added to the lowvoltage Ycoupled winding This could be done externally or by choosing winding 3 as the primary The measured inductance is Application Manual ATPDraw version 73 257 2 1 3 pu 0328 pu 0328 10735 kV 248 MVA 152 H 2 50 00056 m L and the inductance that should be added to winding 1Z in ATP 2 128 H 1 ATP m mz L L n n Saturation is of no importance in this example and a single point is set on the characteristic page i 1 128 If a measurement of the zero sequence impedance is missing a reasonable assumption for this particular transformer is to set it to 23 of the positive sequence magnetizing current Further the zero sequence inductance added in ATP is one half of the real value This gives 2 2 2 0 0 0 568 568 2 252 128 3 2 z ATP ATP z mz U R L L The Delta winding The total winding voltage is 2 0693 kV UA The short circuit impedance is 2 2 00105 00944 3 0693 kV 248 MVA 061 j548m Z j R2061 m and L2175 H The Wye winding The total winding voltage is 3 0693 3 04 kV UA The short circuit impedance is 2 3 00105 00944 3 04 kV 248 MVA 0203 j183m Z j R30203 m and L3585 H The ATP file format and connectivity of the transformer specified in is TRANSFORMER THREE PHASE TX0001 252 TRANSFORMER T1A 1E11 1 128 9999 1Z1A T0002C 00841032156797 2 T0002A 00140027993446 3D2A D2C 00061 0174 693 4Y3A 000200585 4 TRANSFORMER T1A T1B 1Z1B T0002A 2 T0002B 3D2B D2A 4Y3B TRANSFORMER T1A T1C 1Z1C T0002B 2 T0002C 3D2C D2B 4Y3C Z1A Z1B Z1C D2A D2B D2C Y3A Y3B Y3C Application Manual 258 ATPDraw version 72 The example shown in Fig 610 also includes a stepdown transformer and regulating transformer regulation not modeled that also are modeled as Saturable Transformer components Alternatively the BCTRAN or Hybrid Transformer models could have been used as they have an internal conversion of test report data These models do not support Zigzag transformers however The harmonics are calculated by an algorithm in MODELS This is shown in chapter 551 in this manual The automatic approach is assumed A default model is used and the Models text is typed in under Edit The output of absolute value and angle are declared s 26phase ABSF and ANGF while the input X is single phase The user can select the type of input switch current in this case by clicking on the left input node of the model and select Input Current in the Node dialog box The Model will output all harmonics 0N where N is a data parameter as a function of time The calculation is performed by integration of a sliding window of size 1FREQ sec The selection of variables to plot is made from a models probe connected to the ABSF node The probe is set to 26phases and the phases of special interest 1 5 7 11 13 23 25 are checked under Monitor Fig 615 Model probe dialog The line current in phase A at the 132 kV side is selected as input A connection is drawn from the left 3phase side of the switch to the single phase Model input node In the Connection dialog that then pops up phase A is selected The simulated phase A current is shown in Fig 616 and the 5th 7th 23rd and 25th harmonics calculated in Models shown in Fig 617 f ile Exa14pl4 xv ar t cHVBUSAT132A 000 002 004 006 008 010 400 300 200 100 0 100 200 300 400 Fig 616 Simulated line current phase A at the 132 kV side Application Manual ATPDraw version 73 259 Fig 617 The harmonics of the current in Fig 616 The harmonics can also be calculated in for instance PlotXY as shown in Fig 618 but not as a function of time MCs PlotXY Fourier charts Copying date 28012009 File Exa14pl4 Variable cHVBUSAT132A peak Initial Time 008 Final Time 01 0 5 10 15 20 25 30 00 05 10 15 20 25 harmonic order Fig 618 Harmonics calculated by FFT in PlotXY Application Manual 260 ATPDraw version 72 f ile Exa14pl4 xv ar t v P1 N1 v P2 N2 0 4 8 12 16 20 103 0 150 300 450 600 750 900 Fig 619 DC voltages on the LV side 64 The Controlled Electric Rotating Machines Power system studies often require the simulation of transients operations of 3phase electrical rotating machines including their control schemes with cases like synchronous generators stability after external faults induction motor stalling due to voltage dips power quality issues due to the aeolic generators dynamics etc This section illustrates on how to represent these machines synchronous induction and doublefed mainly and their controls in order to properly reproduce the group behavior in realistic cases Electric Rotating machinery representations for simulation of transients include both electromagnetic models for the windings and magnetic core and mechanical models for the rotating body so their inputoutput possibilities include electromagnetic magnitudes like voltages currents and fluxes along with mechanical magnitudes like torques angles and speeds Regarding the control schemes and due to their extensive functionstopologies neither ATPDraw nor ATPEMTP offers specific single objects that represent control schemes of the rotating machines instead with the TACS or MODELS objects the user may assemble or code the particular control arrangement Due to the above and as mentioned in the ATPDraw Reference Manual chapter 4117 ATPDraw offers three classes of rotating machines objects Objects that include rotating machines with both the electromagnetic and the mechanical models SM ATPEMTP source 5958 multimass synchronous machine and IM56A ATPEMTP source 56 singlemass induction machine The input data for these objects are the nameplatemanufacturer data so they can be readily incorporated in a simulation case The user must add the proper control schemes for the powerfrequency and voltagereactive power controls for the SM object and the mechanical loadprime mover scheme for the IM56A object Objects that include the universal machine UM with only the electromagnetic modelling UM1 ATPEMTP source type 19 code 1 synchronous machine UM3 ATPEMTP Application Manual ATPDraw version 73 261 source type 19 code 3 singlefed induction machine UM4 ATPEMTP source type 19 code 4 doublefed induction machine The input data for these objects are the electrical parameters values that the user must obtain from the nameplatemanufacturer data Also the user must add the analog electric network for the mechanical rotating body representation and the proper powerfrequency and voltagereactive power control schemes too Objects that include the universal machine ATPEMTP source type 19 with the electromagnetic modelling and a singlemass rotor electric analogy with builtin measurements and some optional controllers in TACS UMSYN ATPEMTP source type 19 code 1 synchronous machine UMIND ATPEMTP source type 19 codes 3 and 4 singlefed and doublefed induction machines The input data for these objects are mainly the nameplatemanufacturer data with them ATPDraw obtains the electrical parameters values required by the ATPEMTP sources Also in case that the represented unit have a different control scheme the user can inhibit the builtin controls and to include the proper powerfrequency and voltagereactive power control schemes In order to have the case with the machines controlled or not at the desired steadystate conditions the case must be solved with a few seconds in TMAX without intentional transients Then the user must verify that the initial operational magnitudes of the machines voltages angles powers torques etc have the correct values For this purpose the analysis of the solution text output file LIS is highly recommended too Note that for the UM variants codes 1 3 4 the control input magnitudes to the ATPDraw objects are applied in physical units and incremental regarding the initial values currents in Ampere as analogy of mechanical torques 1 A 1 Nm are applied to the masses analog RC circuits and in the case of code 1 synchronous machine the DC excitation voltage in Volt is applied to the field winding first winding in rotors data of UM first terminal while the other is grounded This is explained in the Help text at every ATPDraws object and must be taken into account when the user set the required scaling and limits for the output of the machines control schemes For the SM and IM56A objects the control input magnitudes are applied in PU units of the initial values of the torques and the DC excitation voltage then it is convenient that a previous steady state solution be analyzed before the main case simulation is done a Solve the steadystate of the case until the initial values of voltages angles powers etc of the simulated network machines and other elements met the desired conditions b Analyze the steadystate solution text output LIS file for each SM and IM56 machine and note the reported values for mechanical and electromagnetic torques and the DC excitation voltage at the field winding terminals For the SM 5958 machines these values are under their Data Parameter and initial conditions section for the IM56A machines their torque values are at their The initial torque calculation for a Type56 IM at bus X00YYA report c With the initial values as bases for the PU magnitudes and in order to obtain a proper controlled machines response the user must obtain and set the required scaling and limits for the machines control schemes 641 Synchronous machine control Exa22aacp The ATPEMTP sources types 59 solved in the dq0 reference frame and 58 solved in the ABC reference frame whose rules of application and input data formats are described in the Application Manual 262 ATPDraw version 72 ATPEMTP Rule Book chapter VIII and their formulation is illustrated in the EMTP Theory Book chapter 8 are preprocessed with the ATPDraws object SM that properly considers these featurescharacteristics A threephase stator winding with possible delta or wye star internal connection with only a threephase terminal for connection to the rest of the power system representation In case of wyeconnected machines the user has no access to the neutral terminal but heshe can specify an RL grounding impedance possible zero in PU of the machine MVA and kV ratings Up to four rotor windings field and damper in the daxis and damper and parasitic eddy currents in the qaxis even when the rotor has no electrical network connection nodes the user can specify the DC voltage in PU of the steadystate value to apply to the field winding Field current at rated voltage in the airgap line with optional saturation characteristics in the rotors direct and quadrature axis Only two points S1 at rated voltage and S2 S1 are required for each characteristic A multimass rotating body with masses specified with constant moment of inertia and viscous damping coefficient and shaft sections specified only with the stiffness constant individual mechanical torque in PU of the steadystate value can be applied at any mass the electromagnetic torques internal application is done to the mass designated as the generator rotor and to the exciter rotor if any Then for the graphic representation and preprocessing of the source types 5958 the ATPDraws object named SM has this appearance and node description Fig 620 Graphic appearance and connection nodes of the ATPDraw object SM BUS a threephase node for the stator winding connection to the rest of the power system representation EXFD a singlephase node for the DC voltage in PU of the value at the steadystate solution control input to the rotors field winding of the from the connected TACS or MODELS output variable POWER a multiphase node for the mechanical torques in PU of the value at the steadystate solution control input to every specified turbines mass from the connected TACS or MODELS output variables EXOUT up to five outputs for passing to TACS or MODELS objects the values of the specified internal machines electrical and mechanical magnitudes in engineering units stator and rotor currents EM torques masses speeds and angles shaft torques etc These machine nodes can be named and the machine magnitude for EXOUT nodes can be selected as shown Application Manual ATPDraw version 73 263 Fig 621 SM Connection Nodes Data For the usage of a machine magnitude in a TACS process an ATPDraws EMTPOUT Circuit Variable Internal Variable ATPEMTP TACS signal source type 92 object must be connected to the EXOUT node that have the selected electromagnetic or mechanical magnitude The user must be aware that in the transient simulation the initial at TIMEX 0 seconds value of the signal source is zero because TACS solve its circuit before the electrical network and MODELS objects are solved in the time loop calculation For the usage of a machine magnitude in a MODELS object its input node type must be selected as Input Machine and connected to the EXOUT node that have the selected electromagnetic or mechanical magnitude but if a TACS signal source is also connected to that EXOUT node the MODELS input node must be declared as Input TACS otherwise the values that the MODELS object receives will be zero at all the simulation steps without any warning from ATPEMTP On other hand the object SM accepts its data input only in the manufacturers format described in the ATPEMTP Rule Book chapter VIII the same for both source types 58 and 59 The following figure shows the data sections of this format Electrical Attributes rated values reactances General data steady AC source 5859 Field current saturation characteristic Masses number ids inertias and Output machines magnitudes for the PL4 file and the number of EXOUT nodes Fig 622 SM input data Electrical Attributes General data Field Current Masses and Output For the illustration of the controlled synchronous machine represented with the ATPDraws standard object SM the companion file SM58ACP contains the simulation case of a generating unit rated 600MVA 22kV 60Hz 2 pole generator and its stepup transformer that is delivering 500 MW PF00 at 1025 rated voltage in its steadystate and in the transient simulation it experiences a singlelinetoground fault at t 10 seconds and a tripreclose event on phase C of Application Manual 264 ATPDraw version 72 its 300 km transmission overhead line at 400 kV The data of the generator the controls and the rest of the system appears in the Chapt 643 The following figure shows the entire simulated system with the controlled synchronous machines scheme and its flow of signals Fig 623 Power System Representation for the Controlled Synchronous Machine Simulation The simplified models of the machines controls and prime mover in this case are all in MODELS objects see these scripts in Chapt 643 The controls scheme objects have with the following definitions TABLE 641 Synchronous Machine Controls MODELS Objects of the Example Case MODEL PURPOSE INPUT OUTPUT UGRMS Calculation of the LL rms 3phase voltage in kV 3phase set of node voltages UG representative LL rms voltage from generators stator winding terminals in kV UI2PQ3 ATPDraws Power System Tools object Calculation of the 3phase P Q powers in VA 3phase set of node voltages 3phase set of switch currents PG QG 3phase P Q powers in Watt and VAr AVRPSS Representation of the Generators Automatic Voltage Regulator with a Power System Stabilizer Function UG LL rms Voltage from generators stator winding terminals in kV RefV Desired generator voltage in PU of its steadystate value RefW Desired generator rotor speed in PU of its steadystate value WG generator rotor speed in rads VREG Regulation voltage for the Generators Rotating Exciter field winding in PU of its steadystate value ROTEXC Representation of the Generator Rotating Exciter VREG Field winding regulation voltage in PU of its steadystate value EFD Excitation Voltage for the synchronous machines field winding in PU of its steadystate value GOVT2 Representation of the Generators Governor and Turbine LP and HP WG Generator rotor speed in rads RefW Desired generator TORQC TORQD Mechanical Torque for the masses 3 LP and 4 HP Application Manual ATPDraw version 73 265 sections rotor speed in PU of its steadystate value RefP Desired generator Power in PU of its steady state value PG Generators 3phase active power in Watt of the generator rotor in PU of its steadystate value Note the single phase connection lines for the corresponding masses C 3 LP D 4 HP directly to the multiphase node POWER The case was solved with deltat50E5 seconds and Tmax200 seconds The SLG fault is applied from t 10 second to t 12 second the faulted transmission line phase C is disconnected at the generation end from t 105 second to t 175 second and from t 105 second to 155 second at the system Thévenin equivalent end Because the synchronous machine model in the ATPDraw object is very easy to select from the ATPEMTP source type 59 to type 58 both solutions are illustrated and they show a very different machine behavior a with source type 58 solved in the ABC reference frame whose results are believed closer to the real behavior the simulation shows a machines stable swing without an outofstep operation and b with the source type 59 solved in the dq0 reference frame the simulation shows a machines 14pole slip outofstep event that supposes a more severe operational stress on all components of the generating unit and the rest of the power system The graphical results of simulations with both sources type 59 14pole slip and type 58 no pole slip are shown next Fig 624 Active P and Reactive Q powers delivered by the generator to its stepup transformer Fig 625 Generator rotor mass angle and speed Application Manual 266 ATPDraw version 72 Fig 626 Rotating exciter output voltage and the current at the generator field winding terminals Fig 627 Torque applied to turbine masses and LL rms voltage at the stator winding terminals Fig 628 LG voltages at the stator winding terminals Fig 629 Currents at the stator winding terminals Application Manual ATPDraw version 73 267 Fig 630 Torques electromagnetic and mechanical at the generator turbine shaft 642 Universal machine control Exa22bacp The Universal Machine requires input in electrical quantities This makes it rather difficult to use in practice The WINDYN tool offers calculation of these parameters based on manufacturers data The example in this chapter starts with a UMSYN machine with the same parameters as in Chapt 641 The UMSYN component support a single mass internally The Universal Machine needs control inputs in physical quantities field voltage in V in torque in Nm with current in A used as analog Moreover the Universal Machine can optionally be automatically initialized The recommended setup is to use Automaticinitialization and record the physical quantities by inspecting the LISfile Then the field and torque controls must be modified by TRQ0TRQpu10 and EFD0EFDpu10 Run the case with Automatic initialization no need for tuned controls at this point Inspect the LISfile look for Solution at nodes with known voltage Solution at nodes with known voltage Nodes that are shorted together by switches Node Source node voltage Injected source current NA name Rectangular Polar Rectangular Polar NA WGEN 37699111843078 37699111843078 13426960819E7 134269608304E7 NA 000 00 54480216294013 1799976752 NA EXFD IX0019 23053311654305 23053311654305 29768502209823 29768502209823 NA 00 00 00 00 NA Take note of the calculated torque current injected into the node and the field voltage In this example these are WGEN1342696E6 ANm positive for generator and EXFD23053312 V These values must be used in a final physical scaling of the controls Use the same control blocks as in the SM case based on pu quantities but modify the output via TACS Use the TFORTRAN block with one input and one data Specify the output as shown below The input to the TACS scaling block comes from MODELS so add a TMODVAR block on the input The scaling could have been embedded into the MODELS block also Application Manual 268 ATPDraw version 72 Fig 631 Scaling of control output to physical quantities Upper Torque lower Field Application Manual ATPDraw version 73 269 Exfd Torque SM WI EXFD WGEN ui PQ fu MODEL URMS MODEL AVRPSS M PG M QG T U Ref 1 PU MODEL GovTur2 M TMPU V GEN V M I TGX V M EFDPU M VGEN fu Y XFMR M I H0 T P Ref 1 PU LCC 50 km M VREG T W Ref 1 PU LCC 100 km M M LCC 50 km T W Ref 1 PU LCC 100 km MODEL ROTEXC CO07C X0008 OHL 112 sec CO05C C Fig 632 Same case as in Fig 623 with UMSYN model Exa22bacp The UMSYN component can be used to calculate the input to an UM1 machine model This is done be inspecting the ATPfile creating from the UMSYN model and typing in the created coil data manually The UM1 model needs two TYPE14 AC sources for initialization and the mechanical network added manually as capacitorresistor equivalents The control part can be identical SM w WGEN EFD XX0014 EXFD ui PQ M PG M QG V GEN M I TGX V M UG Y XFMR M VREG T U Ref 1 PU T W Ref 1 PU M EFDPU M fu M TLP T W Ref 1 PU T P Ref 1 PU fu M MODEL GovTur2 MODEL UGRMS MODEL AVRPSS MODEL ROTEXC V M Fig 633 Same case as in Fig 623 with UM1 model Exa22cacp Fig 634 compares the active power response of the type 58 synchronous machine in Exa22a with the universal machine in Exa22b Exa22c is identical to Exa22b We clearly see that the active power delivered is equal in the beginning but damping of the type 58 machine is higher Application Manual 270 ATPDraw version 72 Exa22apl4 mPG Exa22bpl4 mPG 0 4 8 12 16 20 s 10 05 00 05 10 15 109 Fig 634 Active power delivered by the generators in Exa22a and Exa22b 643 Data used in the ATPDraw cases described Chapt 641642 Exa22 The generator has the following data TABLE 642 Synchronous machine data Electrical data Rated Capacity Sn in MVA 60000 Adc Rated LL Voltage Un in kV 2200 Rated Load Sn PFn Un Field Current Ifn 30350 Rated Frequency Fn in Hz 6000 NoLoad Rated Un Field Current AGline 10900 Rated Speed in RPM 36000 NoLoad Field Current 10 Un S1 11700 Rated Power Factor PFn in PU 090 NoLoad Field Current 125 Un S2 19200 Full Load Generator Efficiency 9903 Full Load GeneratorTurbine Efficiency 9847 PU PU DAxis Synchronous Reactance Xd 1650 Stator Winding Resistance Ra 00045 QAxis Synchronous Reactance Xq 1590 Stator Winding Leakage Reactance XL 01400 DAxis Transient Reactance Xd 0250 Zero Sequence Reactance Xo 00802 QAxis Transient Reactance Xq 0460 Neutral Grounding Resistance Rn 90000 DAxis SubTransient Reactance Xd 0200 Neutral Grounding Reactance Xn 64533 QAxis SubTransient Reactance Xq 0200 Seconds DAxis Transient Time Const Tdo 45 Generator LG Capacitance Cg uF 02325 QAxis Transient Time Constant Tqo 0550 DAxis SubTransient Time Constant Tdo 0040 QAxis SubTransient Time Constant Tqo 0090 Mechanical data Mass No Rotor EXTRS Tmec HICO E6 kgm2 DSD Nmrads HSP E6 Nmrad 1 Exciter 0000058 0015 5954 2 Generator 0007425 1971 132875 3 Turbine LP 66 0013094 3476 67977 4 Turbine HP 34 0002103 0558 The Stepup transformer data is 650 MVA 22kV400kV DY1g Zt 11 PlossSn 55200 kW This stepup transformer was represented with the ATPDraws Hybrid Transformer object Application Manual ATPDraw version 73 271 The 300 km overhead transmission line at 400 kV has three 1113 kCM ACSRAW conductors per phase and two guards galvanized steel conductors with this configuration data TABLE 643 Overhead line data Rin cm Rout cm Rdcohmkm Horiz m Vtower m Vmid m Phase A 0399 1599 00511 105 250 125 Phase B 0399 1599 00511 00 250 125 Phase C 0399 1599 00511 105 250 125 Guard 1 0000 04890 1463 110 343 23 Guard 2 05695 07325 1460 110 343 23 It is represented with four segments of 16 13 13 16 of the total length and three ABC BCA transpositions every segment has electrical parameters obtained with the Bergerón model traveling wave constant parameters at the rated frequency of 60 Hz The generator delivers power to a remote power system represented with a balanced Thévenin equivalent Ssc3ph 66428 MVA Ssc1ph 79099 MVA with these data TABLE 644 Remote source data Rthev ohm Xthev ohm Zero sequence 056344 137529 Positive sequence 162208 264452 The MODELS user objects in this example case with the data applied in the simulations have these codes MODEL UGRMS Representative 3PH LL RMS VOLTAGE DATA Freqdflt 600 Rated Frequency in Hz Uinidflt 2255 Initial Voltage in kV INPUT Ubus13 OUTPUT Urms VAR Urms Tfl1 Tfl2 Ualp Ubet Uraw HISTORY Urmsdflt Uini INIT Tfl1 10Freq Tfl2 Tfl12020 ENDINIT EXEC Ualp 20Ubus1Ubus2Ubus330 Ubet Ubus2 Ubus317320508076 Uraw sqrt15Ualp2 Ubet2 CLAPLACEUrmsUraw0001S010S0 Tfl1S1 Tfl2S2 ENDEXEC ENDMODEL MODEL AVRPSS An Automatic Voltage Regulator PSS DATA RVgndflt 22000 Rated voltage in kV Vinidflt 22550 Initial Voltage in kV Kregdflt 40000 Regulator Amplifier Gain in PU MaxVdflt 5000 Exciter Max limit in PU RPMidflt 36000 Initial Speed in RPM INPUT Vgen RefV RefW Wgen OUTPUT EFD VAR EFD Wini LimV DWgn DWps DVps DVgn ErrV ErfV DVfb Tled Tlag Treg Kfbk Tfbk Twsh Tlgw Tldw LVps HISTORY DWpsdflt 00 DVpsdflt 00 ErfVdflt 10Kreg Application Manual 272 ATPDraw version 72 EFDdflt 10 DVfbdflt 00 INIT Tled 0400 AVR lead time constant Tlag 0050 AVR lag time constant Treg 0020 AVR lead time constant Kfbk 0050 AVR lead time constant Tfbk 2000 AVR lag time constant Twsh 5000 PSS Washout time constant Tldw 0150 PSS lead time constant Tlgw 0050 PSS wash lag time constant LVps 0100 Pss MinMax limit Wini PIRPMi 300 LimV MaxVRVgnVini ENDINIT EXEC DWgn RefW WgenWini Speed Error in PU CLAPLACEDWpsDWgnTwshS110S0 TwshS1 CLAPLACEDVpsDWpsdminLVps dmaxLVps10S0TldwS110S0TlgwS1 DVgn KregKreg10RefV VgenVini Voltage Error ErrV DVgn DVps DVfb Sum point ClaplaceErfVErrV 1S0TledS11S0TlagS1 ClaplaceEFDErfVdminLimV dmaxLimV KregS01S0TregS1 ClaplaceDVfbEFD KfbkS11S0TfbkS1 ENDEXEC ENDMODEL MODEL ROTEXC Simple Rotating Exciter Model DATA Texcdflt 0600 Exciter time constant in s Adflt 1440 Frolich Saturation constants for Bdflt 0440 UgUr AUr1BUr Vemxdflt 3500 Maximum EFD output Vemndflt 0010 Minimum EFD output INPUT VREG OUTPUT EFD VAR EFD Vsum HISTORY EFDdflt 10 EXEC Vsum VREG AEFD10 B EFD Sum point CLAPLACEEFDVsumdminVemn dmaxVemx10S0TexcS1 ENDEXEC ENDMODEL MODEL GOVT2 SMs PowerSpeed Governor Turbine DATA RPMi dflt 36000 Steadstate speed in RPM Pmax dflt 6000 Max Turbine power in MW Pini dflt 5000 Initial gen power in MW Drop dflt 0050 Regulation Droop factor in PU TtHP dflt 0350 HP Turbine time constant in s TtLP dflt 0150 HP Turbine time constant in s INPUT Wgen RefW RefP Pgen OUTPUT PmLP PmHP VAR PmHP PmLP RWgn LimP DWgn DPWg DPgn DPPg DPgt Pval Tldw Tlgw Kgnp Tldp Tlgp RPMG HISTORY DPWgdflt 00 DPPgdflt 00 Pvaldflt 10 PmHPdflt 10 PmLPdflt 10 INIT RWgn PI RPMi 300 Rated Speed in rads LimP PmaxPini Turbine Power limit in PU Tldw 0250 Gov W Lead time constant in s Tlgw 0010 Gov W Lagg time constant in s Kgnp 0250 Power Error Gain in PU Tldp 0250 Gov P Lead time constant in s Tlgp 0010 Gov P Lagg time constant in s ENDINIT EXEC RPMG 300 Wgen PI Gen Speed in RPM Application Manual ATPDraw version 73 273 DWgn RefW WgenRWgnDrop Speed error in PU CLAPLACEDPWgDWgn10S0 TldwS110S0 TlgwS1 DPgn RefP Pgen10E6Pini Power error in PU CLAPLACEDPPgDPgn10S0 TldpS110S0 TlgpS1 DPgt DPWg DPPg Kgnp Total Power Error CLAPLACEPvalDPgtdmin00 dmaxLimP 10S010S1 Valve CLAPLACEPmHPPval 10S010S0 TtHPS1 HP Turbine CLAPLACEPmLPPmHP 10S010S0 TtLPS1 LP Turbine ENDEXEC ENDMODEL 644 The Controlled Induction Machines Exa23acp The simulation of the transient events in the operation of induction machines is needed in many studies The results of these simulations provide the assessment of the electrical and mechanical performance of the induction machines regarding an event in the electrical system the machine is connected to or the impact in the performance of that electrical system due to a transient event in the mechanical load of the induction machine In both situations the control on mechanical torque that the load or the prime mover applies to the machine is an essential part of the rotating machine representation As exposed in chapter 641 an induction machine motor or generator can be represented in ATPDraw circuit projects with these elements The ATPEMTP source type 19 Universal Machine UM code 3 the singlefed induction machine solved in the dq formulation frame represented with the ATPDraw objects UMIND with the controlled torque applied as an incremental value in physical units Nm additional to its value determined in its steadystate solution and UM3 that only represents the electromagnetic performance of the induction machine while the mechanical rotational body must be modelled as an electrical analog network and controlled torques in physical units Nm are applied as TACScontrolled current sources and The ATPEMTP source type 56 TEPCOs Machine the singlefed induction singlemass machine solved in the ABC formulation frame represented with the ATPDraw objects IM56A with the controlled torque applied as a PU magnitude of its value determined at the steadystate solution The mechanical load in the machines shaft is represented by a torque to be applied to the rotating mass of the machine and this torque can be a function of time according to the machines operational duty or a speeddependent function according to the load type fan compressor mill etc In both cases the load must be represented by a TACS or MODELS variable with the torque value in the proper unit Nm or PU of steadystate value that is connected to the input node of UMIND UM3 or IM56A In order to illustrate on the controlledtorque induction machine the example case Exa23acp contains an induction motor represented in three unconnected subcircuits with all three UMIND UM3 and IM56A objects and this motor is subject to an operational sequence that includes the startup at fullvoltage the mechanical fullload application and a LinetoLine fault for 05 seconds at its feeder The motor and feeder have the following nameplatecatalog rated data and operative specifications Application Manual 274 ATPDraw version 72 TABLE 645 Induction Motor and Feeder Data for the Example Simulation Induction Motor Rated Output Load 6500 HP 484705 kW Rated Frequency 60 Hz Rated Voltage 66 kV Speed at Rated Load Voltage And Frequency 1787 RPM Current at Rated Load Voltage And Frequency 490 A Rated Starting Current and Noload Current 51 PU and 025 PU of Rated Current Efficiency at Rated Load Voltage And Frequency 968 Maximum and Starting Torque 250 and 20 of Rated Torque Rated FW Losses 1 of Rated Load Moment of Inertia 115 kWsKVA Feeder represented with a Thévenin equivalent Voltage Rated 69 kV operates at 685 kV Zero sequence impedance 00233 j01275 ohm Frequency 60 Hz Positive sequence impedance 00095 j02937 ohm The induction machine is represented with a singlecage rotor in all three objects even when in UMIND and UM3 the machine can be specified with a more complex structure Besides the lack of information the machines saturation was considered of minor relevance for this ratedvoltage case and it was not represented In order to simulate the source type 56 with a floatingneutral stator winding comparable to the UM3 and UMIND connection an auxiliary 11 frontend YYg transformer is included Also the simulation begins with the TEPCOs IM at 0001 rated speed that yield a steadystate nonzero torque that is the base for the required torque scaling to PU of the initial value The UM3 and UMIND representations start at 00 rated speed and their initial load torque is 00 Nm of course Now the machines load torque is represented with this speed ω function for the steady state operation 61 The function parameters can be determined with the fullload 6500 HP 4847050 kW characteristic given by these three points TABLE 646 Torque speed characteristic CONDITION 1 Stand Still 2 Minimum Torque 3 Fullload Speed S 0000 PU 0 RPM 0 rads 0200 PU 3574 RPM 37427 rads 100 PU 1787 RPM 187134 rads Torque T 0150 PU 388522 Nm 0075 PU 194261 Nm 100 PU 25901465 Nm With T2 62 LnT3 T2 LnT1 T2 LnS3 S2 LnS2 63 ExpLNT3 T2 LNS3 S2 64 Application Manual ATPDraw version 73 275 With the speed in rads and the torque in Nm the parameters of are 194261 Nm 27377361 18122454 Fig 635 TorqueSpeed function In addition to this steadystate behavior a lowpass transfer function with a unitary gain and a time constant of 03 seconds is added in order to represent the possible load torque delay response to a sudden speed change Now for the induction motor simulation with its UMIND representation the circuit has this appearance Fig 636 Circuit for the simulation of a singlecage induction motor with UMIND and its Attributes window In the UMIND data window the MODEL was chosen as Singlecage rotor with a damping factor of 225 the STARTUP was specified at a Slip of 100 respect to synchronous speed and the invoked Fit View reported this result from the ATPDraw fitting process for the UM code 3 data Application Manual 276 ATPDraw version 72 Fig 637 Data for the UM code 3 obtained with the UMIND Fitting View feature Now the load torque in Nm for its application at the UMIND object is coded in MODELS as MODEL T4UMIND Mech Load Torque for UMIND DATA Snomdflt 17870 Rated speed in RPM Tnomdflt 25901465 Rated torque in Nm Tat0dflt 0150 Torque at zero speed in PU of Tnom Smindflt 0200 Speed at minimum torque in PU of Snom Tmindflt 0075 Minimum torque in PU of Tnom Taucdflt 0300 Load time constant in second Tinidflt 0000 Initial motor torque in Nm Tstadflt 10000 Load torque start time in second INPUT Smotr OUTPUT Tload VAR Tatz Tcon Srat Scon Alph Ktrq Tstdy Tload HISTORY Tloaddflt 00 INIT Tatz Tnom Tat0 Tcon Tnom Tmin Srat Snom Pi 300 rated speed in rads Scon Srat Smin Alph lnTnomTconlnTatzTconlnSratSconlnScon Ktrq explnTnomTconAlphlnSratScon ENDINIT EXEC Tstdy Tini tTstaTcon KtrqabsSmotrSconAlph Steady torque CLAPLACETloadTstdy 10S010S0 TaucS1 plus inertia ENDEXEC ENDMODEL Note that the calculated torque is defined negative because it represents a withdrawal of power from the machine For cases with nonzero initial speed the Tini torque can be obtained from the steadystate report in the LIS file and the Tini value must be positive because this initial torque is Application Manual ATPDraw version 73 277 already applied by an internal current source in the UMIND object and the external current source only must apply the additional torque The Data entry window and the Help text of the T4UMIND MODEL is Fig 638 Data Entry Window and Help text of MODEL T4UMIND On other hand the simulation circuit with the UM3 representation with the same data as obtained with the Fit View feature and the RC electric analog network derived of the UMIND object obtained from the ATP file or LIS file has this appearance Fig 639 Circuit for the simulation of a singlecage induction motor with UM3 and its Attributes window Note the type 14 AC current source required by the UM code 3 at BUSM has Tsto set to 10E9 seconds and the TACScontrolled type60 current source then apply the full calculated load torque passed from the MODEL named T4UM3 The code of this MODEL differs from that of T4UMIND only in these sections Application Manual 278 ATPDraw version 72 MODEL T4UM3 Mech Load Torque for UM3 VAR Tatz Tcon Srat Scon Alph Ktrq Tstrt Tstdy Tload HISTORY Tloaddflt Tini EXEC Tstrt tTstaTini Tstdy Tstrt tTstaTcon KtrqabsSmotrSconAlph CLAPLACETloadTstdy 10S010S0 TaucS1 ENDEXEC ENDMODEL The Data entry window the Help text and the Tini recommendation of the T4UM3 MODEL are essentially the same as for T4UMIND At last the simulation circuit with the IM56A representation is shown in the Fig 640 where an auxiliary 11 frontend YYg transformer is included in order to have a stator winding neutral point available for the same floating neutral connection of the UMIND and UM3 objects Also the data for the IM56A object is obtained with a simplified calculation in a spreadsheet in a file included in the example case Exa23acp The circuit appearance and the IM56A data entry window are T I56O phase 12 Tm phase 9 speed SAT Y Y IM56 Aux 11 transformer for a floating neutral stator winding connection I56B6 abc rms ui PQ I M I56Q M I56P 685 kV M I56V abc rms M I56I M TLOD56 K T I56RPM IM T INIT TACS A sample calculation of data for IM56A MODEL Tload Fig 640 Circuit for the simulation of an induction motor with IM56A and its Attributes window Note that the 12phase IM56A output node named I56O provides in phase 9 the speed value in rads that is admitted with the proper connection 9I as a TACS input into the T4IM56 MODELS object whose output is the calculated load torque that is connected to the TORQE node of the IM56A object here named TLOD56 The code in this T4IM56 object only differs from that of T4UMIND in the following MODEL T4IM56 Mech Load Torque for IM56A HISTORY Tloaddflt 10 XEC Tstrt tTsta Tstdy Tstrt tTstaTcon KtrqabsSmotrSconAlphTini CLAPLACETloadTstdy 10S010S0 TaucS1 plus inertia ENDEXEC ENDMODEL Application Manual ATPDraw version 73 279 Also note that if the ATPEMTP source type 56 is specified starting at zero speed the executable tpbigexe aborts the simulation To avoid this in the example the initial slip is 99999 regarding the synchronous speed as if the simulated machine is a veryslowmoving generator requiring a mechanical torque 297166258E03 Nm as it is read in the steadystate report of the LIS file The initial torque calculation for a Type56 IM at bus X0001A differs by 1 or more from the scheduled input value Within overlay 11 SUBROUTINE IMINIT the two values are respectively TM TMINIT 297166258E03 000000000E00 Exactly this initial torque value is entered as Tini the base torque value in the data entry window of the MODELS object named T4IM56 that it is shown next along with its Help text Fig 641 Data Entry Window and Help text of MODEL T4UMIND Now and all circuits in the same example with Δt 50E5 seconds and Tmax 12 seconds all three UMIND UM3 and IM56A replicated well the rated data of noload rated load and starting currents efficiency and slip at full load in a previous rated voltage rated frequency case Now in the example case Exa23acp with the feeders Thévenin equivalent data from table 645 the simulated sequence is 0000s UM3UMIND at zero rpm initial speed and IM56A at 1800 000001 0018 RPM 0050s Startup transient fullvoltage application on unloaded motor 10000s Fullload application to the motors 12000s LL fault at the feeders terminals 12500s LL Fault is cleared 15000s End of simulation This case results show the voltage sag in amplitude and duration time due to the noload startup operation of the motor and the starting current magnitude due to the LL fault the variations on the motors speed power demand and currents The results also show that both circuits with UM UMIND and UM3 yield the same magnitudes with slight differences regarding the magnitudes from the circuit with the IM56A object Application Manual 280 ATPDraw version 72 Fig 642 Variations on the LG RMS voltage at the motors terminals Fig 643 RMS Motor Currents energization fullload application and LL fault Fig 644 Motor demand in the simulated sequence Active P and Reactive Q Powers Fig 645 Rotational Speed RPM of the motor detail at the fullload and LL fault Application Manual ATPDraw version 73 281 Fig 646 Mechanical Load torque applied to the motor detail at the fullload and LL fault 645 Windsyn machine control Exa17acp Machine control is typically of minor importance in an electromagnetic transients program as the time constants involved are much larger than the electrical time constants Nevertheless is some situation it might be of interest The Fig 647 shows a simple example where the Windsyn synchronous machine model is being controlled by a governor and an exciter The loads of the machine doubles at 2 seconds and goes back to the initial 500 kW at 10 seconds The Windsyn generator is autoinitialized and this involves two sources hidden inside its libfile Initialization of the control units can thus be a challenge To control the machine additional external sources must be adjusted MODELS is here used for convenience but TACS components will result in much master performance The Windsyn component requires the special request card UM TO TACS so be able to do calculation performance parameters in TACS This is added as a User SpecifiedAdditional component The parameters used and the type of controls may certainly be discussed but the point here is to illustrate the interface between machine and control The speed control takes as input the actual speed of the machine voltage at the TORQUE node of the machine and gives out the torque to an additional current source connected to the same node The voltage control takes as input the phase A voltage to ground and gives out the field voltage to an additional voltage source The example shows how to get the field current and initial field voltage into the ST1A exciter model A separate model is used to calculate the rms value V MODEL turgov HYDRO M M M MODEL fmeter MODEL rms M M MODEL ST1A exciter Exfd Torque SM WI V Note Do not connect a switch to the field node EXFD as there is already a switch inside the UMSYN model The type 60 source for field voltage control must come after the type 14 sources for field initialization Fig 647 Machine control of Winsyn autoinitialize synchronous machine Exa17acp Application Manual 282 ATPDraw version 72 6451 Hydro turbine governor The gate opening limits must be adjusted to take the steadystate condition into account and Gmin1 is set in this case to allow 1 pu increase and reduction in torque Also the initial head h0 is set to zero here Fig 648 Hydro turbine governor MODEL TURGOV DATA TwD gFL gNL fp RpTrRtTgTpKs RmaxcloseRmaxopenGmaxGminMWWrated Wref INPUT W OUTPUT Torque VAR x1x2x3x4PmechAtx5hqqNLh0s y1y2gh1WrefpuWputorque HISTORY x1 dflt0x2 dflt0x3 dflt0x4 dflt0 x5 dflt0 q dflt0h dflt0 y1 dflt0y2 dflt0g dflt0 INIT h00 Initial head Set to zero in case of autoinitiation of generator AtrecipgFLgNL qNLgNLsqrth0 WrefpuWrefWrated ENDINIT EXEC WpuWWrated30pi Governor hydraulic turbin x1 WrefpuWpux5 cLaplacex2x11s01s0Tps1 x3Ksx2 minRmaxclose maxRmaxopen Gate openingclosing rate cLaplacex4x3 dminGmin dmaxGmax1s01s1 Gate position cLaplacegx41s01s0Tgs1 Gate servo motor cLaplacex5x4Rps0RpRtTrs11s0Trs1 Permanent transient droop Hydraulic turbin Permanent and transient droop control 1 p p t r r R R R T s T s 1 1 Tp s s K 1 s 1 1 Tg s Gmax Gmin Rmax Rmin x5 x1 x2 x3 x4 g Pilot valve and servo motor Gate servo motor Pm 1 Tw s fp qNL h0 At D g Penstock head loss Tp005 s Tg 02 s Rp 005 Rt 043 Tr 5 s Ks 5 Ap 10960041087 D 05 fp 3042104 Tw 156 s Application Manual ATPDraw version 73 283 cLaplaceqy11s0Tws1 qFlow hqrecipg2 hHead h1qqfp Penstock head loss y1h0hh1 Change in head y2qqNLh Change in mechanical power PmechAty2gDWrefpuWpu Pmechg Uncomment to turn off turbine TorquePmechrecipWMW1e6 ENDEXEC ENDMODEL 6452 Exciter model The Exciter is of type IEEE ST1A with inputs terminal voltage VT field current IFD reference voltage Vref and stabilizer signal VS all signals in pu The Exciter IEEE DC1A is also implemented for comparison Fig 649 IEEE ST1A exciter Parameters used TR 004 TB 10 TC 1 KA190 TA 0 TF 1 KF 0 KLR 0 ILR5 VRmax78 VRmin67 KC008 The exciter model ST1A requires the field current as input This variable can be obtained by specify the MODELS node as Input Current and connect it directly to the EXFD terminal of the machine since there is a switch inside that measures the total field current Fig 650 How to get the field current into Models and how to specify the Vs and VT nodes MODEL EXST1A DATA VrefVTpuTrTcTbKaTaVuelVoel Klr Ilr Kf Tf VRmaxVRmin Kc EFDrefIFDref INPUT VT Ifd Vs If0 OUTPUT Efd VAR x1x2x3x4x5x6 EfdVcIFDpuEfd0 HISTORY x1 dflt0x2 dflt0x3 dflt0x4 dflt0x5 dflt0 x6 dflt0 Vc dflt0 VT dflt0 INIT Efd0 1 1 sTR 1 1 C B sT sT 1 F F sK sT 1 A A K sT KLR Vref VS VT min max VOEL VUEL max T R C FD V V K I min T V VR EFD IFD ILR Application Manual 284 ATPDraw version 72 IFDpu1 ENDINIT EXEC if T2timestep then Special trick to obtain the initial field voltage Efd0If0001 else IFDpuIFDIFDref VcVT1Tr cLaplaceVcVT1VTpus01s0Trs1 cLaplacex6x5Kfs11s0Tfs1 x1VrefVcVsx6 cLaplacex2x11s0Tcs11s0Tbs1 cLaplacex3x2Kas01s0Tas1 x4x3IFDpuIlrKlr x5maxx4Vuel x5minx5Voel Efdx5 minVTVTpuVRmin maxVTVTpuVRmaxKcIFDpu EfdEfdEFDrefEfd0 endif ENDEXEC ENDMODEL Fig 651 IEEE DC1A exciter Parameters used TB 006 TC 0173 KA400 TA 089 TE 115 KE 1 A 0014 B 155 KF 0058 TF 062 MODEL EXDC1A DATA VrefTcTbKaTaVRMAXVRMINKfTfTeKeVuelAB Efdbase INPUT Vc OUTPUT Efd VAR x1x2x3x4x5x6 VfeVfEfdVcpu HISTORY x1 dflt0x2 dflt0x3 dflt0x4 dflt0x5 dflt0 x6 dflt0 Vfe dflt0 Vf dflt0 INIT Efd0 ENDINIT EXEC VcpuVcsqrt3Vref1000 Phase voltage measured so scale to line voltage x11VcpuVf cLaplacex2x1Tcs11s0Tbs11s0 x3maxx2Vuel cLaplacex4x3 dminVRMIN dmaxVRMAXKas0Tas11s0 x5x4Vfe cLaplacex6x51s0Tes1 Vfex6KeAexpBx6 cLaplaceVfVfeKfs1Tfs11s0 Efdx6Efdbase ENDEXEC ENDMODEL VRmax 1 1 C B T s T s max VRmin 1 A A K T s 1 F F K s T s Vc EFD 1 TE s exp KE u A B u VUEL u Application Manual ATPDraw version 73 285 6453 RMS value calculation The RMS value is calculated by a standard models provided by Laurent Dube Since the speed of the generator changes the frequency is calculated by another model The MODELSDefault model option was used and the text simply pasted into the Model component EditFlip was used to switch the input and outputs As this model gives its output to another model it must be written first to the ATP file This is managed by giving it a lower Order number than the receiving model and then choose ATPSettingsFormat Sort by Order In the receiving model the input node must be set to Input MODEL MODEL rmsmeter DATA xrmsini dflt1 initial rms value INPUT freq monitored frequency x monitored signal VAR xrms rms value of monitored signal x2 internal xx ix2 internal integral of x2 period 1freq OUTPUT xrms DELAY CELLSix2 12timestep 1 INIT histdefix2 0 integralx2 0 IF xrmsini 0 THEN xrms0 ELSE xrmsxrmsini ENDIF ENDINIT EXEC period recipfreq x2 xx ix2 integralx2 IF tperiod THEN xrms sqrtix2 delayix2 periodperiod ENDIF ENDEXEC ENDMODEL The frequency is calculated by another model based on zerocrossing detection f ile exa17pl4 xv ar t mUC u1OMEGM 0 10 20 30 40 50 s 3500 4000 4500 5000 5500 6000 6500 100 120 140 160 180 200 Fig 652 Machine response with no regulation Application Manual 286 ATPDraw version 72 f ile exa17pl4 xv ar t mUC u1OMEGM 0 5 10 15 20 25 30 s 5500 5700 5900 6100 6300 6500 100 120 140 160 180 200 Fig 653 Machine response with exciter DC1A and governor no hydro turbine 65 Simulating transformer inrush current transients The magnetic coupling between the windings and the nonlinear characteristic of the magnetizing reactance are the most important factors in transformer energizing transient studies The BCTRAN supporting routine of ATP can be used to derive the R L or L1 R matrix representation of a single or 3phase multiwinding transformer ATPDraw now provides a similar interface to the BCTRAN supporting routine like the one provided for the LCC objects The BCTRAN input data are the excitation and short circuit factory test data which can easily be obtained from the transformer manufacturers Additionally the user can select between several options for modeling the nonlinear magnetizing branch The first example circuit of this section demonstrates the use of BCTRAN objects for transformer energization studies In the second example readers are familiarized with the application of user specified objects and the Grouping feature for transformer modeling 651 Energization of a 40013218 kV autotransformer Exa10acp The study case is the energization of a 3phase threewinding Yyd coupled transformer The wye connected 132 kV windings and the delta coupled 18 kV windings are unloaded in this study The schematic diagram of the simulated case is shown in Fig 654 the corresponding ATPDraw circuit is depicted in Fig 655 637 mH 420 3 S SC 8000 MVA 6nF 4nF B A C 40013218 kV 250 MVA Yyn0d11 200 ohm Fig 654 Oneline scheme of the transformer and the 400 kV source Application Manual ATPDraw version 73 287 U I I I I I Aa0d11 BCT A A V V Fig 655 ATPDraw circuit Exa10acp The nameplate data of the transformer are as follows Voltage rating VhighVlowVtertiary 40013218 kV Yyn0d11 Power rating 250 MVA 75 MVA tertiary Positive seq excitation losscurrent 140 kW 02 Positive seq reactance High to Low 15 Sbase250MVA 15 Sbase250MVA High to Tertiary 125 Sbase75MVA 416667 Sbase250MVA Low to Tertiary 72 Sbase75MVA 24 Sbase250MVA Short circuit loss High to Low 710 kW High to Tertiary 188 kW Low to Tertiary 159 kW In the BCTRAN dialog box you specify first the number of phases and the number of windings per phase under Structure see Fig 656 Under Ratings the nominal linetoline voltage power ratings the type of coupling of windings and the phase shift must be entered For auto transformers the nominal voltage of the windings which is the required input for BCTRAN is calculated automatically by ATPDraw and the shortcircuit impedances are also redefined according to the Eq 645 646 650 of the EMTP Theory Book 5 The zero sequence excitation and short circuit parameters are approximately equal to the positive sequence values for an auto transformer having tertiary delta winding so the Zero sequence data available check boxes are unselected in this example The External Lm option is chosen under Positive core magnetization because external Type96 hysteretic inductors are used to represent the magnetizing inductance Accordingly only the resistive component of the magnetizing current will be entered as IEXPOS in the BCTRAN input file Application Manual 288 ATPDraw version 72 Fig 656 BCTRAN dialog box of the 40013218 kV transformer Following data specification the program offers to generate a BCTRAN input file and run ATP It can either be performed by a Run ATP requests without leaving the dialog box or selecting OK If the BCTRANfile is correct a punchfile will be created This file is directly included in the final ATPfile and there is no conversion to a library file as for linescables The BCTRAN input file generated by ATPDraw is shown next This file is given extension atp and stored in the BCT folder BEGIN NEW DATA CASE ACCESS MODULE BCTRAN ERASE C Excitation test data card C FREQ IEXPOS SPOS LEXPOS IEXZERO SZERO LEXZERO 3 50 05600056 250 140 0 2 3 0 C Winding data cards C VRAT R PHASE1 PHASE2 PHASE3 1 154729872 HBUSALBUSAHBUSBLBUSBHBUSCLBUSC 2 762102355 LBUSA LBUSB LBUSC 3 18 TBUSATBUSCTBUSBTBUSATBUSCTBUSB C Shortcircuit test data cards C PIJ ZPOSIJ SPOS ZZEROIJ SZERO 1 2 710334150145 250334150145 250 0 1 1 3 188613951637 250613951637 250 0 1 2 3 159 24 250 24 250 0 1 BLANK card ending shortcircuit test data PUNCH BLANK card ending BCTRAN data BEGIN NEW DATA CASE BLANK CARD The nonlinear magnetizing branch of the 40013218 kV autotransformer is represented by delta Application Manual ATPDraw version 73 289 coupled Type96 hysteretic inductors in this study The fluxcurrent characteristic of these inductors can be obtained by means of the HYSDAT supporting routine of ATP Fig 657 shows the hysteresis loop of the Itype1 material of ATP and of the magnetic core of the transformer 15 1 05 0 05 1 15 2 15 1 05 0 05 1 15 2 I PSI pu Hyst Hyst Armco Fig 657 The shape of the hysteresis loop of the transformer magnetic core compared with the material type 1 of ATPs HYSDAT supporting routine The output file generated by the HYSDAT supporting routine is listed below In this example the file is given a name HYSTR400LIB and stored in the USP folder C Cards punched by support routine on 21Jul02 140823 C HYSTERESIS C ERASE C C ITYPE LEVEL Request Armco M4 oriented silicon steel only 1 availab C 1 4 That was ITYPE1 As for LEVEL2 moderate accuracy outp C 982 972 Current and flux coordinates of positive saturat 368250000E01 949129412E01 245500000E01 943411765E01 110475000E01 923400000E01 491000000E00 903388235E01 184125000E00 886235294E01 613750000E01 851929412E01 214812500E00 811905882E01 355975000E00 743294118E01 429625000E00 628941176E01 491000000E00 457411765E01 613750000E00 305894118E01 675125000E00 423105882E01 859250000E00 571764706E01 110475000E01 686117647E01 133797500E01 743294118E01 174918750E01 800470588E01 239362500E01 851929412E01 328356250E01 891952941E01 429625000E01 920541176E01 613750000E01 949129412E01 982000000E01 972000000E01 135025000E02 977717647E01 9999 Such a nonlinear characteristic can be connected to the Type96 inductor in two ways include as an external file or enter fluxcurrent data pairs directly in the Characteristic page as shown in Fig 658 The Copy and Paste buttons of the dialog box provide a powerful way to import the Application Manual 290 ATPDraw version 72 whole characteristic from an external text file via the Windows clipboard or export it to another Type96 objects It is thus possible to bring a HYSDAT punchfile up in a text editor mark the characteristic copy it to the clipboard and paste it into the Characteristic page Fig 658 Importing the nonlinear characteristic from a HYSDAT punchfile The complete ATP input file generated by ATPDraw for this study case is listed next BEGIN NEW DATA CASE C Generated by ATPDRAW August Monday 26 2019 C A Bonneville Power Administration program C by H K Høidalen at SefASNTNU NORWAY 19942019 C DUMMY XYZ000 C dT Tmax Xopt Copt 5E6 15 500 5 0 0 1 0 0 1 0 C 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 C 345678901234567890123456789012345678901234567890123456789012345678901234567890 BRANCH C n 1 n 2ref1ref2 R L C LBUSA 004 0 LBUSB 004 0 LBUSC 004 0 SOURCASUPLA 2 637 0 SOURCBSUPLB 2 637 0 SOURCCSUPLC 2 637 0 SOURCASUPLA 200 0 SOURCBSUPLB 200 0 SOURCCSUPLC 200 0 TBUSA 01 0 TBUSB 01 0 TBUSC 01 0 96TBUSBTBUSC 8888 00 1 36825 949129412 184125 937694118 Application Manual ATPDraw version 73 291 61375 909105882 12275 880517647 2148125 811905882 405075 686117647 7365 491717647 1166125 703270588 1657125 789035294 2455 857647059 3621125 903388235 56465 937694118 982 972 135025 977717647 9999 96TBUSATBUSB 8888 00 1 36825 949129412 184125 937694118 61375 909105882 12275 880517647 2148125 811905882 405075 686117647 7365 491717647 1166125 703270588 1657125 789035294 2455 857647059 3621125 903388235 56465 937694118 982 972 135025 977717647 9999 96TBUSCTBUSA 8888 00 1 36825 949129412 184125 937694118 61375 909105882 12275 880517647 2148125 811905882 405075 686117647 7365 491717647 1166125 703270588 1657125 789035294 2455 857647059 3621125 903388235 56465 937694118 982 972 135025 977717647 9999 HBUSA 006 0 HBUSB 006 0 HBUSC 006 0 VINTAGE 1 1TBUSATBUSC 69428436268432 2TBUSBTBUSA 00 69428436268432 3TBUSCTBUSB 00 00 69428436268432 USE AR 1HBUSALBUSA 32888630659697 42462348721612 2LBUSA 7231251366149 00 34681001957452 09492595191772 3TBUSATBUSC 23450004639366 00 8467537379274 00 33834949508527 00 4HBUSBLBUSB 1936225317E15 00 677127449E15 00 1202491824E14 00 32888630659697 42462348721612 5LBUSB 677127449E15 00 2041578689E14 00 Application Manual 292 ATPDraw version 72 282318606E14 00 7231251366149 00 34681001957452 09492595191772 6TBUSBTBUSA 1202491824E14 00 282318606E14 00 6542678427E4 00 23450004639366 00 8467537379274 00 33834949508527 00 7HBUSCLBUSC 1936225317E15 00 677127449E15 00 1202491824E14 00 1936225317E15 00 677127449E15 00 1202491824E14 00 32888630659697 42462348721612 8LBUSC 677127449E15 00 2041578689E14 00 282318606E14 00 677127449E15 00 2041578689E14 00 282318606E14 00 7231251366149 00 34681001957452 09492595191772 9TBUSCTBUSB 1202491824E14 00 282318606E14 00 6542678427E4 00 1202491824E14 00 282318606E14 00 6542678427E4 00 23450004639366 00 8467537379274 00 33834949508527 00 VINTAGE 0 UNITS 11 USE RL SWITCH C n 1 n 2 Tclose TopTde Ie VfCLOP type SUPLA HBUSA 1 045 1 1 SUPLB HBUSB 1 045 1 1 SUPLC HBUSC 1 045 1 1 SUPLA HBUSA 0735 1 1 SUPLB HBUSB 0785 1 1 SUPLC HBUSC 0785 1 1 SOURCE C n 1 Ampl Freq PhaseT0 A1 T1 TSTART TSTOP 14SOURCA 0 326600 50 1 1 14SOURCB 0 326600 50 120 1 1 14SOURCC 0 326600 50 120 1 1 INITIAL OUTPUT SUPLA SUPLB SUPLC HBUSAHBUSBHBUSC BLANK BRANCH BLANK SWITCH BLANK SOURCE BLANK INITIAL BLANK OUTPUT BLANK PLOT BEGIN NEW DATA CASE BLANK Some results of the simulation are shown in Fig 659 In the reported case the steady state magnetizing current of the unloaded transformer is interrupted at 45 ms producing high residual flux in two phases As a result a high amplitude inrush current may occur at a subsequent transformer energization Application Manual ATPDraw version 73 293 file exa10pl4 xvar t cSUPLA HBUSA cSUPLB HBUSB cSUPLC HBUSC 0 10 20 30 40 50 ms 10 05 00 05 10 A file exa10pl4 xvar t cSUPLA HBUSA cSUPLB HBUSB cSUPLC HBUSC 007 008 009 010 011 012 013 014 015 s 500 250 0 250 500 A Fig 659 Steadystate magnetizing current upper curves and the inrush current lower curves at a subsequent energization 652 Energization of a 13215 kV generator stepup transformer Exa11acp The use of the icon customization and the advantages of the grouping feature of ATPDraw are demonstrated in this example The simulated case is again a transformer switching study in which a 155 MVA 13215 kV Yd coupled stepup and a 4 MVA 1569 kV Dd coupled auxiliary transformer are energized together The fast start gas turbine plant is located near to a 400220120 kV substation and the transformers are connected with the substation by a 120 kV single core XLPE cable During the stepup transformer energization the generator is still disconnected so it need not to be considered in this study The ATPDraw circuit of the simulation is shown in Fig 660 U SM T I V LCCTR132 I T Fig 660 ATPDraw circuit Exa11gacp Fig 660 shows several customized ATPDraw objects created by the Edit Compress command If you are not familiar with this grouping feature please read in section 51 of this Advanced Manual This feature provides a powerful tool in advanced modeling On Fig 660 the nonlinear Application Manual 294 ATPDraw version 72 hysteretic transformer objects the parallel connected 3phase breakers and the TACS objects for flux measurement were compressed into single objects and the icon of each group has been customized as well The icon of some nongroup objects were also customized eg the LCC object of the XLPE cable The uncompressed version of this case is also part of the ATPDraws example collection and is shown in Fig 661 Therefore you can see how the grouping feature makes the circuit more readable U SM 1569 BCT T Chg T T Gs T T V Gs T T Chl Clg I Gs T T Gs T T Gs T T Gs I LCC I Clg I I Chg TR132 Chl T Fig 661 ATPDraw circuit without using compress Exa11acp The model of the Ynd11 and the Dd0 transformers consists of a linear part user specified library object or BCTRAN object and a nonlinear hysteretic inductor The capacitances between the transformer windings and ground have been considered as well These capacitances do not influence the inrush current significantly but they need to be considered especially at delta coupled transformer terminals to avoid floating subnetwork found simulation errors For more details about the model parameters please read in section 582 of the Advanced Manual The compress option of ATPDraw can be used effectively to create new probetype objects as well The 3phase Flux probe of this example has been constructed by integrators TACS Transfer functions General objects timecontrolled switches to set zero initial conditions and coupling to TACS objects The output of the Flux probe the instantaneous flux linkage of the transformer windings can be used to analyze the operation of the model during steady state no load conditions and during the transformer deenergizationreenergization as shown in Fig 662 The circuit breaker of the transformer has a common drive with mechanical phase shift of 60 electrical degrees The making sequence is ACB with 333 ms delay between the poles and the breaking sequence is BCA Some results of the simulation obtained by the elaborated model are shown next Fig 663 shows the flux linkage and the phasetoground voltages of the stepup transformer during the noload breaking process The residual flux is quite low in all phases thus a subsequent energization will not produce high amplitude inrush current even if the making is done at the voltage zero crossing When synchronizing the first pole to close with the bus voltage and energize the transformer close to the voltage peak the inrush current amplitude will not exceed the peak value of the nominal load current of the transformer see in Fig 664 Application Manual ATPDraw version 73 295 file Exa11pl4 xvar cTR15B TR15C factors offsets 1 0 t FLX15C 1 0 10 5 0 5 10 80 60 40 20 0 20 40 60 80 Fig 662 Roaming of the operating point on the hysteresis loop in steadystate and during the subsequent nonsinusoidal oscillations at transformer deenergization file Exa11pl4 xvar t factors offsets 1 0 vTR132A 1 21E5 vTR132B 1 0 vTR132C 1 21E5 002 003 004 005 006 007 008 009 010 s 320 240 160 80 0 80 160 240 320 kV file Exa11pl4 xvar t t FLX15A t FLX15B t FLX15C 002 003 004 005 006 007 008 009 010 s 80 60 40 20 0 20 40 60 80 Fig 663 Nonsinusoidal voltage oscillations appear after deenergizing the stepup transformer upper curves The residual flux is less then 30 in each phases lower curves Vs Amps Vs Application Manual 296 ATPDraw version 72 file Exa11pl4 xvar t cBREKA CABLA cBREKB CABLB cBREKC CABLC 10 15 20 25 30 35 40 45 50 ms 100 75 50 25 00 25 50 A file Exa11pl4 xvar t vTR132A vTR132B vTR132C 016 017 018 019 020 s 150 100 50 0 50 100 150 kV file Exa11pl4 xvar t vTR132A vTR132B vTR132C 017 018 019 020 s 160 120 80 40 0 40 80 120 160 kV file Exa11pl4 xvar t cBREKA CABLA cBREKB CABLB cBREKC CABLC 016 017 018 019 020 021 022 023 024 s 2400 1600 800 0 800 1600 2400 3200 A file Exa11pl4 xvar t cBREKA CABLA cBREKB CABLB cBREKC CABLC 016 017 018 019 020 021 022 023 024 s 500 250 0 250 500 A Fig 664 Interrupting the steady state noload current of the stepup transformer upper curves and the inrush current amplitude below when energizing the first pole of the breaker a at the voltage zero crossing b close to the voltage peak Application Manual ATPDraw version 73 297 653 Using the Hybrid Transformer component Exa16acp The Hybrid Transformer component XFMR provides a topologically correct core model with individual saturation characteristics in legs and yokes calculated based on relative core dimensions Further the saturation characteristic is based on the Frolich equation with an additional optional aircore inductance thus improving the response above the last test report value This is of great importance when it comes to overexcitation situations like inrush current simulations The XFMR component in version 56 offers type 96 inductances even if these are not recommended for transient studies This gives on the other hand residual flux in the core after de energization In general advance Models controlled hysteretic inductors are needed to give good inrush current predictions Fig 665 shows the XFMR input dialog for the example Exa16acp A 3legged stacked core is selected and this requires relative yoke dimensions to be given under Core data A Triplex core single phase units does not require relative dimensions Under Inductance and Core the short and open circuit test report data are given respectively Resistance automatically follow Inductance for Test Report data The Winding sequence is set with the lowvoltage winding as the inner The XFMR dialog can work test report data directly Creation of the saturation characteristics is automized for type 96 half of the core losses is assigned to hysteresis losses with a Steinmetz coefficient n2 and a uniform width of the hysteresis Fig 665 XFMR model example Exa16acp Application Manual 298 ATPDraw version 72 When the user clicks on OK ATPDraw performs an internal calculation of the leakage inductance in the same way as BCTRAN The winding resistances are connected outside the Amatrix however The core model is fitted to the Test Report rms values by a Gradient Method optimization routine The user should also click on the Settings button on the Core page to select the type of nonlinear inductance 98 93 or 96 and the number of points on linearized Frolich equation maximum 9 A high number is required to get good inrush current estimates The final slope inductance part of the aircore inductance is set to zero in this case Design data really required to estimate it Using the Estimate check box will estimate La06a where the factor a6 is typical for core material M4 and a is found from the optimization with 0 Fig 666 Core settings Fig 667 shows a simulated inrush currents switching in a 290 MVA transformer from the 16 kV side with zero residual flux The same transformer is modeled both in BCTRAN and XFMR and the comparison shows that the XFMR gives about four times higher inrush currents This is because the BCTRAN model incorrectly assumes linear extrapolation of the magnetization characteristic above the Test Report data In addition the currents into the XFMR model have more reasonable waveshapes and attenuation file Exa16pl4 xvar t cX0004BLVXB cX0004CLVXC cX0011BLVBB cX0011CLVBC 000 002 004 006 008 010 s 2000 1500 1000 500 0 500 1000 1500 2000 A 500 375 250 125 0 125 250 375 500 A Fig 667 Comparison of inrush currents zero residual flux for a 290 MVA transformer modeled in BCTRAN and XFMR Application Manual ATPDraw version 73 299 66 Switching overvoltage studies with statistical approach Exa12acp The switching impulse withstand level of EHV line insulators are generally lower than the lightning impulse withstand level Therefore some measures are needed to protect the line against switching overvoltages especially when the insulation level is rather low like in case of line uprating One or more of the following measures could be applied to reduce these overvoltages mounting surge arresters at the line terminals and along the line application of circuit breaker with closing resistors synchronizing the breaker operations at line energization and reclosing limiting or eliminating the trapped charge at dead time of the 3phase reclosing The influence of the latter two measures to the switching overvoltage distribution is analyzed in this example The use of the masterslave feature of ATPs statistical switches is also introduced The EMTP model shown in Fig 668 has been elaborated for a line upgrading feasibility study to analyze the switching performance of a 400 kV compact line The clearances the location of the phase and ground wires and the length of the composite insulator strings are assumed known in this example U U U MOV U STAT MOV LCC MID LCC LCC LCC STAT STAT V S Fig 668 ATPDraw circuit for the statistical switching study Exa12acp The investigated line has been divided into four sections each of them represented by an LCC JMarti object To set up the initial conditions of the line easily a 3phase voltage source is connected to the line at right having voltage amplitude equal to the desired trapped charge This source is disconnected before the operation of the statistical switches to make the line unloaded It is worth to mention that some care is needed when constructing the EMTP model for such a statistical simulations because the unnecessary overcomplication of the model may increase the overall simulation time of that many statistical runs significantly 661 Setting program options for the statistical simulation The simulated switching incidence is a 3phase reclosing in this study Statistical switches of Gaussiantype represent the reclosing breaker The masterslave dependency is now supported by ATPDraw thus phase A is specified as master and the remaining two as slave ATP requires the master switch be specified earlier in the ATPfile then a slave ATPDraw ensured automatically this ordering This is why the closing of the dialog box of a master switch is somewhat delayed Application Manual 300 ATPDraw version 72 Fig 669 Input parameters of master and slave statistical switches The rest of program options and circuit parameter settings for a statistical study is very similar to that of any other time domain simulations There is one addition however You need to specify the Switch study and Switch controls under ATP Settings Switch before generating the ATPfile Unless you need special settings the Switch controls parameters need not be modified Fig 670 Setting the parameters of the statistical study The Output Manager found under ATPOutput Manager F9 enables the user to select those output requests to be added to the statistical tabulation The user can also group and scale the output requests Example 12 requests as default only output of the MID voltage but the terminal voltages and for instance surge arrester energy can be added The selection of alternative statistical tabulation is shown in Fig 672 662 Results of the statistical study As worstcase assumption the fault which precedes the 3phase reclosing in one or more phases has not been considered here Taking that the inductive voltage transformers play a significant role in eliminating the trapped charge in the healthy phases during the dead time of reclosing but CVTs or CCVT has no such effect two different cases have been considered a1 the trapped charge is equal to the phase to ground voltage peak a2 the trapped charge is 30 of the phase to ground voltage peak The reclosing operations are synchronized to the bus voltage in this simulation It means that the master switch is closed when the instantaneous value of the phasetoground bus voltage is equal to zero The average delay for the slave switches in phase B and C is set 120 and 60 electrical degrees respectively The standard deviation of the operating time of the synchronous controller and the breaker has been considered as an additional parameter in the study Application Manual ATPDraw version 73 301 b1 accumulated deviation of the breaker and the controller operating time is 1 ms b2 accumulated deviation of the breaker and the controller operating time is 2 ms The statistical tabulation of the overvoltage distribution will be part of the LISfile as shown next 1 Statistical output of node voltage 03430E06 0 MIDA MIDB MIDC Statistical distribution of peak voltage at node MIDA The base voltage for per unit printout is Vbase 343000000E05 Interval voltage voltage in Frequency Cumulative Per cent number in per unit physical units density frequency GE current value 51 12750000 437325000E05 0 0 100000000 52 13000000 445900000E05 2 2 98000000 87 21750000 746025000E05 1 99 1000000 88 22000000 754600000E05 1 100 000000 Summary of preceding table follows Grouped data Ungrouped data Mean 166850000E00 166882696E00 Variance 385116162E02 381739314E02 Standard deviation 196243767E01 195381502E01 4 SUMMARY SUMMARY SUMMARY SUMMARY SUMMARY SUMMARY SUMMARY SUMMARY SUMMARY SUMMARY 4 The following is a distribution of peak overvoltages among all output nodes of the last data card that have the same base voltage This distribution is for the maximum of the peaks at all output nodes with Vbase 343000000E05 Interval voltage voltage in Frequency Cumulative Per cent number in per unit physical units density frequency GE current value 51 12750000 437325000E05 0 0 100000000 52 13000000 445900000E05 1 1 99000000 91 22750000 780325000E05 1 99 1000000 92 23000000 788900000E05 1 100 000000 Summary of preceding table follows Grouped data Ungrouped data Mean 177125000E00 177305706E00 Variance 525173611E02 527332819E02 Standard deviation 229166667E01 229637283E01 Finally a brief summary of the simulation results is given next Considering the metaloxide arresters with 2 pu protection level at both ends of the line the highest overvoltages appear in the inner points of the line As an example Fig 671 shows the probability distribution functions of the switching overvoltages arising in the middle of the line The four curves correspond to the following cases a Three phase reclosing with 30 trapped charge Standard deviation of the accumulated operating time of the synchronous controller and the breaker is 1 ms b Three phase reclosing with 100 trapped charge Standard deviation of the accumulated operating time of the synchronous controller and the breaker is 1 ms c Three phase reclosing with 30 trapped charge Standard deviation of the accumulated operating time of the synchronous controller and the breaker is 2 ms d Three phase reclosing with 100 trapped charge Standard deviation of the accumulated operating time of the synchronous controller and the breaker is 2 ms As it can be seen the reclosing overvoltages are quite low even if the trapped charge is close to the voltage peak if the reclosing operations are synchronized to the busside voltage zero by a point on wave controller Application Manual 302 ATPDraw version 72 0 10 20 30 40 50 60 70 80 90 100 1 12 14 16 18 2 22 24 P U d1t 30 d1t 100 d2t 30 d2t 100 Fig 671 Probability distribution function of the 3phase reclosing overvoltages Fig 672 Output Manager and alternative request of Statistical Tabulation Application Manual ATPDraw version 73 303 67 Power system protection Exa24acp This example illustrates the usage of the Power System Toolbox in ATPDraw with modeling of the IEEE 9 Bus system with distance protection units The LINE3 component is used to represent the lines as PIequivalent and various fault scenarios Voltage and current probes are used to show steady state voltage and load flow TEx TPow 59 SM TEx TPow 59 SM TEx TPow 59 SM Y XFMR Y XFMR Y XFMR 449j382 BUS8 BUS9 I 163j943 169j854 BUS5 S041j0389 125j50 BUS4 100j35 BUS6 S60j 13 90j30 S31j171 V BUS7 10263374 V 104 00 V 103 93 V 1033 32 V 09962601 V 10142631 V 10163075 V 10262779 I 7162j2592 I r21 21 r21 21 r21 21 r21 21 2phase fault AB 90 Fig 673 IEEE 9 Bus system modeled in ATPDraw with Power System Toolbox Exa24acp The most sophisticated part of the model is the protective relays represented by a group R21 No data is surfaces so all settings and readout must be done inside the group Selecting the relay at Bus7 facing Bus 8 and EditEdit group gives the content shown in Fig 674 All the relays are equal in topology The two relays at each side of the line are also equal in parameters but flipped in direction take note of the important icon arrow Relays have different settings for each line The relay group R21 consists of four Models and a Group that must come in the correct sequence Sidebars Object Inspector Tree used to arrange the sequence correctly starting with the two lowpass filters for the measured voltages and currents then an RXcalculator for the loop impedance estimation next a distance relay and then finally a Group consisting of a controlled circuit breaker current zero detection Application Manual 304 ATPDraw version 72 ui RX 21 B T ctrlcb Fig 674 Content of distance relay group left with input dialog of the distance relay right The relay settings are the most complicated but a Zone Helper shown in Fig 675 is available via Set zones that let the user work with reach and blinder angles instead of RX values in a polygon To take full advantage of the Zone Helper the RL and XL settings in the relay should correspond to the actual positive sequence impedance of the involved line Default settings is based on using 80 and 120 of the line length for reach X of zone 1 and 2 the rightmost blinder angle equal to the line impedance angle and the other angles equal to 30 degrees Fig 675 Zone Helper distance relay W1RELAY21P Application Manual ATPDraw version 73 305 Fig 676 Zone definition and view from the Zone Helper for relay W1RELAY21P Application Manual 306 ATPDraw version 72 Fig 677 Relay Bus7 towards Bus8 impedance trajectories click on View in Fig 674 Phase A B C notation in legend means loop 1 2 3 The figure shows that the impedance of loop 1 enters zone 2 while the others stays outside This means a phase A to B fault Fig 678 Simulated voltage at Bus 7 and trip signals for each side sent to circuit breaker f ile Exa23pl4 xv ar t v BUS7A v BUS7B v BUS7C mTRIP78 mTRIP87 00 02 04 06 08 10 s 400 300 200 100 0 100 200 300 400 kV 00 02 04 06 08 10 Trip Zone 1 Trip Zone 2 Application Manual ATPDraw version 73 307 68 Solar power interface via PWM controlled inverter Exa25acp This example shows how ATPDraw can be used to study the integration of solar energy in the power grid The example is based on case 43 by Francisco Peñaloza at wwwatpdrawnet for the PV part but adds a fully switched igbt inverter controlled by MODELS in the dqplane The system is shown in Fig 679 with the PV model to the left with sun radiation variations as input and a temperature corrected MODELS controlled current source output To the right is the 22 kV system where a possible 3phase fault can be applied at the middle of the feeding line 15 C Tpv C T PVP PVN Y XFMR F Wm2 I U D V DQ ct ui PQ M D tcl05 s top065 s Fig 679 Photo voltaic source interfaced with igbt PWMcontrolled inverter Exa25acp In the middle of Fig 679 is the inverter in a Group shown below with a Models control Because ATP has no special treatment for the simulation of power electronics switching it is important to use a small timestep 1 μs used here and add snubbers across the switches The nonlinear diode DIODEN component is used as it has embedded all needed functionality The six fire pulses are collected by a 6phase node and controlled by a PWM scheme I I Fig 680 Switched igbt inverter Fig 681 Control scheme of igbt inverter ab c dq L P dq ab c P I P I Qref 3 vd 2 P I v i vd v q id iq Qref VDCref vd c PLL θ Vref ωL ω L Ki Ti Kd Td Application Manual 308 ATPDraw version 72 The input dialog of the voltage source inverter control is shown in Fig 682 The Data attributes are manipulated to show all data values The control strategy is to force reactive power output to zero and keep the DCbus voltage constant at 1800 V The PV is first ramped up from zero and the inverterswitch on the DCside is connected at 002 sec The response of the control to a change in sunlight Irad is shown in Fig 683 Fig 682 Input dialog of VSICTRLUQ Model Fig 683 Calculated power P Q on the ACside of the inverter and DCbus voltage Vdc as response to irradiated power Irad Application Manual ATPDraw version 73 309 An ideal 3phase fault at the middle of the feeding AC line is next applied at 05 sec lasting for 150 ms The response of the control is shown in Fig 684 There is a large overshoot in the DC bus voltage when clearing the fault at 065 sec as power is fed into the DC side for a short period Fig 684 Calculated power P Q on the ACside of the inverter and DCbus voltage Vdc as response to irradiated power Irad and a 3phase AC fault from 05 to 065 sec The MODELS script for reactive power and DCbus control is shown below MODEL VSICTRLUQ COMMENT 05Oct2018 Prof H K Hoidalen ENDCOMMENT INPUT volt13 phase voltages curr13 line current out of inverter VDCP VDCN Positive and negative DCbus voltage OUTPUT fire16 CONST twopi VAL6283185307 DATA S dflt1 MVA Vrms dflt1 kV LL rms VDCref dflt1 V Qref dflt0 pu Freq0 dflt50 Hz swfreq dflt3250 Hz Ki dflt1 pu Ti dflt0003sec Kd dflt1 pu Td dflt01 sec Lf dflt05 mH filter inductance theta0 DFLT00 initial phase betw daxis and alphaaxis VAR UAUBUDUQIAIBIDIQ UDF UQF IDFIQF IDerrIQerrVDCorVQcortxtriang VDrefVQref Vref13 freq omega theta dth tau Vpu IpuFire16i PQU0IDrefIQref VlimLfpu IQmax Vdc VDCerr HISTORY INTEGRALomega DFLTtheta0PI180 freq DFLTFreq0 UDF dflt1 UQF dflt0 IDF dflt0 Application Manual 310 ATPDraw version 72 IQF dflt0 VDcor dflt0 VQcor dflt0 IDref dflt0 INIT omega2PIFreq0 theta theta0PI1800 taurecip2PIswFreq5 VpuVrms1000sqrt23 peak ref IpuS1000Vrmssqrt23 peak ref LfpuLf1000IpuVpu scale to H and pu Vlim50 ENDINIT EXEC VdcVDCPVDCN Park transforms UDvolt1costhetavolt2costheta2pi3volt3costheta2pi3 Park UQvolt1sinthetavolt2sintheta2pi3volt3sintheta2pi3Park IDcurr1costhetacurr2costheta2pi3curr3costheta2pi3 Park IQcurr1sinthetacurr2sintheta2pi3curr3sintheta2pi3Park claplaceUDFUDsqrt23Vpus01s0sqrt2taus1tau2s2 LP filter claplaceUQFUQsqrt23Vpus01s0sqrt2taus1tau2s2 LP filter claplaceIDFIDsqrt23Ipus01s0sqrt2taus1tau2s2 LP filter claplaceIQFIQsqrt23Ipus01s0sqrt2taus1tau2s2 LP filter P UDFIDFUQFIQF23 Q UDFIQFUQFIDF23 VDCerr VdcVDCref2Vpu claplaceIDrefVDCerrdmin13 dmax13 KdTds0Kds110s1 PI regulator IDrefPrefUDF32 min13 max13 IQmaxsqrtmax032S2 IDref2 IQrefQrefUDF32 minIQmax maxIQmax IDerrIDrefIDF IQerrIQrefIQF claplaceVDcorIDerr KiTis0Kis110s1 PI regulator claplaceVQcorIQerr KiTis0Kis110s1 PI regulator VDrefUDFIQFomegaLfpuVDcor minVlim maxVlim VQrefUQFIDFomegaLfpuVQcor minVlim maxVlim for i1 to 3 do Vrefisqrt23VDrefcosthetai12pi3VQrefsinthetai12 pi3 endfor txt mod recipswfreq triangVdc2Vputx4swfreq1 2tx4swfreq22txrecipswfreq triangular PWM for i1 to 3 do fireiVrefitriang firei3not firei endfor PLL dthatan2UQFUDF claplaceFreqdth000277s025s11s1 omega 2piFreq theta INTEGRALomega ENDEXEC ENDMODEL 69 Postprocessing ATPDraw offers a few options for postprocessing as summarized in Chapt 39 Here the COMTRADE and embedded plotting features are explained Application Manual ATPDraw version 73 311 691 COMTRADE generation The example Exa26acp illustrates how to use the COMTRADE objects to generate comtrade files The case is a singlepole reclosing after a ground fault phase A Only the COMTRADE1 object is shown in Fig 685 because the other options are similar The timestep of the simulation is 125 µs and the power frequency is 60 Hz The sampling frequency chosen in the COMTRADE1 object is on the contrary 1920 Hz meant to illustrate how this can be selected independent from the timestep A special trick using the COMTRADE objects is that a packing object is needed to stack first the analog then the digital channels The user must specify the MODELS code for each case as shown below The COMTRADE1 object requires declaration of a single output and 13 phases is chosen in this case with first 10 analog then 3 digital channels Inside the packing object zero sequence voltage and current are calculated Click on the packing objects input nodes to select the type of input voltage current switch status MODELS 105 PU L0 LCC 40 km LCC 40 km LCC 40 km LCC 40 km LCC 40 km L1S LCC 40 km 105 PU L15 LCC 40 km GND 00225 s B400 LCC 40 km I I I I I I V B400 V S400 V SLG ABC ui PQ M P1 M Q1 MODEL pk2ctd1 Assembles the channels into single 13phase node Second version COMTRADE1 object Multiphase inputs requires packing object 26 channels capability cmtrd A D C7111 Fig 685 Setting up creation of COMTRADE files with packing object In Fig 384 there are three Models component in series so the sequence of these objects must be correct Control the sequence manually from the SidebarProject click Update or simply select EditArrangeSort all Models Packing object MODELS code MODEL PACK2CTD1 User defined COMTRADE Signal Packer INPUT V1ABC13 1st 3ph Analog signals LN Voltages I1ABC13 2nd 3ph Analog signals phase currents P1 Q1 1ph Analog signal P Q powers CBST 13 digital signals lines CB pole status OUTPUT CHA113 Packed VAR CHA113 Signals EXEC CHA1 V1ABC1 First pack signals into analog channels CHA2 V1ABC2 CHA3 V1ABC3 CHA4 V1ABC1 V1ABC2 V1ABC3 Zero seq voltage 3V0 CHA5 I1ABC1 CHA6 I1ABC2 CHA7 I1ABC3 CHA8 I1ABC1 I1ABC2 I1ABC3 3I0 return Application Manual 312 ATPDraw version 72 CHA9 P1 CHA10 Q1 CHA11 CBST1 Then pack signals into digital channels CHA12 CBST2 CHA13 CBST3 ENDEXEC ENDMODEL The COMTRADE objects input dialog is shown in Fig 686 The user can select an arbitrary sampling frequency and both up and down sampling is supported The COMTRADE objects consist of open MODELS code that can be modified by the user but the WRITE section must not be changed The sum of the number of analog NumA and digital NumD channels must match the number of outputs of the packing object 13 in this case Trigger is specified in the IEEE C37111 standard and Tinit is additionally used to start the sampling On the Comtrade page Fig 687 the channel information should be provided according to the IEEE C371111999 standard The Comtrade file format can be ascii or binary but in addition an option to store the data in a mat MatLab v4 file is available ATPDraw reads in the written data from the LISfile and perform the necessary scaling to create appropriate cfg and dat files stored in the Result Directory with the name given as Filename The time multiplier is added as an option since vendors tend to interpret the time scale a bit differently The COMTRADE objects have a View option that plots the raw data read from the LISfile In a multiple run situation only the last run is stored this was unless Merge results in multiple runs is checked Fig 686 COMTRADE objects dialog Standard MODELS page Application Manual ATPDraw version 73 313 Fig 687 COMTRADE objects dialog Comtrade page CDT1cfg file MyStationATPDraw1999 1310A3D 1VA1ALT1V100000036649697366496970000P 2VB1BLT1V100000035099676350996760000P 3VC1CLT1V10000003475722873475722870000P 43V01NLT1V10000010277314102773140000P 5IA1ALT1A1000050788188507881880000P 6IB1BLT1A0100001077566081077566080000P 7IC1CLT1A0100001455491931455491930000P 83I01NLT1A100004971959694971959690000P 9P1TLT1W1E50000640929764092970000P 10Q1TLT1VAr1E50000633266163326610000P 1CB1AALT10 2CB1BBLT10 3CB1CCLT10 60 1 19201152 17122020 205715417000 17122020 205715427000 BINARY 1 Application Manual 314 ATPDraw version 72 Fig 688 Loading of the CTD1cfg and corresponding CDT1dat in SIGRA 692 Embedded plotting Embedded plotting was added to ATPDraw v71 and improved in steps into v72 In contrast to the other postprocessing technologies the Plot object reads directly from the PL4file This is based on subscription to specific curve names and runs The functionality of the plotting object is explained in Chapt 394 In Exa27acp it is used to directly compare the inrush current as function of the switching instant dependent on the switching strategy The main work is to select the curves to plot as shown in Fig 690 Clicking in the column Series name a list of all plotting variables is available in a dropdown combo box obtained from Output Manager F9 The naming convention follows that of PlotXY The selected name will then be stored in the object as a subscription to curves in the PL4file If node names change in the process there will be no error just missing curves Consequently the Plot object must be updated as well It is therefore recommended to only plot curves whose nodes are user named and fixed Development in the Plot object will likely be related to the selection of curves to plot Application Manual ATPDraw version 73 315 The result from the investigation in Fig 689 shows that it is possible to reduce the maximum inrush current from 1200 A to around 500 A with the switching strategy to the left Inrush current phase B as function of closing time phase AC 5 ms after B 16 kV I V V Y XFMR V XFMR 16 kV I V V Y XFMR V XFMR Inrush current phase B as function of closing time phase ABC simultaneously TCLB002KNT10001 TCLATCLB0005 TCLCTCBB TCLA002KNT10001 TCLBTCLA TCLCTCBB Fig 689 Embedded plotting objects for testing of inrush current Fig 690 Selecting curves to plot 5 GREAT TIPS TO KEEP YOUR HOME SAFE WHILE AWAY THIS HOLIDAY SEASON ATPDraw version 73 317 7 Appendix ATPDraw for Windows 73 B A D F G A F D E E G G F B C D A A A F C F B F G E A C G C D G E F E C B D E ADESGIADESGIADESGIADESGIADESGIADESGIADESGI ADESGIADESGIADESGIADESGIADESGIADESGIADESGIADESGIADESGIAD ES HE ORA GENESG RAINA NEEDED WUG TOC RO SI EGISTOE SICALD RISEN THE CLOUD DAR THESIG MIST HAS EPPEDARTO TRE CONIDIEROTERMIONSTODE HO NIS TO STORIESTODAY OR TRTHAFSTORIO ES THE C PIS SOHE TESTIONSINES TE SGIOURESDEE STRIES TECIOUS SIC STIONS CLE HE SIGESTORIES GENOF MIST HAS THE BERTED CLOUD RAVED TO CRIES NCRERORINISMIST ORE IS TO TRIES TODA TE TESTIESSAGE SGINE Appendix ATPDraw version 73 319 71 PFC simulations in ATPDraw The Verify feature of ATPDraw enables the user to compare the linecable model with an exact PIequivalent as a function of frequency or verify the power frequency benchmark data for zeropositive short circuit impedances reactive open circuit line charging and mutual zero sequence coupling The Verify module supports the POWER FREQUENCY CALCULATION PFC of zero and positive short circuit impedances and open circuit reactive line charging along with mutual zero sequence impedance for multi circuit lines The supporting programs LINE CONSTANTS and CABLE CONSTANTS calculate the series impedance and the shunt admittance from geometrical data and material properties These electrical parameters are part of the printout file lis The power frequency calculations give in principle the short circuit impedances and the open circuit reactive power The linecable may be a single circuit component with an arbitrary number of phases or a multicircuit component where all circuits normally are threephase The following parameters are calculated for a single circuit in a linecable with n conductors a Short circuit impedances All terminals at one end of the linecable are connected to ground A positive sequence symmetrical voltage is applied to the terminals at the other end and the positive sequence impedance is calculated I E Z The voltage applied to the terminal I is 1 2 exp n i j E Ei where n is the number of phases in the circuit The positive sequence current is obtained from the terminal currents by the formula 2 exp 1 exp 2 exp 2 1 2 1 n j I n i j I n j I I n I n i The zero sequence impedance is calculated in a similar way 0 0 0 E I Z The voltage E0 here is applied to all terminals and I0 is the average current supplied by the source b Opencircuit reactive power All terminals at one end of the component are open except the conductors which are specified to be grounded A positive sequence symmetrical voltage is applied to the terminals at the other end and the positive sequence current component is calculated by the same formula as for the positive sequence impedance The positive sequence opencircuit reactive power is then calculated by the formula Im I n E Q where E is the line to line voltage Using the voltage between two adjacent phases for an nphase circuit gives 2 sin n V E The calculation I is based on an ATP calculation with E 10 Using this value for I implies that I n n V Q Im 4 sin 2 2 ATP also automatically calculates the reactive power supplied by the source Q1Qn The open circuit reactive power can thus also be calculated by taking the average of these quantities for all phases and multiply by a factor 2 since a peak value 10 is used in the calculation and the lineto line voltage is specified as rms Appendix 320 ATPDraw version 72 Qn Q Q n V Q 2 1 2 2 The zero sequence opencircuit reactive power is calculated as well The same voltage is then applied to all terminals at one end of the line The zero sequence current is the average value of the current injected into the terminals This current I0 is calculated by ATP with E0 10 Using this value for I0 implies that 0 2 2 0 Im sin 4 I n n V Q In this case ATP automatically calculates the reactive power Q injected into the circuit from the source Similarly to the positive sequence values the zero sequence opencircuit reactive power is also equal to Q n V Q 2 2 0 For a linecable with several circuits each circuit is tested separately For shortcircuit calculation the other circuits isare is also grounded at one end while for opencircuit calculations all terminals are open The mutual coupling between the circuits is calculated as well and called zero sequence transfer impedance This is done by connecting all phases of each individual circuit to a common node A current 3I0 is then applied to one of these common nodes circuit and the voltage on the other node is measured All terminals at the other end of the component is grounded The procedure is repeated for all circuits except the last one Below is listed the xVerifyFdat file for a 6phase line BEGIN NEW DATA CASE 1667E9 10 1 1 1 PREFIX DATPDraw3lcc INCLUDE LCC6lib INZO1 INZO1 INZO1 INZO1D INZO1E INZO1F OUTO1A OUTO1B OUTO1C OUTO1D OUTO1E OUTO1F INCLUDE LCC6lib INZO2A INZO2B INZO2C INZO2 INZO2 INZO2 OUTO2A OUTO2B OUTO2C OUTO2D OUTO2E OUTO2F INCLUDE LCC6lib INZS1 INZS1 INZS1 INZS1D INZS1E INZS1F INCLUDE LCC6lib INZS2A INZS2B INZS2C INZS2 INZS2 INZS2 INCLUDE LCC6lib INPO1A INPO1B INPO1C INPO1D INPO1E INPO1F OUPO1A OUPO1B OUPO1C OUPO1D OUPO1E OUPO1F INCLUDE LCC6lib INPO2A INPO2B INPO2C INPO2D INPO2E INPO2F OUPO2A OUPO2B OUPO2C OUPO2D OUPO2E OUPO2F INCLUDE LCC6lib INPS1A INPS1B INPS1C INPS1D INPS1E INPS1F INCLUDE LCC6lib INPS2A INPS2B INPS2C INPS2D INPS2E INPS2F INCLUDE LCC6lib INMS11 INMS11 INMS11 INMS12 INMS12 INMS12 BLANK BRANCH BLANK SWITCH 14INZO11 10 50 00 10 14INZO21 10 50 00 10 14INPO1A1 10 50 00 10 14INPO1B1 10 50 120 10 14INPO1C1 10 50 240 10 14INPO2D1 10 50 00 10 14INPO2E1 10 50 120 10 14INPO2F1 10 50 240 10 14INZS11 10 50 00 10 14INZS21 10 50 00 10 14INPS1A1 10 50 00 10 14INPS1B1 10 50 120 10 14INPS1C1 10 50 240 10 14INPS2D1 10 50 00 10 14INPS2E1 10 50 120 10 14INPS2F1 10 50 240 10 Appendix ATPDraw version 73 321 14INMS111 3 50 00 10 BLANK SOURCE INMS12 BLANK OUTPUT BLANK CARD PLOT BEGIN NEW DATA CASE BLANK The xVerifyFdat file describes the following 9 cases Zero sequence short circuit impedance real and imaginary part Z0 R0 jX0 Fig 71 LCCVerify Power Frequency Calculations Cir 1 Q1 3 2 0 2 V Q Cir 2 Q2 3 2 0 2 V Q Cir 1 1I 3 1 0 Z Cir 2 I2 3 1 0 Z Cir 1 120 120 1I C 1I B A 1I 3 01 j j e e Z Cir 2 120 120 1F 1E D 1 0 3 1 j j e I e I I Z Cir 1 Q1C Q1B Q1A 3 2 2 V Q Cir 2 Q2F Q2E Q2D 3 2 2 V Q Q1 1 V cost 1 V cost Q2 1 V cost I1 1 V cost I2 3 I0 V12 I1A I1B I1C I2D I2E I2F Q1A Q1B Q1C Q2D Q2E Q2F Cir 1 Cir 2 Z00 V12I0 E10 V E10 V E10 V E10 V Appendix 322 ATPDraw version 72 Each phase of a circuit is connected to a 1 V amplitude voltage source with zero phase angle The other end of the line is grounded Z0 is calculated as the inverse of the injected current divided by the number of phases in the circuit All phase conductors of other phases are open Positive sequence short circuit impedance real and imaginary part Z R jX The phases of a circuit are connected to a 1 V amplitude voltage source with phase angle 360i1n where I is the phase number 123 and n is the number of phases of the tested circuit The other end of the line is grounded Z is calculated as the inverse of the positive sequence current All phase conductors of other phases are open Zero sequence line charging Q0 Each phase of a circuit is connected to a 1 V amplitude voltage source with zero phase angle The other end of the line is open Q0 is the injected reactive power multiplied by the square of the user specified base voltage multiplied with 2n All phase conductors of other phases are open Positive sequence line charging Q The phases of a circuit are connected to a 1 V amplitude voltage source with phase angle 360i1n where I is the phase number and n is the number of phases of the tested circuit The other end of the line is open Q is calculated as the average injected reactive power multiplied by the square of the user specified base voltage multiplied with 2n All phase conductors of other phases are open Mutual zero sequence impedance real and imaginary part Z00 R00 jX00 Each phase of the ith circuit is connected to a 1 A amplitude current source with zero phase angle The receiving end of the circuits I and j is grounded The jth circuit is shortcircuited and open in the sending end Z00 is calculated as the voltage at the sending end of the jth circuit The process is repeated for all circuits All phase conductors of phases not belonging to the ith and jth circuit are open 72 Line Check When performing transient analysis of power systems high frequency models of overhead transmission lines and underground cables must be developed In this process parameters like ground and conductor conductivity crosssection geometry and average overhead line height could be uncertain and questionable Very often the only reliable benchmark data are sequential parameters at power frequency It is thus of great interest to be able to verify the developed linecable model at power frequency before simulating and analyzing transients The present version of ATPDraw has in the LCCmodule a builtin option to verify a line segment 1 This is done by calculating the short circuit input impedances and the open circuit reactive power consumption In addition a frequency scan is supported However data for each line segment is rarely available and in addition one would prefer to verify an entire linecable length including the effect of transpositions Instead of calculating the short circuit input impedance and the open circuit reactive power consumption it would be better to obtain the serial impedance and the shunt admittance along with the average mutual impedance and admittance between circuits in 6phase and 9phase cases The new module integrated in ATPDraw involves an improved handling of the equivalent mutual coupling between circuits Appendix ATPDraw version 73 323 721 Single phase systems Initially consider a singlephase circuit of length l with frequency domain distributed series impedances and shunt admittances as shown in Fig 72 The line is spited in segments of length dx Fig 72 Single phase representation of transmission line j L R Z ω m j C G Y ω Sm The currents and voltages at the sending and receiving ends will not be equal The idea is further to use the measured quantities at both terminals to obtain the series impedance and shunt capacitance Current balance at point x results in u Y x i The voltage drop between x and xdx gives Z i x u These two equations result in the wave equation Y u Z x u 2 2 with the solution x x B e A e u x γ γ where the constants A and B are determined from the boundary conditions and Z Y γ The current is x x B e A e Z x u Z i x γ γ 1 1 γ 1 Short circuit case This is the typical configuration for obtaining the series impedance A sinusoidal voltage or current is applied at the sending end while the receiving end is grounded 0 0 U u and 0 u l gives U0 B A and 0 γ γ l l B e A e which result in l x l U u x γ sinh sinhγ 0 and l x l Z U i x γ sinh γ coshγ 1 0 1 The currents at the terminals are 45 γ 1 3 γ 1 1 γ sinh γ coshγ 0 4 2 1 0 1 0 l l Z l U l l Z U i and 2 360 γ 7 6 γ 1 1 γ sinh 1 γ 4 2 1 0 1 0 l l Z l U l Z U i l 3 where the approximation comes from a series expansion of the hyperbolic functions The second quadratic term is eliminated in the following combination γ 180 1 1 3 2 0 4 1 0 l Z l U i l i i 4 The total series impedance can thus be approximated by the following combination of the measured inputs and outputs Appendix 324 ATPDraw version 72 180 1 1 2 0 0 3 4 Z l l Z l i l i u Z sc s 5 The same result is obtained if a current is applied at the sending end instead of a voltage 2 Open circuit case This is the typical configuration for obtaining the shunt admittance A sinusoidal voltage or current is applied at the sending end while the receiving end is left open 0 0 U u and 0 i l gives U0 B A and 0 γ γ l l B e A e which result in l x l U u x γ cosh coshγ 0 and l x l Z U i x γ cosh γ sinhγ 1 0 6 The unknown terminal quantities are 15 γ 2 3 γ 1 1 γ cosh γ sinhγ 0 4 2 0 1 0 l l Y l U l l Z U i and 7 24 γ 5 2 γ 1 1 γ cosh 1 4 2 0 0 l l U l U u l 8 where the approximation again comes from a series expansion of the hyperbolic functions Similar to the short circuit case an equivalent voltage is defined as 36 γ 5 3 γ 1 1 3 2 0 4 2 0 l l U u l u u 9 The total shunt impedance can be approximated by the following combination of the measured inputs and outputs S 180 1 1 36 5 3 1 1 15 2 3 1 1 2 0 0 3 4 4 2 4 2 Y l l l Y l l l l l Y u l u i Y oc s 10 The same result is obtained if a current is applied at the sending end instead of a voltage 3 Comparison with input impedanceadmittance The short circuit input impedance and the open circuit input admittance scaled to get reactive power in ATPDraw is for comparison 15 2 3 1 1 0 0 4 2 l l Z l i u Z sc in and 11 15 2 3 1 1 0 0 4 2 l l Y l u i Y oc in 12 Appendix ATPDraw version 73 325 In these expressions there is a quadratic term present but for short transmission lines the two approaches will give similar results 4 PIcircuits implications So far only a distributed parameter model has been investigated However concentrated parameter models are often used Besides the distributed parameter models in ATP are replaced by PIequivalents during steady state calculation This subsection briefly outlines the implications of this Fig 73 shows a PIequivalent under short and open circuit testing Fig 73 Testing a PIcircuit Left short circuit serial impedance Right open circuit shunt admittance The procedure for calculation of the series impedance and shunt admittance in 5 and 10 will in this case result in 6 γ 1 γ 6 1 2 0 0 3 2 2 l l Z l l Z i l i u Z sc PI s and 12 γ 1 γ 6 1 γ 4 1 2 0 0 3 2 2 2 l l Y l l Y l u l u i Y oc sPI 13 Due to the present quadratic term the result in 13 will be less accurate than for distributed parameters models Care must be taken to prevent wrong results for long transmission lines For example by splitting the line up in smaller segments In constant parameter distributed parameter line models the series resistance I is concentrated at each end R4 and at the middle of the line R2 This will result in some different formulations than in 13 with accuracy dependent on R A solution to this problem is to request EXACT PHASOR EQUIVALENT 2 3 which prevents ATP from using lumped resistance In such case the exact pi equivalent is used as is also the case for frequency dependent transmission line models in ATP The exact PIequivalent is on the form shown in Fig 74 Fig 74 Exact PIequivalent With reference to 13 the calculated series impedance and shunt admittance become 180 γ 1 coshγ 2 sinhγ 3 2 0 0 3 l 4 Z l l l Y Z i l i u Z sc Exact PI s and Yl 2 Zl i0 u0 il 0 ul Yl 2 Zl il i0 u0 ul0 Z2 Z1 i0 u0 il ul Z2 1 cosh sinh and sinh 2 1 l l Y Z Z l Y Z Z Appendix 326 ATPDraw version 72 180 γ 1 coshγ 2 sinhγ 3 2 0 0 3 l 4 Y l l l Z Y u l u i Y oc sExact PI 14 We see that the exactpi equivalent gives the same result as the distributed parameter model 722 3phase systems 1 Positive and zerosequence A 3phase circuit is tested with positive and zero sequence sources applied In the positive sequence phase number I is energized with a sinusoidal source with a phase angle 120ºi1 In the zerosequence system all phases are energized with a sinusoidal source with zero phase angle In cases with several 3phase circuits in parallel the other circuits are not energized and open The series impedance and shunt admittance are calculated for each individual phase as deduced above For example in phase a 2 0 0 3 i l i u Z a a a sa 2 Selfimpedanceadmittance The selfimpedance and admittance of the 3phase circuit j is defined as the average of the values for each individual phase sc sb sa jj Z Z Z Z 13 and sc sb sa jj Y Y Y Y 13 in either the zero and positivesequence system 3 Mutual couplings Mutual couplings are the equivalent impedance and admittance between circuits The deduction of these quantities is based on an equivalent twophase representation shown in Fig 75 Each 3 phase circuit is equated by a single conductor with its selfimpedanceadmittance and with the average voltage and current distribution Fig 75 Twophase representation Like the singlephase case matrix expressions are now developed and approximated by series expansions The endresult is equal to the singlephase case i Z u s 0 15 u Y i s 0 with 22 12 12 11 Z Z Z Z Zs 12 22 12 12 12 11 Y Y Y Y Y Y Ys 16 Z12dxl Z22dxl Z11dxl Y12dxl Y11dxl Y22dxl x xdx iav1x uav1x Uav2 x iav2x Appendix ATPDraw version 73 327 0 0 0 2 1 av av u u u 0 0 0 2 1 av av i i i 17 2 0 2 0 3 1 2 2 1 1 2 1 l u u l u u u u u av av av av 2 0 2 0 3 1 2 2 1 1 2 1 l i i l i i i i i av av av av 18 The unknown mutual impedance and admittance becomes 2 1 11 1 1 12 0 i i Z i u Z av 19 2 1 1 11 1 1 12 0 u u u Y u i Y av 20 In the positive sequence system the average currents and voltages tend to be very small and for a perfectly symmetric and transposed systems exactly zero In such situations the positive sequence coupling has no meaning The typical test condition is to apply 1 pu current at both circuits with the other ends grounded to obtain the mutual impedance For mutual admittance the test condition is to apply 1 pu at one and 0 or 1 pu at the other circuit and leaving the other ends open 73 Hybrid Transformer XFMR The modeling of the transformer is based on the magnetic circuit transformed to its electric dual 7 8 The leakage and main fluxes are then separated into a core model for the main flux and an inverse inductance matrix for the leakage flux The copper losses and coil capacitances are added at the terminals of the transformer The resulting electrical circuit is shown in Fig 76 Only standard EMTP elements are used Fig 76a Electric model of the Hybrid Transformer 9 2windings H and X 3phases 3legged core Appendix 328 ATPDraw version 72 The figure Fig 76a is not fully correct for the representation of leakage inductances Instead of lumped elements and ideal transformers the leakage is modeled via an inverse inductance matrix Amatrix just like in BCTRAN Windings in each phase have zero self inductance and is only modeled with mutual inductance to the other windings HA1 and HA2 is the outer winding terminals in phase A LA1 and LA2 are the inner winding terminals CA1 and CA2 are the fictitious core winding terminals phase A LHL is the main leakage inductance and LLC represents the space between the core and the inner winding and is set to LLCLHLk with k05 and LHC represents the space between the outer winding and the core and is set to LHCLHL1k The mutual inductance between phases is ignored thus short circuit zerosequence inductance is not considered The open circuit zero sequence inductance is represented by L0 offcore flux path Fig 76b Implementation of mutual inductances via the BCTRAN Amatrix approach Transformer parameters can be based on three different data sources typical values test report and design information The three sources can be selected independently for resistance inductance capacitance and core Test report input is based on standard open and shortcircuits tests with capacitance measurements as an additional option This is the normal choice of data source for existing transformers Design data requires the geometry and material parameters of the windings and the core Such data are rarely available so this option is more for research purposes The Typical value option uses available text book tabulated values of leakage impedance copper and core losses and magnetizing current to estimate model parameters This is suitable when the transformer is not purchased yet or data is unavailable in an initial study However such model must be used with caution 731 Leakage inductance The leakage inductance is modeled with an inverse inductance matrix Amatrix The matrix has dimension nw1np where nw is the number of physical windings the core is connected to the nw 1 winding and np is the number of phases 79 The coupling auto Y D turns ratio and phase shift are produced directly in the Amatrix All possible phase shifts are supported The A matrix has the following structure for a threewinding threephase transformer A B C 0 0 0 0 where 0 0 w w w A A A A 11 12 13 14 21 22 23 24 31 32 33 34 41 42 43 44 P S T C w a a a a a a a a A a a a a a a a a 1 where ABC are the three phases and PSTC stands for primary secondary tertiary and the core nw1 winding Appendix ATPDraw version 73 329 The Amatrix is assumed to have no mutual coupling between the phases The entire zero sequence effect is modeled in the attached core The Awmatrix is established according to the EMTP Theory Book 5 Section 64 and Section 524 p 31 in 7 7311 Typical values The leakage reactance is established from 11 using the lowest value in the typical range In the case of a threewinding transformer the leakage reactance in pu between the inner and outer winding is approximated as the sum of the other two In this case it is assumed that the medium voltage winding is the middle one 7312 Test report The leakage reactance is calculated from the standard test report short circuit data positive sequence 2 2 10 100 X pu Z P kW S MVA 2 In the case of an autotransformer the reactances are scaled according to the Theory Book 5 Section 67 7313 Design data The leakage reactances are calculated according to classical MMF distribution theory as shown in 7 8 Both cylindrical and pancake windings are supported 7314 Handling of the core winding The artificial core winding is related to the leakage channel between the inner physical winding and the core A parameter Ka1a2 is defined in 7 10 where a1 is the width of the inner leakage channel and a2 is the width of the leakage channel between the inner and the outermiddle winding A fixed value K05 is used in ATPDraw If the pu leakage reactances XML XMH and XHL Linner Mmiddle Houter for a three winding transformer are given then the leakage reactances to the core winding are assumed to be 7 10 ML LC K X X ML ML LC MC X K X X X 1 and HM ML HM MC HC X X K X X X 1 3 732 Winding resistance The winding resistances are added externally at the terminal of the transformer Amatrix Optionally the resistances can be frequency dependent 7321 Typical values The typical winding resistances at power frequency are in principle based on 12 A function 4 is established that takes in the parameter u kV and s MVA and returns the resistance in Data for a 290 MVA 420 kV transformer Table I were used to extend the data given in 12 Appendix 330 ATPDraw version 73 00859 02759 07537 15 w u R s 4 7322 Test report The test report data are given at power frequency The per unit short circuit resistances are calculated from short circuit power losses in the test report positive sequence The winding resistance in pu is assumed to be equally shared between the windings in the case of a two winding transformer In the case of a 3winding transformer the traditional starequivalent approach is used In the case of an autotransformer the short circuit resistances are recalculated according to the power balance used in 10 The approach used for reactances from the Theory Book 5 did not work out for the resistances 7323 Design data The user can specify the winding conductivity the equivalent cross section A of each turn the average length l of each turn number of turns of the inner winding N The DC resistance is normalized to the power frequency If the resistance is assumed to be frequency dependent the conductor area must be specified in height and width which determines the stray losses 7324 Frequency dependency The frequency dependent resistance is calculated between 01 to 10 kHz The typical values and test report resistances are assumed to follow 0 0 RS R where R0 is the resistance at the angular power frequency 0 This expression results in considerably lower values than suggested in Fig 26 in 7 This needs to be further investigated The design data resistances are assumed to follow eq 37 in 7 The calculated R and value pairs are fitted to the function twocell Foster equivalent 2 2 2 2 1 1 2 2 0 2 2 2 2 2 2 1 1 2 2 R L R L R R R L R L 5 2 2 1 1 2 2 2 2 2 2 2 2 1 1 2 2 L R L R L R L R L with the resistances R1 and R2 and inductances L1 and L2 as unknowns The fitting routine is based on a Genetic Algorithm implemented in ATPDraw The object function is defined as OF min RRS L constrained to positive unknowns A negative inductance L0L1L2 is added in series with the winding resistance to compensate for the inductance of the Foster cells A constraint is put on the total inductance L0 Lw where Lw is the inverse of the diagonal Awmatrix element 7 section 542 The constraint is handled simply by setting L1L205Lw when the constraint is violated and then continue to obtain new optimized values for R1 and R2 733 Capacitance The Cmatrix is split in two halves and connected to each end of the physical windings The capacitance matrix C is based on the following two matrices Appendix ATPDraw version 73 331 33 32 31 23 22 21 13 12 11 C C C C C C C C C Cw and CC CB CA BC BB BA AC AB AA p C C C C C C C C C C 6 The Cw matrix contains the capacitances between windings 13 equal in all phases The capacitance matrix Cw is built up like a nodal admittance matrix The Cp matrix contains capacitances that are specific to phase A B or C These are typically connected to the outer windings The total Cmatrix is then built on these two symmetrical matrices dependent on the type of winding pancakecylindrical The concept outer winding will be different for pancake and cylindrical windings 7331 Typical values A capacitive coupling factor Kc can be specified by the user with a default value of 03 The concept of transient recovery voltage TRV is used to calculate the effective capacitance when the inductance is known 13 IEEE standard C37 Fig B2 14 is used to obtain the typical frequency of the TRV for a known voltage level and fault current 2 3 2 U I f U I f f U S X C TRV pu eff F 7 with U in kV S in MVA and X pu U S I 3 kA In the case of typical values the Cp matrix between phases is always set to zero for lack of any better choice For a twowinding transformer the Cw matrix is calculated as 12 11 12 22 1 1 12 w PS c eff S PS pu w PP eff P PS pu w w SS c w C C K C U S X f C C C U S X f C C C K C 8 For a three winding transformer the typical capacitance is more complicated with several coupling factors involved Here a simple approach is used 13 0 23 22 33 23 w PT w ST eff S ST pu w w TT eff T ST pu w C C C C C U S X f C C C C U S X f C 9 This approach could be further discussed and improved 7332 Test report In the test report the capacitances between each winding and ground and between all windings is assumed to be directly specified while the Cp matrix is set to zero All values must be specified per phase 7333 Design data The calculation of design data capacitances are based on 7 chapt 53 p 3342 The user has to specify the winding geometry as well as the various equivalent permittivities of insulation system Standard formulas for calculating the capacitance between cylinders and for cylinders over planes are used with end effect and tank effect adjustments Appendix 332 ATPDraw version 73 734 Core The core model is connected to the core winding terminals of the Amatrix Triplex single phase cores stacked cores with three and five legs and shell form cores are supported Basically the inductive and resistive core parts are treated independently but this is a point that requires more research particularly for 3 and 5legged cores where harmonics in the flux creates additional losses The core losses are represented by a linear resistor and the nonlinear inductances are modeled by the Frolich equation 10 Each part of the core is modeled with its own core loss resistance and nonlinear inductance using information about their relative cross section and length to scale the values Fig 77 shows the core model for a 5legged transformer Fig 77 5legged stacked core model The terminals are the nw1 winding Left Practical ATPDraw implementation Right Topologically correct model It is assumed that the magnetic material is characterized by five parameters a b c d and e A list of typical steel materials is developed based on fitting the manufacturers data from state of the art catalogues Older steel materials will have a different characteristic and the losses are typically higher The material list is only used for design data and typical values The BH relationship is assumed to follow the Frolich equation where the optional parameter c introduced in 15 improves the fitting to test report data around rated voltage 0 H B H a b H c H 10 The specific loss is assumed to follow 15 2 10 50 f P W kg d B e B 11 where f is the power frequency The specific loss is traditionally for instance Westinghouse TD reference book 1964 assumed to be 2 max max x e e P K f t B K f B with x said to be 3 for modern materials in the year of 1964 In the above expression t is the thickness of the laminates The traditional expression was tested on modern material data with little success Appendix ATPDraw version 73 333 Fig 78 shows the fit of the specific losses and DCmagnetization curve of ARMCO M4 steel The Frolich fitting is not very good and in Fig 78b fitting around the knee point nominal flux was preferred at the sacrifice of high field fitting B19 T Similar fitting is performed for the other core materials 04 08 12 16 2 B T 1 10 100 1000 10000 H Am ARMCO M4 Fit Frolich H 5284B10542B 0 04 08 12 16 2 B T 0 1 2 3 4 p Wkg ARMCO M4 Fit 60 Hz 50 Hz p Wkg f50150339B2000125B10 Fig 78a Core loss curves c0 Fig 78b DCmagnetization curve 7341 Inductance modeling The basic Frolich equation in 10 is reformulated as a current fluxlinkage characteristic by introducing the flux linkage B A N and the current H l N i where N is the number of turns of the inner winding A is the cross section and l is the length of the involved core section This gives 2 2 0 r a r r r r i l i A N l i A N l L i l A a b i N l c N l i a b i l c i l 12 where the constants 2 L L a a l N A L b b N A and 2 3 L L c c l A N based on the absolute length lL and cross section area AL of the core leg are determined in an optimization process 2 1 min n meas rms i rms calc rms i rms i OF a b c I U I U a b c for n excitation levels Fig 79 Core dimensions 5legged stacked core The user must provide AYAL AOAL lYlL lOlL The final characteristics are determined by using the relative to the main leg dimensions for the corresponding section Ar and lr The nonlinear inductances are implemented as optional type 98 93 or 96 inductances in ATP AL AY AO lL lY2 lO Appendix 334 ATPDraw version 73 7342 Core loss modeling The core loss is split in parts associated with individual core sections It is assumed that the core loss is proportional to the core volume and to the square of the rms voltage across each section of the electric dual The voltage Uo in the neutral point in Fig 77 node IX0001 is the time derivative of the neutral flux found during the Frolich optimization described above Is is assumed that the inductive current components determine the voltage distribution For a 5legged core 2 2 3 2 2 3 2 2 loss leg yoke out ry y ro o P P P P p V U U V U U 13 where Vry and Vro are the relative volumes of the yoke and outer legs respectively and where Uy and Uo are the rms value of the voltage across the sections For a 3legged core the outer leg volume is zero and for triplex and shell form core the loss distribution is straight forward and determined only by the main leg voltage In the type 96 modelling half of the loss is included as hysteresis loss scaled by a Steinmetz coefficient of 2 The hysteresis has a uniform width 7343 Typical values The estimation of the magnetizing current Im is based on 12 Some fitting of the data is performed which results in 0 2154 2933 0 20 350 73 0 s BIL Im 14 when the basic insulation level BIL is known and 0 2134 2283 0 20 150 855 0 s u Im 15 when BIL must be estimated BIL is in kV u is the rated voltage in kV and s is the rated power in MVA For a typical core model the user has to specify the maximum Bfield normally 1517 Tesla and the maximum core loss density First a core material has to be guessed and this gives the a and b values in the Frolich equation and possibly also the c and d values that would replace p The following relationships are then assumed max max max 2 2 rms rms U U B A N A N B 16 max max max max max 2 1 1 2 rms rms a B N H i b B l a B N l b B i 17 which simplistically assumes a sinusoidal magnetizing current This gives the parameter of the fluxlinkagecurrent characteristic rms rms u i B b N A l a a 1 max 2 rms u B b b A N b 2 1 max and 18 c 0 Appendix ATPDraw version 73 335 We see that the expressions for a and b are independent of the magnetic material property a The typical value of b seems to be fairly constant for standard core materials and a value of 05 is assumed in ATPDraw The core loss is estimated as 2 max max 2 1 B a i u b B p A l p P rms rms loss 19 where p Wkg and kgm3 are given and the volume Al is estimated from 16 and 17 7344 Test report The user specifies the excitation voltage in the current in and the core loss in kW The core loss is used directly as explained above to obtain the core resistances For now the core resistances are assumed to be linear and the core loss value at 100 excitation is used The inductive magnetizing current for each point is calculated as 2 2 0 10 rms P kW I I S MVA 20 This results in a sequence of excitation points Urms and Irms The magnetic circuit in Fig 77 assuming sinusoidal fluxes is solved and the rms values of the line currents are calculated and compared to measured ones Optimized values of a b and c optional in 12 are found by a Gradient Method implemented in ATPDraw If a single point is specified the core model is linear 7345 Design data For design data the user directly specifies the core material with its BH relationship a and b values in 10 The absolute core dimensions and the number of innerwinding turns N are known so the inductances can be found directly from 12 Based on manufacturer data the core losses can be established from 11 with A N U B rms 2 and known values of the core weight volume and density the core loss can be estimated 74 Windsyn manufacturers data input and controls The Windsyn program was developed by the late Gabor First as a standalong program for manufacturers data fitting of universal machines in ATP First and interface to this program was added to ATPDraw 18 but later the Windsyn approach was directly implemented in ATPDraw 741 Induction machine modeling The Windsyn program supports four types of induction machines single cage double cage and deep bar rotors as well as wound rotors for doubly fed machines The first three single double deepbar is based on UM type 3 in ATP while the forth wound is based on UM type 4 The only difference between double cage rotor and deepbar is the value of a certain cage factor Windsyn assumes round rotors same quantities in d and q axis and ignores zero sequence parameters and saturation Basically a single mechanical mass is assumed but multi masses can be added externally Appendix 336 ATPDraw version 73 The input parameters manufacturers data are Frequency f Hz linetoline voltage VL kV Power P hp Speed rpm rpm Power factor cos pu efficiency pu slip pu startcurrent Ist pu starttorque Tst pu loadtorque T pu maximum torque optional Tmax pu cage factor m pu In addition it is assumed that the rated load current is 1 pu Fig 710 shows the equivalent circuit in the daxis of the Induction machine supported by Windsyn A common pu basis is chosen so that 2 Zpu U S 21 where S is the rated power of the machine in MVA and U is the rated voltage in kV The rated power of the machine is actually given in horse power in the input dialog so rated power is given by S hp0746103cos Single cage and wound rotor Double cage and deep bar rotor Fig 710 Windsyn Induction machine models in startup The circuits above are considered in two different conditions Startup where the equivalent is as shown and Rated conditions where the rotor resistances are divided by the slip s Note that the rotor inductance is moved to the left side of magnetizing inductance for double cage and deepbar rotors because this is the only way the model fits to the ATP requirements When performing the fitting the stator current and electric torque is used either at startup s1 or at rated power s given The current is equal to the admittance seen in from the stator side while the electric torque is equal to square of the absolute value of the rotor current times the real value of the rotor impedance If in addition the maximum torque is required the slip is varied in 23 until maximum is found in an iterative process 1 1 r m s s r m r Z Z I pu Z Z Z Z 22 2 1 Re 1 e r s r m r T Z pu Z Z Z Z 23 where single cage and wound rotor double cage and deep bar rotors s s s s s r R jX Z R jX jX is the equivalent stator impedance 1 2 2 single cage and wound rotor double cage and deep bar rotors r r r R s jX Z R s R s jX is the equivalent rotor impedance m m Z jX is the magnetization impedance Rs Xs Xr R1 Xm R2 X2 Rs Xs Xr Rr Xm Appendix ATPDraw version 73 337 The stator and rotor inductances are further assumed to be equal The rotor secondary reactance X2 is related to the rotor resistance through the cage factor m 2 1 2 X R R m According to 19 the stator resistance rotor resistance and magnetizing reactance are given by cos 1 1 1 cos 1 sin s r m R s s R s X s 24 where cos is the power factor is the efficiency corrected for core loss friction and windage and s is the slip at rated load The calculated values in 24 are used as an initial guess in the fitting The expression for Rs in 24 implies the restriction 1 s in order to make the stator resistance positive The electrical parameters in Fig 710 are not fitted directly for double cage or deepbar rotors since they are linked together through the efficiency and power factor Instead an equivalent rotor resistance Rst is used This is the real part of the rotor impedance at startup According to 19 we can then write 2 2 1 2 1 1 1 st r r r R R m R m R R R R R 25 An initial value for the equivalent rotor resistance is according to 19 2 cos st r st st R R T I s 26 An initial value for the stator and rotor reactances which in contrast to 19 are assume linear are 2 2 1 1 2 s r s r st X X R R I 27 The Windsyn program asks for the saturation current but this value isnt used 742 The ATPDraw fitting approach ATPDraw lets the following variables be free in the optimization process Stator reactance Rotor reactance x0Xs Magnetization reactance x1Xm Equivalent rotor resistance x2Rst and Slip x3s The slip is generally a free variable but a deviation from rated value penalty is also added to the cost function Starting values are calculated according to 24 26 and 27 Changes in the variables will result in new efficiency power factor and stator resistance The following defined object function is to be minimized 2 2 0 3 1 0 2 0 2 2 3 0 4 0 2 2 2 5 0 6 7 max max0 1 cos cos 1 1 3 1 1 1 1 1 st st st st OF X X w w w X s w I I w T T w I w T T 28 where w1w7 are userdefinable weights In Windsyn a successive nonconvergent iterative procedure was used with effectively w1 w2 w3 w70 and w6 set to a very high value The rated torque is not used in the fitting process since Appendix 338 ATPDraw version 73 the related rated current I01 is used instead Some deviations will be seen from the original Windsyn as the ATPDraw version converge at the exact minimum while Windsyn stopped the iteration at a fixed accuracy To calculate the object function the following process is used The estimate for stator and rotor resistances are updated from 24 using the new slip sX3 but using the initial power factor and efficiency The rotor resistances for double cage and deepbar are calculated according to 25 using the equivalent rotor resistances RstX2 and Rr The equivalent circuit in fig 1 is thus defined and the currents I and Ist are calculated according to 22 and the torques T Tst and Tmax are calculated according to 23 New power factor and efficiency are calculated as cosReII and 1sTReI The object function is called by the BSGF routine 20 in ATPDraw same as used for Hybrid Transformer fitting and Optimization A lower constraint is set on the variables to make them positive 743 ATPDraw input dialogs The new machine model is found as Induction WI under Machines in the selection menu It has a single input dialog box as any other component as shown in Fig 711 Manufacturers data are inputted in the data grid expanded here for illustrative purposes Under Model the type of rotor is selected as well as the mechanical data Also a Governor GGeneral HHydro can be selected here Under Startup the initialization and extra load conditions are specified as sown in Fig 712 The user must click the Fit View button to perform the actual fitting as shown in Fig 713 Here adjustment of parameters and weights can be performed The corresponding electrical parameters are given to the right and the rated torque given below in Nm ATPDraw can also calculate and present the torquespeed characteristic as shown in Fig 714 Appendix ATPDraw version 73 339 Fig 711 Input Dialog of Induction machine WI For Automatic initialization ATPSettingsSwitchUM or Sidebar the user should specify the slip as calculated by the Fitter to get the adjusted rated power out For Manual initialization the initial torque in pu is specified instead The user can also specify an optional extra load applied to the machine Positive signs are for motors and negative sign for generators Fig 712a Model selection page for synchronous machines Fig 712b Settings for Automatic startup For synchronous machines the initial voltage in and angle must be specified instead of the slip Appendix 340 ATPDraw version 73 Fig 713 Fitting dialog Slip fitting relaxed w30 here similar to Windsyn Omega pu 2 18 16 14 12 1 8 6 4 2 Torque pu 3 25 2 15 1 5 5 1 15 2 25 3 Fig 714 Torquespeed curve obtained by clicking on Plot in Fig 4 744 Synchronous machine modeling The synchronous machine modeling process in Windsyn is more straight forward as there is not fitting involved The zerosequence and Canay impedances are ignored Time constants are assumed to come from open circuit tests Appendix ATPDraw version 73 341 Fig 715 Synchronous machine equivalent daxis left and qaxis right Pu quantities are also used for synchronous machines according to 21 Further without any iteration or fitting Stator resistance 1 S R Stator reactance S l X X leakage Magnetization reactance daxis md d l X X X Magnetization reactance qaxis mq q l X X X Field winding reactance daxis d l d l fd d d X X X X X X X Damper winding reactance daxis d l d l kd d d X X X X X X X Field winding reactance qaxis q l q l fq q q X X X X X X X Damper winding reactance qaxis q l q l kq q q X X X X X X X Field winding resistance daxis 0 fd md fd d X X R T if not provided directly by user Field winding resistance qaxis 0 fq mq fq q X X R T Damper winding resistance daxis 0 kd md kd d X X R T Damper winding resistance qaxis 0 kq mq kq q X X R T The presence of damper windings depends on the users choice of rotor type 745 Machine controls The machines can have embedded Governor control torque to maintain a set speed or active power The Synchronous machine can also have an Exciter control field voltage for voltage or reactive power settings All the controls are simplified with minimum TACS requirements RSjXS RkdjXkd RfdjXfd jXmd RSjXS RkqjXkq RfqjXfq jXmq Field winding Field winding Damper winding Damper winding Appendix 342 ATPDraw version 73 Advanced machine studies need probably to extend the controls which is possible since the Torque and Field Voltage nodes are externally available The TACS section also provides power speed and rms voltage measurements 7451 Governor Both the Induction Machine and the Synchronous machine comes with an optional Governor of either General purpose or Hydro type Both are simplified controls aimed at minimum TACS requirements Fig 716 Hydro type Governor 21 Fig 717 General purpose Governor 21 The state variables X1X6 are TACS variables given by the GOVERNOR node name with phase extension AF respectively The torque node of the machines are available for manual or additional control of the machine Torque is modeled as a current 1 A 1 Nm with positive current into the node for generators The voltage at the torque node is the rotor velocity 1 V radsec The rated torque is calculated as for motor for generator W TQ W where W is the active power of the machine calculated as hp746 for induction machine and kVA1000 cos for synchronous machines is the machine efficiency and is the rated speed equal to 30 1 rpm s with positive s used for induction generator and negative s used for induction motor For synchronous machines s is zero Ref 1 Rp 1 1 sT r Pω Tmpu Σ 1sTg Kg 1sTlead Valve 1sTlag x2 x1 x6 x3 Vmax Vmin x1 Ref 1 1 sTp 1 1 sTr s K 1 RpRpRtTds sTd Pω Tmpu 1 s Gmax 1 1 sTg Pilot Gate Droop Σ x2 x6 x3 x4 x5 Gmin Rmax Rmin Appendix ATPDraw version 73 343 A damping resistor is connected at the mechanical side with a value 03 DampFact D TQ where DampFact is user controllable as shown in Fig 711 The torque consumed by the damping is taken into account when setting the initial torque 7452 Exciter The Synchronous Machine comes with an optional Exciter of type IEEE DC or ST The exciter can be set to voltage control or reactive power control x1 Ref 1 1 lead lag s T s T 1 1 s Tr 1 a a K s T 1 f f s K s T max c fld E K I min E x6 x2 x8 x3 x7 QV f pu E Fig 718 Exciter ST1 21 x4 Ref x1 1 1 lead lag s T s T 1 1 s Tr 1 a a K s T 1 f f s K s T max c fld E K I min E 1 s Te 6 6 B x e x K A e x6 x2 x8 x3 x5 x7 QV f pu E Fig 719 Exciter DC1 21 The state variables X1X8 are TACS variables given the EXCITER node name with phase extension AH respectively The field voltage node of the machines are available for manual or additional control of the machine The EFD winding node is the field winding terminal while the EXFD node is where the initialization source AND the exciter source are connected voltage sources in parallel are summed in ATP as shown in Fig 720 Any additional external field voltage source should be connected directly at the external field voltage node and NOT via resistors or switches Appendix 344 ATPDraw version 73 EXFD Torque SM EFD W M Init Exciter Fig 720 Connection of field voltage sources 7453 IO and measurements The rms voltage active and reactive power is used in the controls but these variables are also available for output requests along with other machine quantities as shown in Fig 721 Fig 721 Output selection The stator winding is connected to the internal node STATOR which is connected via the main machine breaker to the external node BUS The three phase voltages at the stator node and the current into the stator phase A are always available as variables in the TACS section The internal INIT node is used as intermediate variables INITA and INITB are 90 deg phase shifts of the phase A stator voltage and current respectively The active and reactive power and the rms voltage are calculated and filtered with a 10 ms lowpass filter as shown below 90STATA 90STATB 90STATC 91BUSA 98INITA 53BUSA 0005 0005 98INITB 53STATA 0005 0005 98VARX1 15STATA INITA BUSA INITB 98WATX1 15STATA BUSA INITA INITB 1KVAR1 VARX1 0001 kVAr 1 1 001 1KWAT1 WATX1 0001 kWatt 1 1 001 98VRMS1 SQRTSTATA 2STATB 2STATC 2 1PUVT1 VRMS1 1E4 pu volt 1 1 001 33PUVT1 KWAT1 KVAR1 75 Power system toolbox calculators The Power System Toolbox contains various components for converting transients to steadystate quantities In addition to this the voltage and current probes add models WRITEPROBEI or WRITEPROBEV for phasor calculations behind the scene if steadystate output beyond time zero Appendix ATPDraw version 73 345 is requested Common to all the Power System Tools is that they are mostly open and built on MODELS 751 Filtering and downsampling Separate components for analogue filtering are available in the toolbox These are 3phase Butterworth low and high pass filters of user selectable order 1 to 3 A lowpass filter should be used for antialiasing with a filter frequency less than the half of sampling frequency The high pass filter can be used to remove subharmonics In both components the user sets a Gain filter frequency FilterFreq an order 13 FilterOrder and a frequency for amplitude correction ScaleFreq The lowpass algorithm in MODELS code is shown below INIT taurecip2PIFilterFreq betaScaleFreqrecipFilterFreq amplitude correction at ScaleFreq alphaGainsqrt1beta2FilterOrder ENDINIT EXEC FOR n1 TO 3 DO if FilterOrder1 then claplaceXFnXnalphas01s0taus1 elsif FilterOrder2 then claplaceXFnXnalphas01s0sqrt2taus1tau2s2 elsif FilterOrder3 then claplaceXFnXnalphas01s02taus12tau2s2tau3s3 else XFnGainXn endif ENDFOR ENDEXEC After filtering the signal should be sampled Often the time step of the simulation is small which gives memory overflow in the later processing As a result downsampling must be used also to mimic actual relay algorithms The MODELS language provides an easy way of down sampling with a single line of code timestep min 1SampleFreq For this to work properly 1SampleFreq must be multiples of the global timestep in the simulation Otherwise the MODELS internal time step will be slightly different during the simulation Furthermore as 8 sampler per period is used by the FFT algorithm it is beneficial to also let SampleFreq be multiple of 8FREQ It is difficult to meet the above requirements especially in 60 Hz systems so in v73 a new approach was introduced inspired by the interpolation technique in the COMTRADE objects First the MODELS method of down sampling is utilized to avoid memory overflow timestep min recip8SampleFreq Next internal interpolation in each MODEL is used with the variable DTi TTi where Ti is the actual sampling time managed inside each MODEL The following models have downsampling functionality ABC2RMS ABC2SEQ ABC2PHR ABC2PHRI ABC2PHRF ABC2PHR2 UI2PQ UI2PQ3 UI2RX UI2RXL UI2RXE WRITEPROBEI WRITEPROBEV The last two are used with probes for T0 phasor calculations Appendix 346 ATPDraw version 73 752 Phasor calculations With downsampling the original recursive DFT algorithm 22 got substantially reduced accuracy and was enhanced by Radix2816 FFTroutines 2324 Models containing this routine require SampleFreq input that should be multiples of 8FREQ for the Radix28 routine and 16FREQ for the Radix216 routine Many of the models have also an algorithm selector where Algorithm1 gives a recursive DFT algorithm 22 while Algorithm0 gives the Radix2 algorithm Both routines use a moving window covering one period The DFT algorithm is recursive and adds increments as the window advances while the FFT routine uses 8 or 16 samples of the entire period The recursive DFT algorithm is the fastest but errors accumulate more easily Compared to 22 the lowpass filtering is now excluded as this must be performed before down sampling 7521 Recursive DFT routine The recursive DFT algorithm is implemented in MODELS Originally in 22 the algorithm assumed a linear signal within the time step but is now simplified to a stepwise signal cos cos cos cos cos cos t t t h t T t T t t t t h t t T t T h h a t y h d y h d t y t h t a t t y h d y h d t y t T h t T a t a t t t y t cos y t T h t In the MODELS syntax with h1 this becomes 2NSAMPL t EXEC DTiTTi if DTi0 then for i1 to 3 do D2FREQdtdelayXiDTi2delayXi1FREQDTi2 reireiDcosOMEGATiScale imiimiDsinOMEGATiScale endfor TiTirecipSampleFreq endif ENDEXEC The new algorithm is faster compared to 22 but the accuracy is lower especially for low sampling rates 8 and 16 times the fundamental frequency One side benefit with the simplified algorithm is that it is more stable when the sampling interval 1SamplFreq becomes smaller and is not an integer number of the time step as supposed to 7522 FFT Radix2 routine The FFT Radix 2 algorithm was implemented based on 24 This based on classical FFT theory and the CooleyTukey algorithm with decimation in time A sample array x with length N being the power of 2 is subdivided in even and odd terms The discrete Fourier transformer thus becomes Appendix ATPDraw version 73 347 1 2 1 2 2 2 1 0 0 N N mk k mk k m m m m m X x W x W x W with j2 N W e The subdivision in odd and even parts then continues until only two terms remains With N8 and 16 closed form analytical expressions can be obtained for the FFT 1 4 8 4 0 4 2 6 1 5 3 7 8 1 k k k k X k x x x x x x x x with cos2 sin2 n n j n The fundamental harmonic X18 can further be written out in real and imaginary parts containing only one scaling factor coming from 18 1 2 j as 14 j The corresponding MODELS code is shown below where delay is used to obtain 1x to 7x 0x is the present value INIT OMEGA 2PIFREQ alpha1sqrt2 for n 0 to 7 do deltaTn nFREQ8 endfor ENDINIT EXEC DTiTTi if DTi0 then for i1 to 3 do x1 delayxideltaT0DTi2 delayxideltaT4DTi2 x3 delayxideltaT2DTi2 delayxideltaT6DTi2 x5 delayxideltaT1DTi2 delayxideltaT5DTi2 x7 delayxideltaT3DTi2 delayxideltaT7DTi2 xre x1 x5 x7alpha xim x3 x5 x7alpha rei xrecosOMEGATiximsinOMEGATi4Scale imi ximcosOMEGATixresinOMEGATi4Scale endfor TiTirecipSampleFreq endif ENDEXEC A Radix216 N16 algorithm 6 is used to achieve better accuracy for higher harmonics in the ABC2PHRH2 component The FFT can still be written on a fairly closed form 7523 Initialization and variable frequency Two new phasor calculation routines are introduced ABC2PHRI and ABC2PHRF In the former the steady state information is utilized to properly initialize the phasor value without the need to wait for one period In the latter the frequency is not a fixed quantity but an input variable which can be calculated by the new PLLDQ component In this case the FFT Radix2 algorithm is required The initialization algorithm has also the imaginary part of the steadystate phasor as input and performed an initialization as shown below the real part is the normal input HISTORY X1 DFLTsqrtreX12imX12costomegaatan2imX1reX1 X2 DFLTsqrtreX22imX22costomegaatan2imx2reX2 X3 DFLTsqrtreX32imX32costomegaatan2imX3reX3 Appendix 348 ATPDraw version 73 753 Power and impedance calculations The algorithm shown in the listing above is used also for PQ and RX calculations and in that case the phasors of two 3phase inputs current I13 and voltage V13 are calculated This gives and re im re im re im re im V jV R jX P jQ V jV I jI I jI For distance relays the positive sequence impedance is needed and this is found by calculate line quantities shown below for the real part of the voltage VLnVnVn mod 3 1 Ground fault relays also requires a zerosequence correction A new ABC2RXE component is added where the zero sequence impedance ratio 0 1 0 1 Z K Z must be provided by the user The positive sequence impedance is then calculated as reI0reI1reI2reI33 imI0imI1imI2imI33 for n1 to 3 do reInreInK0reI0 imInimInK0imI0 DreIn2imIn2 RnreVnreInimVnimInScaleVrecipDScaleI XnimVnreInreVnimInScaleVrecipDScaleI endfor 754 FFTDFT algorithm test The phasor calculation algorithms are compared in the figure below where also the DFT algorithm from ATPDraw 72 is added The purpose is to test the accuracy of the Power calculation VI for various sample frequencies Reactive power calculations in a 60 Hz system are shown because this is the most demanding case The time step is in all the calculations 01 ms 1j 1j M 10j V ui PQ ui PQ M M ui PQ M DFT FFT FFTO 10 kV 60 Hz 1 kV 180 Hz Fig 722 Test circuit for RX calculations 10 3rd harmonic added Fig 723 shows the comparison of the three algorithms only FFT Radix28 and DFT can be selected in the power system toolbox in ATPDraw v73 The FFT0 algorithm is from ATPDraw v72 We see that the new FFT algorithm is accurate in all cases while the old FFT algorithm has problems when the sampling frequency is too large for the time timestep To some minor extent this also applies to the new DFT algorithm The old FFT algorithm also has potential problems for low sampling frequencies shown for 480 Ss Reducing the timestep will increase the accuracy Appendix ATPDraw version 73 349 f ile usrman75pl4 xv ar t mQ0 mQ1 mQ2 000 002 004 006 008 010 s 0 3 6 9 12 15 106 f ile usrman75pl4 xv ar t mQ0 mQ1 mQ2 000 002 004 006 008 010 s 0 3 6 9 12 15 106 f ile usrman75pl4 xv ar t mQ0 mQ1 mQ2 000 002 004 006 008 010 s 0 3 6 9 12 15 106 f ile usrman75pl4 xv ar t mQ0 mQ1 mQ2 000 002 004 006 008 010 s 0 3 6 9 12 15 106 Fig 723 Calculated reactive power Q0 FFT red Q1 DFT green Q2 FFTold blue Theoretical 1307 125 MVar Δt1e4 76 XML data exchange The open XML projectfile format gives an opportunity to manually modify project content and share projects with other software ATPDraw v70 supports limited features that covers standard components connections and texts The XML format is very flexible and since the context is embedded it can be dynamically developed over time with less concern about backward compatibility The XML format is expected to be extended more in the future and what is presented here in this manual is just a start The XMLformat does not follow a SIMstandard and the data and physical layout are not separated The coordinates of components and nodes is the trickiest thing about data exchange The coordinate system and model are explained next 761 ATPDraw coordinate system The coordinate system world coordinates has origin in the upper left corner and a resolution equal to screen pixels when the zoom factor is 100 All positions have a resolution of 10 pixels The xaxis is directed from left to right and the yaxis from top to bottom All components have a 480 Ss 960 Ss 1920 Ss 3000 Ss Appendix 350 ATPDraw version 73 positive position in this coordinate system with default around 5000 5000 Furthermore every component can be rotated around this position with an Angle of 90 180 or 270 deg measured counterclockwise with zero as default The nodes have a position given relative to the components position An exception is the LINE3 component with Left and Right nodes given positions in absolute world coordinates Connections have similarly node positions in world coordinates Position of component nodes except for LINE3 is optional in the XMLfile as this information for standard components is given in ATPDrawscl When a component is rotated or flipped the relative node position remains unchanged but the actual node position is recalculated internally The components icon can be of type vector or bitmap The XMLfile format offers also to set Icondefault and in this case the icon is obtained from ATPDrawscl or reconstructed The icon of type bitmap is centered around the component position 20 20 containing 4141 bytes of color information The icon of type vector consists of shapes and texts in coordinates relative to the component position Fig 724 shows a case with a component located at CompPos49005020 having a node with relative position NodeRelPos2010 which is the default position 9 The node position without rotation will be NodePos49205010 This position must match what is given in overlapping nodes or connections in order connect the circuit properly If the component is rotated n90 deg the node position becomes NodePosCompPosNodeRelPosRn with 0 1 1 0 R Fig 724 Coordinate system in ATPDraw 762 The XML format definition DTDfile The DTDfile describes the possible xml elements tags and their structure and properties The names of element and attributes are case sensitive For definitions of syntax consult for instance httpsenwikipediaorgwikiDocumenttypedefinition ELEMENT project header objects variables ATTLIST project Application CDATA REQUIRED CompPos 4900 5020 NodeRelPos 20 10 NodePos 4920 5010 Default relative node positions 1 20 10 2 20 0 3 20 10 4 10 20 5 0 20 6 10 20 7 20 10 8 20 0 9 20 10 10 10 20 11 0 20 12 10 20 X Y ConnPos1 4920 5010 ConnPos2 4920 5110 Circuit window Appendix ATPDraw version 73 351 ATTLIST project Version CDATA REQUIRED ATTLIST project VersionXML CDATA REQUIRED ATTLIST header Timestep CDATA REQUIRED ATTLIST header Tmax CDATA REQUIRED ATTLIST header XOPT CDATA REQUIRED ATTLIST header COPT CDATA REQUIRED ATTLIST header TopLeftX CDATA REQUIRED ATTLIST header TopLeftY CDATA REQUIRED ELEMENT objects compconntext Supported objects ATTLIST comp Name CDATA REQUIRED ATTLIST comp Id CDATA IMPLIED ATTLIST comp Caption CDATA IMPLIED ATTLIST comp Capangle CDATA IMPLIED ATTLIST comp CapPosX CDATA IMPLIED ATTLIST comp CapPosY CDATA IMPLIED Important definition of various component extensions objects used for groups ELEMENT comp compcontentModelprobeBCTRANXFMRLCCSMUSPBUS3LINE3objects ATTLIST compcontent PosX CDATA REQUIRED ATTLIST compcontent PosY CDATA REQUIRED ATTLIST compcontent NumPhases CDATA IMPLIED ATTLIST compcontent Icon defaultvectorbitmap IMPLIED defaultno data ATTLIST compcontent ScaleIconX CDATA IMPLIED 1 default ATTLIST compcontent ScaleIconY CDATA IMPLIED ATTLIST compcontent Order CDATA IMPLIED ATTLIST compcontent Angle 0 90 180 270 IMPLIED ATTLIST compcontent FlitLR truefalse IMPLIED ATTLIST compcontent Output CDATA IMPLIED ELEMENT compcontent nodedataicon commenthelpstringdatastringnonlin ATTLIST node Name CDATA IMPLIED ATTLIST node Value CDATA IMPLIED ATTLIST node PosX CDATA IMPLIED not needed stored in atpdrawscl ATTLIST node PosY CDATA IMPLIED ATTLIST node NamePosX CDATA IMPLIED ATTLIST node NamePosY CDATA IMPLIED ATTLIST node NumPhases CDATA IMPLIED ATTLIST node Ground 01234 IMPLIED ATTLIST node Kind CDATA IMPLIED ATTLIST node Internal truefalse IMPLIED ATTLIST node Disabled truefalse IMPLIED 0not inherited otherwise parents node ATTLIST node Inherited CDATA IMPLIED ATTLIST data Name CDATA IMPLIED ATTLIST data Value CDATA IMPLIED 0not inherited otherwise parents data ATTLIST data Inherited CDATA IMPLIED ELEMENT comment PCDATA ELEMENT helpstring PCDATA ELEMENT datastring PCDATA ATTLIST nonlin Kind CDATA IMPLIED ELEMENT nonlin point ATTLIST point X CDATA REQUIRED ATTLIST point Y CDATA REQUIRED ATTLIST icon BRectTop CDATA IMPLIED ATTLIST icon BRectLeft CDATA IMPLIED ATTLIST icon BRectBottom CDATA IMPLIED ATTLIST icon BRectRight CDATA IMPLIED ATTLIST icon ExtPX CDATA IMPLIED ATTLIST icon ExtPY CDATA IMPLIED ELEMENT icon PCDATAiconshapeicontext PCDATA holds Bitmaps as hex ATTLIST iconshape Kind CDATA REQUIRED Vector in iconshape and icontext ATTLIST iconshape Tag CDATA REQUIRED ATTLIST iconshape Visible truefalse REQUIRED ATTLIST iconshape PenColor CDATA REQUIRED ATTLIST iconshape PenWidth CDATA REQUIRED ATTLIST iconshape PenStyle CDATA REQUIRED ATTLIST iconshape BrushColor CDATA REQUIRED ATTLIST iconshape BrushStyle CDATA REQUIRED ELEMENT iconshape point relative position to comp integer Appendix 352 ATPDraw version 73 ATTLIST icontext Tag CDATA REQUIRED ATTLIST icontext Visible truefalse REQUIRED ATTLIST icontext PosX truefalse REQUIRED ATTLIST icontext PosY truefalse REQUIRED ATTLIST icontext FontIdx CDATA REQUIRED ATTLIST icontext FontSize CDATA REQUIRED ATTLIST icontext FontColor CDATA REQUIRED Bold2Italic4Underline ATTLIST icontext FontAttrib CDATA REQUIRED ATTLIST icontext Rotate truefalse CDATA IMPLIED ATTLIST icontext Angle CDATA REQUIRED ELEMENT icontext PCDATA PCDATA holds the actual text string ATTLIST Model UseAs CDATA IMPLIED ELEMENT Model PCDATA contains RecordStr ATTLIST probe CaptureSteadyState truefalse IMPLIED ATTLIST probe OnScreen 012 IMPLIED ATTLIST probe ScreenFormat 01234 IMPLIED ATTLIST probe ScreenShow 012345 IMPLIED ATTLIST probe CurrNode truefalse IMPLIED ATTLIST probe FontSize CDATA IMPLIED ATTLIST probe Precision CDATA IMPLIED ATTLIST probe TimeOnScreen truefalse IMPLIED ELEMENT probe monitor ATTLIST monitor Phase CDATA IMPLIED ATTLIST BCTRAN NumPhases 13 IMPLIED ATTLIST BCTRAN NumWindings 23 IMPLIED ATTLIST BCTRAN Freq CDATA IMPLIED ATTLIST BCTRAN OutputAR truefalse IMPLIED ATTLIST BCTRAN AutoAdd truefalse IMPLIED ATTLIST BCTRAN ExtNeutral truefalse IMPLIED ATTLIST BCTRAN AutoByATP truefalse IMPLIED ELEMENT BCTRAN windingcoreshort1short0open1open0 ATTLIST winding kV CDATA IMPLIED ATTLIST winding MVA CDATA IMPLIED ATTLIST winding Coupl CDATA IMPLIED ATTLIST winding Shift CDATA IMPLIED ATTLIST core Type CDATA IMPLIED ATTLIST core CoreOutside CDATA IMPLIED ATTLIST core ExcitationAt CDATA IMPLIED ATTLIST core ConnectAt CDATA IMPLIED ATTLIST short1 Zpc CDATA REQUIRED ATTLIST short1 MVA CDATA REQUIRED ATTLIST short1 kW CDATA REQUIRED ATTLIST short0 Zpc CDATA REQUIRED ATTLIST short0 MVA CDATA REQUIRED ATTLIST short0 kW CDATA REQUIRED ATTLIST open1 Vpc CDATA REQUIRED ATTLIST open1 Ipc CDATA REQUIRED ATTLIST open1 kW CDATA REQUIRED ATTLIST open0 Vpc CDATA REQUIRED ATTLIST open0 Ipc CDATA REQUIRED ATTLIST XFMR NumPhases 13 REQUIRED ATTLIST XFMR NumWindings 1234 REQUIRED ATTLIST XFMR ExcitationAt 1234 IMPLIED ATTLIST XFMR ExternalNeutral truefalse IMPLIED ATTLIST XFMR HideCore truefalse IMPLIED ATTLIST XFMR LBasedOn 0123 IMPLIED 0no 1design 2test 3 typ ATTLIST XFMR RBasedOn 0123 IMPLIED ATTLIST XFMR CBasedOn 0123 IMPLIED ATTLIST XFMR CoreBasedOn 0123 IMPLIED ELEMENT XFMR windingcoreshort1short0open1open0 ATTLIST core Linf CDATA IMPLIED ATTLIST core Lzero CDATA IMPLIED ATTLIST core RelYokeArea CDATA REQUIRED ATTLIST core RelYokeLength CDATA REQUIRED ATTLIST core RelOuterLegArea CDATA IMPLIED ATTLIST core RelOuterLegLength CDATA IMPLIED ATTLIST core RelLimbArea CDATA IMPLIED ATTLIST core RelLimbLength CDATA IMPLIED Appendix ATPDraw version 73 353 ATTLIST LCC Template truefalse IMPLIED ATTLIST LCC NumPhases CDATA REQUIRED ATTLIST LCC LineCablePipe 123 REQUIRED ATTLIST LCC ModelType 01234 REQUIRED ATTLIST LCC IconLength truefalse IMPLIED ELEMENT LCC lineheadercableheaderpipe ATTLIST cableheader InAirGrnd 101 REQUIRED ATTLIST cableheader CableConstant truefalse IMPLIED ATTLIST cableheader Snaking truefalse IMPLIED ATTLIST cableheader MatrixOutput truefalse IMPLIED ATTLIST cableheader ExtraCG truefalse IMPLIED ELEMENT cableheader cable ATTLIST cable NumCond CDATA REQUIRED ATTLIST cable Rout CDATA REQUIRED ATTLIST cable PosX CDATA REQUIRED ATTLIST cable PosY CDATA REQUIRED ELEMENT cable conductor ATTLIST conductor Rin CDATA REQUIRED ATTLIST conductor Rout CDATA REQUIRED ATTLIST conductor rho CDATA REQUIRED ATTLIST conductor muC CDATA REQUIRED ATTLIST conductor muI CDATA REQUIRED ATTLIST conductor epsI CDATA REQUIRED ATTLIST conductor semicon1 CDATA IMPLIED ATTLIST conductor semicon2 CDATA IMPLIED ATTLIST conductor Cext CDATA IMPLIED ATTLIST conductor Gext CDATA IMPLIED ATTLIST conductor Grounded truefalse IMPLIED ATTLIST lineheader RealMtrx truefalse IMPLIED ATTLIST lineheader SkinEffect truefalse IMPLIED ATTLIST lineheader AutoBundle truefalse IMPLIED ATTLIST lineheader MetricUnit truefalse IMPLIED ELEMENT lineheader line ATTLIST line PhNo CDATA REQUIRED ATTLIST line Rin CDATA REQUIRED ATTLIST line Rout CDATA REQUIRED ATTLIST line React CDATA REQUIRED ATTLIST line Horiz CDATA REQUIRED ATTLIST line Vtow CDATA REQUIRED ATTLIST line Vmid CDATA REQUIRED ATTLIST line NB CDATA REQUIRED ATTLIST line Separ CDATA REQUIRED ATTLIST line Alpha CDATA REQUIRED ATTLIST pipe Infinite truefalse IMPLIED ATTLIST RP1 Infinite CDATA REQUIRED ATTLIST RP2 Infinite CDATA REQUIRED ATTLIST RP3 Infinite CDATA REQUIRED ATTLIST rho Infinite CDATA REQUIRED ATTLIST mu Infinite CDATA REQUIRED ATTLIST eps1 Infinite CDATA REQUIRED ATTLIST eps2 Infinite CDATA REQUIRED ATTLIST SM NumMasses CDATA REQUIRED ELEMENT SM mass ATTLIST mass Angle truefalse IMPLIED ATTLIST mass Speed truefalse IMPLIED ATTLIST mass Torque truefalse IMPLIED ATTLIST USP UspParams truefalse REQUIRED ATTLIST USP Usp3ph5s truefalse IMPLIED The include file is in datastring ATTLIST BUS3 PQOnScreen truefalse IMPLIED ATTLIST BUS3 PQUser truefalse IMPLIED ATTLIST BUS3 PSColor truefalse IMPLIED ATTLIST BUS3 PQPosX CDATA IMPLIED ATTLIST BUS3 PQPosY CDATA IMPLIED ATTLIST BUS3 PQFontSize CDATA IMPLIED ELEMENT BUS3 PCDATA Stores the text on screen ATTLIST LINE3 ScaleI CDATA IMPLIED ATTLIST LINE3 ScaleS CDATA IMPLIED ATTLIST LINE3 Fontsize CDATA IMPLIED Appendix 354 ATPDraw version 73 ATTLIST LINE3 Precision CDATA IMPLIED ELEMENT LINE3 LeftRight ATTLIST Left Flag CDATA IMPLIED ATTLIST Left Seq CDATA IMPLIED ATTLIST Right Flag CDATA IMPLIED ATTLIST Right Seq CDATA IMPLIED ELEMENT conn conncontent ATTLIST conncontent NumPhases CDATA IMPLIED ATTLIST conncontent PhaseIdx CDATA IMPLIED ATTLIST conncontent Pos1X CDATA REQUIRED ATTLIST conncontent Pos1Y CDATA REQUIRED ATTLIST conncontent Pos2X CDATA REQUIRED ATTLIST conncontent Pos2Y CDATA REQUIRED ELEMENT text textcontent ATTLIST textcontent FontName CDATA IMPLIED ATTLIST textcontent FontSize CDATA IMPLIED ATTLIST textcontent FontStyle CDATA IMPLIED ATTLIST textcontent Color CDATA IMPLIED ATTLIST textcontent Orientation CDATA IMPLIED In tenths of degrees ATTLIST textcontent BckCol CDATA IMPLIED ATTLIST textcontent FrmCol CDATA IMPLIED ELEMENT textcontent PCDATA ATTLIST variables NumSim CDATA IMPLIED ATTLIST variables IOPCVP CDATA IMPLIED ELEMENT variables var ATTLIST var Name CDATA REQUIRED ATTLIST var Expr CDATA REQUIRED 763 XML skeleton xml version10 project ApplicationATPDraw Version7 VersionXML1 header Timestep1E5 Tmax1 XOPT0 COPT0 TopLeftX4180 TopLeftY4475 objects comp Name compcontent PosX4910 PosY5270 Icondefault node NameIN Value if Name present sequence does not matter node NameOUT Value Value contains the node name data NameRES Value10 data NameRP ValueMyVar datastringText string to include incl model scriptdatastring compcontent probe used by probes monitor Phase1 probe nonlin contains nonlinear characteristics point nonlin LCC contains linescables with header and conductors cableheader cable conductor cable lineheader line lineheader LCC ModelModel contains UseAs and Record Script in datastring SM NumMasses used by synchronous machines mass contains output requests mass data in compdata SM LINE3LINE3 used by LINE3 components BCTRAN used by BCTRAN transformer Appendix ATPDraw version 73 355 winding voltage and rating coupling per winding core core information short1 binary test data positive sequence short0 binary test data zero sequence open1 open circuit test data positive sequence open0 open circuit test data zero sequence BCTRAN XFMRXMFR used by hybrid transformer same structure as BCTRAN objects objects used by GROUPS Content list in hierarchical levels comp conn conncontent Pos1X4920 Pos1Y5010 Pos2X4920 Pos2Y5110 conn text textcontentThis is the text on screen textcontent text objects variables NumSim1 IOPCVP0 var NameMYVAR Expr314 var NameRES Expr12KNT110 variables project 77 ATPDraw data structure and object model ATPDraw has an objectoriented data structure with full support of inheritance and polymorphism as supported in Object oriented Pascal in Delphi 104 The ATPDraw objects inherit from the basic TObject class while the containers inherit from the TObjectList class as shown in Fig 725 The ancestor class TATPDrawObject defines the foundation of all objects in ATPDraw visualization editing storing etc The most important class is the TATPDrawComp that handles IO of all data with variables and nodes in a protected and dynamic way supporting inheritance in groups TATPDrawGroup The main container class TATPDrawObjectList manage iteration enumerations of multilevel groups in two different ways Appendix 356 ATPDraw version 73 Fig 725 ATPDraw data structure Specialized classes in bold implements substantial content Appendix ATPDraw version 73 357 78 Examples project distributed with ATPDraw v73 Exa1 MyFirst circuit Single phase rectifier bridge Exa2 Transpositions and 3phase nodes Exa3 Simple lightning study Exa4 Induction machine fed by PWM source Exa5 Reference cards and Library Exa6 12pulse rectifier groups Exa7 Switching study in 750 kV line Exa8 Controlled MOV in FACTS device Exa9 Detailed lightning study Exa10 Inrush current study BCTRAN Exa11 Inrush current study BCTRAN groups Exa12 Statistical switching overvoltages Exa13 Simple DCDC converters GIFUswitches Exa14 24pulse rectifier harmonics Exa15 Lightning induced overvoltages adv Models Exa16 XFMR and BCTRAN inrush comparison Exa17 Windsyn synchronous machine updated in v7 Exa18 Resonance grounding scanning and optimization Exa19 Double fed induction wind generator Exa20 Power system toolbox loads and relays Exa21 Statistical lightning study Monto Carlo EGM new in v7 Exa22 Controlled synchronous machines a b c new in v7 Exa23 Controlled induction machines new in v7 Exa24 IEEE 9BUS system with distance protection new in v7 Exa25 Controlled inverter interfaced solar plant new in v7 Exa26 Using the COMTRADE objects packing objects single pole reclosing new in v71 Exa27 Embedded plotting example inrush current display in multirun new in v72 Appendix 358 ATPDraw version 73 79 References 1 ATPDRAW version 3 User Manual TR A4389 EFI Norway 1996 2 Ned Mohan Computer Exercises for Power Electronic Education 1990 Department of Electrical Engineering University of Minnesota 3 ATPEMTP Rule Book CanadianAmerican EMTP Users Group 1997 4 Lauren Dube MODELS in ATP Language manual February 1996 5 HW Dommel Electromagnetic Transients Program Reference Manual EMTP Theory Book Bonneville Power Administration Portland 1986 6 L Prikler Main Characteristics of Plotting Programs for ATP EEUG News Vol 6 No 34 AugustNovember 2000 pp 2833 7 B A Mork F Gonzalez and D Ishchenko Parameter estimation and advancements in transformer models for EMTP simulations Task MTU7 Model performance and sensitivity analysis Bonneville Power Administration Portland OR 2004 8 BA Mork F Gonzalez D Ishchenko D L Stuehm J Mitra Hybrid Transformer Model for Transient SimulationPart I Development and Parameters IEEE Trans Power Delivery Vol 22 pp 248255 2007 9 BA Mork F Gonzalez D Ishchenko D L Stuehm J Mitra Hybrid Transformer Model for Transient SimulationPart II Laboratory Measurements and Benchmarking IEEE Trans Power Delivery Vol 22 pp 256262 Jan 2007 10 B A Mork F Gonzalez D Ichshenko Leakage inductance model for Autotransformer transient simulation in Proc Int Conf on Power System Transients paper 248 2005 11 J J Graininger and W D Stevenson Power System Analysis McGrawHill 1994 12 A Greenwood Electrical Transients in Power Systems Wiley 1991 13 IEEE Working Group 150809 Editors A M Gole J MartinezVelasco A J F Keri Modeling and analysis of power system transients using digital programs IEEE 99TP1330 pp 412413 1998 14 IEEE Guide for Transient Recovery Voltage for AC HighVoltage Circuit Breakers Rated on a Symmetrical Current Basis ANSIIEEE Standard C370111994 15 N Chiesa Power Transformer Modelling Advanced Core Model M SC Thesis Politecnico di Milano Italy 2005 16 C Zhu RH Byrd and J Nocedal LBFGSB Algorithm 778 LBFGSB FORTRAN routines for large scale bound constrained optimization ACM Transactions on Mathematical Software Vol 23 Num 4 1997 Pages 550 560 17 W H Press S A Teukolsky W T Vetterling B P Flannery Numerical recipes 2nd Ed 1992 Cambridge University Press 18 Furst G Høidalen HK Windsyn for ATPDraw EEUGmeeting 2008 2224 Sept Cesme Turkey 19 Rogers GJ Shirmohammadi D Induction Machine Modelling for Electromagnetic Transient Program IEEE Trans on Energy Conversion Vol EC2 Issue 4 pp 622628 Dec 1987 20 Zhu C Byrd RH Nocedal J LBFGSB Algorithm 778 LBFGSB FORTRAN routines for large scale bound constrained optimization ACM Transactions on Mathematical Software Vol 23 Num 4 1997 Pages 550 560 21 Kundur P Power System Stability and Control McGrawHill 1996 22 Hans Kr Høidalen Power System Toolbox in ATPDraw 59 Power Frequency Quantities and Relaying Proc EMTP Users Group meeting Cagliari Italy Sept 1516 2014 23 Richard G Lyons Understanding Digital Signal Processing Prentice Hall PTR Second Edition 2004 24 Z Szadkowski 16point discrete Fourier transform based on the Radix2 FFT algorithm implemented into cyclone FPGA as the UHECR trigger for horizontal air showers in the Pierre Auger Observatory Nuclear Instruments and Methods in Physics Research A 560 2006 309316 Appendix ATPDraw version 73 359 710 Index Include 122 PARAMETER 57 83 86 236 Prefix Suffix 81 Vintage 121 A action mode 45 Alternative Transients Program 12 licensing 21 online licensing 21 Armafit command 188 ATP ATP file 23 DBMfile 220 libfile 185 punchfile 185 Rule Book 42 run ATP 53 ATP Connection Wizard 25 ATP menu 27 78 ATP settings 78 Output 52 Simulation 51 ATPDraw 11 ATPDrawini 24 configuration 24 Default view options 113 Directories 112 download 21 Edit options 113 Edit settings 113 examples 243 include files 23 installation 22 interface 25 33 online help 28 options 110 Preferences 111 project file 23 support file 23 ATPEMTPL mailing list 28 Attachment Input dialog 125 Autodetect errors 80 B Bitmap editor 102 Bonneville Power Administration 11 C CABLE CONSTANTS 140 cable data page 193 CABLE PARAMETERS 140 CanadianAmerican EMTP User Group Tsuhuei Liu 12 W Scott Meyer 12 circuit files 66 circuit font 77 Circuit objects 34 Circuit window 34 Clike 15 command line options 24 Component attributes 38 Characteristic tab 121 Hide button 121 Input dialog 38 42 118 119 nonlinear characteristic 123 Order 120 Output request 121 Component selection menu 33 37 119 130 Compress 35 71 74 167 229 COMTRADE 15 60 311 Connection 39 Input dialog 54 123 124 258 creating ATPfile 51 D Dahl Data Design 11 DC machine 177 delta T 51 distributed line 139 download 21 drag and drop 24 163 Drag and drop 125 duplicate 45 E Edit Arrange 70 copy 69 copy graphics 69 Appendix 360 ATPDraw version 73 cut 69 duplicate 69 LINE3 71 paste 69 polygon selection 70 select object 70 edit ATPfile 52 90 Edit circuit 73 171 Edit commands 94 Edit group 73 171 Edit LISfile 91 Edit operations overview 37 Electromagnetic Transients Program 11 EMTP 12 applications 17 Rule Book 358 TPBIGEXE 25 26 user group 21 enclosing pipe 188 export circuit 67 external programs 27 extract 73 F File Input dialog 125 flux probe 294 Fortran 154 G gridsnap 37 ground symbol 50 Group Input dialog 73 171 255 selection 45 Grouping see Compress 167 H HARMONIC FREQUENCY SCAN 30 Harmonic source 182 Help editor 99 108 Help menu 116 Help topics 116 hierarchical modeling 11 Høidalen 11 29 I Icon editor 99 import circuit 67 Import Power System 67 Include characteristic 145 Induction machine 177 initial conditions 12 154 Internal Parser 83 J JMarti line 190 L LCC object 185 243 Library 95 ATPDrawscl 95 edit component 95 User specified template 96 Library menu 39 LINE CONSTANTS 140 line data settings 191 LINE MODEL FREQUENCY SCAN 196 linecable dialog 140 186 linear branch 134 linescables 130 137 Linux 15 load flow 83 157 M Machines 131 260 Main menu 34 66 Main window 33 65 Map window 34 115 masterslave 299 metafile 67 197 miscellaneous parameters 51 MODELS 12 13 131 146 200 Component dialog 201 Debugger 205 Editor 202 Input dialog 148 modfile 101 207 new object 208 record 211 script structure 149 supfile 101 Modified flag 51 mouse operations 36 multilayer circuit 167 N new circuit 41 66 Noda line 190 Node Input dialog 36 126 Node attribute 209 Appendix ATPDraw version 73 361 node name restrictions 53 nonlinear branch 136 O Object Input dialog 36 Sequence 58 open project 66 Optimization 92 232 234 235 236 Output combo box 49 Output Manager 88 89 90 300 302 Output settings 80 P Pacific Engineering Corporation 12 phase sequence 55 Picture Input dialog 124 Plotting Embedded 60 314 GTPPLOT 15 PCPLOT 16 PlotXY 16 Programs 15 WPCPlot 16 PlotXY 16 Postprocessing 59 POWER FREQUENCY CALCULATION 196 319 Power Quality Indexes 15 Power System Toolbox 59 158 344 Probes 132 Curr 43 59 Input dialog 128 Steadystate 128 Volt 44 59 Probes 3phase 132 project file 51 66 public domain 12 R redo 68 reference object 56 134 refresh 77 reload icon 101 Result Directory 23 rubber band 70 71 run ATP 51 88 running simulation 53 S save circuit 51 save project 66 select group 37 Selection dialog 37 118 129 Semlyen line 190 Shape Input dialog 124 Shortcut menu 118 Sidebar 35 74 simulation settings 79 single core cable 188 sorting cards 81 sources 131 142 Splitter 54 133 standard components 29 standard library 162 statistical switch 181 299 Status bar 35 74 Supporting routines 13 BCTRAN 26 212 226 CABLE CONSTANTS 26 DATA BASE MODULE 26 LINE CONSTANTS 26 switches 130 Synchronous machine 144 177 261 SYSTRAN Engineering 11 T TACS 12 13 131 coupling to circuit 152 devices 153 menu 151 transfer functions 153 Template dialog 108 Template editor 96 Text Input dialog 124 Text editor 91 109 Toolbar 46 76 Tools menu 102 Transformers 131 145 BCTRAN 146 212 autotransformer 287 dialog 212 287 ImportExport 214 Input dialog 256 inrush currents 286 Saturable transformer 175 255 258 Selection menu 145 XFMR 146 215 297 327 transposition 56 134 139 Appendix 362 ATPDraw version 73 trapezoidal rule 12 Type94 149 Input dialog 150 U undo 46 68 Universal machine 144 177 untransposed 139 User specified Additional 156 Component dialog 225 create new objects 220 DBMfile 221 Library object 156 nonlinear transformer 226 Reference object 157 Selection menu 131 156 V Variables 38 57 83 84 229 Internal Parser 83 86 Vector graphic editor 103 Verify button 188 View options 77 W widenn PL4 15 Windsyn 183 281 WWW wwweeugorg 21 wwwemtporg 21 Z zoom 76